Yamaha | M7CL V1 | Owner's Manual | Yamaha M7CL Owner's manual

Owner’s Manual
EN
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
regulations does not guarantee that interference will not
occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the
source of interference, which can be determined by turning
the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem
by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of
America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe
Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions
contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your
authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded
cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used.
Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product
in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for
Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your
use of this product in a residential environment will not
result in harmful interference with other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found in
the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(class B)
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park,
Calif. 90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment : DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
Model Name : M7CL-48, M7CL-32
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code:
GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH
BLUE
: NEUTRAL
BROWN
: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus
may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the
terminals in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be
connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol
or colored GREEN or
GREEN-and-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected.
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(FCC DoC)
• This applies only to products distributed by
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material.
Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
2
M7CL Owner’s Manual
(Perchlorate)
(3 wires)
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of
uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
C AUTI O N
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an
equilateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important operating
and maintenance (servicing) instructions
in the literature accompanying the product.
The above warning is located on the rear of the unit.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8 Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from the
apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand,
tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer,
or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
(98-6500)
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig
håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd
samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera
använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan
suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo
valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
(lithium caution)
NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS
• Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up.
• This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up.
• Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het
moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur of
gelieve dan contact op te nemen met de vertegenwoordiging van
Yamaha in uw land.
• For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the
end of life please consult your retailer or Yamaha representative
office in your country.
• Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.
• Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical
waste.
(lithium disposal)
M7CL Owner’s Manual
3
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
Water warning
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device. The required voltage is
printed on the name plate of the device.
• Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions,
or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings.
• Use only the specified power supply (PW800W), if you use an external power
supply.
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and
do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on
it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything
over it.
• Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding
connection. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock.
Do not open
• Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify
them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should
appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
If you notice any abnormality
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden
loss of sound during use of the device, or if any unusual smells or smoke
should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,
disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device inspected by
qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• If this device power supply should be dropped or damaged, immediately turn off
the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the
device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
• Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall
over.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for
extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
• Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the rear to prevent
the internal temperature from becoming too high. In particular, do not place the
device on its side or upside down. Inadequate ventilation can result in
overheating, possibly causing damage to the device(s), or even fire.
• When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always hold the
plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
Location
• When transporting or moving the device, always use two or more people.
Attempting to lift the device by yourself may damage your back, result in other
injury, or cause damage to the device itself.
• When transporting or moving the device, do not hold the display.
• Before moving the device, remove all connected cables.
• When setting up the device, make sure that the rear-panel power switch can be
easily turned ON/OFF. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn
off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet.
• Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum. Depending on
the condition of the connected devices, doing so may cause feedback and may
damage the speakers.
• Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat
(such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent
the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components.
(5)-4
4
M7CL Owner’s Manual
• Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile
phone, or other electric devices. Doing so may result in noise, both in the device
itself and in the TV or radio next to it.
Connections
• Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all devices.
Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume levels to
minimum.
• When connecting the device to PW800W, be sure to turn OFF the device and
PW800W, then, connect the power cable (PSL360).
• Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source. A ground screw is
provided on the rear panel of this device for maximum safety and shock
prevention. If the mains outlet is not grounded, be sure to connect the ground
screw to a confirmed ground point before plugging the device into the mains.
Improper grounding can result in electrical shock.
1/2
Handling caution
Backup battery
• When turning on the AC power in your audio system, always turn on the power
amplifier LAST, to avoid speaker damage. When turning the power off, the power
amplifier should be turned off FIRST for the same reason.
• Do not insert your fingers or hands in any gaps or openings on the device
(vents).
• Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.) into any
gaps or openings on the device (vents) If this happens, turn off the power
immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the
device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• This device has a built-in backup battery. When you unplug the power cord from
the AC outlet, the current scene data and library data is retained. However, if the
backup battery fully discharges, this data will be lost. When the backup battery
is running low, the LCD display indicates “Low Battery!” when you starting up
the system, ( In this case, the Battery field indicates “LOW” or “NO” in the SET
UP screen.) immediately save the data to a USB storage device, then have
qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery.
• Do not use the device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or
uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
• Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and avoid use
excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Do not apply oil, grease, or contact cleaner to the faders. Doing so may cause
problems with electrical contact or fader motion.
XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-).
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the device is not in use.
The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualifi ed Yamaha service
personnel about replacing defective components.
This product contains a high intensity lamp that
contains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this
material may be regulated due to environmental
considerations.
For disposal information in the United States, refer
to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:
www.eiae.org
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA
CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(mercury)
(5)-4
2/2
M7CL Owner’s Manual
5
Contents
1. Introduction
9
Making HA (Head Amp) gain settings ..................44
Thank you ................................................................... 9
Sending an input channel signal
to the STEREO bus .........................................47
An overview of the M7CL........................................... 9
Differences between the M7CL-48 and M7CL-32... 11
The M7CL’s channel structure ................................ 13
5. Input channel operations
51
About the MIX bus types (VARI / FIXED) ................ 14
Signal flow for input channels.................................51
About word clock ..................................................... 14
Specifying the channel name and icon ..................53
Conventions in this manual..................................... 14
Making HA (Head Amp) settings .............................55
About the firmware version ..................................... 14
Sending the signal from an input channel
to the STEREO/MONO buses ..............................57
15
Sending the signal from an input channel
to a MIX bus ..........................................................61
Top panel................................................................... 15
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section ...........61
Rear panel ................................................................. 22
Using the Centralogic section ..............................63
Under the front pad .................................................. 24
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) .....64
2. Panels and controls
3. Basic operation of the M7CL
25
Basic operations
in the top panel / touch screen ........................... 25
Sending the signal from an input channel
to the MATRIX buses ...........................................66
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section ...........66
Using the Centralogic section ..............................67
Pressing the touch screen ................................... 25
Multiple selection (specifying a range) ................ 25
69
Special operations for keys ................................. 25
Signal flow for output channels ..............................69
Encoder operations ............................................. 25
Specifying the channel name and icon ..................71
Multifunction encoder operations......................... 26
Sending signals from MIX channels
to the STEREO/MONO bus ..................................72
The on-screen user interface .................................. 26
Tabs..................................................................... 26
Buttons ................................................................ 26
Faders / Knobs .................................................... 27
List windows ........................................................ 27
Keyboard window ................................................ 27
Popup windows ................................................... 28
Dialog boxes ........................................................ 28
Sending signals from MIX channels and
STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses .....75
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section ...........75
Using the Centralogic section ..............................76
7. Operations in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section
79
Viewing the touch screen ........................................ 28
About the SELECTED CHANNEL section...............79
Function access area .......................................... 28
About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen .....80
Main area............................................................. 29
Operations in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section ............................81
Entering names ........................................................ 30
Using the tool buttons ............................................. 31
About the tool buttons.......................................... 31
8. Operations in the Centralogic section
87
Using libraries ...................................................... 31
About the Centralogic section.................................87
Initializing settings ............................................... 35
About the OVERVIEW screen ..................................88
Copying/pasting settings ..................................... 36
Operations in the Centralogic section ....................90
Comparing two settings ....................................... 36
Fixing the channels or DCA groups
of the Centralogic section ...................................94
4. Connections and setup
39
Connections.............................................................. 39
6
6. Output channel operations
9. Input/output patching
95
Setting up to use the M7CL ..................................... 43
Changing the output patch settings .......................95
Restoring the current scene
to the default state........................................... 43
Changing the input patch settings..........................98
Word clock connections and settings .................. 43
Directly outputting an INPUT channel ..................102
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Inserting an external device into a channel .........100
Contents
10. EQ and Dynamics
105
14. Talkback / Oscillator
149
About EQ and dynamics ........................................ 105
About the talkback and oscillator functions ........149
Using EQ ................................................................. 105
Using talkback ........................................................149
Using dynamics ...................................................... 108
Using the oscillator ................................................151
Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries ..................... 111
EQ library........................................................... 111
15. Meters
Dynamics library ................................................ 111
153
Operations in the METER screen ..........................153
Using the MBM7CL meter bridge (option) ............155
11. Grouping and linking
113
About DCA Groups and Mute Groups .................. 113
16. Graphic EQ and effects
Using DCA groups.................................................. 113
157
About the virtual rack .............................................157
Assigning channels to a DCA group .................. 113
Virtual rack operations .......................................158
Controlling DCA groups ..................................... 115
Graphic EQ operations...........................................161
Using mute groups................................................. 116
About the graphic EQ.........................................161
Assigning channels to mute groups................... 116
Inserting a GEQ in a channel.............................161
Controlling mute groups .................................... 117
Using the 31 Band GEQ ....................................163
Using the Mute Safe function ............................ 119
Using the Flex15GEQ ........................................165
The Channel Link function .................................... 120
About the internal effects ......................................167
Linking the desired input channels .................... 120
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel........... 122
Using an internal effect
via send/return...............................................168
Copying the parameters of a channel................ 122
Inserting an internal effect into a channel ..........170
Moving the parameters of a channel ................. 123
Editing the internal effect parameters ................171
Initializing the parameters of a channel ............. 124
Using the Tap Tempo function...........................173
Using the Freeze effect ......................................175
12. Scene memory
125
Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries ............176
About scene memories .......................................... 125
Using an external head amp ..................................177
Using scene memories .......................................... 125
External head amp connections.........................177
Storing a scene.................................................. 125
Remotely controlling an external head amp.......178
Recalling a scene .............................................. 128
Using user-defined keys to recall ...................... 129
17. MIDI
181
Editing scene memories ........................................ 130
MIDI functionality on the M7CL .............................181
Sorting and renaming scene memories ............. 130
Basic MIDI settings .................................................182
Scene memory editing ....................................... 132
Copying/pasting a scene ................................... 132
Using program changes
to recall scenes and library items.....................184
Clearing a scene................................................ 133
Using control changes to control parameters .....187
Cutting a scene.................................................. 134
Using parameter changes
to control parameters ........................................189
Inserting a scene ............................................... 134
Using the Focus function ...................................... 135
Using the Recall Safe function.............................. 136
Using the Fade function......................................... 139
18. User settings (Security)
191
User Level settings .................................................191
User types and user authentication keys ...........191
13. Monitor/Cue
141
About the monitor/cue functions .......................... 141
Using the Monitor function.................................... 142
Using the Cue function .......................................... 145
About cue groups .............................................. 145
Operating the Cue function ................................... 146
Setting the Administrator password ...................192
Creating a user authentication key ....................193
Logging-in ..........................................................193
Changing the password .....................................195
Editing a user authentication key .......................196
Changing the user level .....................................196
Preferences .............................................................198
User-defined keys ...................................................200
M7CL Owner’s Manual
7
Contents
Console lock ........................................................... 201
Locking the console ........................................... 201
Unlocking the console ....................................... 201
Using a USB storage device to save/load data.... 202
Saving the M7CL’s internal data
on a USB storage device .............................. 202
Loading a file from a USB storage device ......... 203
Editing the files saved
on a USB storage device .............................. 203
Formatting media on
a USB storage device ................................... 206
19. Other functions
207
Appendices
221
EQ Library List ........................................................221
DYNAMICS Library List ..........................................222
Dynamics Parameters ............................................225
Effect Type List .......................................................228
Effects Parameters .................................................229
Effects and tempo synchronization ......................240
Scene Memory/Effect Library
to Program Change Table..................................241
Parameters that can be assigned
to control changes .............................................245
Control change parameter assignments ..............247
NRPN parameter assignments ..............................249
About the SETUP screen ....................................... 207
Mixing parameter operation applicability .............252
Word Clock and Slot settings................................ 208
Using cascade connections .................................. 210
Functions that can be assigned
to user-defined keys ..........................................253
Operations on the cascade slave M7CL............ 210
MIDI Data Format ....................................................255
Operations on the cascade master M7CL ......... 211
Warning/Error Messages .......................................262
Basic settings
for MIX buses and MATRIX buses.................... 212
Troubleshooting .....................................................264
Setting the date and time of the internal clock.... 213
Input/output characteristics ..................................266
Setting the network address ................................. 214
Electrical characteristics .......................................268
Specifying the brightness
of the touch screen, LEDs, and lamps............. 215
Other Functions ......................................................269
Initializing the M7CL’s internal memory............... 216
Adjusting the detection point
of the touch screen (Calibration function) ...... 217
General Specifications ...........................................265
Pin Assignment.......................................................270
Dimensions .............................................................271
Installing the MBM7CL meter bridge (option) ......272
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function) ......... 218
MIDI Implementation Chart ....................................273
Adjusting the input/output gain
(Calibration function)......................................... 219
Index ........................................................................274
Block Diagram...................................... End of Manual
Level Diagram ...................................... End of Manual
• The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner’s manual are for instructional purposes
only, and may be different from the ones on your device.
• Centralogic is trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
8
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
Introduction
1
Thank you
Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha M7CL digital mixing console. In order to take full advantage of the M7CL’s superior functionality and enjoy years of trouble-free use, please read this
manual before you begin using the product. After you have read the manual, keep it in a safe
place.
An overview of the M7CL
The M7CL is a digital mixing console with the following features.
■ A mixing system that delivers
both cutting-edge digital
technology and analog-style operation
The M7CL is a full-digital mixing console containing the
latest digital technology, designed for installed systems or
SR applications. 24-bit linear AD/DA converters are used
to deliver up to 108 dB of dynamic range and amazing
sound quality.
As input channels, it provides 32 (M7CL-32 model) or 48
(M7CL-48 model) monaural INPUT channels, and four
stereo ST IN channels.
As output channels, it provides 16 MIX channels, eight
MATRIX channels, a STEREO channel, and a MONO
channel. L/C/R three-channel output using the STEREO/
MONO channels is also supported.
The user interface has been completely redesigned for
simple and intuitive operation.
A dedicated channel strip with fader, cue, and on/off control is provided for all frequently-used input channels and
the STEREO/MONO channels. This mixer can be comfortably operated even by users who are new to digital
consoles.
The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the left of
the display lets you use the knobs to control the main
parameters (gain, EQ, dynamics threshold, bus send levels, etc.) for the particular channel on which you’re focusing. This section can be operated just like a module on an
analog mixer.
In the center of the top panel is located the newly developed Centralogic section, which lets you control eight
channels at once. You can control fader, cue, and on/off
settings for the eight channels or DCA groups recalled to
this section by pressing a single key. The display is a touch
screen. You can turn functions on/off or select items simply by touching buttons or knobs in the screen.
Mix parameter settings, including head amp gain and
phantom power for input channels, can be stored and
recalled as “scenes.” All faders on the panel are motorized
moving faders, so that when you recall a scene, the previous fader locations are reproduced immediately.
■ Effects and graphic EQ that can be
patched into a desired signal path
High-quality multi-effect processors are built in, with up
to four available simultaneously. Effects such as reverb,
delay, multiband compression, and various modulation
effects can be routed via internal buses or inserted into the
desired channel. 31-band graphic EQ and a newly developed Flex15GEQ are also provided, and can be inserted in
any channel or output.
The Flex15GEQ allows you to adjust the gain for any fifteen of the thirty-one bands.
Since two GEQ units can be mounted in the same rack, a
total of up to sixteen GEQ units can be used simultaneously. To use effects or graphic EQ, you mount them in
the eight virtual racks shown in the touch screen. The currently-mounted modules can be seen at a glance, and you
can switch modules and change input/output patching in
an intuitive manner.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
9
An overview of the M7CL
■ Cascade connections
in the digital domain
A second M7CL unit or a digital mixer such as the
Yamaha PM5D connected via a digital I/O card installed
in a slot can be cascade-connected in the digital domain.
Of the MIX buses, MATRIX buses, STEREO/MONO
buses, and CUE bus, up to twenty-four buses can be cascaded individually.
■ Security functions that can be
specified at user-level or system-level
The available functionality can be restricted for users
other than the administrator, with three levels of security;
Administrator, Guest, and User. Passwords can be specified for the administrator and users, preventing important
settings from being changed accidentally.
Information specific to each user (user level, system settings, and user-defined key settings) can be stored on a
USB storage device as a “user authentication key.” By
loading your own user authentication key from a USB
storage device, you can instantly set up the ideal operating
environment for yourself.
10
M7CL Owner’s Manual
■ I/O card expansion
The rear panel provides three slots in which separately
sold mini-YGDAI cards can be installed. AD cards, DA
cards, or digital I/O cards can be installed in these slots to
add inputs and outputs. If an external head amp unit (such
as the Yamaha AD8HR) that supports a special protocol is
connected to the REMOTE connector, the phantom power
and gain settings of the external head amp can also be
remotely controlled from the M7CL.
Differences between the M7CL-48 and M7CL-32
Differences between the M7CL-48 and M7CL-32
1
Introduction
The M7CL is available in two models; the M7CL-48 and the M7CL-32. These models differ as follows.
■ M7CL-48
This model provides 48 INPUT jacks and 48 INPUT channels.
INPUT jacks 1–32 are located at the right side of the rear panel, and INPUT jacks 33–48 are located at the left side of the
rear panel.
2
1
1 INPUT jacks 1–32
B INPUT jacks 33–48
In addition to the channel strip for INPUT channels 1–32 located at the left side of the front panel, there is a channel strip
for INPUT channels 33–48 located at the right side of the front panel.
1
2
1 Channel strip for INPUT channels 1–32
B Channel strip for INPUT channels 33–48
M7CL Owner’s Manual
11
Differences between the M7CL-48 and M7CL-32
■ M7CL-32
This model provides 32 INPUT jacks and 32 INPUT channels.
INPUT jacks 1–32 are located at the right side of the right panel, just as on the M7CL-48 model, but there are no INPUT
jacks at the left side of the rear panel.
1
1 INPUT jacks 1–32
The channel strip for INPUT channels 1–32 is located in the left side of the front panel, just as on the M7CL-48 model, but
there is no channel strip for INPUT channels in the right side.
1
1 Channel strip for INPUT channels 1–32
HINT
• In this owner’s manual, whenever there is a difference between the M7CL-32 model and the M7CL-48 model, specifications
that apply only to the M7CL-48 model are enclosed in curly brackets { } (e.g., INPUT jacks 1–32 {1–48}).
12
M7CL Owner’s Manual
The M7CL’s channel structure
The M7CL’s channel structure
● STEREO channel / MONO channel
■ Input channels
This section processes an input signal and sends it to various buses (STEREO, MONO, MIX, MATRIX). There are
two types of input channel, as follows.
● INPUT channels 1–32 {1–48}
These channels are used to process monaural signals. By
default, the input signals from the monaural analog input
jacks (INPUT jacks 1–32 {INPUT jacks 1–48}) are
assigned to these channels.
These channels process the signals that are sent from the
input channels or MIX channels, and send them to the corresponding output port. These channels are used as the
main stereo output and monaural output.
The STEREO channel and MONO channel can be used
either to output independent signals, or for three-channel
L/C/R playback.
When the M7CL is in the default state, the following output ports are assigned.
STEREO channel L
OMNI OUT jack 15, 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack L
● ST IN channels 1–4
STEREO channel R OMNI OUT jack 16, 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack R
These channels are used to process stereo signals. By
default, the input signals from EFFECT RETURN 1–4 are
assigned to these channels.
MONO channel
Signal assignments to the input channels can be changed
as desired.
1
Introduction
The M7CL provides the following input channels and output channels.
No assignment
Signal assignments to the output channels can be changed
as desired.
■ Output channels
This section mixes the signals sent from input channels
etc., and sends them to the corresponding output ports or
output buses. There are three types of output channel, as
follows.
● MIX channels 1–16
These channels process the signals sent from input channels to the MIX buses, and send them from the output
ports. These are used mainly to send signals to the monitor
system or to external effects. The signals of MIX channels
1–16 can also be sent to the STEREO bus, MONO bus, or
MATRIX buses.
When the M7CL is in the default state, the following output ports are assigned.
MIX channels 1–12
OMNI OUT jacks 1–12
MIX channels 1–8
Slot 1 output channels 1–8, 9–16
MIX channels 9–16
Slot 2 output channels 1–8, 9–16
● MATRIX channels 1–8
These channels process the signals that are sent from input
channels, MIX channels, STEREO channel, and MONO
channel to the MATRIX buses, and send them from the
output ports. Using the STEREO and MONO buses, different combinations of signals and mix balances can be
sent out from the M7CL.
When the M7CL is in the default state, the following output ports are assigned.
MATRIX channels 1/2
OMNI OUT jacks 13/14
MATRIX channels 1–8
Slot 3 output channels 1–8, 9–16
M7CL Owner’s Manual
13
About the MIX bus types (VARI / FIXED) • About word clock • Conventions in this manual• About the firmware version
About the MIX bus types (VARI / FIXED)
The sixteen MIX buses provided on the M7CL can be assigned either as VARI or FIXED types in
pairs of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered buses (→ p. 212). Each type has the following
characteristics.
● VARI
● FIXED
This type allows the send level of the signal sent from the
input channels to the MIX bus to be varied. The point at
which the signal is sent from the input channel to a VARI
type MIX bus can be chosen from before the EQ, before
the fader, or after the [ON] key. This type is used mainly
for sending the signal to a monitor system or external
effect.
With this type, the send level of the signal sent from the
input channels to the MIX bus is fixed. The signal sent
from an input channel to a FIXED type MIX bus is taken
from immediately after the [ON] key. This type is used
mainly when you want to distribute signals to an external
device at the same mix balance as the STEREO/MONO
buses.
About word clock
“Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing.
Normally, one device transmits a reference word clock signal, and the other devices receive this
word clock signal and synchronize to it.
In order to transmit or receive digital audio signals to or from an external device via a digital I/O
card installed in a slot of the M7CL, the word clock must be synchronized between the devices.
Be aware that if the word clock is not synchronized, the signal will not be sent correctly, or there
may be unpleasant noise. (For details on synchronizing the M7CL’s word clock with an external
device → p. 208).
Conventions in this manual
In this manual, switch-type controls on the panel are called “keys.” Of the control knobs on the
panel, those that turn from a minimum value to a maximum value are called “knobs,” while those
that turn endlessly are called “encoders.”
Controls located on the panel are enclosed in square
brackets [ ] (e.g., [CUE] key) in order to distinguish them
from the virtual buttons and knobs displayed in the screen.
For some controls, the name of the section is given before
the [ ] (e.g., SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key).
Whenever there is a difference between the M7CL-32
model and the M7CL-48 model, specifications that apply
only to the M7CL-48 model are enclosed in curly brackets
{ } (e.g., INPUT jacks 1–32 {1–48}).
About the firmware version
You can view the firmware version number in the SETUP screen (→ p. 207).
You can also download the most recent firmware version from the website.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
14
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 2
Panels and controls
Top panel
The top panel of the M7CL is divided into the following sections.
2
Panels and controls
This chapter explains the names and functions of each part of the M7CL.
Display section (P. 18)
SELECTED CHANNEL
section (P. 17)
INPUT section (P. 16)
Meter bridge (option)
(P. 17)
SCENE MEMORY/
MONITOR section
(P. 19)
INPUT section (P. 16)
ST IN (Stereo Input)
section (P. 16)
Centralogic section (P. 19)
USER DEFINED KEYS section (P. 20)
STEREO/MONO MASTER
section (P. 20)
NAVIGATION KEYS
section (P. 21)
NOTE
• This illustration shows the top panel of the M7CL-48. The M7CL32 does not have the INPUT section at the right (channels 33–48).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
15
Top panel
■ INPUT section
■ ST IN (Stereo Input) section
In this section you can control the main parameters of
monaural input channels 1–32 {1–48}.
In this section you can control the principal parameters for
the stereo ST IN channels 1–4. With the exception that the
object of control will alternate between the L and R channels each time you press the [SEL] key, these controls
operate in the same way as for the INPUT channels.
1
2
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
1 [SEL] key
These keys select the channel to be controlled. When you
press this key to make the LED light, that channel will be
selected for control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section and in the touch screen.
In SENDS ON FADER mode, the [SEL] keys of all channels will light.
B [CUE] key
These keys select the channel to be cue-monitored. If cue
is on, the LED will light.
C Meter LEDs
These LEDs indicate the input level of the channel.
16
M7CL Owner’s Manual
D [ON] key
This switches the channel on/off. If a channel is on, the
key LED will light. In SENDS ON FADER mode, this is
an on/off switch for the signal sent from each channel to
the currently selected MIX bus.
E Fader
Adjusts the input level of the channel. In SENDS ON
FADER mode, this adjusts the send level of the signal
from each channel to the currently selected MIX bus.
Top panel
■ Meter bridge (option)
1 MIX meters
These indicate the level of MIX channels 1–16.
B MATRIX meters
These indicate the level of MATRIX channels 1–8.
2
Panels and controls
If an optional MBM7CL meter bridge is installed, the
MIX/MATRIX channel levels can be monitored at all
times. The monitoring position can be selected from PRE
EQ (immediately before attenuator), PRE FADER (immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after
the [ON] key).
1
2
■ SELECTED CHANNEL section
In this section you can control the mix parameters for the
currently selected input channel or output channel.
1
C [PAN] encoder
● When an input channel is selected
This adjusts the panning of the signal that is sent from
the selected channel to the L/R channels (or L/C/R
channels) of the STEREO bus.
23
● When a ST IN channel is selected
4
5
6
This adjusts the left/right balance of the signals that
are sent from the selected two channels to the STEREO bus.
● When a MIX channel (MONO x 2) is selected
This adjusts the panning of the signal that is sent from
the selected channel to the L/R channels of the STEREO bus.
● When a MIX channel (STEREO) is selected
7
This adjusts the left/right balance of the signals that
are sent from the selected two channels to the STEREO bus.
● When a MATRIX channel (STEREO) is selected
This adjusts the left/right balance of the signals that
are sent from the selected two channels to the STEREO bus.
● When a STEREO channel is selected
This adjusts the left/right balance of the signals that
are output from the L/R channels of the STEREO bus.
1 [MIX/MATRIX] encoders
D [DYNAMICS 1] encoder
● When an input channel is selected
● When an input channel is selected
This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from that
channel to the MIX/MATRIX buses.
Adjusts the THRESHOLD parameter of the gate, etc.
● When a MIX channel is selected
● When a MIX, MATRIX, or STEREO/MONO
channel is selected
This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the
selected MIX channel to the MATRIX buses.
Adjusts the THRESHOLD parameter of the compressor, etc.
● When a MATRIX channel is selected
This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from each
MIX channel to the selected MATRIX bus.
B [HA] encoder
Adjusts the head amp gain of an input channel. This does
nothing if another type of channel is selected.
NOTE
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is
adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind that noise may
be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold
output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT
connector when using phantom power.
E [DYNAMICS 2] encoder
● When an input channel is selected
Adjusts the THRESHOLD parameter of the compressor, etc.
● When a MIX, MATRIX, or STEREO/MONO
channel is selected
No function.
F [HPF] encoder
Adjusts the HPF cutoff frequency for an input channel.
This does nothing for other types of channel.
G EQ [Q], EQ [FREQUENCY], EQ [GAIN] encoders
For each band of the four-band EQ, these adjust the Q,
center frequency (cutoff frequency), and gain.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
17
Top panel
■ Display section
This is a touch screen that you can operate by touching the
surface of the screen. A USB connector is provided on the
right side of the display.
2
1
1 Display (touch screen)
This display shows the information you need to operate
the M7CL, and lets you make system-wide settings and
control mix parameters for input and output channels.
Since this is a touch screen, you can use your finger on the
screen to select menus or set parameters. However, you
cannot press two or more locations to operate them simultaneously.
B USB connector
You can connect a USB storage device here to save/load
internal data. USER KEY data that determines the user
level can be saved on a USB storage device to limit the
functionality that can be operated by each user.
NOTE
• You can connect a USB storage device to the USB connector.
However, operation is guaranteed only with USB flash memory.
NOTE
• If the touch screen becomes dirty, wipe it with a soft dry cloth.
CAUTION
• Never use a sharp or pointed object such as your fingernail to
operate the touch screen. Doing so may scratch the screen
and render the touch screen inoperable.
■ USB storage device formats
Storage media with capacities 2GB or less formatted in FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32 are supported. If
your storage device is formatted otherwise, please
re-format it in the SAVE/LOAD screen.
■ Prevention of accidental erasure
Some USB storage devices have a write protect
setting that lets you prevent data from being erased
accidentally. If your storage device contains important data, it’s a good idea to use the write protect
setting to prevent accidental erasure.
On the other hand, you’ll need to make sure that
your USB storage device’s write protect setting is
turned off before you save data.
CAUTION
• An ACCESS indicator is shown in the function access area
while data is being accessed (saved, loaded, or deleted). Do
not disconnect the USB connector or power-off the M7CL
while this indicator is shown. Doing so may damage your storage media, or may damage the data in the M7CL or on your
media.
18
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Top panel
■ Centralogic section
1
2
3
1 Multi-function encoders
According to the type of screen that is currently selected,
these encoders control the knobs selected in the touch
screen.
B [SEL] key
These keys select the channel to be controlled. When you
press this key to make the LED light, that channel will be
selected for control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section and in the touch screen.
C [CUE] key
These keys select the channel to be cue-monitored. If cue
is on, the LED will light.
4
D Meter LEDs
These LEDs indicate the input/output level of the channel.
5
E [ON] key
This switches the channel on/off. If a channel is on, the
key LED will light.
6
2
Panels and controls
In this section you can control a group of (up to) eight
channels or DCA groups selected in the NAVIGATION
KEYS section.
F Fader
This adjusts the input/output level of the channel. You can
also make internal settings (→ p. 163) so that these faders
are used as controllers to adjust the gain of each GEQ
band.
■ SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section
In this section you can perform operations for scene memory and monitoring.
1
2
3
4
1 SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key
This key stores the current mix parameter settings into a
dedicated scene memory.
B SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key
This key recalls previously-saved settings from a scene
memory.
C SCENE MEMORY [▲]/[▼] keys
Use these keys to select the scene number that you want to
store or recall. The number of the currently selected scene
is shown in the function access area in the right of the
touch screen. You can press the [▲]/[▼] keys simultaneously to return to the current scene number.
D [MONITOR LEVEL] knob
Adjusts the signal level of the monitor output. If the
PHONES LEVEL LINK function is turned on in the
MONITOR screen, this will also adjust the level of the
front panel [PHONES] jack.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
19
Top panel
■ USER DEFINED KEYS section
These keys execute the functions that have been assigned
by the user.
1 User defined keys [1]–[12]
These keys execute the functions that have been assigned
by the user (scene changes, switching the talkback or
internal oscillator on/off, etc.).
1
■ STEREO/MONO MASTER section
In this section you can control the principal parameters of
the STEREO/MONO channels.
1
2
1 [SEL] key
This key selects the channel to be controlled. When you
press this key to make the LED light, that channel will be
selected for control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section and in the touch screen.
For the STEREO channel, the selected object of control
will alternate between the L and R channels each time you
press the [SEL] key.
B [CUE] key
This key selects the channel to be cue-monitored. If cue is
on, the LED will light.
3
C [ON] key
This key switches the channel on/off. If a channel is on,
the key LED will light.
D Fader
This adjusts the output level of the channel.
4
20
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Top panel
■ NAVIGATION KEYS section
NOTE
• If you press and hold a navigation key for two seconds or longer,
that key will blink. At this time, only the object of control for the
Centralogic section will be changed to the corresponding channels
and fixed. If you press a different navigation key while the first key
is blinking, only the object of control in the touch screen will be
changed.
E [ST IN] key
This key selects ST IN channels 1–4.
F [DCA] key
This key selects the DCA groups.
G [MIX 1-8] key
H [MIX 9-16] key
These keys select MIX channels 1–8 and 9–16 respectively.
I [MATRIX] key
This key selects MATRIX channels 1–8.
9 8
3 4
L
J [STEREO] key
This key assigns the STEREO channel L/R and the
MONO channel to modules 1–3 of the Centralogic section. In this case, modules 4–8 are not used.
2
Panels and controls
In this section you can select the channels that will be controlled by the Centralogic section and in the touch screen.
K [IN 33-40] key {M7CL-48 only}
1
J
2 5
K
L [IN 41-48] key {M7CL-48 only}
These keys select INPUT channels 33–40 and 41–48
respectively.
6 7
1 [IN 1-8] key
B [IN 9-16] key
C [IN 17-24] key
D [IN 25-32] key
These keys select INPUT channels 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, and
25–32 respectively.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
21
Rear panel
Rear panel
3
1
K
M
J
98 7 6 5
L
3
4
2
1
1
M7CL-48
4
1
1 INPUT jacks 1–32 {1–48}
These are balanced XLR-3-31 female input jacks for
inputting analog audio signals from line level devices or
microphones. Nominal input level is -62 dBu to +10 dBu.
Male XLR plug
D OMNI OUT jacks 1–16
These are XLR-3-32 male output jacks that output analog
audio signals. These are used mainly to output the signals
of MIX channels or MATRIX channels. Nominal output
level is +4 dBu.
1 (ground)
3 (cold)
Female XLR plug
2 (hot)
3 (cold)
2 (hot)
1 (ground)
3
NOTE
• Although OMNI OUT jacks 1–16 have a nominal input/output level
of +4 dBu (maximum level +24 dBu), an internal switch allows this
to be changed to -2 dBu (maximum level +18 dBu) if necessary. (A
fee will be charged for this procedure.) For details, contact to your
Yamaha dealer.
2
B ST IN jacks 1–4
These are balanced XLR-3-31 female input jacks for
inputting analog audio signals from line level devices or
microphones. Nominal input level is -62 dBu to +10 dBu.
Male XLR plug
1 (ground)
3 (cold)
2 (hot)
C LAMP connector
This is a four-pin female XLR output jack that supplies
power to a separately sold gooseneck lamp (such as the
Yamaha LA5000). {The M7CL-48 has these connectors at
two locations.}
22
M7CL Owner’s Manual
9
8
7
6
5
E 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack
This is an AES/EBU (XLR-3-32 male) jack that outputs
the digital audio signal of a desired channel in AES/EBU
format. This is used mainly to output the signal of the
STEREO/MONO channel.
F REMOTE connector
This is a D-sub 9-pin male connector for remotely controlling an external head amp device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR)
that supports a special protocol. It can also be used to
transmit/receive MIDI messages to/from an external
device.
Rear panel
G WORD CLOCK IN/OUT connectors
These are BNC connectors used to transmit/receive word
clock signals to/from an external device. The WORD
CLOCK IN connector is internally terminated by 75
ohms.
I ETHERNET connector
This connector allows the M7CL to be connected via a
CAT3 (transmission speed up to 10 Mbps) or CAT5
(transmission speed up to 100 Mbps) Ethernet cable to a
Windows computer. This is used mainly to control mix
parameters or edit scene memories and libraries from the
dedicated “M7CL Editor” application program.
NOTE
• The DME Network Driver required for connection to the Ethernet
connector, the Studio Manager required for starting up M7CL Editor, and the M7CL Editor itself can be downloaded from the following Yamaha website.
2
M
N
L
K
J
J Slots 1–3
These slots allow separately sold mini-YGDAI I/O cards
to be installed to expand the input/output ports.
Panels and controls
H MIDI IN/OUT connectors
These connectors are used to transmit and receive MIDI
messages to and from external MIDI devices. The MIDI
IN connector receives messages from an external device,
and the MIDI OUT connector transmits messages from
the M7CL. These are used mainly to record M7CL parameter operations or scene/library selections on an external
device, or to control M7CL parameters from an external
device.
K AC IN connector
Connect the included power cable to this connector.
L POWER switch
This switch turns the internal power supply on/off.
M DC POWER INPUT connector
You can connect the separately sold PW800W power supply here as a backup external power supply. If the
PW800W is connected, the M7CL will continue receiving
power from the PW800W even if its own internal power
supply shuts down due to a problem.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
CAUTION
• If you connect the PW800W, you must be sure to first poweroff both the M7CL and the PW800W. Then use the optional
power supply cable (PSL360) to make the connection. Failure
to observe this will cause malfunctions or electric shock.
HINT
• If the PW800W is connected, the M7CL will operate correctly
whether its own internal power supply and the PW800W are both
turned on, or whether just one of these is turned on.
• If both power supplies are on, and an abnormality is detected in
one of the power supplies, the M7CL will automatically switch to
the other power supply. If this occurs, the touch screen will show a
message to indicate this.
N Grounding screw
In order to ensure safe operation, use this screw to connect
the M7CL to an electrical ground. Making a correct
ground connection will effectively eliminate noise such as
hum and interference.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
23
Under the front pad
Under the front pad
1
2
3
4
1 PHONES LEVEL knob
Adjusts the level of the signal that is output from the
PHONES OUT jack.
B PHONES OUT (headphone output) jack
This headphone jack lets you monitor the MONITOR
OUT or CUE signal.
C TALKBACK jack
This is a balanced XLR-3-31 jack to which a talkback mic
can be connected. You can make settings in the screen to
supply +48V phantom power to this jack. This is used to
send instructions from the mixer operator to the desired
output channel.
D TALKBACK GAIN knob
This adjusts the input level of the mic connected to the
TALKBACK jack.
24
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 3
Basic operation of the M7CL
Basic operations in the top panel / touch screen
This section explains the basic procedures you can perform in the M7CL’s top panel and touch
screen. In general, you will operate the M7CL using the appropriate combination of the operations explained here.
Pressing the touch screen
Place your fingertip on a button, knob, or field in the touch
screen, and press lightly. You will mainly use this operation to switch screens and pages, to select the parameter to
be operated, and to turn a button on/off. Depending on the
type of button, the number may increase or decrease
depending on the location you press.
Multiple selection (specifying a
range)
While pressing your finger on the touch panel, move it in
the left/right direction to specify a range within a character
string. You will use this mainly when assigning a name to
a scene or library.
3
Basic operation of the M7CL
This chapter explains the M7CL’s user interface and its basic operations.
HINT
• This makes it easy to select a range of buttons to be turned on/off
together.
Special operations for keys
Normally you will press a top panel key once, but in some
cases you can access a special function by rapidly pressing
a key twice in succession.
Encoder operations
For the channel select buttons, you can select multiple buttons by moving your finger across the touch screen while
continue to press.
Normally, encoders are turned left/right to change the
value of the corresponding parameter. By pressing an
encoder you can recall a specific screen. For some parameters, you can adjust the value in finer steps (greater
detail) by turning the encoder while pressing it.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
25
Basic operations in the top panel / touch screen • The on-screen user interface
Multifunction encoder operations
Multifunction encoders 1–8 are used to operate the knobs
selected for operation in the touch screen (→ p. 27).
When you press to select a knob that can be controlled by
the multifunction encoders, a thick line appears around it.
(Normally, a knob of this type corresponds to the multifunction encoder located immediately below that knob,
allowing you to control up to eight parameters simultaneously.) While a knob is selected, turning the multifunction encoder located immediately below that knob will
change the value of the corresponding parameter.
In the SCENE LIST screen, you can make a multiple
selection by turning a multifunction encoder while pressing it.
Press the touch
screen to select
the knob you
want to operate.
Using the multifunction encoders to control
parameters.
The on-screen user interface
Operations such as mixing and adjusting the sound of each channel are performed using the top
panel faders, keys, and encoders. However to make more detailed settings, you will need to
access the appropriate function and edit the parameter values in the touch screen. The section
below explains the various user interface components shown in the touch screen, and how to
use them.
Tabs
Some screens shown in the display consist of multiple
pages. In screens of this type, the page name is shown at
the top and bottom. The area of the display showing a
page name is called a “tab.” Tabs are used to switch
between pages within the same screen.
26
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Buttons
Buttons in the display are used to execute specific functions, to switch parameters on/off, or to select one of multiple choices. Buttons that perform an on/off operation are
shown in a color such as white, yellow, or green while
turned on, and blue or black while they are turned off.
When you press a button that has a ▼ symbol, a separate
window will open, allowing you to make detailed settings.
The on-screen user interface
Faders / Knobs
Faders in the screen are used mainly for visual confirmation of the levels of the corresponding channels, and will
move in tandem when you operate the top panel faders.
The current value is also shown in numerical form immediately below the fader.
List windows
The following type of window will appear when you need
to select items from a list, such as a list of user-defined
keys.
Basic operation of the M7CL
3
Knobs in the screen provide visual confirmation of the
value of the corresponding parameter.
Most knobs are linked with operations of the SELECTED
CHANNEL section encoders or the multifunction encoders.The current value is also shown in numerical form
immediately below the knob.
When a knob that can be operated by the multifunction
encoders (i.e., knobs other than in the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen) is pressed once, a heavy frame
appears around the knob. This frame indicates that the
knob is selected for operation using the multifunction
encoders.
Within the list, the highlighted item always shown in the
center is the item selected for operations. Press the ↑ / ↓
located below the list to scroll the list upward or downward.
HINT
• You can also scroll up/down using the multifunction encoder.
• If there is more than one list in the screen, your operations will
apply to the list enclosed in a yellow frame. You can press the multifunction encoder to move the focus of your operations to the next
column.
Keyboard window
While you are using the multifunction encoders to operate
a knob, the line indicating the setting of the knob will
become longer and the line around the circumference will
become thinner; this clearly identifies the knob that you
are operating. Also, a frame will appear around the numerical value.
The following keyboard window will appear when you
need to assign a name or comment to a scene or library, or
when you need to assign a channel name. Press characters
in the window to enter the desired characters (for the procedure see → p. 30).
Knobs for which a double frame is displayed indicate
PAN/BALANCE.
HINT
• For some knobs, pressing them again when they are enclosed by
a heavy frame will open a window where you can make additional
detailed settings.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
27
The on-screen user interface • Viewing the touch screen
Popup windows
When you press a button or field for a specific parameter
in a screen, a window showing detailed parameters or lists
will appear. This type of window is called a “popup window.”
Tool buttons
There are three types of popup window, “1 ch” windows
that show only a specific channel, “8 ch” windows that
show the currently selected group of eight channels, and
“ALL” windows that show all channels in a single view.
You can switch between these using tabs.
Some popup windows show several buttons called “tool
buttons” at the top of the window. You can use these tool
buttons to recall libraries or to perform copy/paste operations.
Press the “X” symbol to close the popup window and
return to the previous screen.
Dialog boxes
A dialog box like the following will appear when you
need to confirm the operation you just performed.
Press the OK button to execute the operation. The operation will be cancelled if you press the CANCEL button.
Viewing the touch screen
The M7CL’s touch screen shows the following information, and is broadly divided into two areas.
1
2
4
3
5
7
8
6
9
J
K
Main area
Function access area
Function access area
1 Selected channel
This shows the number, name and icon of the channel that
is currently selected for operation. (For details on assigning a name → p. 30, on selecting an icon → p. 53). You can
also press this field to switch channels. Pressing the left
half will select the preceding channel, and pressing the
right half will select the next channel.
28
M7CL Owner’s Manual
B Time
This indicates the current time. (For details on how to set
the time → p. 213).
C User name
This indicates the name of the user who is currently
logged in (i.e., is authenticated and able to operate the system).
Viewing the touch screen
NOTE
• Do not disconnect the USB connector while the “ACCESS” indication is shown here. Doing so may damage the data on the USB
storage device.
Main area
The contents of the main area will change depending on
the function that is currently selected. Mixing operations
will involve mainly the following two types of screen.
■ SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
This screen shows all the mix parameters for the currently
selected channel. To access this screen, click one of the
encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
D Help
This button is used to show on-line help in the main area.
However, the current software as of September 2005 does
not support this.
E SENDS ON FADER
Press this button to switch to SENDS ON FADER mode,
where you can use the faders of the top panel to adjust the
MIX send level (→ p. 64). During this time, the function
access area of the touch screen will change to a screen
allowing you to select the send-destination MIX bus.
F CH JOB (Channel Job)
Press this button to switch to CH JOB mode, where you
can make settings for channel grouping and linking (→
p. 113). During this time, the function access area of the
touch screen will change to a screen allowing you to select
the function you want to operate.
G RACK
When you press this button, the VIRTUAL RACK screen
will appear in the main area, allowing you to edit the GEQ
or effect settings (→ p. 158).
H MONITOR
When you press this button, the MONITOR screen will
appear in the main area, allowing you to edit the monitor
or oscillator settings (→ p. 142).
3
Basic operation of the M7CL
If the oscillator or talkback is enabled, this area will indicate “OSC” or “TB” respectively. If cue monitor is on, the
type of signal being cue-monitored (IN/OUT/DCA/KEY
IN/EFFECT) is shown. An indication of “ACCESS” is
shown while a USB storage device attached to the USB
connector is being accessed.
■ OVERVIEW screen
This screen simultaneously shows the main parameters for
the (up to) eight channels currently assigned to the Centralogic section. To access this screen, press one of the keys
in the NAVIGATION KEYS section or one of the multifunction encoders.
I METERS
These are level meters that monitor the level of the STEREO bus (L/R), MONO bus (M), and cue signal (CUE).
When you press this field, the METER screen will appear
in the main area, displaying the meters and fader status for
all channels at once (→ p. 153).
J SETUP
When you press this button, the SYSTEM screen will
appear in the main area, allowing you to make basic system settings and user-specific settings (→ p. 207).
K SCENE
This indicates the number and name of the scene that was
last stored or recalled. A lock icon is displayed for readonly scenes. If you edit the parameters from their last
stored or recalled state, an “
” symbol will appear in
the lower right.
When you press this field, the SCENE LIST screen will
appear in the main area, allowing you to store or recall
scenes (→ p. 125).
HINT
• If the METER screen is shown in the meter area, the OVERVIEW
screen won’t appear even you press a key in the NAVIGATION
KEYS section. To return to the OVERVIEW screen, press a multifunction encoder or press the highlighted METER field once
again.
When you press a button 7 through K to access the corresponding screen, the button will be highlighted. In this
state, pressing the button once again will return either to
the most recently recalled SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen or the OVERVIEW screen.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
29
Entering names
Entering names
On the M7CL you can assign a name to each input channel, output channel, and DCA group,
and assign a title to scene and library data when saving it.
To assign a name, you will use the keyboard window shown in the screen.
1 Access the screen for assigning a name.
The illustration shown below is an example of the
SCENE STORE window used to enter a scene title or
comment.
cursor
● BS button
Deletes the character at the left of the cursor (or the
string of characters selected in the text box).
● TAB button
This button accesses the next selectable item. For
example in the SCENE STORE window you can use
this button to switch between two text input boxes,
and in the PATCH/NAME window you can use this
to switch channels.
● SHIFT LOCK button
Switches between uppercase and lowercase alphabetical characters. You can enter uppercase characters and symbols while this button is on, and
lowercase characters and numerals while this button
is off.
● ENTER button
Finalizes the name you entered. In the SCENE
STORE window, this has the same effect as pressing
the STORE button.
4 When you’ve entered the name, press the
The box that shows the characters you’ve entered will
display a vertical line called the “cursor,” which indicates the current position.
STORE button or the ENTER button.
The name you entered will be applied.
HINT
2 Use the keyboard window in the touch
screen to enter the desired characters.
When you press a character in the keyboard window,
the corresponding character will be entered in the box,
and the cursor will move to the right.
3 Input the subsequent characters in the
same way.
When inputting characters, you can use the following
buttons in the keyboard window.
● COPY button
Copies the string of characters that are selected
(highlighted) in the text box.
● CUT button
Deletes and copies the string of characters that are
selected (highlighted) in the text box.
● PASTE button
Inserts the string of characters copied by COPY or
CUT at the cursor location (or overwrites the currently selected range of characters).
● CLEAR button
Deletes all characters that have been input in the text
input box.
● INS button
Inserts a space (blank) at the cursor position.
● DEL button
Deletes the character at the right of the cursor (or the
string of characters selected in the text box).
30
M7CL Owner’s Manual
• This basic procedure also applies in screens where you enter
names for channels or other library items. When you enter a
name for a channel, your input will be reflected immediately
without your having to press the ENTER button.
• By pressing inside the text entry box, you can move the input
position to the location you pressed. If you select a region of
characters you’ve entered in the box and then enter a new
character, the newly entered character will overwrite the
selected region.
Using the tool buttons
Using the tool buttons
In some popup windows, the title bar at the top of the window contains tool buttons for additional
functions. You can use these buttons to access related libraries or copy parameters from one
channel to another channel. This section explains how to use the tool buttons.
Using libraries
In the ATT/HPF/EQ, DYNAMICS 1/2, GEQ, and
EFFECT popup windows, the following tool buttons are
shown.
1
2
3
4
5
This section explains basic operations for libraries. Libraries allow you to store and recall settings for the currently
selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect).
The following libraries are provided.
• Input EQ library
• Output EQ library
• Dynamics library
• GEQ library
• Effect library
3
Basic operation of the M7CL
About the tool buttons
The method of operation is essentially the same for each
library.
1 LIBRARY button
This button opens the library associated with the current
popup window (EQ, dynamics, GEQ, or effect libraries).
● Recalling settings from a library
B DEFAULT button
This button returns the currently selected channel (EQ/
dynamics) or rack (effect) to its default state.
1 Open a popup window that provides the
C COPY button
This button copies the settings of the currently selected
channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect). The copied
content is held in a buffer memory (a temporary memory
area).
D PASTE button
This button pastes the settings from the buffer memory to
the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack
(GEQ/effect).
tool buttons.
To access each popup window, proceed as follows.
[ATT/HPF/EQ popup window]
[DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window]
In the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the
OVERVIEW screen, press the appropriate field for EQ
or Dynamics 1/2.
2
E COMPARE button
This button exchanges and compares the settings in the
buffer memory with the settings of the currently selected
channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect).
1
For some windows, the following tool buttons are also
shown.
• SET ALL .........Sets all parameters in the window.
• CLEAR ALL....Clears all parameters in the window.
• ALL PRE.........Specifies PRE as the position from
which all signals are sent to the specified bus.
• ALL POST ......Specifies POST as the position from
which all signals are sent to the specified bus.
1 EQ graph field
B Dynamics 1/2 field
M7CL Owner’s Manual
31
Using the tool buttons
2 Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack
1
2
(GEQ/effect) for which you want to recall
settings.
The method of selecting a channel or rack will depend
on the type of popup window that is displayed.
[ATT/HPF/EQ popup window (1 ch)]
[DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1 ch)]
Use the panel [SEL] keys or the channel select button
in the function access area to select a channel.
Channel select button
1 EQ graph field
B Dynamics 1/2 field
[GEQ/EFFECT popup window]
In the VIRTUAL RACK window that appears when
you press the RACK button in the function access
area, press a rack in which a GEQ/effect is already
mounted.
1
[ATT/HPF/EQ popup window (8 ch/ALL)]
[DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (8 ch/ALL)]
In addition to using the panel [SEL] keys or the channel select button in the function access area, you can
also select a channel by pressing the channel number /
channel name buttons in the popup window.
Channel number / Channel name buttons
2
1 RACK button
B Racks
32
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Using the tool buttons
If you use the channel number / channel name buttons
in the 8 ch/ALL popup window, you can select multiple channels by selecting a region. In this case, the
same library data will be recalled to all of the selected
channels.
1 List
This shows the data saved in the library. A highlighted
line indicates that it is selected for operations. Readonly data is indicated by an R symbol.
HINT
• The right side of the list shows information (such as the
dynamics type or effect type used) about the corresponding
data. The dynamics library also displays symbols indicating
whether the data can be recalled into Dynamic 1 and/or
Dynamics 2.
B RECALL button
This recalls the data selected in the list into the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/
effect).
4 By turning any one of the multifunction
[GEQ/EFFECT popup window]
Use the rack select tabs at the bottom of the popup
window to select a rack.
encoders, move the highlighted line in the
list to select the library item you want to
recall.
Depending on the data you’ve selected for recall, it
may not be possible to recall it into the currently
selected channel or rack. Each library has the following restrictions.
3
Basic operation of the M7CL
Selected region
● Dynamics library
The dynamics library contains three types of data;
Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2 for input channels, and
Dynamics 1 for output channels. You can’t recall the
data if an inappropriate type of dynamics data is
selected in the library.
● GEQ library
The GEQ library contains two types of data; 31
Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ. You can’t recall the data
if the type selected in the library is different than the
type of the recall-destination GEQ.
Rack select tabs
NOTE
• You can’t select a rack select tab of a rack in which no GEQ or
effect is mounted.
● Effect library
Effect library items that use effect types “HQ.Pitch”
and “Freeze” can be recalled only to rack 5 or 7.
These cannot be recalled if any other rack is
selected.
If you select a library number that cannot be recalled,
it will not be possible to press the RECALL button.
3 Press the LIBRARY tool button to open the
corresponding library window.
Library windows contain the following items.
1
2
M7CL Owner’s Manual
33
Using the tool buttons
5 Press the RECALL button.
4 Turn one of the multifunction encoders to
select the store-destination library number.
HINT
• You can make settings so that a dialog box will ask you to
confirm the Recall operation. For details on this setting, refer
to p. 198.
NOTE
• You can’t store to a library number that contains read-only
data (indicated by an R symbol).
5 When you’ve selected the store-destination, press the STORE button.
The LIBRARY STORE popup window will appear,
allowing you to assign a title to the settings. For details
on entering text, refer to “Entering names” (→ p. 30).
6 The selected data will immediately be
loaded into the channel (EQ/dynamics) or
rack (GEQ/effect) you selected in step 2.
● Storing settings in a library
1 Open a popup window that provides the
tool buttons.
2 Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack
(GEQ/effect) whose settings you want to
store.
NOTE
• You can select only one channel or rack as the source for
storing. If multiple channels are selected in the dynamics/EQ
popup window (8 ch or ALL), you won’t be able to perform the
Store operation.
3 In the upper part of the popup window,
6 When you’ve assigned a title to the settings, press the STORE button in the
LIBRARY store popup window.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation.
press the LIBRARY button to access the
library.
7 To execute the Store operation, press the
OK button.
The current settings will be stored to the library number you selected in step 4. If you decide to cancel the
Store operation, press the CANCEL button instead of
the OK button.
HINT
1
1 STORE button
The settings of the currently selected channel (EQ/
dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect) will be stored to the
position selected in the list.
• Even after you’ve stored the settings, you can edit the title of
the settings by pressing the data title in the list to access the
LIBRARY TITLE EDIT popup window. However, you can’t edit
the title of a read-only library item (indicated by an R symbol).
NOTE
• Be aware that if you store settings to a location that already
contains data, the existing data will be overwritten. (Readonly data cannot be overwritten.)
34
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Using the tool buttons
1
Open a popup window that provides the
tool buttons.
2 In the upper part of the popup window,
press the LIBRARY button to access the
library.
Initializing settings
Heres how you can return the EQ/dynamics settings of the
currently selected channel or the effect settings of a rack
to their default state. A GEQ can be initialized by the
FLAT button in the screen.
1 Open a popup window that provides the
tool buttons.
2
Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack
(effect) whose settings you want to initialize.
3 Press the DEFAULT button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the initialization
operation.
3
Basic operation of the M7CL
● Erasing settings from a library
1
1 CLEAR button
This clears (erases) the settings that are selected in the
list.
3
Turn one of the multifunction encoders to
select the library item that you want to
clear.
4 To execute the initialization, press the OK
button.
The EQ/dynamics of the channel or the effect settings
of the rack you selected in step 2 will be initialized. If
you decide to cancel the initialization, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
HINT
• You cannot clear read-only data (indicated by an R symbol).
4 Press the CLEAR button.
HINT
• In the case of EQ/dynamics, you can use the channel number
/ channel name buttons in the 8 ch/ALL popup window to
select a range of channels and initialize them in a single operation.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear operation.
5 To execute the Clear operation, press the
OK button.
The data you selected in step 3 will be cleared. If you
decide to cancel the Clear operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
35
Using the tool buttons
Copying/pasting settings
Here’s how the EQ/dynamics settings of the currently
selected channel or the GEQ/effect settings of a rack can
be copied to a buffer memory and pasted to another channel or rack.
Copy/paste operations are restricted to the following combinations.
• Between input channel EQ settings
• Between output channel EQ settings
• Between dynamics processors for which the pastedestionation has the same type (GATE, DUCKING,
COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H,
COMPANDER-S, or DE-ESSER) as the copysource
• Between effects mounted in a rack
HINT
• Only 31 Band GEQ settings that use less than fifteen bands
can be copied to a Flex15GEQ.
1 Open a popup window that provides the
tool buttons.
2 Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack
(GEQ/effect) whose settings you want to
copy.
3 Press the COPY button.
The current settings will be saved in the buffer memory.
NOTE
• Be aware that if you copy other settings before you paste, the
buffer memory will be overwritten.
• You can select only one channel or rack as the copy-source. If
multiple channels are selected in the 8 ch/ALL popup window,
you won’t be able to press the COPY button.
4 Select the paste-destination channel or
rack.
HINT
• If you’re pasting EQ/dynamics settings, you can use the 8 ch/
ALL popup window to select multiple channels as the pastedestination. In this case, the same content will be pasted to all
selected channels.
5 Press the PASTE button.
The settings of the channel (EQ/dynamics) or the rack
(GEQ/effect) you selected in step 2 will be pasted.
NOTE
• Be aware that when you paste, the settings will overwrite the
paste-destination.
• If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the PASTE
button cannot be pressed.
• Of the two types of GEQ, using the tool buttons in a rack
where a Flex15GEQ is selected will cause the settings to be
copied/pasted individually.
• Effect settings with an effect type of “HQ.Pitch” or “Freeze”
cannot be pasted to rack 6 or 8.
36
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Comparing two settings
You can use the COMPARE button to exchange the settings held in the buffer memory with the settings of the
currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/
effect). This is convenient when you want to temporarily
keep the settings at a certain point, and compare them later
with the subsequently edited settings.
1 Open a popup window that provides the
tool buttons.
2 Select a channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack
(GEQ/effect).
3 Press the COPY button to place the current
settings in the buffer memory.
This will be the first set of settings.
NOTE
• Be aware that if you copy other settings before you compare,
the buffer memory will be overwritten.
4 Edit the settings of the currently selected
channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/
effect).
This will be the second set of settings.
HINT
• After you’ve stored the first set of settings in the buffer memory, you can initialize the channel or rack and edit the second
set of settings from an initialized state if desired.
Using the tool buttons
5 To compare the first set of settings with the
current settings (the second set), press the
COMPARE button.
You will return to the first set of settings. At this time,
the second set of settings will be held in the buffer
memory.
3
Basic operation of the M7CL
COPY
The first set
The first set
Buffer memory
The first set
Edit the settings
(The second set)
Buffer memory
COMPARE
The first set
The second set
Buffer memory
6 You can press the COMPARE button repeatedly to compare the first and second sets of
settings.
Each time you press the COMPARE button, the current settings will be exchanged with the settings held
in the buffer memory.
Unlike the Paste operation, the Compare operation
always lets you return to the previous settings as long
as the buffer memory has not been overwritten.
HINT
• The settings in the buffer memory can also be used for the
Paste operation.
NOTE
• Of the two types of GEQ, using the tool buttons in a rack
where a Flex15GEQ is selected will cause the settings to be
exchanged individually with the buffer memory.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
37
38
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 4
Connections and setup
This chapter explains how to make audio input/output connections, and how
to perform the setup required when starting the M7CL for the first time.
4
Connections and setup
Connections
■ Analog input connections
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Surface
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
SONG SCENE
REC
INPUT jacks 1–32 {1–48} are used mainly to connect microphones or monaural line-level devices. ST IN jacks 1–4 (L/R)
are used mainly to connect stereo line-level devices.
NOTE
• In the default state, the ST IN jacks are not patched. (Racks 5–8 are assigned to the ST IN channels.)
In order to use the signals connected here as inputs, you will need to make patch settings.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
39
Connections
■ Analog output connections
Monitor speakers (foldback)
PW800W power supply
Power cable
Monitor speakers
Main speakers
To the OMNI OUT jacks 1–16, you can patch the output signals from output channels (MIX, MATRIX, STEREO (L/R), MONO
(C)), monitor signals (MONITOR OUT L/R/C channel), and the direct out signals of INPUT channels 1–32 {1–48}.
When the M7CL is in the default state, the signals of the following channels are patched to each output port. (You are free
to change this patching as desired.)
OMNI OUT jacks 1–12
MIX channels 1–12
OMNI OUT jacks 13/14
MATRIX channels 1/2
OMNI OUT jacks 15/16
STEREO channel (L/R)
Below the M7CL’s front pad there is a PHONES OUT jack for monitoring, and this jack always lets you monitor the signal
that is selected as the monitoring source (→ p. 141). By assigning the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can monitor this same signal through external speakers (→ p. 142).
HINT
• If you connect the power cable to the AC IN jack and also connect the separately sold PW800W power supply, power
will continue to be supplied from the PW800W even if the internal power supply shuts down due to a problem.
40
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Connections
■ Digital input/output connections
CD recorder
Connections and setup
4
Digital I/O card
Speaker processor
(e.g., Yamaha DME64N)
Main speakers
Use the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack to send the M7CL’s internal signals to an external digital audio device. When the M7CL
is in the default state, the output signal of the STEREO channel is patched to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack, and can be used
to record the main mix onto a CD recorder or other device.
By installing separately sold mini-YGDAI I/O cards in slots 1–3, you can add input/output jacks to the M7CL or connect
HDR (Hard Disk Recorder) or speaker processor units.
For the types of I/O cards that can be used, refer to the appendix (→ p. 267).
Refer to the Yamaha professional audio website for the most recent information on I/O cards.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
NOTE
• In order to send and receive digital audio signals via the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack or slots 1–3, the word
clock of both devices must be synchronized (→ p. 208).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
41
Connections
■ Installing an option card
Before you install I/O cards in slots 1–3, you must check the Yamaha website to determine whether the card is compatible
with the M7CL, and to verify the total number of Yamaha or third-party cards that can be installed in combination with that
card.
Yamaha website: http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
To install an optional mini-YGDAI card, proceed as follows.
1 Make sure that the power is turned off.
2 Loosen the screws that hold the slot cover
in place, and remove the slot cover.
4 Use the screws included with the card to
fasten the card in place.
Malfunctions or incorrect operation may occur if the
card is not fastened.
Keep the removed slot cover in a safe place.
CAUTION
• Before connecting a separately sold mini-YGDAI I/O card to
the M7CL, you must turn off the power switch of the M7CL and
the PC800W power supply.
Failure to observe this will cause malfunctions or electric
shock.
Slot cover
3 Align the edges of the card with the guard
rails inside the slot, and insert the card into
the slot.
Push the card all the way into the slot so that the connector at the end of the card is correctly inserted into
the connector inside the slot.
Card
42
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Setting up to use the M7CL
Setting up to use the M7CL
This section explains the setup required when starting up the M7CL for the first time. We will also
discuss basic operations for sending an input channel signal out from the STEREO bus so that
you can check the connections.
Turn on the power of the M7CL, and recall (load) the
default setting scene (scene number 000).
NOTE
• In the procedure described here, you are asked to recall this
default setting scene so that the remaining step in this chapter can be performed appropriately. In actual operation, there
is no need to recall the default setting scene each time.
1 Turn on the power of the M7CL.
When you turn on the power of the M7CL, you should
first power-on the M7CL, and then power-on your
power amp and monitor system. (When turning the
power off, follow the opposite order.)
HINT
• If a PW800W power supply is connected to the M7CL, the
power will turn on regardless of whether you first turn on the
POWER switch of the M7CL or of the PW800W.
Word clock connections and
settings
“Word clock” refers to the clock data that provides the
basis of timing for digital audio signal processing.
If you connect external equipment such as a DAW system
or HDR (Hard Disk Recorder) to a digital I/O card
installed in slot 1–3, this equipment must be synchronized
to the same word clock as the M7CL in order for digital
audio signals to be transferred between the M7CL and the
external equipment. To do so, set one device as the word
clock master (transmitting device), and the other devices
as the slaves (receiving devices) so that the slaves will
synchronize to the word clock master.
There are two ways in which the M7CL can operate as a
word clock slave that is synchronized to an externally-supplied word clock; the M7CL can use the clock data
included in the digital audio signal being input from a digital I/O card, or it can use a separate word clock signal
supplied to the rear panel WORD CLOCK IN jack.
4
Connections and setup
Restoring the current scene to
the default state
Digital audio signal
+
Clock data
2 Use the top panel SCENE MEMORY [▲]/[▼]
keys to make scene number “000” appear
in the SCENE field in the function access
area of the display.
SLOT 1–3
2
HDR or other digital audio
device (word clock master)
M7CL (word clock slave)
Clock data
1
Digital audio signal
1 SCENE MEMORY [▲]/[▼] keys
B SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key
SCENE field
3 Press the top panel SCENE MEMORY
[RECALL] key.
Scene number “000” will be loaded, and the mix
parameters will return to the default state.
HINT
• Be aware that when scene number “000” is loaded, the input
patch, output patch, internal effect, and HA (Head Amp) settings will also return to their default state. (However, the word
clock master selection is not affected.)
WORD
CLOCK IN
jack
SLOT 1–3
M7CL (word clock slave)
Digital MTR or other
digital audio device
(word clock master)
In either case, you must use the following procedure to
specify the word clock source that the M7CL will use.
HINT
• The procedure below is not necessary if you are using the M7CL
as the word clock master, or if the M7CL is not digitally connected
to an external device.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
43
Setting up to use the M7CL
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
In the SETUP screen you can make settings that apply
to the entire M7CL.
3 In the WORD CLOCK SELECT field, select
the clock source.
In the WORD CLOCK SELECT field, use the buttons
to select the clock source you want to use as the word
clock master.
● When using clock data from a digital audio
signal as the clock source
Press a valid two-channel button for the corresponding slot.
● When using word clock data from the WORD
CLOCK IN jack as the clock source
Press the WORD CLOCK IN button.
If the M7CL is operating correctly with the new clock,
the symbol immediately above the corresponding button will turn light blue.
HINT
• The clock data of the digital audio signal supplied via a digital
I/O card in slots 1–3 can be selected in two-channel units.
1
2
1 SYSTEM SETUP field
B WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP button
2 In the SYSTEM SETUP field at the center of
the window, press the WORD CLOCK/SLOT
SETUP button to open the WORD CLOCK/
SLOT SETUP popup window.
• For details on word clock, refer to “Word Clock and Slot settings” (→ p. 208).
4 To close the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP
popup window, press the “×” symbol
located in the upper right.
You will return to the SETUP screen.
5 To close the SETUP screen, press the
SETUP button in the function access area.
1
Making HA (Head Amp) gain settings
Here’s how to adjust the gain of the HA (Head Amp) for
each input channel to which a mic or instrument is connected.
On the M7CL, channel parameters can be controlled using
either the SELECTED CHANNEL section to make settings for a single channel, or using the Centralogic section
to make settings for up to eight channels. Use the method
that’s appropriate for your situation.
1 WORD CLOCK SELECT field
NOTE
• When you switch the word clock source, noise may occur due
to loss of synchronization. Be sure to lower the volume of
your power amps and monitor system before you continue
with the following procedure.
● Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
(settings for one channel)
With this method, you select the input channel whose settings you want to adjust, and use the encoders of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the settings for
that channel.
1 Make sure that a mic or instrument is connected to an INPUT jack (→ p. 39).
2 In the top panel INPUT section, press the
[SEL] key for the channel corresponding to
the INPUT jack you want to control.
In the state immediately after scene 000 is recalled, the
input signals from INPUT jacks 1–32 {1–48} are
being sent to INPUT channels 1–32 {1–48} respectively, and can be controlled by corresponding channel
strip.
44
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Setting up to use the M7CL
For example if you want to make head amp settings
for INPUT jack 7, press the [SEL] key of the channel
strip for INPUT channel 7.
[SELECTED CHANNEL section]
1
[INPUT section channel strip]
1
4
Connections and setup
3
1 [HA] encoder
When you press one of the encoders in this section, the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will appear in
the touch screen.
[SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen]
1
1 [SEL] key
B Level meter
When you press the [SEL] key, the key LED will light.
The lit LED indicates that this channel is selected for
operations. The level meter of that channel strip will
indicate the input level for that channel.
3 In the SELECTED CHANNEL section
located at the left of the touch screen,
press any of the encoders.
The SELECTED CHANNEL section provides
focused control of the currently selected channel (i.e.,
the channel whose [SEL] key is lit).
1 HA field
The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen shows
most of the parameters of the channel currently
selected by its [SEL] key.
HINT
• In actuality, you can use the encoders of the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to operate the channel selected by its
[SEL] key even without displaying the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen. (In this case, a popup window will appear to
show the value of the parameter you’re operating.)
M7CL Owner’s Manual
45
Setting up to use the M7CL
4 While performing on the mic or instrument,
turn the [HA] encoder of the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to adjust the gain of the
currently selected channel.
Adjust the level as high as possible without allowing
the OVER segment of the channel strip level meter to
light when the mic or instrument is being played
loudly.
When you turn the [HA] encoder in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section, the knob in the HA field of the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will move in
tandem with the encoder.
NOTE
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA
gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind
that noise may be generated if there is a difference between
the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device
connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom
power.
• If the level meter does not show any movement even if you
have raised the [HA] encoder, it is possible that the INPUT
channel selected by its [SEL] key does not match the INPUT
jack to which your mic or instrument is connected. Make sure
that the connections and the selection of the [SEL] key are
correct. If necessary, recall scene number 000 once again.
The navigation keys of the NAVIGATION KEYS section select the eight channels or DCA groups that will
be controlled by the Centralogic section. In this section, the following keys correspond to input channels.
●
●
●
●
[IN 1-8] key
[IN 9-16] key
[IN 17-24] key
[IN 25-32] key
These keys select INPUT channels 1–8, 9–16, 17–
24, and 25–32 respectively.
● [ST IN] key
This key selects ST IN channels 1–4.
● [IN 33-40] key {M7CL-48 only}
● [IN 41-48] key {M7CL-48 only}
These keys select INPUT channels 33–40 and 41–
48 respectively.
When you press a navigation key, the OVERVIEW
screen will appear in the display, and the principal
parameters of the up to eight selected channels are
shown simultaneously. You can use the keys and faders
of the Centralogic section to control the level, on/off
status, and cue operations of the selected eight channels or DCA groups.
5 Press the [SEL] key of another input channel, and adjust the head amp gain in the
same way.
When you press a [SEL] key to select another channel,
the channel shown in the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen will change accordingly.
1
2
3
HINT
• In the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen you can also
switch the head amp’s phantom power on/off, and switch the
phase between normal and reverse. To do this, press the HA/
PHASE field to access the popup window. (For details on the
procedure → p. 55).
4
5
● Using the Centralogic section
(settings for eight channels)
Use the Centralogic section and the OVERVIEW screen to
make head amp settings for up to eight channels. This
method is convenient when you want to adjust the same
parameter for multiple channels at once.
6
1 Connect a mic or instrument to an INPUT
jack. (For details on making connections
→ p. 39).
2 Press a navigation key in the NAVIGATION
KEYS section so that the input channels
you want to control are assigned to the
Centralogic section.
1
B
C
D
E
F
Multi-function encoders
[SEL] keys
[CUE] keys
Level meters
[ON] keys
Faders
HINT
• You can rapidly switch from the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen to the OVERVIEW screen by pressing one of the multifunction encoders in the Centralogic section.
46
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Setting up to use the M7CL
Sending an input channel signal
to the STEREO bus
This section explains how to adjust the gain to set the level
of the signal sent from an input channel to the STEREO
bus, and adjust the pan/balance so that the signal can be
monitored from external speakers connected to the STEREO channel. The following procedure lets you check
whether the connections from the mic or instrument to the
main speakers are appropriate.
In this case as well, you can either use the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to make settings for one channel at a
time, or use the Centralogic section to make settings for
up to eight channels at a time.
1
● Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
(settings for one channel)
1 Press the [SEL] key of the input channel
1 HA/PHASE field
3 Press a knob in the HA/PHASE field of the
you want to control.
4
Connections and setup
For example, the following illustration shows the
OVERVIEW screen for INPUT channels 1–8. The
knobs of the HA/PHASE field indicate the amount of
HA gain for each channel.
2 Press one of the encoders in the
screen to select it.
SELECTED CHANNEL section.
When you press a knob shown in the OVERVIEW
screen, a bold frame is displayed around the horizontal
row of knobs of the same type. This frame indicates
the you can use the multifunction encoders of the Centralogic section to operate the corresponding knobs.
The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the
selected channel will appear.
1
4 While performing on the mic or instrument,
use the Centralogic section’s multifunction
encoders 1–8 to adjust the HA gain of each
channel.
Adjust the level as high as possible without allowing
the OVER segment of the channel level meter in the
Centralogic section to light when the mic or instrument is being played at its loudest volume.
The input level is also shown by the level meter of the
corresponding INPUT section or ST IN section.
NOTE
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA
gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind
that noise may be generated if there is a difference between
the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device
connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom
power.
HINT
• In the OVERVIEW screen you can also switch the head amp’s
phantom power on/off, and switch the phase between normal
and reverse. To do so, press the selected knob in the HA/
PHASE field once again to access the popup window. (For
details → p. 55).
1 TO ST PAN/BALANCE field
3 In the To ST PAN/BALANCE field of the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, make
sure that the ST button is on (white characters on a pink background).
In the TO ST PAN/BALANCE field you can use the
ST/MONO button to switch the signal sent from the
input channel to the STEREO/MONO buses on/off.
The knob in this field indicates the pan/balance of the
signal sent to the STEREO bus.
If the ST button is off (black characters on blue background), press the button to switch it on.
4 Verify that in the top panel, the [ON] of the
corresponding input channel is on.
5 Use the navigation keys to switch the eight
channels controlled by the Centralogic section, and adjust the gain for other input
channels in the same way.
The [ON] turns the corresponding channel on or off. If
the [ON] key is off (LED dark), press the key to turn it
on (LED lit).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
47
Setting up to use the M7CL
5 In the STEREO/MONO MASTER section,
HINT
make sure that the [ON] key of the STEREO
channel is on, and raise the STEREO channel fader to 0 dB.
• The signal being output from the STEREO channel can
also be monitored using headphones connected to the PHONES
OUT jack located below the front pad (→ p. 142).
7 To adjust the pan/balance of the signal sent
from the input channel to the STEREO bus,
turn the [PAN] encoder of the SELECTED
CHANNEL section.
When you turn the [PAN] encoder, the knob in the HA
field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
will move in tandem with the encoder.
1
8 Press the [SEL] key of another input chan-
nel, and adjust the pan/balance in the same
way.
When you press a [SEL] key to select another channel,
the channel shown in the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen will change accordingly.
2
● Using the Centralogic section
(settings for eight channels)
Here’s how to use the Centralogic section and OVERVIEW screen to adjust the input level and pan/balance
sent to the STEREO bus for up to eight signals at a time.
1 Press a navigation key in the NAVIGATION
1 STEREO channel [ON] key
B STEREO channel fader
6 Raise the fader of the currently selected
KEYS section so that the input channels
you want to control are assigned to the
Centralogic section.
The selected eight channels are shown in the OVERVIEW screen.
input channel to an appropriate volume.
In this state, you should now hear sound from the
speaker system that is patched to the STEREO channel.
If you don’t hear sound, check whether the LR meters
are moving in the METER field of the function access
area.
[METER field of the function access area]
1
1 TO STEREO/MONO field
2 Make sure that in the TO STEREO/MONO
● If the LR meters are moving
It may be that the STEREO channel is not correctly
patched to the output jacks that are connected to
your speaker system. Check the output port patching
(→ p. 95).
● If the LR meters are not moving
It may be that the INPUT channel [ON] key is off.
Check the status of the [ON] key (→ p. 16).
48
M7CL Owner’s Manual
field of the screen, the ST symbol of each
channel is on (white characters on pink
background).
The ST/MONO symbol in the OVERVIEW screen
indicates the on/off status of the signal sent from that
input channel to the STEREO/MONO buses. If the ST
symbol is off (gray characters on a black background),
use the TO ST PAN/BALANCE field of the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW page to switch it on
(→ p. 47).
Setting up to use the M7CL
3 In the Centralogic section, verify that the
[ON] of the corresponding input channel is
on.
4 In the STEREO/MONO MASTER section,
make sure that the [ON] key of the STEREO
channel is on, and raise the STEREO channel fader to 0 dB.
5 In the Centralogic section, raise the fader of
the corresponding input channel to an
appropriate volume.
4
Connections and setup
In this state, you should now hear sound from the
speaker system that is patched to the STEREO channel.
HINT
• You can also adjust the input level using the faders of the
INPUT section or ST IN section instead of the faders of the
Centralogic section.
If you don’t hear sound, check whether the LR meters
are moving in the METER field of the function access
area.
● If the LR meters are moving
It may be that the STEREO channel is not correctly
patched to the output jacks that are connected to
your speaker system. Check the output port patching
(→ p. 95).
● If the LR meters are not moving
It may be that the INPUT channel [ON] key is off.
Check the status of the [ON] key (→ p. 16).
HINT
• The signal being output from the STEREO channel can
also be monitored using headphones connected to the
PHONES OUT jack located below the front pad (→ p. 142).
6 To adjust the pan/balance of the signal sent
from each input channel to the STEREO
bus, press a knob in the TO STEREO/MONO
field of the screen to select it, and turn the
multifunction encoders of the Centralogic
section.
When you turn a multifunction encoder, the knob in
the TO STEREO/MONO field of the OVERVIEW
screen will also turn.
7 Use the navigation keys to switch the eight
channels controlled by the Centralogic section, and make adjustments for other input
channels in the same way.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
49
50
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 5
Input channel operations
This chapter explains operations for input channels (INPUT channels and ST
IN channels).
The input channels are the section that processes the signals received from the rear panel input
jacks or slots 1–3, and sends them to the STEREO bus, MONO bus, MIX buses, and MATRIX
buses. There are two types of input channel, as follows.
■ INPUT channels 1–32 {1–48}
These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the M7CL is in the default state, the input signals from INPUT
jacks 1–32 {1–48} are assigned to these channels.
M
O
MIX
1 2 ··· 1516
CH 1-32 {48}
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
INSERT POINT
CH
INSERT OUT 1-32 {48}
CH
INSERT IN 1-32 {48}
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
DYNA1OUT
DYNA2OUT
EQ OUT
METER
METER
METER
GR METER
GR METER
PRE EQ
METER
HPF
INSERT
PRE HPF
ATT
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
Keyin
Self PRE EQ
Self POST EQ
MIX13-16 OUT
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32]POST EQ {32}
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48]POST EQ{48}
INPUT PATCH
DIRECT OUT 1-32 {48}
LEVEL
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
LR MONO TO MONO TO ST
L R (C) 1 2 ··· 7 8
L R
To OUTPUT PATCH
PAN
PRE HPF
METER
32
{48}
ON
PRE HPF / PRE EQ / PRE FADER
N
ST O
MATRIX CUE
5
Input channel operations
Signal flow for input channels
GATE
COMP
DUCK
COMPAND
EXPAND
DE-ESSER
COMP
KEYIN CUE
Keyin Filter
To MIX
PRE FADER
METER
LEVEL/
DCA1-8
INSERT
PAN MODE
ST R
POST ON
PAN LINK
ON
MIX1,3...15
ON
MIX2,4...16
ON
POST PAN L
ON
POST PAN R
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
PAN
To MATRIX PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
VARI
ON
LEVEL
MATRIX1,3...7
ON
LEVEL
MATRIX2,4...8
To MATRIX
ON
LEVEL
PAN
To MIX
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
VARI
To MIX
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
VARI
STEREO
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL/POST PAN L
VARI
STEREO
ON
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL/POST PAN R
ON
ST L
MONO (C)
TO LCR
CSR
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
FIXED
FIXED
STEREO
ON
LCR
POST ON
To MIX
POST ON
METER
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
CUE L
CUE R
■ ST IN channels 1–4
These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the M7CL is in the default state, the signals from EFFECT
RETURN 1–4 (L/R) are assigned to these channels.
M
O
MIX
1 2 ··· 1516
L R (C) 1 2 ··· 7 8
L R
BAL
STCH 1L-4R
DYNA1OUT
EQ OUT
DYNA 2OUT
METER
METER
METER
GR METER
GR METER
PRE EQ
METER
PRE HPF
METER
HPF
ATT
8
PRE HPF
INPUT PATCH
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
LR MONO TO MONO TO ST
N
ST O
MATRIX CUE
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
Keyin
Self PRE EQ
Self POST EQ
MIX13-16 OUT
STCH 1L-4R POST EQ
PRE FADER
METER
LEVEL/
DCA 1-8
GATE
COMP
DUCK
COMPAND
EXPAND
DE-ESSER
COMP
KEYIN CUE
Keyin Filter
To MIX
FIXED
STEREO
To MIX
ST R
PAN LINK
POST ON
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
VARI
(PRE FADER)PFL/(POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
VARI
STEREO
ON
(PRE FADER)PFL/(POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
ON
ST L
MONO (C)
TO LCR
POST ON
ON
MIX 1,3... 15
ON
MIX 2,4... 16
ON
ON
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
BAL
VARI
STEREO
To MATRIX
PAN MODE
CSR
VARI
To MIX
LCR
PRE FADER
FIXED
To MIX
POSTON
METER
ON
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
ON
LEVEL
MATRIX1,3...7
ON
LEVEL
MATRIX2,4...8
ON
LEVEL
BAL
CUE L
CUE R
M7CL Owner’s Manual
51
Signal flow for input channels
● INPUT PATCH
● LCR (Left/Center/Right)
This assigns an input signal to the input channel.
Switches the phase of the input signal.
This sends the signal of the input channel as a three-channel output (the MONO (C) channel and the L/R channels)
to the STEREO bus / MONO bus.
● HPF (High Pass Filter)
● MIX ON/OFF (MIX send on/off)
● ø (Phase)
This is a high pass filter that cuts the region below the
specified frequency.
This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the input
channel to MIX buses 1–16.
● ATT (Attenuator)
● MIX LEVEL 1-16 (MIX send level 1–16)
Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal.
● 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
A parametric EQ with four bands; HIGH, HIGH MID,
LOW MID, and LOW.
● DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor that can be used for gating,
ducking, expander, or compressor.
● DYNAMICS 2
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or de-esser.
● LEVEL/DCA 1–8
Adjusts the input level of the channel.
● ON (On/off)
Turns the input channel on/off. If off, that channel is
muted.
● PAN
This adjusts the panning of the signal sent from the
INPUT channel to the STEREO bus. If necessary, this pan
setting can also be applied to signals sent to two paired
MIX/MATRIX buses.
● BALANCE
On ST IN channels, the BALANCE parameter is used
instead of PAN. The BALANCE parameter adjusts the
volume balance of the left/right signals sent from the ST
IN channel to the STEREO bus. If necessary, you can turn
on PAN LINK in the BUS SETUP popup window so that
the setting of this parameter will also be applied to the signal sent to two MIX or MATRIX buses that are set to stereo.
52
M7CL Owner’s Manual
This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input
channel to VARI type MIX buses 1–16. As the position
from which the signal is sent to the MIX bus, you can
choose from the following; immediately before ATT, prefader, or post-fader.
● MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the input
channel to MATRIX buses 1–8.
● MATRIX LEVEL 1–8 (MATRIX send levels 1–8)
Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input
channel to MATRIX buses 1–8. As the position from
which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can
choose from the following; immediately before ATT, prefader, or post-fader.
● INSERT (INPUT channels only)
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an
external device such as an effect processor. As the position
of the insert-out/insert-in point, you can choose either
immediately before ATT or pre-fader.
● DIRECT OUT (INPUT channels only)
This can be patched to any output port, and the input signal sent directly from that output port. As the position of
the direct output, you can choose immediately before
HPF, immediately before ATT, or immediately before
fader.
● METER
This meters the level of the input channel. You can switch
the position at which the level is detected.
Specifying the channel name and icon
Specifying the channel name and icon
On the M7CL, the name and icon shown in the screen can be specified for each input channel.
Here we will explain how to specify the channel name and icon.
1 Use the navigation keys to access the
OVERVIEW screen containing the input
channel whose channel name / icon you
want to assign.
3 To select the icon for that channel, press
the icon button.
The lower part of the popup window will change as
follows.
1
5
Input channel operations
1
2
1 Channel number / Channel name field
2
1 Icon select buttons
These buttons select the icon used for this channel.
Access the PATCH/NAME popup window by
pressing the channel number / channel
name field of the channel whose channel
name / icon you want to assign.
2
3
B Sample name select buttons
These buttons select a sample name associated with
the currently selected icon. When you press a button,
that sample name will be input to the channel name
field.
4 Use the icon select buttons to select the
1
icon you want to use for that channel.
The selected icon is shown in the icon button in the
upper part of the window.
5 If necessary, use the sample name select
buttons to select a sample name.
The sample name you selected will be input to the
channel name field in the upper part of the window.
HINT
4
The popup window shows the following items.
1 Input port button
• You can add or edit characters in the channel name field even
after you’ve entered the sample name. If you want to assign
consecutively numbered channel names such as “Vocal1”
and “Vocal2,” this can be easily done by entering the sample
name and then adding a number.
This indicates the currently selected input port. If you
press this button when selecting an icon or changing
the channel name, you will return to the input port
select screen.
B Icon button
This indicates the icon selected for that channel. When
you press this button, a screen will appear in which
you can select an icon or sample name.
C Channel name input box
This indicates the name assigned to that channel.
When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear.
D Tabs
Use these tabs to switch between items.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
53
Specifying the channel name and icon
6 If you want to enter a channel name directly
(or edit the sample name that was entered),
press the channel name field in the upper
part of the window.
The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of
the window, allowing you to enter or edit the characters. For details on how to use the keyboard window,
refer to p. 30.
7 Use the [SEL] keys to switch input chan-
nels, and specify the icon or channel name
for other channels in the same way.
When the PATCH/NAME popup window is shown,
you can use the [SEL] keys to switch the channel
being edited.
8 When you’re finished with your input, press
the “×” symbol in the upper right of the window.
HINT
• You can press the TAB button to switch to the next channel.
You can press the ENTER button to close the popup window
in the same way as using the “×” symbol.
54
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Making HA (Head Amp) settings
Making HA (Head Amp) settings
This section explains how to make HA (Head Amp) related settings (phantom power on/off, gain,
phase) for each input channel.
can do so by using the HA encoder of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section. (p. 17)
2 If you want to edit detailed parameters such
as phantom power on/off or phase, use the
navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW
screen that includes the input channel
whose HA you want to edit.
1
NOTE
• If you’ve turned off the phantom power master setting in the
SETUP screen SYSTEM SETUP field, phantom power will
not be supplied even if the +48V button is turned on for each
channel.
CAUTION
• If you don’t need phantom power, be sure to turn this button
off.
• Before you turn phantom power on, make sure that no device
other than a condenser mic is connected to that jack. Otherwise, you risk damaging your external equipment.
• To protect your speaker system, leave the power amps (powered speakers) turned off when switching the phantom power
on/off. We also recommend that you set all output level faders
to the minimum position. Otherwise, high-volume output may
damage your hearing or equipment.
C GAIN knob
This indicates the gain of the head amp assigned to
this channel. To adjust this value, operate multifunction encoder 3. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the
corresponding port.
1 HA/PHASE field
3 Press the HA/PHASE field of the channel
whose HA you want to adjust; the HA/
PATCH popup window will appear.
This popup window can be viewed in three types of
view (1 ch, 8 ch, ALL), and you can use the tabs at the
bottom of the screen to switch between these types.
These windows include the following items.
[HA/PATCH popup window (1 ch)]
D ø (Phase) button
This switches the head amp assigned to the channel
between normal phase (black) and reverse phase
(orange).
E INPUT PORT popup button
This shows the input port assigned to this channel. You
can press this button to access the INPUT PORT
SELECT popup window, where you can select the
input port for each channel.
F Icon / Channel Name button
This shows the number, icon, and channel name for
that channel. You can press this button to access the
PATCH / NAME popup window, where you can edit
the input port patching and specify the channel name.
1
2
5
Input channel operations
1 If you only want to adjust the HA gain, you
3 4
5
6
Here you can make HA-related settings for the currently selected channel.
1 Icon / Channel number / Channel name
This shows the icon, channel number, and channel
name for that channel.
B +48V button
This switches the phantom power on (red) or off
(black) for the head amp assigned to this channel.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
55
Making HA (Head Amp) settings
[HA/PATCH popup window (8 ch)]
1 Channel select button
Here you can make HA-related settings for a group of
eight channels.
This indicates the channel number, the icon selected
for that channel, and the channel name. When you
press this button, that channel will be selected for
operations, and the corresponding [SEL] key will
light.
1
B GAIN knob
This indicates the gain of the head amp assigned to the
channel. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it,
and operate multifunction encoders 1–8.
The indicator located at the immediate right of the
knob indicates the presence or absence of a signal for
the corresponding port.
2
3
4
5
1 Channel select button
This shows the icon, channel number, and channel
name for the channel. When you press this button, that
channel will be selected for operations, and the corresponding [SEL] key will light.
B INPUT PATCH button
This indicates the currently selected input port. You
can press this button to access the INPUT PORT
SELECT popup window, where you can select the
input port for each channel.
C +48V button
This switches the phantom power on (red) or off
(black) for the head amp assigned to this channel.
D GAIN knob
This indicates the gain of the head amp assigned to
this channel. Use multifunction encoders 1–8 to adjust
the value. The level meter located at the immediate
right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port.
E ø (Phase) button
This switches the head amp assigned to the channel
between normal phase (black) and reverse phase
(orange).
[HA/PATCH popup window (ALL)]
This window shows the head amp settings of all input
channels. Here you can also adjust the head amp gain
in groups of the selected eight channels.
134
2
C +48V
This indicates the phantom power on (red) or off
(black) status for the head amp assigned to the channel.
D ø (Phase)
This indicates either normal phase (black) or reverse
phase (orange) for the head amp assigned to the channel.
4 Access either the 1 ch or 8 ch HA/PATCH
popup window.
5 Use the on-screen buttons or the multifunction encoders to edit the head amp gain,
phase, and phantom power on/off settings.
NOTE
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA
gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind
that noise may be generated if there is a difference between
the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device
connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom
power.
• The GAIN knob, +48V button, and ø button are valid only for
channels whose assigned input port is an INPUT jack, ST IN
jack, or a slot that is connected to an external head amp
device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR). (For details on connecting
external head amp devices → p. 177).
6 Perform the same operations for other
input channels as desired.
If you are viewing the 1 ch HA/PATCH popup window, you can also use the [SEL] keys to switch the
channel for editing.
If you are viewing the 8 ch HA/PATCH popup window, you can use the navigation keys to switch the
channels being controlled in groups of eight channels.
7 When you’re finished editing, press the “×”
symbol in the upper right of the window.
56
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO buses
Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO buses
This section explains how to send the signal of an input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO
bus.
The STEREO bus and MONO bus are used mainly to send signals to the main speakers. There
are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus; ST/MONO mode and LCR
mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. These modes differ in the following
ways.
This mode sends the signal from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently.
• The signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/off individually.
• The panning of the signal sent from an INPUT channel to the STEREO bus L/R is controlled by the TO ST PAN knob.
(The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob.)
• The left/right volume balance of the signal sent from a ST IN channel to the STEREO bus is controlled by this knob.
(The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob.)
■ LCR mode
This mode sends the signal of the input channel to a total of three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C)) together.
• The signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus will be switched on/off as a whole.
• The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob specifies the level ratio between the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
• The TO ST PAN knob / BALANCE knob specifies the level of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO
(L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.
5
Input channel operations
■ ST/MONO mode
HINT
• If you want to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones etc., you should press
the MONITOR button in the function access area to select “LCR” as the monitor source before you continue with
the following procedure (→ p. 142).
1 Make sure that an input source is con-
nected to the input channel you’re adjusting, and set the phantom power supply,
gain, and phase of the head amp to obtain
the optimum input signal (→ p. 55).
2 Use the navigation keys to access the
OVERVIEW screen that includes the input
channel you want to send to the STEREO/
MONO bus.
3 In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to
select the channel you want to adjust, and
then press the knob once again to access
the TO STEREO/MONO popup window.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window you can
control the signal that is sent from the input channel to
the STEREO/MONO bus. You can view this popup
window as two types, 8ch and ALL; use the tabs below
the window to switch between them. These windows
include the following items.
[TO STEREO/MONO popup window (8 ch)]
1
2
3
4
1
1 STEREO/MONO field
Here you can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of the signal sent from input channels to the
STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of
eight channels.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
57
Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO buses
1 Channel select button
[TO STEREO/MONO popup window (ALL)]
This shows the icon, channel number, and channel
name for the channel. When you press this button, that
channel will be selected for operations, and the corresponding [SEL] key will light.
The screen shows the status of the signals sent from all
input channels to the STEREO bus / MIX bus. Here
you can also adjust the pan or balance in groups of the
selected eight channels.
B MODE button
This button selects either ST/MONO mode or LCR
mode as the way in which the signal will be sent to the
STEREO bus or MONO bus. This mode can be specified individually for each channel.
The two modes will alternate each time you press the
button. An indicator (ST/MONO or LCR) immediately
above the button will light to indicate the currently
selected mode.
13
3
2
C STEREO/MONO buttons
These buttons are individual on/off switches for the
signal that is sent from each channel to the STEREO
bus / MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/
MONO mode.
D TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
For INPUT channels, this acts as the PAN knob that
adjusts the left/right panning of the signal sent to the
STEREO bus.
For ST IN channels, this acts as the BALANCE knob
that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals
sent to the STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the
knob to select it, and operate the corresponding multifunction encoder.
If the MODE button is set to LCR mode, the following
button and knob are displayed instead of the STEREO/
MONO button (3).
5
6
E LCR button
This button is an overall on/off switch for the signals
sent from the channel to the STEREO bus and MONO
bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from
the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus
or MONO bus.
F CSR knob
This knob adjusts the relative level of the signals sent
from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the
MONO (C) bus, in a range of 0–100%. To adjust the
value, press the knob to select it, and operate the corresponding multifunction encoder.
58
M7CL Owner’s Manual
1 Channel select button
This indicates the channel number, the icon selected
for that channel, and the channel name. When you
press this button, that channel will be selected for
operations, and the corresponding [SEL] key will
light.
B TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
For INPUT channels, this acts as the PAN knob that
adjusts the left/right panning of the signal sent to the
STEREO bus. For ST IN channels, this acts as the
BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left
and right signals sent to the STEREO bus.
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and
operate the corresponding multifunction encoder.
If the signal reaches the overload point at any meter
detection point in that channel, the indicator at the
right of the knob will light.
C ST/MONO indicator
If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, this individually indicates the on/off status of the signal sent from
the channel to the STEREO bus / MONO bus.
If a channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator is
displayed in this location. The LCR indicator indicates
the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to
the STEREO bus and MONO bus.
4 Access the eight-channel TO STEREO/
MONO popup window.
5 Use the MODE button to select either ST/
MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.
6 In the STEREO / MONO MASTER section of
the top panel, make sure that the [ON] key
of the STEREO channel / MONO channel is
turned on, and raise the fader to an appropriate position.
Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO buses
7 In the INPUT section or ST IN section of the
If the CSR knob is set to 0%, operating the TO ST
PAN knob of an INPUT channel will change the level
of the signals sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and
MONO (C) bus as shown in the following diagram. In
this case, the TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO
(C) bus.
top panel, make sure that the [ON] key is
turned on for the input channel you want to
control, and raise the fader to an appropriate position.
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether
ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the
channel in step 5.
use the STEREO/MONO button to turn the
signal sent from the input channel to the
STEREO bus / MONO bus on or off.
Signal sent to the
STEREO (R) bus
L
9 In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window,
use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning
of the signal sent from the input channel to
the STEREO bus.
use the LCR button to turn the signals sent
from the input channel to the STEREO bus /
MONO bus on or off together.
Signal sent from
the ST IN (L)
channel to the
STEREO (L) bus
Signal level
8 In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window,
L
For a channel that is set to LCR mode, the signals sent
to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus are
switched on/off together.
use the CSR knob to adjust the level difference between the signals sent from that
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the
MONO (C) bus.
C
R
TO ST BALANCE knob
Signal sent from
the ST IN (R)
channel to the
STEREO (R) bus
Signal level
9 In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window,
R
Operating the TO ST BALANCE knob of a ST IN
channel will change the level of the signals sent from
the ST IN L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and
MONO (C) bus as shown in the following diagram. In
this case, the TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal is sent to the
MONO (C) bus.
For a channel that is set to ST/MONO mode, the signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus
can be switched on/off individually.
● Channels for which LCR mode is
selected
C
TO ST PAN knob
10 In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window,
5
Input channel operations
8 In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window,
Signal level
● Channels for which ST/MONO mode is
selected
Signal sent to the
STEREO (L) bus
L
use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning
of the signal sent from the input channel to
the STEREO bus and MONO (C) bus.
C
R
TO ST BALANCE knob
If the CSR knob is set to 100%, operating the INPUT
TO ST PAN knob will change the level of the signals
sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus as
shown in the following diagram.
Signal level
Signal sent to the
MONO (C) bus
Signal sent to the
STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the
STEREO (R) bus
L
C
PAN knob
R
M7CL Owner’s Manual
59
Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO buses
Operating the TO ST BALANCE knob of a ST IN
channel will change the level of the signals sent from
the ST IN L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and
MONO (C) bus as shown in the following diagram.
Signal level
Signal sent from the
ST IN (L) channel to
the MONO (C) bus
C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
Signal sent from the
ST IN (R) channel to
the MONO (C) bus
Signal level
L
Signal sent from the
ST IN (L) channel to
the STEREO (L) bus
L
60
Signal sent from the
ST IN (R) channel to
the STEREO (R) bus
C
TO ST BALANCE knob
M7CL Owner’s Manual
R
Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus
Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus
This section explains how to send the signal from an input channel to MIX buses 1–16.
MIX buses are used mainly for the purpose of sending signals to foldback speakers on stage, or
to effect processors. You can send a signal from an input channel to a MIX bus in the following
three ways.
■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
In this method, you use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MIX buses.
When using this method, the signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX buses can be adjusted simultaneously.
In this method, you use the multifunction encoders of the Centralogic section to adjust the send levels to the MIX buses.
When using this method, the signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX bus can be adjusted
simultaneously.
■ Using the faders of the top panel
In this method, you switch the M7CL to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the faders of the top panel to adjust the send
levels to the MIX buses. When using this method, the signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX bus can be
adjusted simultaneously.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL
section
Here’s how you can use the encoders of the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels of the signals
sent from a specific input channel to all MIX buses.
2
Input channel operations
5
■ Using the Centralogic section
1
3
4
1 Make sure that an output port is assigned
to each MIX bus to which you want to send
signals, and that your monitor system or
external effect processor etc. is connected
to the corresponding output port.
For details on assigning an output port to a MIX bus
refer to p. 95. For details on connecting an external
device, refer to p. 39.
2 Use the [SEL] keys of the top panel to
select the input channel that will send signals to the MIX buses.
3 Press any one of the encoders of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to access
the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will show
all the mix parameters of the corresponding input
channel. Adjustments of send levels to the MIX/
MATRIX buses is done in the TO MIX/TO MATRIX
field of this screen.
1 TO MIX/TO MATRIX field
In this field you can switch the on/off status and adjust
the level of the signal sent from the input channel to
the MIX buses / MATRIX buses.
B TO MIX/TO MATRIX buttons
These buttons select the send destination that is controlled by the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field. If the TO
MIX button is on, you are controlling the signals sent
to the MIX buses.
C TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob
Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input
channel to MIX bus. To adjust the send levels, use the
encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, the left
knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as a PAN
knob (for a ST IN channel, the BALANCE knob). If
the TO MIX SEND ON/OFF button (4) is off, the
knob will be dimmed.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
61
Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus
D TO MIX SEND ON/OFF button
This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the
input channel to MIX bus.
An indication of “PRE” in black characters on a white
background is shown above these buttons only if PRE
(pre-fader) is selected as the position from which the
signal is sent from the input channel. This indication is
not shown for POST (post-fader). (For details on how
to switch between PRE and POST → p. 64).
HINT
• If PRE is selected as the send position to a MIX bus, you will
further be able to select either PRE EQ (immediately before
the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader)
for each MIX bus (→ p. 212).
4 In the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field in the
screen, make sure that the TO MIX button is
turned on.
When the TO MIX button is on, the TO MIX/TO
MATRIX field shows the knobs and buttons for MIX
buses 1–16. If this button is off, press the button to
turn it on.
For an INPUT channel, the right knob will adjust the
common send level to the two MIX buses, and the left
knob will adjust the panning between the two MIX
buses. Turning the left TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob
toward the left will increase the amount of signal sent
to the odd-numbered MIX bus, and turning it toward
the right will increase the amount sent to the evennumbered MIX bus.
For a ST IN channel, the right knob adjusts the common send level for the two MIX buses, and the left
knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and right
signals sent to the two MIX buses. Turning the left TO
MIX SEND LEVEL knob toward the left will increase
the amount of signal sent from the L-channel to the
odd-numbered MIX bus, and turning it toward the
right will increase the amount sent from the R-channel
to the even-numbered MIX bus.
HINT
MIX buses can be either a FIXED type whose send
level is fixed, or a VARI type whose send level is variable. You can switch between FIXED and VARI types
for each two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered
MIX buses (for the procedure → p. 212).
If the send-destination MIX bus is a FIXED type, a O
symbol is displayed instead of the TO MIX SEND
LEVEL knob. In this case you won’t be able to adjust
the send level.
• If necessary, the TO MIX PAN/TO MIX BALANCE knob setting can be linked with operations of the TO ST PAN/TO ST
BALANCE knob shown in the STEREO/MONO field of the
OVERVIEW screen (→ p. 212).
5 Make sure that the TO MIX SEND ON/OFF
button is turned on for the send-destination
MIX bus.
If this button is off, press the button in the screen to
turn it on.
6 In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, use
the MIX SEND LEVEL knobs to adjust the
send levels to the MIX buses.
If the send-destination MIX bus is a VARI type, the
TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob is displayed in the same
color as the corresponding encoder of the SELECTED
CHANNEL section. In this case, you can use the corresponding encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL
section to adjust the send level.
HINT
• If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MIX
bus, use the navigation keys to access the corresponding MIX
channel, and press the appropriate [CUE] key in the Centralogic section.
7 You can use the top panel [SEL] keys to
switch input channels and control the send
level to all MIX buses in the same way.
If necessary, you can specify two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX buses as a stereo bus and
link the main parameters (→ p. 212).
If the send-destination MIX bus is assigned as stereo,
the left knob of the two adjacent TO MIX SEND
LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MIX PAN knob
(for a ST IN channel, it will operate as the TO MIX
BALANCE knob).
62
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus
Using the Centralogic section
Here’s how you can use the multifunction encoders of the
Centralogic section to adjust the send level of the signals
sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific
MIX bus.
3 Press the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob for the
desired send-destination MIX bus.
A bold frame will appear around all TO MIX SEND
LEVEL knobs for that MIX bus.
1 Make sure that an output port is assigned
For details on assigning an output port to a MIX bus
refer to p. 95. For details on connecting an external
device, refer to p. 39.
2 Use the navigation keys to access the
OVERVIEW screen that includes the input
channel you want to control.
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the TO MIX/
TO MATRIX field to adjust the send levels to the
MIX/MATRIX bus.
1
4 Use multifunction encoders 1–8 to adjust
the send level of the signals sent from the
up to eight input channels to the selected
MIX bus.
If necessary, you can use the navigation keys to switch
the input channels that are assigned to the Centralogic
section, and adjust the send levels from other input
channels to the selected MIX bus.
HINT
• If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MIX
bus, use the navigation keys to access the corresponding MIX
channel in the Centralogic section, and press the [CUE] key
for that MIX channel.
5
Input channel operations
to each MIX bus to which you want to send
signals, and that your monitor system or
external effect etc. is connected to the corresponding output port.
5 If you want to make detailed settings for
MIX sends, press the TO MIX SEND LEVEL
knob inside the bold frame once again.
2
When you press the currently selected TO MIX SEND
LEVEL knob once again, the MIX SEND popup window will appear. The window includes the following
items.
3
1 2
7 8
3
1 TO MIX/TO MATRIX field
In this field you can switch the on/off status and adjust
the level of the signal sent from the input channel to
the MIX buses / MATRIX buses. Use the TO MIX/TO
MATRIX buttons of the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen to switch the type of send destination
shown in this field (→ p. 82).
4
5
6
B TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob
1 SEND TO
This screen shows the send level of the signals sent
from the input channels to the MIX bus. These knobs
are shown only when the send-destination MIX bus is
a VARI type.
To adjust the send level, press the appropriate knob to
select it, and operate multifunction encoders 1–8. If
the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, the left
knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as a PAN
knob (for a ST IN channel, the BALANCE knob). If
the TO MIX SEND ON/OFF button is off, the knob
will be dimmed.
This indicates the number, channel name, and icon of
the MIX bus that is currently selected as the send-destination for signals.
C TO MIX SEND ON/OFF button
These are on/off switches for the signal sent from the
input channels to the MIX bus. These buttons are
shown only when the send-destination MIX bus is a
FIXED type.
B ←/→ buttons
Use these buttons to switch between send-destination
buses. You can switch consecutively through MIX
buses 1–16 and MATRIX buses 1–8.
C Channel select button
This indicates the channel number, the icon selected
for that channel, and the channel name. When you
press this button, that channel will be selected for
operations, and the corresponding [SEL] key will
light.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
63
Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus
D PRE button
This button switches the position at which the signal is
sent from the input channel to a VARI type MIX bus.
The signal is sent from the post-fader position when
this button is off, and from the pre-fader position when
this button is on.
E TO MIX SEND ON/OFF button
These are on/off switches for the signal sent from the
input channels to the MIX bus.
F TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob
This screen shows the send level of the signal sent
from the input channels to the MIX bus. To adjust the
level, operate multifunction encoders 1–8.
If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, the TO
MIX PAN knob (for a ST IN channel, the TO MIX
BALANCE knob) and TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob
are shown in this location.
G ALL PRE button
This button selects PRE as the position from which
signals are sent from all input channels to VARI-type
MIX buses.
H ALL POST button
This button selects POST as the position from which
signals are sent from all input channels to VARI-type
MIX buses.
6 Use the TO MIX SEND ON/OFF buttons to
switch the signals sent from the input channels to the currently selected MIX bus on/
off.
Using the faders (SENDS ON
FADER mode)
Here’s how you can use the faders of the top panel to
adjust the signal that is sent from all input channels to a
specific MIX bus.
1 Make sure that an output port is assigned
to each MIX bus to which you want to send
signals, and that your monitor system or
external effect etc. is connected to the corresponding output port.
For details on assigning an output port to a MIX bus
refer to p. 95. For details on connecting an external
device, refer to p. 39.
2 In the function access area, press the
SENDS ON FADER button.
The M7CL will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode.
The most recently selected group of MIX buses will be
assigned to the Centralogic section. The faders of the
INPUT section and ST IN section will move to the
send level values of each channel for the currently
selected MIX bus.
In SENDS ON FADER mode, the function access area
in the display will show buttons for selecting the senddestination MIX bus.
7 If necessary, use the PRE buttons to select
the location of the signal that is sent from
each input channel to a VARI type MIX bus.
1
HINT
• If the PRE button is on, you can also select PRE EQ (immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately
before the fader) for each MIX bus. This setting is made in the
BUS SETUP popup window (→ p. 212).
• The PRE button is not shown for FIXED type MIX buses.
8 Repeat steps 3–6 to adjust the send level
for other MIX buses in the same way.
1 MIX bus selection buttons
These buttons select the send-destination MIX bus.
The buttons will be joined if two MIX buses are set to
stereo.
3 Use the MIX bus selection buttons in the
function access area to select the senddestination MIX bus.
HINT
• You can also select a MIX bus by using the navigation keys
and the [SEL] keys of the Centralogic section.
• If you once again press the MIX button selection button that is
currently selected, cue monitoring will be turned on for the
corresponding MIX channel. This method is convenient when
you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to the
selected MIX bus.
64
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus
tion or ST IN section to adjust the send
level from the input channels to the
selected MIX bus.
HINT
• You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a userdefined key. This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON
FADER mode for a specific MIX bus, and quickly switch back
again.
5 Repeat steps 3–4 to adjust the send level
for other MIX buses in the same way.
6 When you’re finished adjusting the MIX
send levels, press the “×” symbol in the
function access area.
The function access area display will return to its prior
state, and the M7CL will exit SENDS ON FADER
mode and return to normal mode.
5
Input channel operations
4 Use the faders of the top panel INPUT sec-
M7CL Owner’s Manual
65
Sending the signal from an input channel to the MATRIX buses
Sending the signal from an input channel to the MATRIX buses
This section explains how to send the signal from an input channel to MATRIX buses 1–8. The
MATRIX buses are used to produce a mix that is independent of the STEREO bus or MIX buses,
mainly for sending to a master recorder or to the monitor system for the musicians.
You can send a signal from an input channel to the MATRIX buses in the following two ways.
■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
In this method, you use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses.
When using this method, the signals sent from a specific input channel to all MATRIX buses can be adjusted simultaneously.
■ Using the Centralogic section
In this method, you use the multifunction encoders of the Centralogic section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX
buses. When using this method, the signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MATRIX bus can be
adjusted simultaneously.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL
section
Here’s how you can use the encoders of the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels of the signals
sent from a specific input channel to all MATRIX buses.
1 Make sure that an output port is assigned
to the MATRIX bus to which you want to
send signals, and that your external device
is connected to the corresponding output
port.
For details on assigning an output port to a MATRIX
bus refer to p. 95. For details on connecting an external device, refer to p. 39.
2 Use the [SEL] keys of the top panel to
select the input channel that will send signals to the MATRIX buses.
3 Press any one of the encoders of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to access
the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
Adjustments of send levels from the input channel to
the MIX buses / MATRIX buses is done in the TO
MIX/TO MATRIX field of this screen.
2
1
3
4
1 TO MIX/TO MATRIX field
In this field you can switch the on/off status and adjust
the level of the signal sent from the input channel to
the MIX buses / MATRIX buses.
B TO MIX/TO MATRIX buttons
These buttons select the send destination that is controlled by the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field. If the TO
MATRIX button is on, you can control the signal sent
to the MATRIX bus.
C TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob
Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input
channel to MATRIX bus. To adjust the send levels, use
the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,
the left knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as
a PAN knob (for a ST IN channel, the BALANCE
knob).
D TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button
This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the
input channel to MATRIX bus.
An indication of “PRE” in black characters on a white
background is shown above these buttons only if PRE
(pre-fader) is selected as the position from which the
signal is sent from the input channel. This indication is
not shown for POST (post-fader). (For details on how
to switch between PRE and POST → p. 77).
4 In the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field in the
screen, make sure that the TO MATRIX button is turned on.
When the TO MATRIX button is on, the TO MIX/TO
MATRIX field shows the knobs and buttons for
MATRIX buses 1–8. If this button is off, press the button to turn it on.
If necessary, you can specify two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MATRIX buses as a stereo bus
and link the main parameters (→ p. 212).
66
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Sending the signal from an input channel to the MATRIX buses
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is assigned as
stereo, the left knob of the two adjacent TO MATRIX
SEND LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MATRIX
PAN knob (for a ST IN channel, it will operate as the
TO MATRIX BALANCE knob).
Using the Centralogic section
Here’s how you can use the multifunction encoders of the
Centralogic section to adjust the send level of the signals
sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific
MATRIX bus.
1 Make sure that an output port is assigned
HINT
For details on assigning an output port to a MATRIX
bus refer to p. 95. For details on connecting an external device, refer to p. 39.
2 Use the navigation keys to access the
OVERVIEW screen that includes the input
channel you want to control.
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the TO MIX/
TO MATRIX field to adjust the send levels to the
MIX/MATRIX bus.
1
5
Input channel operations
For an INPUT channel, the right knob will adjust the
common send level to the two MATRIX buses, and the
left knob will adjust the panning between the two
MATRIX buses. Turning the left TO MATRIX SEND
LEVEL knob toward the left will increase the amount
of signal sent to the odd-numbered MATRIX bus, and
turning it toward the right will increase the amount
sent to the even-numbered MATRIX bus.
For a ST IN channel, the right knob adjusts the common send level for the two MATRIX buses, and the
left knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and
right signals sent to the two MATRIX buses. Turning
the left TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob toward the
left will increase the amount of signal sent from the Lchannel to the odd-numbered MATRIX bus, and turning it toward the right will increase the amount sent
from the R-channel to the even-numbered MATRIX
bus.
to each MATRIX bus to which you want to
send signals, and that your monitor system
or external effect etc. is connected to the
corresponding output port.
2
• If necessary, the TO MATRIX PAN/TO MATRIX BALANCE
knob setting can be linked with operations of the TO ST PAN/
TO ST BALANCE knob shown in the STEREO/MONO field of
the OVERVIEW screen (→ p. 212).
5 Make sure that the TO MATRIX SEND ON/
OFF button is turned on for the send-destination MATRIX bus.
If this button is off, press the button in the screen to
turn it on.
6 In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, use
the MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs to adjust
the send levels to the MATRIX buses.
HINT
• If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific
MATRIX bus, use the navigation keys to access the corresponding MATRIX channel, and press the appropriate [CUE]
key in the Centralogic section.
7 You can use the top panel [SEL] keys to
switch input channels and control the send
level to the MATRIX buses in the same way.
1 TO MIX/TO MATRIX field
In this field you can switch the on/off status and adjust
the level of the signal sent from the input channel to
the MIX buses / MATRIX buses. Use the TO MIX/TO
MATRIX buttons of the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen to switch the type of send destination
shown in this field (→ p. 82).
B TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob
This screen shows the send level of the signal sent
from the input channels to the MATRIX bus.
To adjust the send level, press the appropriate knob to
select it, and operate multifunction encoders 1–8. If
the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, the
left one of the two adjacent knobs will be linked as the
TO MATRIX PAN knob.
3 Press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob for
the desired send-destination MATRIX bus.
A bold frame will appear around all TO MATRIX
SEND LEVEL knobs for that MATRIX bus.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
67
Sending the signal from an input channel to the MATRIX buses
4 Use multifunction encoders 1–8 to adjust
the send level of the signals sent from the
up to eight input channels to the selected
MATRIX bus.
If necessary, you can use the navigation keys to switch
the input channels that are assigned to the Centralogic
section, and adjust the send levels from other input
channels to the selected MATRIX bus.
HINT
• If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific
MATRIX bus, use the navigation keys to access the corresponding MATRIX channel in the Centralogic section, and
press the [CUE] key for that MATRIX channel.
5 If you want to make detailed settings for
MATRIX sends, press the TO MATRIX SEND
LEVEL knob inside the bold frame once
again.
When you press the currently selected TO MATRIX
SEND LEVEL knob once again, the MATRIX SEND
popup window will appear. The window includes the
following items.
1 2
7 8
3
4
5
6
1 SEND TO
This indicates the number, channel name, and icon of
the MATRIX bus that is currently selected as the senddestination for signals.
B ←/→ buttons
Use these buttons to switch between send-destination
buses. You can switch consecutively through MIX
buses 1–16 and MATRIX buses 1–8.
C Channel select button
This indicates the channel number, the icon selected
for that channel, and the channel name. When you
press this button, that channel will be selected for
operations, and the corresponding [SEL] key will
light.
D PRE button
This button selects the location from which the signal
of the input channel will be sent to the MATRIX bus.
The signal will be sent from POST (Immediately after
the [ON] key) if this button is off. The signal will be
sent from the PRE EQ (Immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (Immediately before the fader)
as specified in the BUS SETUP popup window if this
button is on.
E TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button
These are on/off switches for the signal sent from the
input channels to the MATRIX bus.
68
M7CL Owner’s Manual
F TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob
This screen shows the send level of the signal sent
from the input channels to the MATRIX bus. To adjust
the level, operate multifunction encoders 1–8.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,
the TO MATRIX PAN knob (for a ST IN channel, the
TO MATRIX BALANCE knob) and TO MATRIX
SEND LEVEL knob are shown in this location.
G ALL PRE button
This button selects PRE as the position from which
signals are sent from all input channels to VARI-type
MIX buses.
H ALL POST button
This button selects POST as the position from which
signals are sent from all input channels to VARI-type
MIX buses.
6 Use the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF buttons
to switch the signals sent from the input
channels to the currently selected MATRIX
bus on/off.
7 If necessary, use the PRE buttons to select
the location of the signal that is sent from
each input channel to a VARI type MATRIX
bus.
8 Repeat steps 3–6 to adjust the send level
for other MATRIX buses in the same way.
Chapter 6
Output channel operations
This chapter explains operations for output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX
channels, STEREO channel, MONO channel).
Signal flow for output channels
■ MIX channels 1–16
These channels process the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them to the corresponding output
port, MATRIX bus, STEREO bus, or MONO (C) bus. When the M7CL is in the default state, the following output ports are
assigned.
MIX channels 1–12
OMNI OUT jacks 1–12
MIX channels 1–8
Slot 1 output channels 1–8, 9–16
MIX channels 9–16
Slot 2 output channels 1–8, 9–16
6
Output channel operations
The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various buses,
processes them with EQ and dynamics, and sends them to output ports or other buses. The following types of output channel are provided.
M
O
MIX
1 2 ··· 1516
N
ST O
MATRIX CUE
L R (C) 1 2 ··· 7 8
L R
MIX 1-16
To RACKIN PATCH
INSERT POINT
To OUTPUT PATCH
MIX
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
INSERT OUT 1-16
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
MIX
INSERT IN 1-16
EQ OUT
PRE EQ
DYNA OUT
METER
METER
METER
GR METER
INSERT
ATT
4 BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
CUE ON
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
POST ON
METER
PRE FADER
METER
LEVEL
ON
INSERT
MIX OUT1-16
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT PRE FADER
Keyin
Self PRE EQ / Self POST EQ / MIX13-16 OUT/
MIX(1-8,9-16)POST EQ
(13-16)To KEYIN
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
POST ON
(PRE FADER) PFL / (POST ON) AFL
MATRIX1,3...7
MATRIX2,4...8
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
PAN
ON
ST L
MONO (C)
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
STEREO
PAN MODE TO ST TO MONO
TO LCR
PAN
LR MONO
LCR
POST ON
ST R
CSR
■ STEREO channel / MONO (C) channel
Each of these channels process the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus or MONO (C) bus, and send it to
the corresponding output port or MATRIX bus. If input channels are in LCR mode, the STEREO (L/R) channels and the
MONO (C) channel can be used together as a set of three output channels. When the M7CL is in the default state, the following output ports are assigned.
STEREO channel (L/R)
OMNI OUT jacks 15/16,
2TR OUT DIGITAL jack (L/R)
M7CL Owner’s Manual
69
Signal flow for output channels
M
O
MIX
1 2 ··· 1516
N
ST O
MATRIX CUE
L R (C) 1 2 ··· 7 8
L R
STEREO L,R,MONO(C)
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PACH STEREO INSERT POIN
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
INSERT OUT L,R,MONO (C)
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
STEREO
INSERT IN L,R,MONO (C)
PRE EQ
EQ OUT
INSERT
ATT
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
POST ON
METER
PRE FADER
METER
DYNA OUT
METER
METER
GR METER
METER
LEVEL
BAL
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO (C)
ON
INSERT
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT PRE FADER
Keyin
Self PRE EQ / Self POST EQ / MIX13-16 OUT /
ST (L,R,MONO (C)) POST EQ
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
POST ON
CUE ON
(PRE FADER) PFL / (POST ON) AFL
LEVEL
MATRIX1,3...7
MATRIX2,4...8
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
PAN
ON
PRE FADER / POST ON To MATRIX
VARI
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
STEREO
■ MATRIX channels 1–8
These channels process the signals sent from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses, and send
them to the corresponding output ports. When the M7CL is in the default state, the following output ports are assigned.
MATRIX channels 1–8
Slot 3 output channels 1–8, 9–16
MATRIX channels 1/2
OMNI OUT jacks 13/14
M
O
MIX
1 2 ··· 1516
N
ST O
MATRIX CUE
L R (C) 1 2 ··· 7 8
L R
MATRIX 1-8
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH MATRIX
INSERT OUT 1-8
MATRIX
INSERT IN 1-8
INSERT POINT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
EQ OUT
DYNA OUT
METER
METER
GR METER
PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
ATT
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
CUE ON
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
PRE FADER
METER
LEVEL
POST ON
METER
ON
INSERT
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
Keyin
Self PRE EQ / Self POST EQ / MIX13-16 OUT/
MATRIX1-8 POST EQ
MATRIX OUT 1-8
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
POST ON
(PRE FADER) PFL / (POST ON) AFL
● ATT (Attenuator)
Attenuates/boosts the level of the signal.
● 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
A parametric EQ with four bands; HIGH, HIGH MID,
LOW MID, and LOW.
● DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or expander.
● INSERT
This adjusts the output level of the channel.
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an
external device such as an effect processor. You can switch
the insert-out and insert-in locations.
● BALANCE (STEREO channel only)
● METER
● LEVEL
Adjusts the left/right volume balance of the STEREO (L/
R) channel.
This meters the level of the output channel. You can
switch the position at which the level is detected.
● ON (On/off)
● KEY IN (MIX channels 13–16 only)
Turns the output channel on/off. If off, that channel is
muted.
● MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
You can send the output signals of MIX channels 13–16 to
dynamics processors and use them as key-in signals to
control the dynamics.
This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the MIX
channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel
to each MATRIX bus 1–8.
● RACK IN PATCH
● MATRIX 1-8 (MATRIX send levels 1–8)
● OUTPUT PATCH
This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the MIX
channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel
to each MATRIX bus 1–8. As the position from which the
signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose either
immediately before the four-band EQ, immediately before
the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.
70
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, you
can use the PAN knob to adjust the panning between the
two MATRIX buses. If the send-source is a stereo MIX
channel or the STEREO channel, use the BALANCE
knob to adjust the volume balance of the left and right
channels sent to the two MATRIX buses.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
This patches the output signal of a MIX channel to an
input of the rack.
This assigns an output port to an output channel.
● MONITOR SELECT
This selects the output signal of an output channel as a
monitor source.
Specifying the channel name and icon
Specifying the channel name and icon
This section explains how to specify the name and icon that will be displayed in the screen for
each output channel.
1 Use the navigation keys to access the
OVERVIEW screen that includes the output
channel whose channel name and icon you
want to specify.
3 To select the icon for the channel, press the
icon button.
The lower part of the popup window will change as
follows.
1
1
2
1 Icon select buttons
These buttons select the icon used for this channel.
1 Channel number / Channel name field
2 Access the PATCH/NAME popup window by
pressing the channel number / channel
name field of the channel whose channel
name / icon you want to assign.
4 Use the icon select buttons to select the
icon you want to use for that channel.
2
1
B Sample name select buttons
These buttons select a sample name associated with
the currently selected icon. When you press a button,
that sample name will be input to the channel name
field.
Output channel operations
6
3
The selected icon is shown in the icon button in the
upper part of the window.
5 If necessary, use the sample name select
buttons to select a sample name.
The sample name you selected will be input to the
channel name field in the upper part of the window.
HINT
4
The popup window includes the following items.
1 Icon button
• You can add or edit characters in the channel name field even
after you’ve entered the sample name. If you want to assign
consecutively numbered channel names such as “Chorus 1”
and “Chorus 2,” this can be easily done by entering the sample name and then adding a number.
This indicates the icon selected for that channel. When
you press this button, a screen will appear in which
you can select an icon or sample name.
B Channel name input box
This indicates the name assigned to that channel.
When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear.
C Output port button
This indicates the currently selected output port. If you
press this button when selecting an icon or changing
the channel name, you will return to the output port
select screen.
D Tabs
These tabs select the items shown in the lower part of
the screen.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
71
Specifying the channel name and icon • Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus
6 If you want to enter a channel name directly
(or edit the sample name that was entered),
press the channel name field in the upper
part of the window.
The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of
the window, allowing you to enter or edit the characters. For details on how to use the keyboard window,
refer to p. 30.
7 Use the [SEL] keys of the Centralogic sec-
tion to switch output channels, and specify
the icon or channel name for other channels in the same way.
When the PATCH / NAME popup window is shown,
you can use the [SEL] keys of the Centralogic section
to switch channels within the currently selected eight
channels.
If you want to operate output channels other than those
in the currently selected eight channels, use the navigation keys → Centralogic section [SEL] keys to
select the desired channel.
8 When you’re finished with your input, press
the “×” symbol in the upper right of the window.
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus
This section explains how to send the signal of a MIX channel to the STEREO bus or MONO
bus.
There are two ways to send signals from a MIX channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus; ST/
MONO mode and LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. These
modes differ in the following ways.
■ ST/MONO mode
This mode sends the signal from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently.
• The signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/off individually.
• The panning of the signal sent from a monaural MIX channel to the STEREO bus L/R is controlled by the TO ST PAN
knob. (The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob.)
• The left/right volume balance of the signal sent from a stereo MIX channel to the STEREO bus is controlled by the
BALANCE knob. (The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob.)
■ LCR mode
This mode sends the signal of the MIX channel to a total of three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C)) together.
• The signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus will be switched on/off as a whole.
• The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob specifies the level ratio between the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
• The TO ST PAN knob / BALANCE knob specifies the level of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R)
bus and MONO (C) bus.
HINT
• If you want to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones etc., you should press
the MONITOR button in the function access area to select “LCR” as the monitor source before you continue with
the following procedure (→ p. 142).
72
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus
1 Use the navigation keys to access the
OVERVIEW screen that includes the MIX
channel you want to send to the STEREO/
MONO bus.
C STEREO/MONO buttons
These buttons are individual on/off switches for the
signal that is sent from each channel to the STEREO
bus / MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/
MONO mode.
1
1 STEREO/MONO field
2 In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to
select the MIX channel you want to adjust,
and then press the knob once again to
access the TO STEREO/MONO popup window.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window you can
control the signal that is sent from the MIX channel to
the STEREO/MONO bus. You can view this popup
window as two types, 8ch and ALL; use the tabs below
the window to switch between them. These windows
include the following items.
[TO STEREO/MONO popup window (8 ch)]
1
2
3
4
6
Output channel operations
D TO ST PAN/BALANCE knob
For monaural MIX channels, this acts as the PAN
knob that adjusts the left/right panning of the signal
sent to the STEREO bus.
For stereo MIX channels, this acts as the BALANCE
knob that adjusts the volume. To adjust the value,
press the knob to select it, and operate the corresponding multifunction encoder.
If the MODE button is set to LCR mode, the following
button and knob are displayed instead of the STEREO/
MONO button (3).
5
6
E LCR button
This button is an overall on/off switch for the signals
sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus
and MONO (C) bus. If this button is off, no signals
will be sent from the corresponding MIX channel to
the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
F CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob
This knob adjusts the relative level of the signals sent
from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the
MONO (C) bus, in a range of 0–100%. To adjust the
value, press the knob to select it, and operate the corresponding multifunction encoder.
[TO STEREO/MONO popup window (ALL)]
Here you can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of the signal sent from MIX channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight
channels.
1 Channel select button
This shows the icon, channel number, and channel
name for the channel. When you press this button, that
channel will be selected for operations, and the corresponding [SEL] key of the Centralogic section will
light.
B MODE button
This button selects either ST/MONO mode or LCR
mode as the way in which the signal will be sent to the
STEREO bus or MONO bus. This mode can be specified individually for each channel.
The two modes will alternate each time you press the
button. An indicator (ST/MONO or LCR) immediately
above the button will light to indicate the currently
selected mode.
This shows the status of the signals sent from all MIX
channels to the STEREO bus / MONO bus, and
adjusts the pan or balance for the eight selected channels.
For MATRIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels, only the channel number, icon, and channel name
are shown.
13
3
2
M7CL Owner’s Manual
73
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus
1 Channel select button
This indicates the channel number, the icon selected
for that channel, and the channel name. When you
press this button, that channel will be selected for
operations, and the corresponding [SEL] key will
light.
B TO ST PAN/BALANCE knob
For monaural MIX channels, this acts as the PAN
knob that adjusts the left/right panning of the signal
sent to the STEREO bus. For stereo MIX channels,
this acts as the BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume.
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and
operate the corresponding multifunction encoder.
If the signal reaches the overload point at any meter
detection point in that channel, the indicator at the
right of the knob will light.
C ST/MONO indicator
If a MIX channel is set to ST/MONO mode, this individually indicates the on/off status of the signal sent
from the channel to the STEREO bus / MONO bus.
If a channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator is
displayed in this location. The LCR indicator indicates
the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to
the STEREO bus and MONO bus.
3 Access the eight-channel TO STEREO/
MONO popup window.
4
Use the MODE button to select either ST/
MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.
5 In the STEREO / MONO MASTER section of
the top panel, make sure that the [ON] key
of the STEREO channel / MONO channel is
turned on, and raise the fader to an appropriate position.
6 Press the [MIX 1-8] key or [MIX 9-16] key so
that the MIX channels you want to control
are recalled to the Centralogic section.
7 Make sure that the [ON] key of that channel
is on, and use the fader in the Centralogic
section to raise the master level of the MIX
channel to an appropriate position.
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether
ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the
channel in step 5.
● Channels for which ST/MONO mode is
selected
8 In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window,
use the STEREO/MONO button to turn the
signal sent from the MIX channel to the
STEREO bus / MONO bus on or off.
For a channel that is set to ST/MONO mode, the signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus
can be switched on/off individually.
9 In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window,
press the TO ST PAN knob to select it, and
use multifunction encoders 1–8 to adjust
the pan of the signal sent from the MIX
channels to the STEREO bus.
● Channels for which LCR mode is
selected
8 Make sure that the LCR button is turned on
in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window.
Channels for which the LCR button is off will not send
any signal to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
9 In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window,
press the CSR knob to select it, and use
multifunction encoders 1–8 to adjust the
level difference between the signals sent
from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus
and to the MONO (C) bus.
The CSR knob settings are the same as for input channels. (For details, refer to → p. 59)
10 In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window,
press the TO ST PAN knob to select it, and
use multifunction encoders 1–8 to adjust
the panning of the signals sent from the
MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and
the balance of the signals sent to the
MONO (C) bus and STEREO (L/R) bus.
Refer to page 59 for details on how the signal level
sent from an LCR mode MIX channel to each bus will
change according to the operation of the TO ST PAN
knob.
74
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses
This section explains how to send the signal from a MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to MATRIX
buses 1–8. You can do this in either of the following two ways.
■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
In this method, you use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses.
This method allows you to simultaneously control the signals sent from a specific MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C)
channel to all MATRIX buses.
■ Using the Centralogic section
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL
section
6
Output channel operations
In this method, you use the multifunction encoders of the Centralogic section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX
buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control the signals sent from up to eight MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO
(C) channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
2 1
3
Use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section
to adjust the send level of the signals sent from the desired
MIX, STEREO (L/R) or MONO (C) channel to all
MATRIX buses.
1 Make sure that an output port is assigned
to the MATRIX bus to which you want to
send signals, and that an external device is
connected.
For details on assigning an output port to a MATRIX
bus refer to p. 95. For details on connecting an external device, refer to p. 39.
2 Using the navigation keys, assign the
desired MIX channels 1–8 or 9–16 or the
STEREO/MONO channels to the Centralogic section.
3 Use the [SEL] keys of the Centralogic section to select the input channel that will
send signals to the MATRIX buses.
The STEREO/MONO channels can also be selected
directly by using the [SEL] keys of the STEREO/
MONO MASTER section.
4 Press any one of the encoders of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to access
the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will show
all the mix parameters of the corresponding channel.
Adjustments of send levels to the MATRIX buses is
done in the TO MATRIX field of this screen.
1 TO MATRIX field
In this field you can switch the on/off status and adjust
the level of the signal sent from that channel to the
MATRIX buses.
B TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob
This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from that
channel to the MATRIX buses. To adjust the send levels, use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL
section.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,
the left knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as
a PAN knob (for the STEREO channel or a stereo
MIX channel, the BALANCE knob). If the TO
MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button (3) is off, the knob
will be dimmed.
C TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button
Functions as an on/off switch for the signal sent from
that channel to the MATRIX bus.
An indication of “PRE” in black characters on a white
background is shown above these buttons only if the
signal send position is PRE (pre-fader). This indication is not shown for POST (post-fader). (For details
on how to switch between PRE and POST → p. 77).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
75
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses
HINT
• If PRE is selected as the position from which the signal is
sent to a MATRIX bus, the signal will be sent from the
pre-fader position regardless of the setting in the BUS
SETUP screen.
5 Make sure that the TO MATRIX SEND ON/
OFF button is turned on for the send-destination MATRIX bus.
Using the Centralogic section
This method lets you use the multifunction encoders to
simultaneously adjust the send levels from the eight channels selected in the Centralogic section to the desired
MATRIX bus.
1 Make sure that an output port is assigned
to the MATRIX bus to which you want to
send signals, and that your external device
is connected to the corresponding output
port.
If this button is off, press the button in the screen to
turn it on.
6 In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, use
For details on assigning an output port to a MATRIX
bus refer to p. 95. For details on connecting an external device, refer to p. 39.
the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs to
adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses.
HINT
2 Use the navigation keys to access the
OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel (MIX channels 1–8, 9–16, or STEREO/
MONO channels) that you want to control.
• If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific
MATRIX bus, use the navigation keys to access the corresponding MATRIX channel, and press the appropriate [CUE]
key in the Centralogic section.
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the TO
MATRIX field to adjust the send levels to the
MATRIX bus.
7 Use the navigation keys and the [SEL] keys
of the Centralogic section to switch channels, and adjust the send level from other
channels to the MATRIX buses in the same
way.
1
2
1 TO MATRIX field
This field specifies the send level of the signal sent
from the MIX and STEREO/MONO channels to the
MATRIX bus.
B TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob
This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the
MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to the MATRIX
buses.
To adjust the send level, press the appropriate knob to
select it, and operate multifunction encoders 1–8. If
the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, the
left knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as a
PAN knob (for stereo MIX channels or for the STEREO channel, the BALANCE knob).
3 Press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob for
the desired send-destination MATRIX bus.
A bold frame will appear around all TO MATRIX
SEND LEVEL knobs for that MATRIX bus.
76
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses
the send level of the signals sent from up to
eight MIX channels or the STEREO/MONO
channels to the selected MATRIX bus.
If necessary, you can use the navigation keys and the
[SEL] keys of the Centralogic section to switch the
send-destination channel.
HINT
• If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific
MATRIX bus, use the navigation keys to access the corresponding MATRIX channel in the Centralogic section, and
press the [CUE] key for that MATRIX channel.
5 If you want to make detailed settings for
MATRIX sends, press the TO MATRIX SEND
LEVEL knob inside the bold frame once
again.
When you press the currently selected TO MATRIX
SEND LEVEL knob once again, the MATRIX SEND
popup window will appear. The window includes the
following items.
1
2 7 8
3
4
5
F TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob
This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the
MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to the MATRIX
bus. To adjust the level, operate multifunction encoders 1–8.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,
the TO MATRIX PAN knob (for a stereo MIX channel
or the STEREO channel, the TO MATRIX BALANCE knob) and TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob
are shown in this location.
G ALL PRE button
This button sets PRE as the position from which the
signal is sent from all channels to the MATRIX bus.
H ALL POST button
This button sets POST as the position from which the
signal is sent from all channels to the MATRIX bus.
6 Use the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF buttons
to switch the signals sent from the MIX and
STEREO/MONO channels to the currently
selected MATRIX bus on/off.
7 If necessary, you can use the PRE button to
select the location from which the signal is
sent from each channel to the MATRIX bus.
8 Repeat steps 3–6 to adjust the send level
6
Output channel operations
4 Use multifunction encoders 1–8 to adjust
for other MATRIX buses in the same way.
6
1 SEND TO
This indicates the number, channel name, and icon of
the MATRIX bus that is currently selected as the senddestination for signals.
B ←/→ buttons
Use these buttons to switch between send-destination
MATRIX buses.
C Channel select button
This indicates the channel number, the icon selected
for that channel, and the channel name. When you
press this button, that channel will be selected for
operations, and the corresponding [SEL] key will
light.
D PRE button
This button selects the location from which the signal
of the MIX or STEREO/MONO channel will be sent
to the MATRIX bus. The signal is sent from the postfader position when this button is off, and from the
pre-fader position when this button is on.
E TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button
This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the
MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to the MATRIX
bus.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
77
78
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 7
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
This chapter explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section
and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to control the selected channel.
About the SELECTED CHANNEL section
7
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the left of the display corresponds to a mixer module of a conventional analog mixer, and allows you to manually adjust all the major parameters of
the currently selected channel.
Operations in this section will affect the channel that was most recently selected by its [SEL] key.
For a ST IN channel or STEREO channel, either the L or the R channel is selected, and the
major parameters are linked.
You can use the encoders on the panel to control mix parameters such as head amp gain, HPF/
EQ settings, the threshold setting of the dynamics processors, pan/balance settings, and send
levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses.
SELECTED CHANNEL section
M7CL Owner’s Manual
79
About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
When you press one of the encoders in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen will appear in the touch screen. The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen shows most of the parameters of the channel currently selected by its [SEL] key. This
screen lets you check the settings being controlled by the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen contains the following items.
1
7 23 4
5
6
J
K
C PATCH field (output channels only)
For output channels, the PATCH field is shown in the (2)
area. This field indicates the output port that is patched to
the output channel. If two or more output ports are
patched, only will be shown as a representative.
L
D TO ST PAN/BALANCE field
I
8
M
N O
1 TO MIX/TO MATRIX field
• When an input channel is selected
...........Here you can switch the on/off status of
the signals sent from that channel to
each MIX bus and MATRIX bus, and
view the send levels. By switching
between the TO MIX and TO MATRIX
buttons you can switch the buses that
are shown in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or OVERVIEW
screen.
• When a MIX, STEREO, or MONO channel is selected
...........Here you can switch the on/off status of
the signals sent from that channel to
each MATRIX bus, and view the send
levels.
• When a MATRIX channel is selected
...........Here you can switch the on/off status of
the signals sent from each channel to
that MATRIX bus, and view the send
levels.
B HA field (input channels only)
This field shows the input port patched to the input channel, the head amp gain, the phantom power on/off status,
the phase setting, and the input level OVER indicator.
80
M7CL Owner’s Manual
• When an INPUT channel or monaural MIX channel
is selected
........... This functions as an on/off switch for the
signal sent from that channel to the
STEREO/MONO bus. The panning of
the signal sent to the STEREO bus is
also shown.
• When a ST IN channel or a stereo MIX channel is
selected
........... This functions as an on/off switch for the
signal sent from that channel to the
STEREO/MONO bus. This also shows
the balance of the left/right signals sent
from that channel to the STEREO bus.
• When a stereo MATRIX channel is selected
........... This shows the balance of the left/right
signals sent from the MATRIX channel.
• When a STEREO channel is selected
........... This shows the balance of the left/right
signals sent from the STEREO channel.
E DYNAMICS 1 field
F DYNAMICS 2 field (input channels only)
This shows the Dynamics 1/2 parameters. This also
accesses a popup window where you can edit detailed
dynamics parameters that cannot be edited in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section.
G HPF field (input channels only)
These controls switch the HPF (high-pass filter) on/off,
and adjust its cutoff frequency.
H EQ field
Here you can switch the four-band EQ on/off, and view its
parameters.
About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen • Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
I EQ graph field
This shows the response of the EQ/HPF.
J INSERT field (INPUT, MIX, MATRIX, STEREO,
M FADER field
Here you can view the input/output level of the channel,
and switch it on/off.
and MONO channels only)
The signal route for insertion in the channel can be
switched on/off here.
N DCA field (input channels only)
Here you can select the DCA group to which that channel
is assigned.
K DIRECT OUT field (INPUT channels only)
This is an on/off switch for the signal that is directly output from the channel. The output level is also shown here.
O MUTE field
Here you can select the mute group to which that channel
is assigned.
L RECALL SAFE field
Switches the Recall Safe status on/off for that channel. If
only some of the channel parameters are set to Recall
Safe, the PARTIAL indicator will light.
This section explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control all of the
parameters for a specific channel.
1 Use a [SEL] key to select the channel you
want to control.
The SELECTED CHANNEL section controls the
channel that was last selected by its [SEL] key.
To select an INPUT, ST IN, STEREO, or MONO
channel, press the appropriate [SEL] key in the INPUT
section, ST IN section, or STEREO/MONO MASTER
section of the top panel.
To select a MIX or MATRIX channel, use the navigation keys to recall the desired channel to the Centralogic section, and then press the [SEL] key for the
desired channel.
The number and name of the currently selected channel is shown in the channel select field located in the
function access area of the touch screen.
Channel number
Channel name
HINT
• In addition, you can make settings in the PREFERENCE
screen so that you can access detailed parameters that cannot be edited in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. (For
details, refer to p. 198).
Even if a different screen is selected, the knobs of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section always affect the currently selected channel. In this case, a window indicating the value of that parameter will appear in the
screen when you operate a knob.
7
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
HINT
• In the case of ST IN channels or STEREO channels, you can
switch between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same
[SEL] key.
• You can also switch channels by pressing the channel select
field located in the function access area. Pressing the left side
will select the preceding channel, and pressing the right side
will select the next channel.
2 Press any one of the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section.
When you press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen for the currently selected channel will appear. If
you leave this screen displayed, you will always be
able to view the settings in the screen while operating
an encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
3 Use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the buttons in the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to edit
the parameters of the selected channel.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
81
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Subsequent operations will differ depending on the
parameters you want to adjust.
● Adjusting the send level to a MIX bus or
MATRIX bus
Use the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field when you want to
send the signal from an INPUT/ST IN channel to a MIX
bus, or from an INPUT, ST IN, MIX, or STEREO channel
to a MATRIX bus.
1
2
3
To adjust the send level to MIX buses or MATRIX buses,
first use the TO MIX / TO MATRIX buttons to select the
buses to which you want to send the signal (only for input
channels).
Next, use the corresponding [MIX/MATRIX] encoders of
the SELECTED CHANNEL section (color-coded in the
screen) to adjust the send levels of the signal sent to each
bus.
If desired, you can use the TO MIX/TO MATRIX SEND
ON/OFF buttons to switch the signal sent to each bus on/
off. Above each of these buttons is shown the position
from which the signal is sent from the current channel.
(For details on changing the send position → p. 64).
● Adjusting the send level from the MIX
channels to a specific MATRIX bus
To adjust the send level from the MIX channels to a specific MATRIX bus, first select the send-destination
MATRIX channel, and then access the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen. If you have selected a
MATRIX channel, the FROM MIX field is shown at the
left edge of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
This field includes the following items.
1
2
1 TO MIX/TO MATRIX buttons
(Input channels only)
These buttons select the buses that will be controlled.
This field will show the MIX buses if the TO MIX button is on, or the MATRIX buses if the TO MATRIX
button is on.
B TO MIX/TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs
These knobs indicate the send level of the signal sent
from that input channel to each MIX bus or MATRIX
bus. To adjust the values, use the corresponding [MIX/
MATRIX] encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL
section.
If the send-destination MIX bus / MATRIX bus is set
to stereo, the left knob of the two adjacent knobs will
operate as a PAN knob. (For a ST IN channel, a stereo
MIX channel, or STEREO channel, it will operate as
the BALANCE knob.) When you press this knob, the
corresponding MIX/MATRIX SEND popup window
will appear.
NOTE
• If the send-destination MIX bus is a FIXED type, this knob will
not appear; only the TO MIX SEND ON/OFF button ( 3) will
be shown.
C TO MIX/TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button
These are on/off switches for the signal sent from the
channel to each MIX bus / MATRIX bus.
82
M7CL Owner’s Manual
1 TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs
These adjust the send level of the signal sent from
each MIX channel to the selected MATRIX bus.
B TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF buttons
These are on/off switches for the signal sent from each
MIX channel to the MATRIX bus.
To adjust the send level to a MATRIX bus, turn the corresponding [MIX/MATRIX] encoder in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section (they are color-coded as in the
screen).
If desired, you can use the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF
buttons to switch the signal sent from each MIX channel
to the MATRIX bus on/off. Above each of these buttons is
shown the position from which the signal is sent from the
MIX channel. (For details on changing the send position
→ p. 77).
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
● Making HA settings
(input channels only)
● Setting the pan/balance
To control the head amp (HA) assigned to an INPUT/ST
IN channel, you will use the [HA] encoder of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section and the HA field of the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. The HA field
includes the following items.
To adjust the pan/balance of the signal sent from that
channel to the STEREO bus, use the [PAN] encoder of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section and the TO ST PAN/
BALANCE field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen. The TO ST PAN/BALANCE field includes the following items.
5
1
1
2
2
1 GAIN knob
This indicates the gain of the head amp assigned to the
channel. To adjust the value, use the [HA] encoder of
the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
B INPUT PORT popup button
This shows the input port assigned to this channel. It
also accesses a popup window in which you can select
the input port.
C +48V
This indicates the phantom power on (red) or off
(black) status for the head amp assigned to the channel.
D ø (Phase)
This indicates either normal phase (black) or reverse
phase (orange) for the input assigned to the channel.
E OVER indicator
This will light when the input signal from the HA
reaches the overload point.
To adjust the head amp gain, use the [HA] encoder of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section.
In the screen, the indicator at the upper right of the HA
knob shows the presence or absence of a signal at the
patched input port, and also indicates whether an overload
has occurred.
When you press the GAIN knob in the screen, the HA/
PATCH popup window (1 ch) will appear, allowing you to
make settings for the head amp. (For details on the popup
window → p. 55). When you press the INPUT PORT button, the PATCH/NAME popup window will appear, allowing you to select the input port for each channel. (For
details on the popup window → p. 98).
NOTE
1 PAN/BALANCE knob
The following parameter will change, according to the
channel that is selected.
INPUT channel
TO STEREO PAN
ST IN channel
TO STEREO BALANCE
MIX (MONO×2) channel
TO STEREO PAN
MIX (STEREO) channel
MIX BALANCE
MATRIX (MONO×2) channel
Not displayed
MATRIX (STEREO) channel
MATRIX BALANCE
STEREO channel
STEREO BALANCE
MONO channel
Not displayed
B ST/MONO button
(INPUT, ST IN, and MIX channels only)
This switches the on/off status of the signal sent from
that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO
(C) bus.
3
7
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
3 4
C LCR button
(INPUT, ST IN, MIX channels only)
If an INPUT, ST IN, or MIX channel is set to LCR
mode, the LCR button is displayed in location (2).
The LCR button is an overall on/off switch for the signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus and
MONO bus.
To adjust the pan/balance of each channel, use the ST/
MONO button or LCR button to select the send-destination bus, and operate the [PAN] encoder of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section.
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is
adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind that noise may
be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold
output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT
connector when using phantom power.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
83
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
● Changing the output patching
(output channels only)
To change the output patching of an output channel in the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, use the popup
button in the PATCH field.
When you press the popup button, the PATCH/NAME
popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output port and specify the channel name and icon. (For
details on the popup window → p. 98).
● Making dynamics settings
To edit the dynamics for the currently selected channel,
use the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 field of the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the [DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoders of the SELECTED
CHANNEL section.
To edit the dynamics settings, switch the DYNAMICS
ON/OFF button on, and use the [DYNAMICS 1]/
[DYNAMICS 2] encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL
section to adjust the THRESHOLD parameter.
If you want to edit parameters other than THRESHOLD,
or to recall existing data from the library, press any location within the field to access the DYNAMICS 1/
DYNAMICS 2 popup window. (For details on the popup
window → p. 108).
● Making HPF/EQ settings
To edit the HPF of the currently selected channel, use the
HPF field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or
the [HPF] encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section
(input channels only).
The HPF field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen contains the following items.
1
2
NOTE
• The DYNAMICS 2 field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen and the [DYNAMICS 2] encoder of the SELECTED
CHANNEL section are valid only if an input channel is
selected.
The DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 field of the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen contains the following items.
2
3
4
1
5
1 FREQUENCY knob
Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF.
B HPF ON/OFF button
Switches the HPF on/off.
To edit the HPF, turn the HPF ON/OFF on, and use the
[HPF] encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to
adjust the cutoff frequency.
To edit the EQ of the currently selected channel, use the
EQ field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW function
or the EQ [Q], EQ [FREQUENCY], and EQ [GAIN]
encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The EQ
field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen contains the following items.
2
3
1 THRESHOLD knob
This indicates the setting of the THRESHOLD parameter of a gate or compressor. To edit the setting, use the
[DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoders of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section.
B OVER indicator
This will light if the output level of the dynamics
reaches the overload point.
C Level meter
This displays a bar graph indication of the signal level
being input to the dynamics (on=green, off=gray) and
the amount of gain reduction (orange). The THRESHOLD setting is shown numerically and as a vertical
line.
D DYNAMICS ON/OFF buttons
These buttons turn dynamics processors 1/2 on/off.
E Parameter knobs
These knobs indicate the values of parameters other
than THRESHOLD.
84
M7CL Owner’s Manual
1
1 Q/FREQUENCY/GAIN knobs
These knobs indicate the Q, FREQUENCY (center
frequency), and GAIN (amount of boost/cut) for each
band (LOW, LOW-MID, HIGH-MID, and HIGH).
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
C EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on/off.
To edit the EQ, switch the EQ ON/OFF button on, and use
the EQ [Q], EQ [FREQUENCY], and EQ [GAIN] knobs
of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the cue,
center frequency, and the amount of boost/cut.
If you want to edit more detailed parameters, or recall
existing settings from the library, press any EQ or HPF
knob or a location within the EQ graph field to access the
EQ popup window. (For details on the popup window →
p. 105).
NOTE
• The type of the LOW band EQ or HIGH band EQ cannot be
switched in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. If necessary, you can access the EQ popup window and switch the
EQ type.
• If the HIGH band EQ type is already set to Low Pass Filter,
the HIGH band Q knob will not be displayed, and the GAIN
knob will function as an on/off switch for the Low Pass Filter.
● Making insert settings (INPUT, MIX,
MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO channels only)
Use the INSERT field to make insert-related settings for
an input channel in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen. This field includes the following items.
2
1
3
1 INSERT popup button
● Making direct output settings
(INPUT channels only)
Use the DIRECT OUT field to make direct-output related
settings for an input channel in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. This field includes the following
items.
2
1
3
1 DIRECT OUT popup button
When you press this button, the INSERT/DIRECT
OUT popup window will appear, allowing you to
make settings for insert and direct output.
B DIRECT OUT LEVEL indicator
This indicates the currently specified DIRECT OUT
LEVEL value.
C DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button
Turns the direct output on/off.
To make direct out settings in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, press the DIRECT OUT popup button
to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (1
ch), and assign an output port to the direct out (→ p. 102).
Press the DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button to turn it on, and
use the DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob to adjust the output
level.
● Setting a channel to Recall Safe
Use the RECALL SAFE field to specify Recall Safe for
the channel that is currently selected in the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen. This field includes the following items.
When you press this button, the INSERT/DIRECT
OUT popup window will appear, allowing you to
make settings for insert and direct output.
B IN indicator
This indicates the presence or absence of a signal at
the input port patched to INSERT IN.
C INSERT ON/OFF button
Switches the insert on/off.
To make insert settings in the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen, press the INSERT popup button to access
the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (1 ch), and
assign an output port and input port to the insert-out and
insert-in (→ p. 102). When you’ve assigned the ports,
press the INSERT ON/OFF button to turn it on.
7
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
B OVER indicator
This will light when the post-EQ signal reaches the
overload point.
2
1
3
1 RECALL SAFE popup button
This opens the RECALL SAFE MODE popup window, where you can make settings related to Recall
Safe.
B PARTIAL indicator
This will light if only some of the parameters of that
channel are set to Recall Safe.
C RECALL SAFE ON/OFF button
Switches the Recall Safe status on/off for the channel.
To set the channel to Recall Safe mode, press the
RECALL SAFE ON/OFF button to turn it on. If you want
to specify Recall Safe only for specific parameters, press
the RECALL SAFE popup window to open the RECALL
SAFE MODE popup window, and then select the parameters for which you want to specify Recall Safe. (For
details on the popup window → p. 136).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
85
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
● Turning a channel on/off
Use the FADER field to switch the channel on/off in the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. This field
includes the following items.
2
1
3
To assign the channel to a DCA group, turn on the desired
DCA button 1–8 (multiple selections are allowed). To
check the channels that are assigned to each DCA group,
press the DCA popup button to open the DCA/MUTE
GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window. (For details on
the popup window → p. 114).
● Assigning a channel to a mute group
Use the MUTE field of the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen to assign a channel to a mute group. This
field includes the following items.
4
1
1 FADER
2
This indicates the input/output level of the channel.
This is linked with the fader on the top panel.
3
B Σ CLIP indicator
This indicator will light if an overload occurs at even
one of the level detection points in that channel.
C Input/output level
This indicates the current setting of fader.
D CH ON/OFF button
This button switches the channel on/off. This is linked
with the [ON] button of the top panel.
1 MUTE popup button
When you press the CH ON/OFF button in the FADER
field, that channel will be switched on/off and the top
panel [ON] key will operate in tandem with this.
This accesses the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
MODE popup window, where you can select the channels that will be assigned to each DCA group or mute
group.
● Assigning a channel to a DCA group
(input channels only)
B MUTE SAFE indicator
This will light if this channel is set to Mute Safe.
You can make Mute Safe settings in the DCA/MUTE
GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window.
Use the DCA field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen to assign a channel to a DCA group. This field
includes the following items.
1
2
1 DCA popup button
This accesses the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
MODE popup window, where you can select the channels that will be assigned to each DCA group or mute
group.
B DCA buttons 1–8
These buttons select the DCA group(s) to which this
channel is assigned.
86
M7CL Owner’s Manual
C MUTE buttons 1–8
These buttons select the mute group(s) to which this
channel is assigned.
To assign the channel to a mute group, turn on the desired
mute button 1–8 (multiple selections are allowed). To
check the channels that are assigned to each mute group,
press the MUTE popup button to open the DCA/MUTE
GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window. (For details on
the popup window → p. 114).
Chapter 8
Operations in the Centralogic section
This chapter explains how you can use the Centralogic section and the
OVERVIEW screen to control up to eight channels at once.
About the Centralogic section
The Centralogic section located below the touch screen lets you recall and simultaneously control a set of up to eight input channels, output channels, or DCA groups.
Use the navigation keys of the NAVIGATION KEYS section to select the channels that will be
controlled.
Operations in the Centralogic section
8
NAVIGATION KEYS section
Centralogic section
When you press one of the navigation keys in the NAVIGATION KEYS section, the channels / DCA groups corresponding
to that key will be assigned to the Centralogic section, and can be controlled using the faders, [ON] keys, and [CUE] keys of
the Centralogic section.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
87
About the OVERVIEW screen
About the OVERVIEW screen
The OVERVIEW screen simultaneously shows the main parameters for the (up to) eight channels currently assigned to the Centralogic section.
When you use the navigation keys to select the eight channels that will be assigned to the Centralogic section, the touch screen will display the OVERVIEW screen for those channels. (The
[DCA] key is an exception to this.)
The OVERVIEW screen contains the following items.
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
J
K
L
When you press one of the knobs in the OVERVIEW
screen, the same type of knob for each channel will be
enclosed by a heavy frame.
This heavy frame indicates that the parameter corresponding to those knobs can be edited. In this state, you can
operate multifunction encoders 1–8 to edit the parameter
values of the corresponding channels.
There is no OVERVIEW screen for the DCA group. This
means that if you press the [DCA] key to assign the DCA
groups to the Centralogic section, the OVERVIEW screen
will continue to show the eight channels that had previously been displayed. In this case, the Centralogic section
faders and [ON] keys will control DCA group operations,
and the multifunction encoders and [SEL]/[CUE] keys
will control the up to eight channels shown in the OVERVIEW screen.
1 Channel number / Channel name field
This shows the number, name, and icon for the up to eight
channels selected for control in the OVERVIEW screen.
B HA/PHASE field (input channels only)
For input channels that have a rear panel input jack or
external head amp device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR) patched
to them, the head amp settings (gain setting, phantom
power on/off, phase setting) are displayed here.
For input channels that have another input port or rack
output (internal effect or GEQ) patched to them, information on the input source (port/rack name and number, card
name and effect module name, phase setting) will be displayed.
If an output channel is selected, the B area will change as
follows.
3
4
C OUTPUT PORT field (output channels only)
This shows the name and number of the output port
patched to each channel.
HINT
• If two or more output ports are patched, a “+” symbol is shown
after the name of one of the output ports.
D INSERT/DIRECT OUT field
• When an input channel is selected
........... This displays the insert or direct output on/
off status of each channel.
• When an output channel is selected
........... This displays the insert on/off status of each
channel.
88
M7CL Owner’s Manual
About the OVERVIEW screen
K DCA/MUTE GROUP field
This shows the DCA group (input channels only) and
mute group to which each channel belongs.
F DYNAMICS 1 field
G DYNAMICS 2 field (input channels only)
L Channel number / Channel name field
This shows the number, channel name, and icon for the up
to eight channels that are currently selected for operation
in the Centralogic section (except for the multifunction
encoders).
For each channel, this shows the name of the type selected
for Dynamics 1, the input level, gain reduction amount,
and threshold. If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, a
three-step indicator shows the presence or absence of a
signal, and the open/closed status of the gate.
H TO MIX/TO MATRIX field
This shows the send level of the signal sent from each
channel to the MIX buses / MATRIX buses. (If the senddestinations are MATRIX buses, an indication of “TO
MATRIX” is shown at the bottom of the field.)
To adjust the send level for each bus, press the corresponding knob to select it, and operate multifunction
encoders 1–8.
HINT
• If input channels are shown, you can use the TO MIX / TO MATRIX
button in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to change the
send-destination shown in this field.
• You can also assign the SEND ENCODER MODE function to a
user-defined key, and use it to change the send-destination in the
same way.
Area A shows the channels that can be controlled by the
OVERVIEW screen, multifunction encoders, [SEL] keys,
and [CUE] keys. Area L shows the channels or DCA
groups that can be controlled by the Centralogic section’s
faders and [ON] keys.
For example if you assign DCA groups to the Centralogic
section, the OVERVIEW screen will continue showing the
eight channels that had been displayed until then, and in
this case the channels or DCA groups shown in areas A
and L will be different.
On the M7CL, you can leave the channels/groups assigned
to the Centralogic section fixed, and switch only the eightchannel groups displayed in the OVERVIEW screen (→
p. 94), and the content shown in A and L will differ in
this case as well.
If MATRIX channels are selected, the H area will change
as follows.
8
Operations in the Centralogic section
E EQ field
This is a graph that shows the approximate EQ response
for each channel.
9
I FROM MIX field
This shows the send level of the signals sent from MIX
channels 1–16 to each MATRIX bus. To adjust the send
level for each bus, press the corresponding knob to select
it, and operate multifunction encoders 1–8.
J TO STEREO/MONO field
This shows the on/off status of the signal sent from each
channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus, and the panning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus (or the left/
right volume balance if the send-source is stereo).
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and operate
multifunction encoders 1–8.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
89
Operations in the Centralogic section
Operations in the Centralogic section
This section explains how you can use the Centralogic section and the OVERVIEW screen to
simultaneously control the parameters of up to eight channels.
1 Use the navigation keys of the NAVIGATION
KEYS section to select the channels or
DCA groups that you want to control.
When you press a navigation key, the LED of that key
will light. The touch screen will show the OVERVIEW screen, and the parameters of the up to eight
channels you selected will appear.
Subsequent operations will differ depending on the
parameters you want to adjust.
● Specifying the channel name and icon
In the OVERVIEW screen you can use the channel number and channel name fields to specify the name and icon
for each channel. This field includes the following items.
HINT
1
• When the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed,
you can switch to the OVERVIEW screen by pressing any of
the multifunction encoders 1–8. This is convenient when you
want to quickly switch to the OVERVIEW screen while leaving
the same channels or DCA groups selected for control.
2 Use the faders and [ON] keys of the Centralogic section to adjust the level of the (up to)
eight selected channels and switch them
on/off.
HINT
• The bottom line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels or DCA groups that can be controlled by the faders and
[ON] keys of the Centralogic section.
• The top line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels
that can be controlled by the [CUE] keys and multifunction
encoders 1–8 of the Centralogic section.
3 Use the fields in the OVERVIEW screen and
the multifunction encoders and [CUE] keys
to adjust the parameters for the (up to)
eight channels.
2
3
1 Channel number
The number of that channel or DCA group.
B Channel name
C Icon
These show the name and icon selected for that channel or DCA group.
If you want to change the name or icon, press the field
to access the PATCH/NAME popup window. (For
details on the popup window → p. 53).
● Making HA settings (input channels only)
For input channels to which a rear panel input jack or an
external head amp device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR) is
patched, you can use the HA/PHASE field of the OVERVIEW screen to control the head amp. The HA/PHASE
field includes the following items.
1
2
3
1 GAIN knob
This indicates the gain of the head amp assigned to the
channel. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it,
and operate multifunction encoders 1–8.
B +48V
This indicates the phantom power on (red) or off
(black) status for the head amp assigned to the channel.
C ø (Phase)
This indicates either normal phase (black) or reverse
phase (orange) for the head amp assigned to the channel.
NOTE
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA
gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind
that noise may be generated if there is a difference between
the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device
connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom
power.
90
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Operations in the Centralogic section
● Making Dynamics 1/2 settings
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the DYNAMICS 1/
DYNAMICS 2 fields to make Dynamics 1/2 settings for
each channel. These fields include the following items.
1
If you want to switch the phantom power on/off, switch
the phase between normal/reverse, or change the input
port patching for each channel, press the HA/PHASE field
(if the GAIN knob is displayed, press the knob to select it
and then press the knob once again) to access the HA/
PATCH popup window. (For details on the popup window
→ p. 55).
3
2
1 Input level meter
This green bar graph shows the level of the signal after
it has passed through dynamics processing.
● Changing the output patching (output channels only)
B GR meter
This orange bar graph indicates the amount of gain
reduction produced by the dynamics processor.
From the OVERVIEW screen, you can change the output
port that’s patched to an output channel by pressing the
OVERVIEW screen’s OUTPUT PORT field to access the
PATCH/NAME popup window. (For details on the popup
window → p. 53).
C Threshold
The vertical line indicates the currently-specified
threshold value and its approximate position in the GR
meter.
● Making settings for Insert (other than ST IN
channels / monitor) or Direct Output (INPUT
channels only)
Only if GATE is selected as the type, the B–3 areas will
change as follows.
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the INSERT /
DIRECT OUT field to make settings related to Insert and
Direct Output. This field includes the following items.
4
Green
Yellow
Red
1
2
1 INS
This indicates the insert on/off status.
B D.OUT (INPUT channels only)
This indicates the direct output on/off status.
To make details settings for Insert or Direct Output, press
the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT/
DIRECT OUT popup window (8 ch). (For details on the
popup window → p. 100).
● Making ATT/HPF/EQ settings
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the EQ graph field
to make settings for the ATT (attenuation), HPF (high pass
filter), and EQ of each channel.
When you press the EQ graph field, the ATT/HPF/EQ
popup window (1 ch) will appear. In this window you can
use the on-screen buttons and the multifunction encoders
to control all of the ATT/HPF/EQ parameters. (For details
on the popup window → p. 105).
D GR meter
This indicator shows the operating status of the gate.
The following segments will light according to the
presence or absence of signal passing through the gate,
and according to the open/closed status of the gate.
8
Operations in the Centralogic section
If the channel is patched to an input port that has no head
amp, or to the rack (internal effect or GEQ), the port
name, number, and phase are shown.
• Red........... This will light if no signal is passing
through Dynamics 1/2 (gain reduction
amount = 30 dB or more).
• Yellow ...... This will light if the signal is passing
through Dynamics 1/2 and the gate is
even slightly closed (gain reduction
amount = less than 30 dB).
• Green ....... This will light if the signal is passing
through Dynamics 1/2 and the gate is
open (gain reduction amount = 0 dB).
NOTE
• The DYNAMICS 2 field of the OVERVIEW screen is available
only if an input channel is selected.
If you want to control Dynamics from the OVERVIEW
screen, press the DYNAMICS 1/2 field to open the
DYNAMICS 1 / DYNAMICS 2 popup window (1 ch).
(For details on the popup window → p. 108).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
91
Operations in the Centralogic section
● Adjusting the send levels from a channel to
all MIX buses / MATRIX buses
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the TO MIX / TO
MATRIX field to send signals from a channel to the MIX
buses and MATRIX buses. This field includes the following items.
These knobs will adjust the panning between two
buses that are set to stereo. (For a stereo channel, they
will adjust the volume balance of the left and right
channels sent to the two buses.)
2
1
1 TO MIX/TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob
Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input
channel to each MIX bus / MATRIX bus. To adjust the
value, press the knob for the desired bus to select it,
and operate multifunction encoders 1–8.
If the send-source is an input channel, you’ll need to
first select the send-destination buses (MIX buses or
MATRIX buses). Use the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen TO MIX/TO MATRIX button (→ p. 82)
to make this selection. The screen will change as follows according to the buses you select.
If MIX buses are
selected as the senddestination
If MATRIX buses are
selected as the senddestination
B TO MIX SEND ON/OFF button
These are on/off switches for the signal sent from the
input channel to the MIX buses. These buttons are
shown only when the send-source is an input channel
and the send-destination is a FIXED type MIX bus.
To switch the on/off status of the signal sent from the
channel to VARI type MIX buses or to MATRIX buses,
press the selected knob once again to open the MIX
SEND / MATRIX SEND popup window (8 ch). (Alternatively, you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen.)
● Adjusting the send levels from all MIX channels to a MATRIX bus
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can simultaneously adjust
the send level of the signals sent from all MIX channels to
each MATRIX bus.
To do this, use the [MATRIX] key of the NAVIGATION
KEYS section to assign MATRIX channels 1–8 to the
Centralogic section. At this time, the OVERVIEW screen
will show the FROM MIX field. This field includes the
following items.
1
Press the selected knob once again, and the MIX
SEND / MATRIX SEND popup window (8 ch) will
appear, depending on the send-destination buses you
selected. This popup window contains on/off switches
for the signals sent from the channel to the corresponding buses, and lets you select the send point
(PRE or POST). (For details on the popup window →
p. 212).
If the send-destination MIX bus or MATRIX bus is set
to stereo, the left of the two adjacent knobs will operate as the TO MIX PAN or TO MATRIX PAN knob
(or as the BALANCE knob if the send-source channel
is stereo).
TO MIIX PAN/
TO MATRIX PAN knob
92
M7CL Owner’s Manual
1 FROM MIX SEND LEVEL knob
For each MATRIX bus, this shows the send level of
the signals sent from MIX channels 1–16. To adjust
the value, press the knob to select it, and operate multifunction encoders 1–8.
If you press the selected knob once again, the
MATRIX SEND popup window (8 ch) will appear. In
this popup window you can switch the on/off status of
the signal sent from a specific MIX channel to
MATRIX buses 1–8, and select the send position
(PRE/POST). (Use the / buttons in the window
to select MIX channels. For details on the popup window → p. 64).
Operations in the Centralogic section
● Adjusting the pan/balance (INPUT, ST IN,
STEREO, and MIX channels only)
● Assigning a channel to a DCA group or Mute
group
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the TO STEREO/
MONO field to switch the on/off status and adjust the pan/
balance of the signal sent from each channel to the STEREO/MONO buses. The following items are shown in the
TO STEREO/MONO field.
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the DCA/MUTE
GROUP field to assign a channel to a DCA group (input
channels only) or mute group. This field includes the following items.
1 2
1
3
2
1 DCA indicator (input channels only)
• When an INPUT channel or monaural MIX channel is selected
........ The panning of the signal sent to the
STEREO bus is shown.
• When a ST IN channel or a stereo MIX channel is
selected
........ The balance of the left/right signals sent
to the STEREO bus is shown.
• When a STEREO channel or a stereo MATRIX
channel is selected
........ The balance of the left/right output signals is shown.
This indicator shows the DCA group(s) to which the
input channel is assigned. The numbers of DCA
groups to which this channel belongs are highlighted.
B Mute indicator
This indicator shows the mute groups to which the
channel is assigned. The numbers of mute groups to
which this channel belongs are highlighted.
To assign a channel to a DCA group or Mute group, press
the DCA/MUTE GROUP field to open the DCA/MUTE
GROUP ASSIGN popup window. (For details on the
popup window → p. 114).
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and
operate multifunction encoders 1–8.
If you press the selected knob once again, the TO
STEREO/MONO popup window (8 ch) will appear. In
this popup window, you can switch between ST/
MONO mode and LCR mode, and change the on/off
status of the signal sent to the STEREO/MONO bus
for up to eight channels at a time. (For details on the
popup window → p. 57).
B OVER indicator
This indicator will light if any of the level detection
points in each channel reach the OVER level.
8
Operations in the Centralogic section
1 PAN/BALANCE knob
C ST/MONO indicator (INPUT, ST IN, and MIX
channels only)
This indicates the on/off status of the signal sent from
that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO
(C) bus. To switch this on/off, press the selected knob
once again to open the TO STEREO/MONO popup
window.
If an INPUT, ST IN, or MIX channel is set to LCR mode,
the C area will change as follows.
4
D LCR indicator (INPUT, ST IN, MIX channels
only)
The LCR indicator shows the overall on/off status of
the signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/
R) bus and MONO (C) bus.
To switch this on/off, press the selected knob once
again to open the TO STEREO/MONO popup window.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
93
Fixing the channels or DCA groups of the Centralogic section
Fixing the channels or DCA groups of the Centralogic section
If desired, you can fix the channels or DCA groups controlled by the faders, [ON] keys, meters,
[CUE] keys, and [SEL] keys of the Centralogic section, and switch between groups of eight channels for control in the OVERVIEW screen.
In this case, the multifunction encoders will control a different set of eight channels than the
Centralogic section’s faders and [ON] keys.
1 In the NAVIGATION KEYS section, press
the navigation key for the channels or DCA
group you want to fix in the Centralogic
section, and hold it down for two seconds
or longer.
The LED of the navigation key will blink. The blinking indicates that the corresponding channels or DCA
groups are now fixed to the Centralogic section.
2 Press a navigation key (other than the
The following illustration shows the example of when
the DCA groups are fixed to the Centralogic section,
and INPUT channels 1–8 are controlled in the OVERVIEW screen.
Control INPUT
channels 1–8 in the
OVERVIEW screen.
Control DCA
groups 1–8.
[DCA] key) to select the eight channels
you want to control in the OVERVIEW
screen.
The LED of the navigation key you selected in step 2
will light. The lit status indicates that the corresponding channels can be controlled in the OVERVIEW
screen and by the multifunction encoders.
NOTE
• You cannot operate DCA groups in the OVERVIEW
screen using the multifunction encoders. For this reason, pressing the [DCA] key in step 2 will have no
effect.
3 As desired, use the navigation keys to
switch the group of eight channels controlled by the OVERVIEW screen, multifunction encoders.
4 To release the channels or DCA groups
that were fixed to the Centralogic section,
press the navigation key you operated in
step 1 once again, and hold it down until
the navigation key LED changes from
blinking to lit.
When the navigation key LED changes to being lit, its
channels or DCA groups will be assigned to both the
Centralogic section and the OVERVIEW screen.
94
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 9
Input/output patching
This chapter explains how to edit the input patch and output patch settings,
and how to use insert connections and direct output.
Changing the output patch settings
OMNI OUT jacks 1–12
MIX channels 1–12
OMNI OUT jacks 13/14
MATRIX channels 1/2
OMNI OUT jacks 15/16
STEREO channel (L/R)
2TR OUT DIGITAL jack
STEREO channel (L/R)
Slot 1 output channels 1–8
MIX channels 1–8
Slot 1 output channels 9–16
MIX channels 1–8
Slot 2 output channels 1–8
MIX channels 9–16
Slot 2 output channels 9–16
MIX channels 9–16
Slot 3 output channels 1–8
MATRIX channels 1–8
Slot 3 output channels 9–16
MATRIX channels 1–8
However, the above patching can be changed as desired.
To change the patching, you can either select the output
port that will be the output destination of each output
channel, or you can select the output channel that will be
the output source for each output port.
2 In the top part of the screen, press the
channel number / channel name field to
access the PATCH / NAME popup window.
In the PATCH / NAME popup window you can change
the channel name, icon, and output port assigned to
each output channel. The window includes the following items.
1
2
3
4
5
● Selecting the output port for each output channel
6
Here’s how to select the output port that will be the output
destination for each output channel.
1 Icon button
1 Use the navigation keys to access the
This indicates the icon selected for that channel.
When you press this button, a screen will appear in
which you can select an icon or sample name.
1
B Channel name input box
This indicates the name assigned to that channel.
When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear.
OVERVIEW screen containing the output
channel whose output port you want to
assign.
9
Input/output patching
When the M7CL is in its default state, the output ports are
patched to the following channels.
C Output port button
This indicates the currently selected output port. If you
press this button when selecting an icon or changing
the channel name, you will return to the output port
select screen.
D Output port select tabs
These tabs select the output ports shown in the popup
window. Each tab corresponds to the following output
ports.
● OMNI/2TR OUT
OMNI OUT jacks 1–16 and the 2TR OUT DIGITAL
jack will be displayed.
1 Channel number / Channel name
● SLOT 1–SLOT 3
Output channels 1–16 of slots 1–3 will be displayed.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
95
Changing the output patch settings
● RACK
The input ports of rack 1–8 will be displayed.
HINT
• For details on the GEQ, refer to p. 161.
● Selecting the output channel for each
output port
Here’s how you can select the output channel that will be
the output source for each output port.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
E Output port select buttons
These buttons assign an output port to the currently
selected output channel.
F Tabs
Use these tabs to switch between items.
3 Use the output port select tabs and the output port select buttons to specify the output port that will be assigned to that
channel.
If the output port select buttons are not shown at the
bottom of the window, press the PATCH tab.
4 Use the navigation keys and the [SEL] keys
to switch the output channels being controlled, and specify their output ports in the
same way.
5 When you have finished making settings,
press the “×” symbol located in the upper
right to close the window.
OUTPORT SETUP button
2 In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the
center of the screen, press the OUTPORT
SETUP button to open the OUTPUT PORT
popup window.
You will return to the OVERVIEW screen.
In the OUTPUT PORT popup window you can assign
the source channel for each output port. The popup
window includes the following items.
2
1
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
J
1 Slot number / Card type
If an output channel of slot 1–3 is selected for operations, this shows the slot number and the type of I/O
card installed in that slot.
B DELAY SCALE field
Here you can select the units for the delay time shown
below the delay time knob (5).
• METER (343.59m/s)
........... The delay time is shown as a distance in meters, calculated as the
speed of sound (343.59 m/s) at an
air temperature of 20 °C (68 °F)
multiplied by the delay time (seconds).
96
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Changing the output patch settings
...........The delay time is shown as a distance in feet, calculated as the
speed of sound (1127.26 feet/s) at
an air temperature of 20 °C (68 °F)
multiplied by the delay time (seconds).
• SAMPLE .........The delay time is shown as a number of samples. If you change the
sampling frequency at which the
M7CL operates, the number of samples will change accordingly.
• msec
...........The delay time is shown in units of
milliseconds. If this button is on, the
same value is displayed above and
below the delay time knob (5).
C Output port
This indicates the type and number of the output port
to which the channel is assigned.
D Channel select popup button
This button lets you select the channel that is assigned
to the output port. The name of the currently selected
channel is displayed.
E Delay time knob
This knob sets the delay time of the output port. Press
this knob to select it, and use multifunction encoders
1–8 to adjust the settings. The millisecond value is
shown above the knob, and the delay time value in the
units selected in the DELAY SCALE field (2) is
shown below the knob.
F DELAY button
Switches the output port delay on/off.
G ø (Phase) button
Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output
port between normal phase (black) and reverse phase
(orange).
H ATT knob
Adjusts the amount of attenuation for the signal
assigned to the output port. To adjust this value, press
the knob in the screen to select it, and operate multifunction encoders 1–8. You can adjust the setting in
0.1 dB steps over a range of -96 to +24 dB. The current value is shown immediately below the knob.
I Level meter
This meter indicates the level of the signal assigned to
the output port.
J Output port select tabs
These tabs switch the output ports controlled in the
popup window in groups of up to eight ports.
● OMNI 1–8, 9–16
These control OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 and 9–16
respectively.
● SLOT1 1–8, 9–16
● SLOT2 1–8, 9–16
● SLOT3 1–8, 9–16
These control output channels 1–8 and 9–16 of slots
1–3 respectively.
● 2TR OUT
Control the L/R channels of the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack.
4 To assign a channel to an output port,
press the channel select popup window for
that port.
The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will
appear. The popup window includes the following
items.
1
2
9
Input/output patching
• FEET (1127.26ft/s)
1 Channel select tabs
These select the type of channel shown in the popup
window. Each tab corresponds to the following
channels.
• OUT CH.......... Shows the output channels (MIX
channels 1–16, MATRIX channels
1–8, STEREO L/R channels, and
MONO (C) channel).
• MONITOR OUT
........... Shows the MONITOR OUT L/R/C
channels.
• CH 1–32
• CH 33–48 {M7CL–48 only}
........... Shows INPUT channels 1–32 {1–
48}
B Channel select button
Selects the channel to be assigned to the output port
you selected in step 3.
HINT
3 Use the output port select tabs at the bot-
tom of the popup window to select the output port you want to control.
Each tab corresponds to the following output ports.
• If you selected CH 1–32 or CH 33–48 {M7CL–48 only}, the
input channel you selected will be output directly from the corresponding output port. At this time, the channel select button
in the OUTPUT PORT popup window is shown as “DIR CH
xx” (xx= channel number). (For details on direct output →
p. 102).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
97
Changing the output patch settings • Changing the input patch settings
5 Use the channel select tabs and the channel select buttons to select the source
channel, and press the CLOSE button.
You will return to the OUTPUT PORT popup window.
HINT
• If PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box
will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings. If
STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog
box will appear when you attempt to change a location that is
already patched elsewhere. (For details, refer to → p. 198).
6 Make settings for delay, phase, and attenuator as desired.
7 Repeat step 3–6 to assign channels for
other output ports.
8 When you have finished making settings,
click the “×” symbol in the upper right of
the window to return to the previous
screen.
Changing the input patch settings
When the M7CL is in its default state, the following input
ports are patched to each input channel.
INPUT channels 1–32 {1–48}
INPUT jacks 1–32 {1–48}
ST IN channels 1–4
EFFECT RETURN 1–4 (L/R)
[PATCH / NAME popup window (PATCH)]
2
However, the above patching can be changed as desired.
Here we will explain how to change the patching for each
input channel.
1
1 Use the navigation keys to access the
5
3
4
OVERVIEW screen for the input channels
whose input source you want to change.
1
6
1 Input port button
This indicates the currently selected input port. If you
press this button when selecting an icon or changing
the channel name, you will return to the input port
select screen.
1 Channel number / Channel name
2 In the top part of the screen, press the
channel number / channel name field to
access the PATCH / NAME popup window.
In the PATCH / NAME popup window you can change
the channel name, icon, and input port assigned to
each input channel.
B Icon button
This indicates the icon selected for that channel. When
you press this button, a screen will appear in which
you can select an icon or sample name.
C Channel name input box
This indicates the name assigned to that channel.
When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear.
D Input port select tabs
These tabs select the input ports shown in the popup
window. Each tab corresponds to the following input
ports.
• CH IN 1–32
• CH IN 33–48 {M7CL–48 only}
........... INPUT jacks 1–32 or 33–48 {M7CL–
48 only} will be displayed.
98
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Changing the input patch settings
• ST IN...............L/R channels of ST IN jacks 1–4 will
be displayed.
• SLOT 1–SLOT 3
...........Input channels 1–16 of slots 1–3 will
be displayed.
• RACK..............The output ports of rack 1–8 will be
displayed.
E Input port select buttons
These buttons assign an input port to the currently
selected input channel.
F Tabs
Use these tabs to switch between thems.
3 Access the input port selection screen of
the PATCH / NAME popup window, and use
the input port select tabs and input port
select buttons to select an input port.
HINT
• If PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box
will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings. If
STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog
box will appear when you attempt to change a location that is
already patched elsewhere. (For details, refer to → p. 198).
Input/output patching
9
4 When you have finished making settings,
press the “×” symbol located in the upper
right to close the window.
You will return to the OVERVIEW screen.
HINT
• In the PATCH / NAME popup window you can select the icon
for a channel or assign a name to it (→ p. 53).
• You can also select input ports from the HA/PATCH popup
window.
5 Repeat step 2–4 to assign input ports for
other channels.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
99
Inserting an external device into a channel
Inserting an external device into a channel
If desired, you can insert an effect processor or other external device into the signal path of an
INPUT, MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel. When doing so, the type of input/output port
used for the insertion and the location of the insertion in/out can be specified individually for each
channel.
1 As desired, connect your external equipment to the I/O card(s) in slots 1–3.
DIGITAL OUT
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
digital
I/O card
DIGITAL IN
effect processor
B INSERT field
Here you can make insert-related settings. Press either
the left or right field to choose PRE EQ (before the
attenuator) or PRE FADER (before the fader) as the
insert-out/in position.
C INSERT OUT popup button
This indicates the output port that is selected as the
insert-out for this channel. Press this button to open a
popup window where you can select the output port.
D INSERT IN popup button
This indicates the input port that is selected as the
insert-in for this channel. Press this button to open a
popup window where you can select the input port.
M7CL
E INSERT ON/OFF button
This button switches the insert on/off. If this button is
off, the insert-signal path is bypassed.
HINT
• If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an
external device, you’ll need to synchronize the word clock
between the M7CL and your external device (→ p. 208).
[INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (8ch)]
2 Use the navigation keys to access the
OVERVIEW screen for the channel to which
you want to assign an input source.
3 Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to
access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup
window.
In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window you can
view or change the type of input/output port used for
insertion and the location at which insertion will
occur. There are two variations of this popup window;
one-channel and eight channel. These windows
include the following items.
[INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (1ch)]
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
1 Channel number / Icon
This shows the channel number and the icon that is
selected for that channel. You can press this field to
change the selected channel.
B Channel name
This indicates the name assigned to that channel.
C INSERT OUT popup button
This indicates the output port that is selected as the
insert-out for this channel. Press this button to open a
popup window where you can select the output port.
The currently specified insert-out/in position is shown
below the button.
3 4 5
1 Icon / Channel number / Channel name
This indicates the icon selected for that channel, the
channel number, and the channel name.
100
M7CL Owner’s Manual
D INSERT ON/OFF button
This button switches the insert on/off. If this button is
off, the insert-out/in signal path is bypassed.
E INSERT IN popup button
This indicates the input port that is selected as the
insert-in for this channel. Press this button to open a
popup window where you can select the input port.
Inserting an external device into a channel
4 Access either the one-channel or the eight-
channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, and press the INSERT OUT popup button.
The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will
appear, allowing you to select the output port used for
insert-out. The window includes the following items.
6 Press the INSERT IN popup button.
The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will
appear, allowing you to select the input port used for
insert-in.
7 Specify the input port you will use for
insert-in, and press the CLOSE button.
8 Press the INSERT ON/OFF button to turn it
ON.
1
In this state, insert-out/in is enabled. Adjust the input/
output levels of your external device as necessary.
2
HINT
• Even if the INSERT ON/OFF button is OFF, the signal
selected for insert-out will continue to be sent.
9 If you want to change the insert-out/in position, access the one-channel INSERT/
DIRECT OUT popup button, and press one
of the two INSERT fields.
These tabs select the output ports shown in the window. Each tab corresponds to the following output
ports.
• SLOT 1–SLOT 3
...........Output channels 1–16 from slots 1–
3 will be displayed.
• RACK ...........Input ports to rack 1–8 will be displayed.
B Output port select buttons
These buttons assign the output port that will be used
as insert-out for the currently selected channel.
The INSERT field you pressed will be enabled, and
the other INSERT field will be disabled.
10
When you have finished making all settings, click the “×” symbol located in the
upper right to close the window.
You will return to the OVERVIEW screen.
11 As desired, make insert settings for other
channels as well.
NOTE
9
Input/output patching
1 Output port select tabs
• If a rack in which a GEQ is mounted is specified as the insertout or insert-in, the other patch point will automatically be
assigned to the same rack.
Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a rack in
which a GEQ is mounted, the other patch point will automatically be defeated.
5 Use the output port select tabs and the output port select buttons to specify the output port that will be used as insert-out, and
press the CLOSE button.
You will return to the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup
window.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
101
Directly outputting an INPUT channel
Directly outputting an INPUT channel
The signal of an INPUT channel can be directly output from a desired OMNI OUT jack or from an
output channel of the desired slot. For example, signals can be sent via a digital I/O card
installed in a slot to an external digital recorder, so that a live recording can be made without
being affected by mixing operations within the M7CL.
1 As desired, connect your external equip-
ment to an OMNI OUT jack or to an I/O card
in slots 1–3.
C DIRECT OUT popup button
This indicates the output port used for direct output.
Press this button to open a popup window where you
can select the output port.
D DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button
Turns the direct output on/off.
DIGITAL OUT
digital
I/O card
DIGITAL IN
digital recorder
E DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
Adjusts the level of the signal that is directly output.
[INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (8ch)]
1
M7CL
2
HINT
• If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an
external device, you’ll need to synchronize the word clock
between the M7CL and your external device (→ p. 208).
3
4
2 Use the navigation keys to access the
5
OVERVIEW screen for the input channel
that you want to directly output.
3
1 Channel number / Icon
Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to
access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup
window.
This shows the channel number and the icon that is
selected for that channel. You can press this field to
change the selected channel.
There are two variations of this popup window; onechannel and eight channel. These windows include the
following items.
B Channel name
This indicates the name assigned to that channel.
[INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (1ch)]
1
C DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button
This button switches the direct output on/off. If this
button is off, the direct output for that channel will be
disabled.
The currently selected direct output position is shown
above the button.
D DIRECT OUT popup button
This indicates the output port used for direct output.
Press this button to open a popup window where you
can select the output port.
3 4
2
5
1 Icon / Channel number / Channel name
This indicates the icon selected for that channel, the
channel number, and the channel name.
B DIRECT OUT field
Here you can make settings for direct output. Press a
field to select PRE HPF (before the HPF), PRE EQ
(before the attenuator), or PRE FADER (before the
fader) as the position for direct output.
102
M7CL Owner’s Manual
E DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
Adjusts the level of the signal that is directly output.
Directly outputting an INPUT channel
4 Access either the one-channel or the eight-
channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, and press the DIRECT OUT popup button.
The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will
appear, allowing you to select the output port used for
direct output. The window includes the following
items.
6 Press the DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button to
turn it ON.
In this state, direct output is enabled. Adjust the input
level of your external device as necessary.
HINT
• With the factory settings, all are turned on.
7 If you want to change the position of the
direct output, access the one-channel
INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup button, and
press one of the three DIRECT OUT fields.
1
2
The DIRECT OUT field you pressed will be enabled,
and the other DIRECT OUT field will be disabled.
8 If you want to adjust the level of the direct
These tabs select the output ports shown in the window. Each tab corresponds to the following output
ports.
• OMNI
...........OMNI OUT jacks 1–16 will be displayed.
• SLOT 1–SLOT 3
...........Output channels 1–16 of slots 1–3
will be displayed.
9 When you have finished making all set-
tings, click the “×” symbol located in the
upper right to close the window.
You will return to the OVERVIEW screen.
10 As desired, make direct output settings for
other channels as well.
B Output port select buttons
These buttons assign the output port used for direct
output of the currently selected INPUT channel.
9
Input/output patching
1 Output port select tabs
output, access either the one-channel or
the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT
popup window, and operate the DIRECT
OUT LEVEL knob.
5 Use the output port select tabs and the output port select buttons to specify the output port that will be used for direct output,
and press the CLOSE button.
You will return to the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup
window.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
103
104
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 10
EQ and Dynamics
This chapter explains the EQ (equalizer) and dynamics that are provided on
each channel of the M7CL.
About EQ and dynamics
Each input channel and output channel of the M7CL provides a four-band EQ and dynamics.
EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An attenuator is provided immediately before the EQ, allowing you to adjust the level of the input signal. Input channels also provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ.
Input channels provide two dynamics processors; Dynamics 1 can be used as a gate, ducking,
compressor, or expander, while Dynamics 2 can be used as a compressor, hard compander, soft
compander, or de-esser. Output channels provide one dynamics processor, which can be used
as a compressor, expander, hard compander, or soft compander.
This section explains the four-band EQ that is provided on input channels and output channels.
1 Use the navigation keys to access the
OVERVIEW screen for the channel whose
EQ you want to control.
The EQ field shows the response of the EQ. In this
OVERVIEW screen, you can use the EQ encoders of
the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the parameter settings.
[ATT/HPF/EQ popup window (1 ch)]
This lets you view and edit all EQ parameters of the
currently selected channel. This is convenient when
you want to make detailed EQ settings for a specific
channel.
2
3
8
EQ and Dynamics
10
Using EQ
45 6 7
1
EQ field
2 If you want to edit while watching the ATT/
HPF/EQ parameter values, press the EQ
field in the OVERVIEW screen to access the
ATT/HPF/EQ popup window.
1 TYPE I, II buttons
In the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window, you can edit the
EQ and high-pass filter parameters and switch them
on/off.
There are three variations of this popup window; onechannel, eight-channel, and ALL. These windows
include the following items.
These buttons select the type of EQ. Turn the TYPE I
button on if you want to use the same algorithm as on
previous Yamaha digital mixers, or turn the TYPE II
button on if you want to use the newly developed algorithm. TYPE II reduces the interference between
bands.
9
J
K
B LOW shelving button
If this button is on, the LOW band EQ will function as
a shelving-type EQ. In this case, the LOW band Q
knob is not shown.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
105
Using EQ
C FLAT button
This button resets the GAIN parameters of all bands to
the default value (0.0 dB). If you press this button, a
confirmation dialog box will appear.
L
D HIGH shelving button
If this button is on, the HIGH band EQ will function as
a shelving-type EQ. In this case, the HIGH band Q
knob is not shown.
E Low pass filter button
If this button is on, the HIGH band EQ will function as
a low-pass filter. In this case, the HIGH band Q knob
is not shown, and the GAIN knob will act as an on/off
switch for the low pass filter.
F EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on/off.
G Level meter
These meters indicate the peak levels before EQ and
after EQ. If the signal clips before or after EQ, the
OVER segment will light. If the corresponding channel is stereo (a ST IN channel, a MIX/MATRIX channel set to stereo, or the STEREO channel), level
meters for two channels are displayed.
H EQ graph
This graph shows the approximate response of the EQ
parameters. A pointer is shown at the peak of each
band. The response curve will change when you edit
the Q, FREQUENCY, or GAIN knobs of each band. If
the EQ or high-pass filter is on, the response curve is
highlighted.
I ATT knob
This knob adjusts the amount of attenuation/gain
immediately before input to the EQ, in a range of -96
dB to +24 dB. Use this to compensate for level
changes produced by the EQ. You can use multifunction encoder 1 to control this.
L High-pass filter button
(output channels only)
If this button is on, the LOW band EQ will function as
a high-pass filter. In this case, the LOW band Q knob
is not shown, and the GAIN knob will act as an on/off
switch for the high-pass filter.
[ATT/HPF/EQ popup window (8 ch)]
This shows the input channel or output channel EQ
settings in groups of eight channels at a time.
Use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings. This window lets you control the ATT and HPF settings of all eight channels
shown.
1
2
3
4
5
J HPF knob, HPF ON/OFF button
1 Channel select button
(input channels only)
Here you can switch on/off the high pass filter located
after attenuation and before EQ, and adjust its cutoff
frequency. You can use multifunction encoder 2 to
adjust the cutoff frequency in a range of 20–600 Hz.
This indicates the channel number, the icon selected
for that channel, and the channel name. Press these
buttons to select the channel you want to copy or
paste, or to select multiple channels.
K Q/FREQUENCY/GAIN knobs
These knobs adjust the Q, FREQUENCY (center frequency), and GAIN (amount of boost/cut) for each
band (LOW, LOW MID, HIGH MID, and HIGH).
Press a knob to select the band you want to control,
and use multifunction encoders 3–8 to make adjustments.
B EQ graph
This mini-graph shows the approximate response of
the EQ parameters. You can press the EQ graph to
switch to the one-channel window with that channel
selected. If the EQ or high-pass filter is on, the
response curve is highlighted.
C EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on/off.
D ATT knob
This knob adjusts the attenuation / gain amount before
the signal enters the EQ. You can press the ATT knob
to select it, and then use multifunction encoders 1–8 to
make adjustments.
E HPF knob, HPF ON/OFF button (input
channels only)
These controls switch the high-pass filter on/off, and
adjust its cutoff frequency. You can press the HPF
knob to select it, and then use multifunction encoders
1–8 to make adjustments.
106
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Using EQ
[EQ popup window (ALL)]
This window displays all input channels (or output
channels) at once. This page is only for display, and
does not allow the parameters to be edited. It is useful
when you need to quickly check the EQ settings for all
channels, or when you want to copy/paste EQ settings
between distant channels.
4 If you want to use the high-pass filter on an
input channel, operate the HPF knob or
HPF ON/OFF button in the ATT/HPF/EQ
popup window.
Input channels provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the four-band EQ. The HPF ON/OFF button switches the high-pass filter on/off, and the HPF
knob adjusts the cutoff frequency.
HINT
1
2
• Output channels do not have a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. However, you can turn on the high-pass
button in the popup window to use the LOW band EQ as a
high-pass filter.
• For both input channels and output channels, you can turn on
the low-pass filter button to use the HIGH band EQ as a lowpass filter.
5 If you want to copy EQ settings to another
channel, or initialize the EQ settings, use
the tool buttons of the ATT/HPF/EQ popup
window.
This indicates the channel number, the icon selected
for that channel, and the channel name. Press these
buttons to select the channel you want to copy or
paste, or to select multiple channels.
B EQ graph
This mini-graph shows the approximate response of
the EQ parameters. You can press the EQ graph to
switch to the one-channel window with that channel
selected. If the EQ or high-pass filter is on, the
response curve is highlighted.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using
the tool buttons” (→ p. 31).
HINT
• EQ settings can be saved/loaded at any time using the dedicated library (→ p. 31). Presets suitable for a variety of instruments or situations are also provided.
• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen, and use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL
section to edit the EQ and high-pass filter (→ p. 81).
• Even when the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window is displayed, you
can use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section
to control the EQ.
10
EQ and Dynamics
1 Channel select button
3 Access the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window (1
ch), and press the EQ ON button to enable
the EQ.
If the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window is displayed, you
will be able to edit all of the EQ parameters.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
107
Using dynamics
Using dynamics
Input channels provide two dynamics processors, and output channels provide one dynamics
processor.
1 Use the navigation keys to access the
• Output channels
OVERVIEW screen for the channel whose
dynamics you want to control.
DYNAMICS 1
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
The DYNAMICS 1/2 field shows the dynamics on/off
status and the amount of gain reduction.
COMPANDER-H (Hard compander)
COMPANDER-S (Soft compander)
HINT
• For details on the dynamics parameters, refer to the supplementary material at the end of this manual. (→ p. 225)
DYNAMICS 1 field
B Dynamics graph
This graph displays the approximate response of the
dynamics processor.
DYNAMICS 2 field
2 In the OVERVIEW screen, press the
DYNAMICS 1/2 field to access the DYNAMICS 1 (2) popup window.
In the DYNAMICS 1 (2) popup window, you can edit
the dynamics settings and turn the processor on/off.
There are three variations of this popup window; onechannel, eight-channel, and ALL. These windows
include the following items.
[DYNAMICS 1 (2) popup window (1ch)]
This window shows only the currently selected channel. All dynamics parameters can be viewed and
edited. This is convenient when you want to make
detailed dynamics settings for a specific channel.
2
1
5
9
7
8
1 Dynamics type buttons
Use these buttons to select one of the following four
types of dynamics.
• Input channels
DYNAMICS 1
GATE
DUCKING
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
DYNAMICS 2
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-H (Hard compander)
COMPANDER-S (Soft compander)
DE-ESSER
108
M7CL Owner’s Manual
D DYNAMICS ON/OFF button
Turns the dynamics on/off.
E KEY IN CUE button (only for GATE and
DUCKING)
This button cue-monitors the currently selected key-in
signal.
HINT
3
4
6
C Level meter
These meters show the amount of gain reduction (GR),
and the peak levels before the gate (IN) and after the
gate (OUT). If the signal clips, the OVER segment
will light. If the corresponding channel is stereo (a ST
IN channel, a MIX/MATRIX channel set to stereo, or
the STEREO channel), level meters for two channels
are displayed.
• Even if the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE (the mode in which
all channels whose [CUE] key is on are mixed for monitoring),
turning on the KEY IN CUE button will cause only the signal
of the corresponding channel to be monitored. The [CUE]
keys that had been turned on previously will be forcibly
defeated.
F THRESHOLD knob
This specifies the threshold at which the dynamics will
begin operating. You can use multifunction encoder 1
to control this.
G Other parameters
The other parameters of the dynamics processor are
shown here. The parameters displayed will depend on
the dynamics type that is selected. You can use multifunction encoders to adjust these parameters.
HINT
• For details on the parameters, refer to the supplementary
material at the end of this manual. (→ p. 225)
Using dynamics
H KEY IN FILTER button (only for GATE and
C Dynamics graph
This mini-graph displays the approximate response of
the dynamics processor.
DUCKING)
This field lets you apply a filter to the key-in signal. As
the filter to use, choose either a HPF (high pass filter),
BPF (band pass filter), or LPF (low pass filter). If all of
these buttons are off, no filter will be applied.
If a filter is enabled, you can use multifunction encoders 6/7 to adjust the Q and FREQUENCY (cutoff frequency / center frequency).
D THRESHOLD knob
This specifies the threshold at which the dynamics
processor will begin operating. You can use multifunction encoders 1–8 to control this.
E DYNAMICS ON/OFF button
This turns the dynamics processor on/off.
I KEY IN SOURCE button
This displays the KEY IN SOURCE SELECT popup
window, where you can select the key-in signal.
[DYNAMICS 1 (2) popup window (ALL)]
This window displays the dynamics settings of all
input channels (or output channels) at once. This page
is only for display, and does not allow the parameters
to be edited. It is useful when you need to quickly
check the dynamics settings for all channels, or when
you want to copy/paste dynamics settings between distant channels.
[DYNAMICS 1 (2) popup window (8 ch)]
This window shows the settings for eight channels,
including the currently selected channel. You can
switch between eight-channel groups such as 1–8 and
9–16. Compared to the one-channel display, fewer
parameters can be controlled. This window is convenient when you want to adjust the threshold or certain
other parameters while watching the adjacent channels
to the left and the right.
1
2
10
EQ and Dynamics
1
2
3
4
5
1 Channel select button
This indicates the channel number, the icon selected
for that channel, and the channel name. You can press
these buttons to select a channel or a range of channels.
B GR meter
This indicates the amount of gain reduction. If you are
using “GATE” as the dynamics type, an indicator
showing the open/closed state of the gate is shown.
Gate status
indication
(red)
(yellow)
(green)
On/off status
on
on
on
off
Open/closed
status
close
open
open
–
Gain reduction amount
30 dB or
more
0–30 dB
0 dB
–
1 Channel select button
This indicates the channel number, the icon selected
for that channel, and the channel name. You can press
these buttons to select a channel or a range of channels.
B GR meter
This indicates the amount of gain reduction. The level
display is the same as for the eight-channel window.
You can press the GR meter to switch to the one-channel popup window with that channel selected.
3 Access the DYNAMICS 1 (2) popup window
(1 ch), and press the DYNAMICS ON button
to enable the dynamics processor.
If you access the DYNAMICS 1 (2) popup window (1
ch), you’ll be able to edit all parameters.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
109
Using dynamics
4 To select a key-in signal, proceed as follows.
1
In the DYNAMICS 1 (2) popup window (1 ch),
press the KEY IN SOURCE button to access
the KEY IN SOURCE SELECT popup window.
5 If you want to copy dynamics settings to
another channel, or initialize the dynamics
settings, use the tool buttons of the popup
window.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using
the tool buttons” (→ p. 31).
HINT
• Dynamics settings can be saved/loaded at any time using the
dedicated library (→ p. 31). Presets suitable for a variety of
instruments or situations are also provided.
• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen, and use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL
section to edit the dynamics settings (→ p. 81).
• Even when the DYNAMICS 1 (2) popup window is displayed,
you can use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control the dynamics.
2
Select one of the following as the key-in signal.
• For an input channel
SELF PRE EQ
The pre-EQ (attenuator) signal of the currently selected input channel
SELF POST EQ
The post-EQ signal of the currently
selected input channel
CH 1–48
POST EQ,
STIN 1L/1R–
4L/4R POST EQ
The post-EQ signal of the corresponding
input channel (*1)
MIX OUT 13–16
The post-ON signal of the corresponding
MIX channel
*1 The selectable signals are limited to the group to which that
channel belongs, from the seven groups CH 1–8, CH 9–16,
CH 17–24, CH 25–32, CH 33–40, CH 41–48, and STIN 1L/
1R–4 L/4 R.
• For an output channel
SELF PRE EQ
The pre-EQ (attenuator) signal of the currently selected output channel
SELF POST EQ
The post-EQ signal of the currently
selected output channel
MIX 1–16
POST EQ,
MTRX 1–8
POST EQ, ST L/R,
MONO (C),
POST EQ
The post-EQ signal of the corresponding
output channel (*2)
MIX OUT 13–16
The post-ON signal of the corresponding
MIX channel
*2 The selectable signals are limited to the group to which that
channel belongs, from the four groups MIX 1–8, MIX 9–16,
MATRIX 1–8, and ST/MONO (C).
3
110
Press the CLOSE button to close the popup
window.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries
Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries
You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall EQ and dynamics settings.
EQ library
Dynamics library
There is an “INPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store/
recall EQ settings for input channels, and an “OUTPUT
EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store/recall EQ settings for
output channels.
To recall settings from a library, press the LIBRARY tool
button in the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window.
Library button
Use the “Dynamics Library” to store/recall dynamics settings. All of the M7CL’s dynamics processors use this
dynamics library. (However, the available types will differ
between an input channel’s Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2,
and an output channel’s Dynamics 1. Types that cannot be
selected cannot be recalled.)
To recall an item from the dynamics library, press the
LIBRARY tool button in the DYNAMICS 1 (2) popup
window.
Library button
For details on using the library, refer to “Using libraries”
(→ p. 31).
• You can recall 199 different settings each from the input EQ
library and from the output EQ library. 40 of the input library
items are read-only presets, and 3 of the output library items
are read-only presets.
• For details on how to access the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window,
refer to “Using EQ” (→ p. 105).
For details on using the library, refer to “Using libraries”
(→ p. 31).
10
HINT
• 199 items can be recalled from the library. 41 of these are
read-only presets.
• For details on how to access the DYNAMICS 1(2) popup window, refer to “Using dynamics” (→ p. 108).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
EQ and Dynamics
HINT
111
112
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 11
Grouping and linking
This chapter explains the DCA Group and Mute Group functions that let you
control the level or muting of multiple channels together, the Channel Link
function that links the parameters of multiple channels, and the operations
that let you copy or move parameters between channels.
About DCA Groups and Mute Groups
The M7CL provides eight DCA groups and eight mute groups that let you control the level of multiple
channels simultaneously.
DCA groups allow you to assign input channels to eight groups, so that the Centralogic section faders
1–8 can be used to control the level of all channels in each group. A single DCA fader will control the
level of all input channels belonging to the same DCA group while maintaining the level difference
between the channels. This provides a convenient way in which drum mics etc. can be grouped.
Mute groups allow you to use user-defined keys [1]–[12] to mute/unmute multiple channels in a single
operation. You can use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously. Mute groups 1–8 can be used
with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channel can exist in the same group.
Using DCA groups
This section explains how to assign input channels to the eight DCA groups and use the faders of
the Centralogic section to control them.
Assigning channels to a DCA
group
To assign a channel to a DCA group, you can either select
a specific DCA group first and then specify the channels
to be assigned to the group, or you can select a specific
channel and then specify the DCA group to which it
should be assigned.
● Selecting the channels that will belong
to a specific DCA group
Grouping and linking
11
1 In the function access area, press the CH
JOB button.
The CH JOB button lets you perform grouping, linking, and copying operations between channels. When
you press this button, the function access area will
change as follows.
NOTE
• DCA groups can be used only with input channels.
• DCA group settings are saved as part of the scene.
DCA GROUP button
M7CL Owner’s Manual
113
Using DCA groups
2 Press the DCA GROUP button to access the
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup
window.
In the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup
window you can select the channels to be assigned to
DCA groups. The popup window includes the following items.
1
4
5 Assign channels to other DCA groups in
the same way.
HINT
• You may assign a single channel to more than one DCA
group. In this case, the value will be the sum of the levels of
all assigned DCA faders.
6 When you finish making assignments,
press the CLOSE button to close the popup
window, and press the “×” symbol in the
function access area (CH JOB display).
2
You will return to the previous screen. The DCA/
MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the DCA group(s) to which each channel is
assigned. Numbers that are lit yellow in the upper line
of this field indicate the DCA groups to which that
channel belongs.
3
1 Channel display field
Channels assigned to the DCA group selected by the
DCA GROUP 1–8 buttons (3) are highlighted in yellow.
DCA/MUTE
GROUP field
B DCA GROUP ASSIGN button
Use this button to switch the mode in which you want
to assign DCA groups.
HINT
C DCA GROUP 1–8 buttons
Use these buttons to select the DCA group for which
you want to make assignments.
D CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all channels that are assigned
to the selected DCA group.
HINT
• If the [DCA] key is selected in the NAVIGATION KEYS section, you can access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
MODE popup window by pressing the Centralogic section
[SEL] key twice in rapid succession.
In this case, the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup
window will appear with the DCA GROUP 1–8 button
selected for that DCA group.
3 Use the DCA GROUP 1–8 buttons to select
• You can also access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
MODE popup window by pressing the DCA/MUTE GROUP
field in the OVERVIEW screen.
● Selecting the DCA groups to which a
specific channel will belong
1 Press a [SEL] key to select the input channel for which you want to make assignments.
2 Press any one of the encoders of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to access
the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
In this screen you can view all mix parameters for the
currently selected channel.
1
the DCA group to which you want to assign
channels.
2
HINT
• If the [DCA] key is selected in the NAVIGATION KEYS section, you can also select the assignment-destination DCA
group by pressing a [SEL] key in the Centralogic section.
3
4 Use the [SEL] keys of the INPUT section or
ST IN section to select the channels you
want to assign to the group (multiple selections are allowed).
The [SEL] keys of the assigned channels will light,
and the corresponding channels will be highlighted in
yellow in the channel display field of the window.
To cancel an assignment, press a lit [SEL] key once
again to make it go dark.
114
M7CL Owner’s Manual
1 DCA field
Here you can make DCA group settings for the currently selected channel.
B Popup button
Press this button to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP
ASSIGN MODE popup window. For details, refer to
“Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific
DCA group” (→ p. 113).
Using DCA groups
3
Use the DCA group select buttons to select
the DCA group(s) to which the currently
selected channel will be assigned (multiple
selections are allowed).
4 Select the DCA group(s) for other channels
in the same way.
Controlling DCA groups
Use the faders of the Centralogic section to control DCA
groups.
1 Assign input channels to DCA groups.
2 Using the faders of the top panel INPUT
section or ST IN section, adjust the relative
balance between the input channels
belonging to the DCA group you want to
use.
3 In the NAVIGATION KEYS section, press the
[DCA] key to make it light so that the Centralogic section will be controlling the DCA
groups.
4 Operate the Centralogic section fader corresponding to the DCA group you want to
use.
The level of the channels assigned to that DCA group
will change while preserving the level differences you
established in step 1.
NOTE
• The input faders will not operate at this time.
5 To switch a DCA group on/off, press the
Centralogic section [ON] key for that DCA
group.
When you press a Centralogic section [ON] key to
make it go dark, the channels assigned to that DCA
group will be turned off (the same state as when the
faders are lowered to the -∞ dB position).
6 To cue-monitor a DCA group, press the
11
Grouping and linking
C DCA group select buttons 1–8
These select the DCA group(s) to which the currently
selected channel will be assigned.
Centralogic section [CUE] key for that DCA
group.
When you press the Centralogic section [CUE] key to
make it light, the [CUE] keys of the channels assigned
to that DCA group will blink, and cue monitoring will
be enabled. For more about cue, refer to “Using the
Cue function” (→ p. 145).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
115
Using mute groups
Using mute groups
This section explains how to assign channels to mute groups and use the user-defined keys to
control them.
1 Channel display field
Assigning channels to mute
groups
To assign channel to mute groups, you can either select a
specific mute group and then assign channels to that mute
group, or you can select a specific channel and then specify the mute groups to which it will belong.
NOTE
• To operate a mute group, you’ll need to assign the desired channels to a mute group, and then assign MUTE MASTER to a userdefined key.
HINT
• Mute groups can be used for both input channels and output channels. Both types of channel can exist in the same group.
• Mute group settings are saved as part of the scene.
● Selecting the channels that will belong
to a specific mute group
1 In the function access area, press the CH
Channels assigned to the mute group selected by the
MUTE GROUP 1–8 buttons are highlighted in red. If
the MUTE SAFE button is selected, channels that are
temporarily excluded from all mute groups are highlighted in green.
B MUTE GROUP ASSIGN button
Use this button to switch the mode in which you want
to assign mute groups.
C MUTE GROUP 1–8 buttons
These buttons select mute groups 1–8.
D MUTE SAFE button
Use this button when you want to temporarily exclude
a specific channel from all mute groups. The channel
display field shows the channels that are temporarily
excluded from the mute groups. For more about mute
safe, refer to “Using the Mute Safe function” (→
p. 119).
E CLEAR ALL button
You can press this button to clear the channels that are
assigned to the mute groups.
3 Use the MUTE GROUP 1–8 buttons to select
JOB button.
the mute group to which you want to assign
channels.
The function access area will change as follows.
4 Press the [SEL] key of the input channels /
output channels (you may select more than
one) that you want to assign.
The [SEL] keys of the assigned channels will light,
and the corresponding channels will be highlighted in
red in the channel display field of the window. To cancel an assignment, press a lit [SEL] key once again to
make it go dark.
MUTE GROUP button
5 Assign channels to other mute groups in
2 Press the MUTE GROUP button to access
the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE
popup window.
In this popup window you can select the channels that
will be assigned to each mute group. The popup window includes the following items.
1
116
M7CL Owner’s Manual
HINT
• You are free to assign a single channel to more than one
mute group.
6 When you finish making assignments,
press the CLOSE button to close the popup
window, and press the “×” symbol in the
function access area (CH JOB display).
5
2
3
the same way.
4
You will return to the previous screen. The DCA/
MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the mute group(s) to which each channel is
assigned. Numbers that are lit red in the lower line of
this field indicate the mute groups to which that channel belongs.
Using mute groups
Controlling mute groups
To use mute groups, you must first assign the Mute On/Off
function for a mute group 1–8 to a user-defined key, and
then operate that user-defined key.
DCA/MUTE
GROUP field
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
● Selecting the mute groups to which a
specific channel will belong
1 Press the [SEL] key of the input channel /
output channel that you want to assign.
2 Press any one of the encoders of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to access
the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
In this screen you can view the mix parameters for the
currently selected channel.
1
2
2 In the upper left of the screen, press the
USER SETUP button to access the USER
SETUP popup window.
4
This popup window lets you limit the functionality
that can be used by the user, and also lets you make
system-wide settings. This window includes several
pages, which you can switch between using the tabs
located at the bottom of the window.
1 MUTE field
Here you can make mute group settings for the currently selected channel.
3 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to
select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
B Popup button
The USER DEFINED KEYS page lets you assign
functions to user defined keys [1]–[12].
Press this button to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP
ASSIGN MODE popup window. For details, refer to
“Selecting the channels assigned to a specific mute
group.”
C MUTE SAFE indicator
11
Grouping and linking
3
1
This will light if the currently selected channel is set to
Mute Safe. For more about mute safe, refer to “Using
the Mute Safe function” (→ p. 119).
D Mute group select buttons 1–8
These select the mute group(s) to which the currently
selected channel will be assigned.
3 Use the mute group select buttons to select
the mute group(s) to which the currently
selected channel will be assigned (multiple
selections are allowed).
4 Select the mute group(s) for other channels
in the same way.
1 User defined keys popup buttons
4 Press the popup button for the user-defined
key to which you want to assign the mute
on/off function.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window
will appear.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
117
Using mute groups
5 Choose “MUTE MASTER” in the FUNCTION
column, and choose “MUTE GROUP x”
(where “x” is the mute group number) in the
PARAMETER 1 column. Then press the OK
button.
To select an item in each column, use ↑/↓ buttons or
the multifunction encoders. When you press the OK
button, the Mute On/Off function for the specified
mute group will be assigned to the user-defined key
you selected in step 4, and you will return to the USER
DEFINED KEYS page.
7 When you have finished assigning func-
tions to user-defined keys, press the “×”
symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS
page.
8 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to close the SETUP screen.
9 To mute a mute group, press the user-
defined key [1]–[12] that’s assigned to the
desired mute group.
The LED of the user-defined key will light, and all
channels belonging to the selected mute group will be
muted. At this time, the [ON] key of the muted channels will blink. You can turn on more than one userdefined key to mute multiple mute groups.
10 To defeat muting of a mute group, press the
user-defined key that you lit in step 9.
HINT
• Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group, it will not be
affected by operations of the user-defined key if the [ON] key
of that channel is already turned off to begin with.
HINT
• For more about user-defined keys, refer to “User-defined
keys” (→ p. 200).
6 In the same way, assign the Mute On/Off
function for another mute group to a different user-defined key.
118
M7CL Owner’s Manual
• If you cancel the assignment of the user-defined key, that
mute group will be forcibly set to the unmuted state.
If, after synchronizing with M7CL Editor, the system goes
offline, mute groups not assigned to user-defined keys will
forcibly be un-muted.
Using mute groups
Using the Mute Safe function
If necessary, specific channels belonging to a mute group
can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations
(Mute Safe).
1 In the function access area, press the CH
JOB button.
2 Press the MUTE GROUP button to access
the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE
popup window.
1
2
1 Channel display field
When the MUTE SAFE button is on, channels that are
temporarily excluded from the mute group are highlighted in this field.
11
Grouping and linking
B MUTE SAFE button
This lets you select the channels that will be set to
Mute Safe status.
3 Press the MUTE SAFE button.
4 Press a [SEL] key to select the channel(s)
you want to exclude from mute groups
(multiple selections are allowed).
The [SEL] key will light, and the corresponding channel in the channel display field of the window will be
highlighted in green. You can cancel the Mute Safe
status by pressing a lit [SEL] key once again to make it
go dark.
Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected
when you mute a mute group to which that channel
belongs.
HINT
• Mute Safe settings are not saved in the scene. They will
remain valid until you cancel the settings.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
119
The Channel Link function
The Channel Link function
Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ between
input channels.
The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices.
• Head amp settings
• EQ settings
• Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
• On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
• Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses
• On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• Fader operations
• [ON] key operations
Two or more input channels that are linked are called a “link group.” There is no limit on the number of link groups you can create, or on the number and combinations of input channels that can
be included in these link groups. However, the types of parameters that are linked will be the
same for all link groups.
Linking the desired input channels
1
Here’s how to link specific parameters of input channels.
HINT
• Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene.
• Recall Safe does not affect channel link. When you recall a scene,
the link status will always be reproduced.
1 In the function access area, press the CH
JOB button.
CH LINK button
2
3
1 Channel display field
When you create a link group, the corresponding
channels will be highlighted. If there are two or more
link groups, each group is shown in a different color.
HINT
• All parameters of ST IN channel L/R are always linked.
2 Press the CH LINK button to open the CH
LINK MODE popup window.
In this popup window you can view the channels that
are linked and specify the parameters that will be
linked. The window includes the following items.
120
M7CL Owner’s Manual
B LINK PARAMETER field
Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters
that you want to be linked. These settings are shared
by all link groups.
C SEND PARAMETER field
If you have turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND,
MATRIX ON, or MATRIX send buttons in the LINK
PARAMETER field, use the buttons of this field to
specify the send-destination bus(es).
The Channel Link function
3 Use the buttons of the LINK PARAMETER
field to select the parameter(s) that will be
linked (multiple selections are allowed).
The table below lists the parameters you can select in
the LINK PARAMETER field.
HA button
Head amp settings
EQ button
EQ settings (including ATT/HPF)
DYNAMICS 1, 2 button
Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
MIX ON button
On/off status of signals sent to
MIX buses
MIX SEND button
Send levels of signals sent to
MIX buses
MATRIX ON button
On/off status of signals sent to
MATRIX buses
MATRIX SEND button
Send levels of signals sent to
MATRIX buses
FADER button
Fader operations
CH ON button
[ON] key operations
HINT
• If you link Dynamic 1 and 2 for two or more input channels,
the parameter values will be linked, but the key-in signals are
not linked. For more about dynamics, refer to “Using dynamics” (→ p. 108).
HINT
• If you want to link three or more channels, hold down the linksource [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key of
each channel you want to add to the link group.
• When you press the [SEL] key of a channel belonging to a
link group to make it light, the [SEL] keys of all channels
belonging to the same link group will blink.
• If you link an INPUT channel to a ST IN channel, parameters
that do not exist for a ST IN channel will be ignored.
6 If you want to add a new channel to an
existing link group, hold down any [SEL]
key within the group and press the [SEL]
key that you want to add to the group.
HINT
• If the link-destination channel is already assigned to another
link group, its assignment to the previous group will be cancelled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group.
7 To remove a channel from a link group, hold
down any [SEL] key in the same link group,
and press the [SEL] key of the channel that
you want to remove.
• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS 1, 2 button, library
recall operations will also be linked.
11
4 If you turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND,
Grouping and linking
MATRIX ON, or MATRIX send buttons in
step 3, use the buttons of the SEND
PARAMETER field to specify the bus(es) for
which you want operations to be linked
(multiple selections are allowed).
The table below lists the parameters you can select in
the SEND PARAMETER field.
MX 1–16 buttons
MIX buses 1–16
MT 1–8 buttons
MATRIX buses 1–8
NOTE
• If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, send
on/off and send level will not be linked.
5 To link channels, hold down the [SEL] key
of the link-source input channel and press
the [SEL] key of the link-destination channel.
At this time, the values of the parameters you selected
in steps 3 and 4 will be copied from the link-source to
the link-destination channel. Subsequent operations of
the parameters you selected in steps 3 and 4 will be
linked between channels belonging to the same link
group.
The current link status is shown in the channel display
field of the window.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
121
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
You can copy or move mix parameters between channels, or restore the parameters of a specific
channel to their default settings.
Copying the parameters of a
channel
You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to
another channel. When you execute the copy operation,
the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination.
You can copy between the following combinations of
channels.
• Between input channels
• Between the STEREO L/R channel and MONO channel
• Between MIX channels
• Between MATRIX channels
1 In the function access area, press the CH
JOB button to access the CH JOB menu.
C COPY TARGET field
If you’ve selected a MIX channel, MATRIX channel,
or STEREO/MONO channel as the copy-source, use
the buttons of this field to select the parameters that
will be copied. You may turn both buttons on if
desired.
If both buttons are on, the following parameters will
be copied.
• MODULE PARAMETERS button
........... All parameters of the copy-source
channel
• SENDS button
........... On/off status and send level settings
of the send signals sent to the copysource channel
D COPY
Executes the copy.
3 To select the copy-source channel, press
the corresponding [SEL] key to make it
light.
The corresponding channel is highlighted in the
SOURCE CH field of the window.
When you choose the copy-source channel, the DESTINATION CHs field is automatically emboldened,
allowing you to select the copy-destination.
If you want to re-select the copy-source channel, press
the SOURCE CH field.
COPY button
2 Press the COPY button to access the CH
COPY MODE popup window.
This popup window lets you copy channel settings.
The window contains the following items.
1
NOTE
• Copy settings can be made only in the order of “copy-source”
→ “copy-destination.”
4 To select the copy-destination channel(s),
2
press the corresponding [SEL] key to make
it light (multiple selections are allowed).
3
4
The corresponding channel(s) is/are highlighted in the
DESTINATION CHs field of the window. The channels that can be selected will depend on the channel
you selected in step 3.
If you want to defeat all of the selected copy-destination channels, press the DESTINATION CHs field.
5 If you selected a MIX/MATRIX channel as
1 SOURCE CH field
Indicates the channel that is selected as the copysource. You can press this field to cancel the channel
that is shown.
B DESTINATION CHs field
Indicates the channel that is selected as the copy-destination. You can press this field to cancel the channel
that is shown.
122
M7CL Owner’s Manual
the copy-source, use the buttons of the
COPY TARGET field to select the parameters you want to copy.
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
6 To execute the copy, press the COPY but-
1
ton.
2
The copy will be executed, and the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination channel(s). After the copy has been executed, the SOURCE
CH field and DESTINATION CHs field will return to
an unset state.
7 To close the CH COPY MODE popup window, press the CLOSE button.
1 SOURCE CH field
Moving the parameters of a
channel
This indicates the move-source channel. You can press
this field to cancel the channel that is shown.
The settings of a specific input channel can be moved to a
different input channel. When you execute a Move operation, the numbering of the channels between the movesource and move-destination will move forward or backward by one.
5
3
2
C MOVE
Executes the move.
4
3
5
4
Move by one
You can move settings between the following combinations of channels.
• Between INPUT channels
• Between ST IN channels
1 In the function access area, press the CH
the corresponding [SEL] key to make it
light.
The corresponding channel is highlighted in the
SOURCE CH field of the window.
When you select the move-source channel, the DESTINATION CH field will automatically be emboldened, allowing you to select the move-destination.
If you want to re-select the move-source channel,
press the SOURCE CH field.
NOTE
• Settings for the Move operation can be made only in the order
of “move-source” → “move-destination.”
JOB button to access the CH JOB menu.
11
Grouping and linking
1
2
B DESTINATION CH field
This indicates the move-destination channel. You can
press this field to cancel the channel that is shown.
3 To select the move-source channel, press
Move
1
3
4 To select the move-destination channel,
press the corresponding [SEL] key to make
it light.
MOVE button
The corresponding channel is highlighted in the DESTINATION CH field of the window. The channels that
can be selected will depend on the channel you
selected in step 3.
If you want to defeat the selected move-destination
channel, press the DESTINATION CH field.
5 To execute the move, press the MOVE button.
2 Press the MOVE button to access the CH
MOVE MODE popup window.
This popup window lets you move channel settings.
The settings of all channels between the move-source
and move-destination will shift toward the movesource by one channel, and the channel settings will
move from the move-source to the move-destination.
When the Move has been executed, the SOURCE CH
field and DESTINATION CH field will return to an
un-set state.
6 To close the CH MOVE MODE popup window, press the CLOSE button.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
123
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
Initializing the parameters of a
channel
If desired, you can restore the parameters of a channel to
an initialized state. This operation can be performed on
any channel(s).
1
In the function access area, press the CH
JOB button to access the CH JOB menu.
CLEAR button
2 Press the CLEAR button to access the CH
CLEAR MODE popup window.
This popup window lets you initialize parameters.
1
2
1 TARGET CHs field
In this field, select the channel(s) that you want to initialize. You can press this field to cancel the selected
channel.
B CLEAR
Executes the initialization.
3 To select the channel(s) to be initialized,
press the corresponding [SEL] key to make
it light (multiple selections are allowed).
The corresponding channel(s) is/are highlighted in the
TARGET CHs field of the window.
If you want to de-select all of the selected channels,
press the TARGET CHs field.
124
M7CL Owner’s Manual
4 To execute the initialization, press the
CLEAR button.
The parameters of the selected channel(s) will be initialized.
After initialization, the TARGET CHs field will return
to a state in which nothing is selected.
5 To close the CH CLEAR MODE popup window, press the CLOSE button.
Chapter 12
Scene memory
This chapter explains how to perform scene memory operations.
About scene memories
Using scene memories
12
Scene memory
On the M7CL, the mix parameter settings and input/output port patching can be assigned a
name and stored into memory (and later recalled from memory) as a “scene.”
Each scene is assigned a number in the range of 000–300. Scene 000 is a read-only scene used
for initializing the mix parameters, and scenes 001–300 are writable scenes.
Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] keys, as well as the following
parameters.
• Input/output port patching
• Bus settings
• Head amp settings
• EQ settings
• Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
• Rack (GEQ/effect) settings
• Pan/balance settings
• Insert/direct out settings
• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses
• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• DCA group settings
• Mute group settings
• Channel link settings
This section explains how to store and recall the M7CL’s mix parameters as “scenes.”
Storing a scene
To store the current mix settings as a scene memory, you
can either use the keys of the top panel SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section, or use the SCENE LIST window.
● Using the keys of the SCENE MEMORY/
MONITOR section
1 Use the pad controls of the top panel or the
buttons in the touch screen to set the mix
parameters as desired.
2 Use the SCENE MEMORY [▲]/[▼] keys to
select the store-destination scene number.
The number of the currently selected scene is shown in
the SCENE field of the function access area. When
you select a new scene number, the number will blink.
This blinking indicates that the displayed scene number is different than the currently-loaded scene number.
SCENE MEMORY
[▲]/[▼] keys
M7CL Owner’s Manual
125
Using scene memories
1
23
5
B COMMENT field
Press this field to select it, and enter a comment for the
scene. You can use this as a memorandum for each
scene (maximum 32 characters).
HINT
• The title and comment can be edited later (→ p. 130).
4
1 SCENE field
This field always displays general information about
the scene. You can press this field to access the
SCENE LIST window, where you can view and edit
more detailed settings for the scene.
B Scene number
This indicates the number of the currently selected
scene.
C R symbol (READ ONLY symbol) / Protect
symbol
Read-only scenes are indicated by an R symbol (Readonly symbol) displayed here. Write-protected scenes
are indicated by a Protect symbol.
4 Assign a title or comment to the scene as
desired.
For details on entering text, refer to “Entering names”
(→ p. 30).
5 Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key or
the STORE button located in the lower part
of the SCENE STORE popup window.
The SCENE STORE popup window will close, and a
dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation.
D Scene title
This displays the title of the currently selected scene.
E E symbol (EDIT symbol)
This symbol will appear when you edit the mix parameters of the currently-loaded scene. This symbol indicates that you must execute the Store operation if you
want to keep the changes you made.
HINT
• If you hold down either of the SCENE MEMORY [▲]/[▼] keys,
the scene number will change consecutively.
• If you press the SCENE MEMORY [▲]/[▼] keys simultaneously, the SCENE field indication will return to the number
of the currently-loaded scene.
NOTE
• You cannot Store to a scene number for which the Protect
symbol or R symbol is displayed.
3 Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key.
The SCENE STORE popup window will appear,
allowing you to assign a title or comment to the scene.
1
2
1 SCENE TITLE field
Press this field to select it, and enter a title for the
scene (maximum 16 characters).
126
M7CL Owner’s Manual
6 To execute the Store operation, press the
OK button.
The current mix settings will be stored to the scene
number you selected in step 2. When storing is completed, the scene number in the function access area
will stop blinking. If you decide to cancel the Store
operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the
OK button.
HINT
• You have the option of making settings so that the Store Confirmation dialog box does not appear (→ p. 198). In this case,
pressing the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key once will display the SCENE STORE popup window as usual, and pressing it once again will execute the Store operation.
Alternatively, you can rapidly press the SCENE MEMORY
[STORE] key twice to store without seeing the SCENE
STORE popup window.
NOTE
• If you store to a scene number in which a scene is already
stored, the previous data will be overwritten. It is possible to
cancel a scene store operation immediately after overwriting
a scene (→ p. 128).
Using scene memories
● Using the SCENE LIST window
1 Use the pad controls of the top panel or the
buttons in the touch screen to set the mix
parameters as desired.
2 Press the SCENE field in the function
access area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, where you can
perform various scene-related operations. The window
includes the following items.
1
HINT
• You can select multiple scene numbers as the store-destination. To do so, turn the MULTI SELECT button on and turn a
multifunction encoder, or press the multifunction encoder
while you turn it.
• If you selected multiple scenes as the store-destination, the
same contents will be stored in all scene numbers. This is
convenient when you want to create several variations of the
same mix settings.
• You can also use the SCENE MEMORY [▲]/[▼] keys to
select scene numbers.
NOTE
• Note that you can’t use the STORE UNDO button if you’ve
stored to multiple scenes simultaneously.
4 Press the STORE button.
The SCENE STORE popup window will appear,
allowing you to assign a title or comment to the scene.
5 Assign a title or comment to the scene as
desired.
For details on entering text, refer to “Entering names”
(→ p. 30).
6 Press the STORE button located at the bottom of the SCENE STORE popup window.
1 Scene list
This list shows the scenes that are stored in scene
memory. The row highlighted in blue indicates that
this scene number is selected for operations. A readonly scene is indicated by the R symbol, and a writeprotected scene is indicated by the protect symbol.
B STORE button
This stores the current mix settings into the location
currently selected in the scene list.
C STORE UNDO button
This button cancels (Undo) or re-executes (Redo) the
most recently performed scene Store operation. This
button is valid only immediately after you’ve performed an overwrite-store.
D Scene select knob
This knob lets you rapidly select the desired scene
number. You can use any of the multifunction encoders
to operate this knob. In addition, you can select multiple scenes by pressing the multifunction encoder while
you turn it.
E MULTI SELECT button
You can select multiple scenes by switching this button on and turning the multifunction encoder. (This is
the same result as pressing the scene select knob while
turning it.)
The SCENE STORE popup window will close, and a
dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation.
7 To execute the Store operation, press the
OK button.
The current mix settings will be stored to the scene
number you selected in step 3. If you decide to cancel
the Store operation, press the CANCEL button instead
of the OK button.
8 If you want to cancel a scene overwrite-
12
Scene memory
54 32
store operation, press the STORE UNDO
button.
Immediately after overwrite-storing a scene, you can
use the STORE UNDO button to undo (cancel) the
most recently executed scene store operation. When
you press the STORE UNDO button, a dialog box will
ask you to confirm the Undo operation. Press the OK
button if you want to execute the Undo. After executing the Undo, you can press the STORE UNDO button
once again to Redo (re-execute) the store operation.
NOTE
• The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after
overwrite-storing.
HINT
• You can also assign the same function as the STORE UNDO
button to a user-defined key. (→ p. 200)
3 Turn one of the multifunction encoders to
select the store-destination scene number.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
127
Using scene memories
Recalling a scene
Here’s how to recall a stored scene from scene memory.
You can recall a scene either by using the keys of the top
panel SCENE MEMORY / MONITOR section, or by
using the SCENE LIST window.
1
● Using the keys of the SCENE MEMORY/
MONITOR section
1 Use the SCENE MEMORY [▲]/[▼] keys to
select the scene number that you want to
recall.
The number of the currently selected scene is shown in
the SCENE field of the function access area.
4
23
1 Scene list
SCENE MEMORY
[▲]/[▼] keys
This list shows the scenes that are stored in scene
memory. The row highlighted in blue indicates that
this scene number is selected for operations.
B RECALL button
This recalls the scene that is currently selected in the
scene list.
C RECALL UNDO button
This button cancels (Undo) or re-executes (Redo) the
most recently performed scene Recall operation.
SCENE field
2 Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall operation.
D Scene select knob
This knob lets you rapidly select the desired scene
number. You can use any of the multifunction encoders
to operate this knob.
2 Turn one of the multifunction encoders to
select the recall-source scene number.
HINT
• You can also use the SCENE MEMORY [▲]/[▼] keys to
select scene numbers.
3
To execute the Recall operation, press the
OK button.
The scene you selected in step 1 will be recalled. If
you decide to cancel the Recall operation, press the
CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
HINT
• You have the option of making settings so that the Recall
Confirmation dialog box does not appear in step 2 (→ p. 198).
3 Press the RECALL button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall operation.
4 To execute the Recall operation, press the
OK button.
The scene you selected in step 2 will be recalled. If
you decide to cancel the Recall operation, press the
CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
5 If you want to cancel the scene Recall,
press the RECALL UNDO button.
● Using the SCENE LIST window
1 Press the SCENE field in the function
access area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, where you can
perform various operations for scene memory.
A dialog box asking you to confirm the Undo operation will appear; press the OK button if you want to
execute the operation. After undoing, you can press
the STORE UNDO button once again to Redo (re-execute).
HINT
• You can also assign the same function as the RECALL UNDO
button to a user-defined key. (→ p. 200)
• You can also use MIDI messages (program changes) to recall
scenes. (→ p. 184)
128
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Using scene memories
Using user-defined keys to recall
You can use the user-defined keys to directly recall a
selected scene with a single keystroke, or to step through
the scenes.
To do this, you must first assign a scene recall operation to
a user-defined key. The following recall operations can be
assigned to a user-defined key.
3 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to
select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
The USER DEFINED KEYS page lets you assign
functions to user defined keys [1]–[12].
User defined keys
popup buttons
• INC RECALL
...........Immediately recalls the scene of the
number that follows the currently loaded
scene.
• DEC RECALL
...........Immediately recalls the scene of the
number that precedes the currently
loaded scene.
HINT
• If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows
the currently loaded scene, the closest scene number in
which a scene is stored will be recalled.
• DIRECT RECALL .
...........Directly recalls the scene number that
you assigned to the user-defined key.
When you press a user-defined key to
which this function is assigned, the
assigned scene will be recalled immediately.
4 Press the popup button for the user-defined
key to which you want to assign a function.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window
will appear.
12
Scene memory
To assign one of these functions to a user-defined key so
that a scene can be recalled in a single keystroke, proceed
as follows.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
5 In the FUNCTION row, select “SCENE.”
Proceed as follows, depending on the function you
want to assign.
● To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL
Choose “INC RECALL” or “DEC RECALL” in the
PARAMETER 1 column.
● To assign DIRECT RECALL
Choose “DIRECT RECALL” in the PARAMETER
1 column, and choose “SCENE #xxx” (xxx is the
scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column.
2 In the upper left of the screen, press the
USER SETUP button to access the USER
SETUP popup window.
This window includes several pages, which you can
switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of
the window.
6 When you’ve finished making settings,
press the OK button to close the popup
window.
If desired, assign scene-recall functions to other userdefined keys in the same way.
7 Press the user-defined key to which you
assigned a recall function.
The corresponding scene will be recalled.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
129
Editing scene memories
Editing scene memories
This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory, edit their titles, and copy/
paste them.
HINT
Sorting and renaming scene
memories
You can use a dedicated window to sort scene memories in
alphabetical order of their titles or in order of the date on
which they were created. You can also edit their titles.
1 Press the SCENE field in the function
access area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, where you can
perform various operations for scene memory. You can
use tabs to switch the right half of the SCENE LIST
window between three different fields.
• To change the default setting for the way in which the list is
sorted (ascending or descending order of scene number),
access the USER SETUP popup window PREFERENCE tab,
and change the “LIST ORDER.” (→ p. 198)
B Scene number
This is the scene number 000–300. You can also press
this scene number to select a scene.
C TITLE
This is the name assigned to each scene (maximum 16
characters). You can press this area to access the
SCENE STORE popup window, where you can assign
a title or comment to the scene.
D R symbol (READ ONLY symbol) / Protect
symbol
A read-only scene is indicated by the R symbol, and a
write-protected scene is indicated by the protect symbol. By pressing this area for scenes 001–300, you can
switch between protected and un-protected settings.
1
2
E Scene select knob
This knob selects a scene number shown in the scene
list. You can use any of the multifunction encoders to
operate this knob.
In addition, you can select multiple scenes by pressing
the multifunction encoder while you turn it.
1 SCENE field
B COMMENT field
2 Press the COMMENT tab at the bottom of
the SCENE LIST window.
The COMMENT field will appear in the right half of
the SCENE LIST window.
2
3
4
J
K
L
8
F MULTI SELECT button
You can select multiple scenes by switching this button on and turning the multifunction encoder. (This is
the same result as pressing the scene select knob while
turning it.)
G Store/Recall buttons
These buttons are used to store/recall scenes. You can
also undo (cancel) or redo (re-execute) store/recall
operations. For details, refer to “Using scene memories” (→ p. 125).
1
9
I COMMENT field
Here you can assign a comment to each scene, and
view the status of the Focus function or Fade function
settings.
5
6
7
M
1 Scene list
This lists the scenes that are stored in scene memory.
The line highlighted in blue indicates the scene currently selected for operations.
130
H Tool buttons
Use these buttons to perform operations such as Copy
and Paste on the scenes stored in scene memory. For
details, refer to “Scene memory editing” (→ p. 132).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
J Comment
This is the comment assigned to each scene (maximum 32 characters). You can press this area to access
the SCENE STORE popup window, where you can
assign a title or comment to the scene.
Editing scene memories
K STATUS field
This field indicates the status of each scene. For scenes
for which something other than the ALL button is
selected in the Focus function (→ p. 135), and for
scenes in which the Fade function is enabled (→
p. 139), the “FOCUS” and “FADING” indications will
respectively be lit.
5 If you want to edit the title or comment of a
scene, press the TITLE field or COMMENT
field of the scene to access the SCENE
TITLE EDIT or SCENE COMMENT EDIT
popup window.
For details on entering text, refer to “Entering names”
(→ p. 30).
L Time stamp
This indicates the date and time at which the scene
was last stored, as the year/month/date and hours/minutes/seconds.
1
2
M Field select tabs
These tabs switch the fields that are shown in the right
half of the SCENE LIST window. For details on the
Focus field refer to “Using the Focus function” (→
p. 135), and on the Fade Time field refer to “Using the
Fade function” (→ p. 139).
3 To select a scene number, turn any of the
multifunction encoders on the top panel.
The line highlighted in blue in the scene list indicates
the scene currently selected for operations.
1 SCENE TITLE field
• You can also use the SCENE MEMORY [▲]/[▼] keys to
select scene numbers.
• The operation that occurs when you press the SCENE MEMORY [▲]/[▼] keys (whether the number will move up/down, or
the list itself will move up/down) can be specified in the
PREFERENCE screen SCENE UP/DOWN field.
You can press this field to select it, and enter a title for
the scene (maximum 16 characters).
B COMMENT field
You can press this field to select it, and enter a comment for the scene. (The maximum is 32 characters.)
HINT
4 To sort the list, press one of the column
headers “NO.”, “TITLE,” “COMMENT,” or
“TIME STAMP” at the top of the scene list
and COMMENT field.
The list will be sorted as follows, according to the
location you pressed.
1
2
3
4
• You cannot edit the title or comment of a read-only scene or a
write-protected scene.
6 To enable/disable the protect setting, press
the protect symbol.
A protect symbol is displayed for write-protected
scenes; these scenes cannot be overwritten.
12
Scene memory
HINT
NOTE
• The R symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled.
1 NO.
Sorted in order of scene number.
B TITLE
Sorted in numeric/alphabetical order of title.
C COMMENT
Sorted in numeric/alphabetical order of comment.
7 Use the tool buttons to edit the scene memory.
For details, refer to the section “Scene memory editing” that follows.
D TIME STAMP
Sorted in order of date of creation.
HINT
• By pressing the same location again, you can change the
direction (forward or backward) in which the list is sorted.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
131
Editing scene memories
Scene memory editing
Copying/pasting a scene
The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied/pasted
to other scene numbers, or cleared (erased).
Here’s how to copy a scene into buffer memory, and then
paste it to a different scene number.
1 Press the SCENE field in the function
1 Press the SCENE field in the function
access area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, where you can
perform various operations for scene memory. Scene
memories are edited using the buttons shown in the
upper part of the SCENE LIST window.
Each button has the following function.
1
2
3
4
5
6
access area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear.
2 Turn any one of the multifunction encoders
to select the copy-source scene number,
and then press the COPY button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Copy operation.
1 COPY button
Copies a scene into a memory buffer (a temporary
storage area). For details on how to use this, refer to
“Copying/pasting a scene” that follows.
B PASTE button
This button pastes a scene (previously copied into the
memory buffer) into another scene number. For details
on how to use this, refer to “Copying/pasting a scene”
that follows.
C CLEAR button
This button clears (erases) the selected scene. For
details on how to use this, refer to “Clearing a scene”
(→ p. 133).
D CUT button
Cuts a scene and places it in the memory buffer.
Scenes following the scene number you cut will be
moved forward. For details on how to use this, refer to
“Cutting a scene” (→ p. 134).
3 To execute the copy, press the OK button.
The scene you selected in step 2 will be saved in the
buffer memory.
NOTE
• Be aware that if you copy/cut another scene before you paste,
the other scene will be overwritten to the buffer memory.
• You cannot select multiple scenes as the copy-source.
4 Turn any one of the multifunction encoders
to select the paste-destination scene number, and then press the PASTE button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Paste operation.
E INSERT button
Inserts a scene from the memory buffer at the location
of a different scene number. Scene numbers following
the inserted position will be moved backward. For
details on how to use this, refer to “Inserting a scene”
(→ p. 134).
F UNDO button
This button cancels the most recently-executed scene
editing operation. If you’ve accidentally cleared an
important scene, you can press this key to return to the
state prior to editing the scene.
HINT
• You can select multiple paste-destination scenes. To do so,
turn the MULTI SELECT button on and turn a multifunction
encoder, or press the multifunction encoder while you turn it.
In this case, the same content will be pasted to all selected
scenes.
• A copied scene can also be inserted (→ p. 134).
NOTE
• The UNDO button cannot be used if you’ve simultaneously
edited multiple scenes.
NOTE
• If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the PASTE
button is not available.
2 Perform the desired editing operation.
For details on the procedure, refer to the following
explanations.
132
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Editing scene memories
OK button.
The scene stored in the buffer memory will be pasted
to the scene number you selected in step 4. If you
decide to cancel the Paste operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
NOTE
• Be aware that when you paste to a scene number in which a
scene has already been stored, the existing scene will be
overwritten.
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be
pasted.
Clearing a scene
Here’s how to clear a specified scene.
1 Press the SCENE field in the function
access area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear.
2 Turn any one of the multifunction encoders
to select the scene number that you want to
clear, and press the CLEAR button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear operation.
HINT
• You may select multiple scenes to be cleared. To do so, turn
the MULTI SELECT button on and turn a multifunction
encoder, or press the multifunction encoder while you turn it.
3 To execute the Clear operation, press the
OK button.
The scene number(s) you selected in step 2 will be
cleared. If you decide to cancel the Clear operation,
press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
NOTE
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be
cleared.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
12
Scene memory
5 To execute the paste operation, press the
133
Editing scene memories
Cutting a scene
Here’s how to cut one or more scenes. When you cut a
scene, the scenes of subsequent numbers will move forward. If you cut a single scene, you’ll be able to paste or
insert it at the desired location.
1 Press the SCENE field in the function
access area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear.
2 Turn any one of the multifunction encoders
to select the scene number that you want to
cut, and press the CUT button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Cut operation.
Inserting a scene
Here’s how a scene held in the buffer memory can be
inserted at the desired scene number location.
1 Press the SCENE field in the function
access area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear.
2 Perform the Copy operation (→ p. 132) or
Cut operation so that the scene you want to
insert is placed in the buffer memory.
NOTE
• You cannot copy or cut multiple scenes as the source.
3 Turn any one of the multifunction encoders
to select the insert-destination scene number, and then press the INSERT button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Insert operation.
NOTE
• You may select multiple scenes to be cut. If you cut multiple
scenes, the scenes of the selected region will be cut, and the
subsequent scenes will move forward by the corresponding
number.
• If you intend to paste or insert a scene, you must select only
one scene to cut.
• The CUT button cannot be used if the scene list is sorted in
any other way than by the “NO.” column.
3 To execute the Cut operation, press the OK
button.
The scene(s) you selected in step 2 will be cut, and the
scenes of subsequent numbers will be moved forward.
At this time, the scene that was cut will be held in the
buffer memory (unless two or more scenes were cut).
HINT
• If you select multiple scenes as the insert-destination, the
same scene will be inserted for the selected number of time.
NOTE
• The INSERT button cannot be used if the scene list is sorted
in any other way than by the “NO.” column.
• If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the INSERT
button is not available.
• The INSERT button cannot be used if the Insert operation
would cause the number of stored scenes to exceed 300.
NOTE
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cut.
4 To execute the Insert operation, press the
OK button.
4 If desired, you can paste (→ p. 132) or insert
the cut scene (that was held in the buffer
memory).
NOTE
• Be aware that if you copy or cut a different scene before you
paste or insert, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite
the scene in the buffer memory.
134
M7CL Owner’s Manual
The scene stored in the buffer memory will be insert at
the scene number you selected in step 3. If you
selected multiple scenes as the insert-destination, the
same scene will be inserted multiple times starting at
the scene number you selected. Scenes that were
stored in subsequent numbers following that location
will be moved backward by the number of scenes that
were inserted.
Using the Focus function
Using the Focus function
“Focus” is a function that lets you specify the parameters that will be updated when you recall a
scene. For example, it is convenient to use this if you want to recall only the input channel settings of a certain scene.
HINT
• As a function similar to Focus, there is also a “Recall Safe” function that lets you select channels and parameters
to be excluded from recall operations (→ p. 136). However while the Focus function is specified for each scene,
Recall Safe settings are common to all scenes.
3 Use the buttons other than “ALL” to select
access area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, where you can
perform various operations for scene memory.
the parameters that will be subject to recall
for each scene.
These buttons correspond to the following parameters
(multiple selections are allowed).
Button name
1
2
1 SCENE field
B FOCUS tab
2 Press the FOCUS tab at the bottom of the
Rack settings
HA
Head amp settings
IN PATCH
Input channel patching
OUT PATCH
Output channel patching
IN
Input channel parameters (including DCA
group settings)
OUT
Output channel parameters
WITH SEND
On/off status and send level settings for signals
sent from input channels to MIX buses and
MATRIX bus (shown only if the OUT button is on)
SCENE LIST window.
The FOCUS field will appear in the right half of the
SCENE LIST window.
1
Corresponding parameters
RACK
HINT
• The WITH SEND button is shown only if the OUT button is on.
However if both the IN button and OUT button are on, the
parameters corresponding to WITH SEND will automatically
be subject to recall.
12
Scene memory
1 Press the SCENE field in the function
4 If you want to cancel the restrictions you
specified in step 3, so that all parameters
will be subject to recall, turn the ALL button
on.
When you turn on the ALL button, all other buttons for
that scene will be turned off. Turning on any other button will turn off the ALL button.
5 Recall a scene for which you’ve made
Focus settings.
1 FOCUS field
In this field you can make settings for the Focus function.
The buttons in this field correspond to the scene list
shown in the left side of the SCENE LIST window.
The CURRENT SETTING field lets you make Focus
settings that will be used the next time you perform a
Scene Store operation.
HINT
If buttons other than ALL are turned on for the scene,
only the parameters whose buttons are on will be
recalled. If the ALL button is turned on for the scene,
all parameters will be updated.
HINT
• Scenes for which Focus settings are made are shown by a
“FOCUS” indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST
window.
• The Focus function can be used in conjunction with the Recall
Safe function (→ p. 136). Channels or parameters that are
excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall
Safe will not be recalled.
• When you recall a scene, the Focus settings of that scene will
be reflected in CURRENT SETTING.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
135
Using the Recall Safe function
Using the Recall Safe function
“Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels (DCA groups) from
Recall operations. This differs from the Focus settings (→ p. 135) made for individual scenes in
that Recall Safe settings are common to all scenes.
1 In the function access area, press the CH
D SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field
Here you can switch Recall Safe on/off for the desired
channels or DCA groups, and choose the parameters
that will be excluded from Recall operations. The
channel or DCA group you selected by pressing its
[SEL] key will be shown in this field as the target of
your operations. If you press any of the [SEL] keys of
the DCA groups, the parameters for DCA groups 1–8
will be shown simultaneously.
JOB button to access the CH JOB popup
window.
E APPLY TO ALL INPUT button / APPLY TO
RECALL SAFE button
2 Press the RECALL SAFE button to access
the RECALL SAFE MODE popup window.
In this popup window you can make settings for the
Recall Safe function. The window contains the following items.
1
2
ALL OUTPUT button
If these buttons are on when you operate the SAFE
PARAMETER SELECT buttons, the changes will
apply to all input (or output) channels. This is convenient when you want to make settings for all channels
together.
HINT
• The RECALL SAFE MODE popup window can also be
accessed from the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen’s
RECALL SAFE field (→ p. 85).
3 To select the channel or DCA group whose
Recall Safe settings you want to edit, press
the corresponding [SEL] key.
3
The corresponding channel or DCA group will be
enclosed by a white frame in the CH RECALL SAFE
field. (However, this white frame does not mean that
the Recall Safe setting is now enabled.) The selected
channel or DCA groups 1–8 will be recalled to the
SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field.
HINT
4
5
• If the CH RECALL SAFE field’s SET BY SEL button is on,
Recall Safe will be enabled when you press the [SEL] key,
and the corresponding channel or DCA group will be highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field. You can select parameters as described in step 4 even after turning Recall Safe on.
1 CH RECALL SAFE field
The channels and DCA groups for which Recall Safe
is turned on are highlighted in this field. If you turn on
the SET BY SEL button, you can turn on Recall Safe
for a channel or DCA group simply by pressing the
[SEL] key of that channel or DCA group.
B CLEAR ALL button
This clears all Recall Safe settings for the channels or
DCA groups that are highlighted in the CH RECALL
SAFE field.
C GLOBAL RECALL SAFE field
Press the buttons in this field to select the global
parameters (i.e., parameters that apply to the entire
mix, rather than to specific channels) that will be set to
Recall Safe.
136
M7CL Owner’s Manual
4 If you want to enable Recall Safe for spe-
cific parameters of the selected channel or
DCA group, make the following settings in
the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field.
NOTE
• Simply selecting a parameter in step 4 does not enable Recall
Safe. To turn Recall Safe on/off, you must also perform the
operation of step 5.
HINT
• While the APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (or the APPLY TO
ALL OUTPUT button) is on, operations in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field will apply to all input channels (or output
channels).
Using the Recall Safe function
● If an input channel is selected
● If a MIX channel is selected
Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (except for the “ALL” button) to
select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe
(multiple selections are allowed). If you want all parameters to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL button
(this is the default setting).
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (except for the “ALL” button) to
select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe
(multiple selections are allowed).
In addition, you can use the WITH MIX SEND button displayed in the lower-left part of the field to enable Recall
Safe for the on/off status and send level of the signals sent
from input channels to MIX buses.
If you want all parameters shown in the lower part of the
field to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL button
(this is the default setting).
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Corresponding parameters
All parameters
HA
Head amp settings (including external HA)
EQ
EQ settings (including ATT/HPF)
DYNA 1
Dynamics 1 settings
DYNA 2
Dynamics 2 settings
ALL
All parameters (except for WITH MIX SEND)
MIX ON
On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
EQ
EQ settings (including ATT)
MIX SEND
Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses
DYNA 1
Dynamics 1 settings
MATRIX ON
On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
MATRIX ON
On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
MATRIX SEND
Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses
MATRIX SEND
Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses
FADER
Fader positions
FADER
Fader positions
CH ON
On/off status of [ON] keys
CH ON
On/off status of [ON] keys
WITH MIX SEND
On/off status and send level of signals sent
from input channels to MIX buses
Button name
NOTE
• If the ALL button is on, all other buttons in the lower part of
the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field will be turned off.
Corresponding parameters
NOTE
• If the ALL button is on, all buttons will be turned off except for
the WITH MIX SEND button located in the lower part of the
SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field.
● If a STEREO/MONO channel is selected
• You can switch the WITH MIX SEND button on/off while the
ALL button is left on.
With the exception of the types of button that are displayed, this is the same as for an input channel. These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
12
Scene memory
Button name
ALL
● If a MATRIX channel is selected
With the exception of the types of button that are displayed, this is the same as for a MIX channel.
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button name
Corresponding parameters
ALL
All parameters
EQ
EQ settings (including ATT)
DYNA 1
Dynamics 1 settings
MATRIX ON
On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
MATRIX SEND
Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses
FADER
CH ON
Button name
Corresponding parameters
ALL
All parameters (except for WITH MATRIX
SEND)
Fader positions
EQ
EQ settings (including ATT)
On/off status of [ON] keys
DYNA 1
Dynamics 1 settings
FADER
Fader positions
CH ON
On/off status of [ON] keys
WITH MATRIX
SEND
On/off status and send level of signals sent
from input channels / MIX channels / STEREO/
MONO channels to MATRIX buses
NOTE
• If the ALL button is on, all other buttons in the lower part of
the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field will be turned off.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
137
Using the Recall Safe function
6 To turn on Recall Safe for global parame-
NOTE
• If the ALL button is on, all buttons will be turned off except for
the WITH MIX SEND button located in the lower part of the
SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field.
• You can switch the WITH MATRIX SEND button on/off while
the ALL button is left on.
● If a DCA group is selected
If you press any of the [SEL] keys of the DCA groups, the
parameters for DCA groups 1–8 will be shown simultaneously. As the parameters subject to Recall Safe, you can
select either “ALL” or “LEVEL/ON” (fader position and
on/off status of [ON] key). Recall Safe will be enabled
when you make this selection.
If you want all parameters of the DCA group to be subject
to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL button. Unlike when a
channel is selected, Recall Safe will be enabled for that
DCA group the moment you turn on either the LEVEL/
ON button or the ALL button.
5 To enable Recall Safe for the selected channel, turn on the SAFE button in the SAFE
PARAMETER SELECT field. (If you selected
a DCA group, turn on either the LEVEL/ON
button or the ALL button.)
Channels or DCA groups for which Recall Safe is
enabled will be highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE
field.
SAFE button
HINT
• In the CH RECALL SAFE field, the color of the highlight will
be green if the ALL button was selected in step 4, or blue if
buttons other than ALL were selected.
• If you press the CLEAR ALL button, Recall Safe will be
defeated for all channels and DCA groups for which it is
enabled (i.e., the highlighted channels and DCA groups).
• You can also switch Recall Safe on/off in the SEL CH VIEW
screen’s RECALL SAFE field (→ p. 85).
138
M7CL Owner’s Manual
ters, turn on the buttons of the GLOBAL
RECALL SAFE field.
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button name
Corresponding parameters
INPUT PATCH
Input channel patching
INPUT NAME
Input channel name
OUTPUT PATCH
Output channel patching
OUTPUT NAME
Output channel name
RACK 1–8
Rack 1–8 settings
7 When you’ve finished making settings,
press the CLOSE button to close the popup
window. Then perform a Recall operation.
Only the selected channel(s) (DCA group(s) and
parameter(s) will be excluded from Recall operations.
Channel Link (→ p. 120) and bus settings (→ p. 212)
are not subject to Recall Safe; they will always be
reproduced in the recalled scene.
This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of
several channels included in a link group or one of two
channels set to stereo, the parameter settings of that
channel may differ from those of the other channel(s).
In such cases, the applicable parameter will be automatically re-linked the next time it is operated.
HINT
• The Recall Safe function can be used in conjunction with the
Focus function (→ p. 136). Channels or parameters that are
excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall
Safe will not be recalled.
• If you perform a Recall operation while holding down a [SEL]
key, the Recall Safe settings of that channel will temporarily
be abled for that Recall operation.
Using the Fade function
Using the Fade function
“Fade” is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels and DCA groups to
their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene. The settings of the Fade
function are made independently for each scene.
1 Press the SCENE field in the function
access area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, where you can
perform various operations for scene memory.
B SET buttons
These buttons display the FADE TIME popup window.
C FADING buttons
These buttons switch the Fade function on/off for each
scene.
D Fade time
These indicate the fade time (the time over which the
fader will reach the new value).
1
3 Press the SET button to access the FADE
2
TIME popup window.
1 SCENE field
B FADE TIME tab
In this popup window you can select the channel to
which Fade will be applied, and adjust the fade time.
2 Press the “FADE TIME” tab at the bottom of
1
3 4
the SCENE LIST window.
You can use tabs to switch the right half of the SCENE
LIST window between three different fields. In this
case, press the tab to make the FADE TIME field
appear.
2
2
3
4
1 Channel display field
The channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied
are highlighted.
B FADE TIME knob
This knob sets the fade time. You can use the corresponding multifunction encoder to adjust this.
12
Scene memory
1
C SET ALL button
If you press this button, the Fade effect will be applied
to all faders of that scene.
1 FADE TIME field
In this field you can make settings for the Fade function. The buttons in this field correspond to the scene
list shown in the left side of the SCENE LIST window.
The CURRENT SETTING field lets you make Fade
settings that will be used the next time you perform a
Scene Store operation.
HINT
• When you recall a scene, the Fade settings of that scene will
be reflected in CURRENT SETTING.
D CLEAR ALL button
If you press this button, the Fade effect will be cancelled for all faders of that scene.
4 Press the [SEL] keys of the desired chan-
nels or DCA groups to select the channels
and DCA groups to which the Fade effect
will be applied (multiple selections are
allowed).
The [SEL] keys of the selected channels and DCA
groups will light, and those channels and DCA groups
will be highlighted in the channel display field of the
popup window. You can cancel a selection by pressing
a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
139
Using the Fade function
5 Use the multifunction encoders corre-
sponding to the FADE TIME knobs to adjust
the fade time.
The range is 0.0 sec – 60.0 sec.
When you’ve finished making settings, press the
CLOSE button to close the FADE TIME popup window.
HINT
• The fade time you specify here is used for all channels and
DCA groups selected in step 4.
6 To enable the Fade function, press the FADING button.
The Fade on/off setting is made individually for each
scene.
HINT
• Scenes for which Fade settings are made are shown by a
“FADING” indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST
window.
7 Recall a scene for which the Fade function
is turned on.
The faders will begin to move immediately after
Recall occurs, and will reach the values of the recalled
scene over the course of the specified fade time.
NOTE
• The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if
faders are linked by Channel Link.
HINT
• By stopping a moving fader while you hold down the corresponding [SEL] key, you can stop the fade operation of the
fader at that point.
• If you recall the same scene while faders are moving, the faders of all channels and DCA groups will move immediately to
their target positions.
140
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 13
Monitor/Cue
This chapter explains the M7CL’s monitor/cue functions.
About the monitor/cue functions
The Monitor function lets you audition various outputs through your nearfield monitors or headphones. Below the M7CL’s front pad there is a PHONES OUT jack for monitoring, and this jack
always lets you monitor the signal that is selected as the monitoring source. By assigning the
MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can also monitor the same signal through external speakers. You can select the following signals as the monitor source.
• STEREO channel output signal
• MONO channel output signal
• STEREO + MONO channel output signal
• ST IN channel 1–4 input signal
• A combination of up to eight MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel output signals and ST IN
channel input signals.
The Cue function lets you check an individual selected channel/DCA group by temporarily monitoring it via MONITOR OUT or PHONES. When you press the top panel [CUE] key, the cue signal of
the corresponding channel/DCA group is sent as the monitor output from the selected output port.
NOTE
• The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this reason,
if you turn off the Monitor function, the cue signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speakers. However, the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES OUT jack.
13
Monitor/Cue
The following diagram shows the cue/monitor signal flow.
CUE
L R
CUE TRIM
(INPUT / OUTPUT / DCA)
CUE L
MONO
METER CUE L
Tip
PHONES OUT LR
2
Ring
DA
Sleeve
METER CUE R
CUE R
[PHONES]
PHONES LEVEL
CUE ON
CUE LOGIC
ST IN1 L,R
ST IN2 L,R
ST IN3 L,R
ST IN4 L,R
STEREO OUT
L,R
STEREO OUT
MONO (C)
MIX OUT1-16
MATRIX OUT1-8
DEFINE
MIX
(MAX : 8ch)
PHONES
LEVEL LINK
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
PHONES L
To PHONES OUT
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
PHONES R
To PHONES OUT
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
MONITOR OUT L
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
MONITOR OUT R
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
MONITOR OUT MONO (C)
MONO
MONITOR L
METER MONITOR L
MONITOR R
METER MONITOR R
MONITOR MONO (C)
METER MONITOR MONO (C)
DIMMER
STEREO OUT L,R
STEREO OUT MONO (C)
STEREO OUT L,C,R
MONITOR SELECT
ST IN1 L,R
ST IN2 L,R
ST IN3 L,R
ST IN4 L,R
ON
TALKBACK ON
MONITOR DIMM ON
+MONO (C)
MONITOR LEVEL
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
An output port delay becomes invalid by
assigning a monitor out to the output port
● MONITOR SELECT
● ON (On/off)
Selects the monitor source.
Switches the monitor function on/off.
● METER
● DELAY (Monitor delay)
Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue
signal.
Delays the monitor signal. The Delay function is disabled
if the Cue signal is being output.
● DIMMER
● PHONES LEVEL (Headphone level)
Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a fixed amount.
Adjusts the output level of only the PHONES OUT jack.
● MONITOR LEVEL
● PHONES LEVEL LINK (Headphone level link function)
This affects the output jacks that are assigned to the
MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. If PHONES LEVEL
LINK is ON, this will also affect the PHONES OUT jack.
If this is on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust
the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
141
Using the Monitor function
Using the Monitor function
This section explains how to select the desired monitor source, and monitor it from the PHONES
OUT jack or external monitor speakers.
1 Connect your monitor system to the rear
F OUTPUT button
Turns the monitor output on/off.
panel OMNI OUT jacks, 2TR OUT DIGITAL
jack, or an I/O card installed in a slot.
The monitor signal can be sent to any desired output
jack or output channel. If you’re monitoring through
headphones, make sure that your headphones are connected to the PHONES OUT jack under the front pad.
2 In the function access area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR
screen.
In the MONITOR screen, the MONITOR field lets
you check the current monitor settings, and turn monitoring on/off.
The MONITOR screen includes the following items.
2
3
4
5
1
G PHONES LEVEL LINK button
If this is on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust
the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack.
H MONO MONITOR button
This button allows monaural monitoring. If this button
is on, the signal sent from the PHONES OUT jack and
the MONITOR OUT L/R channels will be monaural.
3 Press the popup button or the meter field to
open the MONITOR popup window.
In the MONITOR popup window you can make
detailed settings for monitoring. The popup window
includes the following items.
1
2
3 54
6
7
8
6 7
8
9
1 SOURCE SELECT field
1 Popup button
Opens the MONITOR popup window, where you can
make detailed settings for monitoring.
B SOURCE SELECT field
Use the buttons in this field to select the monitor
source.
C DIMMER field
The Dimmer function which temporarily attenuates
the monitor signal can be switched on/off here. If you
press the knob in this field so that it is enclosed by a
heavy frame, you can use multifunction encoder 4 to
adjust the amount of attenuation.
D TALKBACK DIMMER field
If Talkback is enabled, this will indicate the on/off status of the Talkback Dimmer function which automatically attenuates the monitor signal. Here you can also
specify the amount of attenuation applied by the talkback dimmer.
E Meter field
This indicates the level of the monitor signal. This
meter shows the level immediately before the dimmer.
The MONITOR popup window will appear if you
press this field, allowing you to make detailed settings
for monitoring.
142
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Use the buttons in this field to select the monitor
source. This operation can also be performed using the
SOURCE SELECT field in the MONITOR screen.
B DIMMER field
Here you can make settings for the Dimmer function
which temporarily attenuates the monitor signal.
• DIMMER knob
........... This adjusts the amount by which
the monitor signal will be attenuated
when the dimmer is on. You can use
multifunction encoder 4 to control
this. This operation can also be performed in the DIMMER field of the
MONITOR screen.
• DIMMER ON button
........... If this button is on, the monitor signal level will be attenuated according to the setting of the DIMMER
knob. This operation can also be
performed in the DIMMER field of
the MONITOR screen.
Using the Monitor function
• TALKBACK DIMMER knob
...........This adjusts the amount by which
the monitor signal will be attenuated
when talkback is on. You can use
multifunction encoder 5 to control
this. This operation can also be performed in the TALKBACK DIMMER
field of the MONITOR screen.
4 Use the buttons of the SOURCE SELECT
field to select a monitor source.
In the SOURCE SELECT field you can select only
one monitor source. However if you’ve selected
DEFINE, you can use the ASSIGN field to specify
multiple monitor sources.
The following table shows the monitor sources you
can select in the SOURCE SELECT field.
STEREO L/R button
STEREO L/R channel output signal
MONO (C) button
MONO channel output signal
LCR button
STEREO L/R + MONO channel (LCR)
output signal
ST IN 1–4 buttons
ST IN jacks 1–4 input signals
DEFINE button
The signal(s) selected in the ASSIGN
field
• TALKBACK DIMMER indicator
...........This indicator shows that talkback is
on, and that the talkback dimmer is
operating.
HINT
• If the normal dimmer and the talkback are both switched on
simultaneously, the setting with the greatest amount of attenuation will be applied.
D MONITOR DELAY field
This field specifies the monitor delay setting by which
the monitor signal is delayed. You can use this in large
auditoriums where there is a time difference between
the monitor signal and the direct sound.
• MONITOR DELAY knob
...........Adjusts the delay time for the monitor signal. You can use multifunction
encoder 6 to control this.
• MONITOR DELAY ON button
...........If this button is on, the monitor signal will be delayed according to the
setting of the MONITOR DELAY
knob.
E MONO MONITOR button
This button allows monaural monitoring. If this button
is on, the signal sent from the PHONES OUT jack and
the MONITOR OUT L/R channels will be monaural.
F PHONES LEVEL LINK button
If this is on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust
the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack.
If you’ve selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT
field, you can use the ASSIGN field to select multiple
sources. The following table shows the monitor
sources you can select in the ASSIGN field.
MIX 1–16 buttons
Output signals of MIX channels 1–16
MTRX 1–8 buttons
Output signals of MATRIX channels 1–8
STEREO L/R button
STEREO L/R channel output signal
MONO (C) button
MONO channel output signal
ST IN 1–4 buttons
ST IN jacks 1–4 input signals
NOTE
• You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the
ASSIGN field. If you select eight monitor sources, no further
selections will be possible. Please turn off the buttons for
unneeded sources.
5 To specify a port as the output destination
for monitor signals L, C, R, press one of the
output select buttons (L/R/C) in the meter
field to open the OUTPUT PORT SELECT
popup window, and choose from the following monitor signal output destinations
(multiple selections are allowed).
13
Monitor/Cue
C TALKBACK DIMMER field
Here you can view and make settings for the Talkback
Dimmer.
G OUTPUT button
Switches the monitor function on/off. This operation
can also be performed using the OUTPUT button in
the MONITOR screen.
H Meter field
• Output select button
...........This opens the OUTPUT PORT
SELECT popup window, where you
can select the port that will output
the monitor signal.
• Level meter ....This indicates the level of the monitor signal. This meter shows the
level immediately before the dimmer.
I ASSIGN field
If you selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT
field, use this field to specify the monitor source. You
can select up to eight monitor sources simultaneously.
Pressing the CLEAR ALL button will clear all selections.
OMNI 1–16
OMNI OUT jacks 1–16
2TR OUT L, R
2TR OUT DIGITAL jack L, R
SLOT 1–3
Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card
installed in slots 1–3
When you’ve selected an output port, press the
CLOSE button to close the popup window.
In the same way, specify the output ports for MONITOR OUT L, R, and C.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
143
Using the Monitor function
HINT
• If desired, you can specify output ports only for MONITOR
OUT L and R, and monitor through two speakers.
• If you have not specified an output port for MONITOR OUT C,
selecting the MONO (C) button or LCR button as the monitor
source will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to
be distributed to MONITOR OUT L/R.
6 To enable monitoring, press the OUTPUT
button to turn it on.
The monitor source you selected in step 4 will be sent
to the output destination you specified in step 5.
7 To adjust the monitor level, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE
MEMORY/MONITOR section of the top
panel.
If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, you can use both
the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the PHONES
LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor level when monitoring through headphones.
The MONITOR LEVEL knob will apply to the
PHONES OUT jack as well.
8 Make settings for Dimmer, Delay, and Monaural as desired.
HINT
HINT
• The PHONES OUT jack will always output the monitor signal,
regardless of whether the OUTPUT button is on or off.
144
M7CL Owner’s Manual
• Monitor on/off operations, selection of the monitor source,
and dimmer on/off operations can also be assigned to userdefined keys (→ p. 200).
Using the Cue function
Using the Cue function
This section explains how to use the M7CL’s Cue function.
About cue groups
The M7CL’s cue signals can be categorized into the following four groups.
STEREO/MONO channel [CUE] key
1 INPUT CUE group
The cue signals of input channels make up this group. To
enable Cue for this group, press the [CUE] key of any
INPUT channel or ST IN channel to turn Cue on.
HINT
• If STEREO/MONO channels are assigned to the Centralogic section, you can also use the [CUE] keys of the Centralogic section to
enable Cue for this group.
INPUT channel [CUE] key
ST IN channel [CUE] key
D Other CUE group
These are the Cue signals operated using buttons displayed in the touch screen. This group is enabled if you
turn on the CUE button in an EFFECT popup window or
the KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS 1 popup window. This group will automatically be disabled when you
exit the corresponding popup window.
CUE button in the display
• If INPUT channels or ST IN channels are assigned to the Centralogic section, you can also use the [CUE] keys of the Centralogic
section to enable Cue for this group.
B DCA CUE group
The cue signals of DCA groups make up this group. To
enable Cue for this group, assign the DCA groups to the
Centralogic section and press a [CUE] key in the Centralogic section to turn Cue on.
It is not possible to simultaneously turn on Cue between
different groups. Normally, the group to which the most
recently pressed [CUE] key (or a CUE/KEY IN CUE button in the screen) belongs will take priority, and the [CUE]
keys of the previously selected group will be defeated.
However if you switch the Cue signal group in a specific
order, the state of the [CUE] keys of the previouslyselected group will be restored when the current Cue signal is defeated.
The following illustration shows the priority order of the
[CUE] keys. After you have switched groups from lower
to upper levels, if you then defeat Cue for the upper group,
the previous [CUE] key status of the group immediately
below will be restored.
Centralogic section [CUE] key
(when controlling DCA groups)
C OUTPUT CUE group
The cue signals of output channels make up this group. To
switch Cue on/off for this group, press the [CUE] key of a
STEREO/MONO channel, or assign MIX channels or
MATRIX channels to the Centralogic section and press a
[CUE] key of the Centralogic section.
Centralogic section [CUE] key
(when controlling MIX channels
or MATRIX channels)
13
Monitor/Cue
HINT
Other CUE group
INPUT CUE group
DCA CUE group
OUTPUT CUE group
For example if you switch groups in the order of OUTPUT CUE group → DCA CUE group → INPUT CUE
group → Other CUE group, you can then successively
defeat the [CUE] keys (CUE/KEY IN CUE buttons) to
successively restore the [CUE] key status of the previously selected group.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
145
Operating the Cue function
Operating the Cue function
This section explains how you can use the [CUE] key of a desired channel or DCA group to monitor the Cue signal.
NOTE
• The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this reason,
the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the Monitor function. However, PHONES OUT jack under the front pad will always output the cue signal regardless of the Monitor
on/off setting. For details on Monitor function settings, refer to “Using the Monitor function” (→ p. 142).
1 In the function access area, press the MON-
2 Press the popup button or the INPUT/DCA/
The CUE field of the MONITOR screen lets you
check the current Cue settings, and turn Cue on/off.
The popup window includes the following items.
ITOR button to access the MONITOR
screen.
1 2
3
OUTPUT field to open the CUE popup window.
2
3
4
5
4
1
1 CUE MODE field
This specifies the mode of operation when multiple
[CUE] keys within the same group are turned on. This
operation can also be performed in the CUE MODE
field of the MONITOR screen.
B INPUT field
Here you can select one of the following positions
from which input channels will be cued.
1 Popup button
Opens the CUE popup window, where you can make
detailed settings for Cue.
B CUE MODE field
Specifies how the Cue function will operate.
C INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT field
For each CUE group, this indicates the signal output
position and the output level. You can press this field
to open the CUE popup window.
• PFL (Pre-Fader Listen) button
........... The pre-fader signal will be output.
• AFL (After-Fader Listen) button
........... The post-fader signal will be output.
• POST PAN button
........... The post-pan signal will be output.
• PFL TRIM knob
........... If PFL is selected, you can adjust
the output level of the cue signal in a
range of -20 dB– +10 dB. You can
operate this knob using multifunction encoder 3.
D CLEAR CUE button
Clears all Cue selections.
NOTE
• Be aware that if you turn the POST PAN button on, you will be
unable to monitor the signal sent to the MONO bus from an
input channel that is set to LCR mode.
C DCA field
Here you can select the position from which Cue will
be output from DCA groups, and specify the output
level.
• PRE PAN button
........... The pre-pan signal will be output
• POST PAN button
........... The post-pan signal will be output
146
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Operating the Cue function
• DCA TRIM knob
...........Adjusts the level of cue output from
a DCA group in a range of -20 dB–
+10 dB. You can operate this knob
using multifunction encoder 4.
• DCA UNITY button
...........If this button is on, pressing the
[CUE] key of a DCA group will
always monitor the corresponding
DCA group at unity gain (the same
level at when the fader in the Centralogic section is at 0 dB).
D OUTPUT field
Here you can select one of the following choices as the
position from which output channels will be cued.
• PFL (Pre-Fader Listen) button
...........The pre-fader signal will be output
4 Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT
field, DCA field, and OUTPUT field to specify the output position and output level for
each Cue group.
Refer to the explanation for each item in step 2, and
make the desired settings.
5 Press the [CUE] key of a desired channel or
DCA group to turn it on.
The Cue signal of the corresponding channel will be
sent to the monitor signal output destination.
The background of the Cue meter in the function
access area will turn blue, indicating the Cue output
level. An abbreviation of the currently-on Cue group
or button is shown above the Cue meter.
The abbreviations displayed for the Cue meter have
the following meaning.
• AFL (After-Fader Listen) button
...........The signal immediately after the
[ON] key will be output
• PFL TRIM knob
...........If you select PFL, you can also use
the PFL TRIM knob located in the
lower part of this field to adjust the
output level in a range of -20 dB–
+10 dB. You can operate this knob
using multifunction encoder 5.
IN
INPUT CUE group
DCA
DCA CUE group
OUT
OUTPUT CUE group
EFFECT
CUE button in the EFFECT popup window
(Other cue group)
KEY IN
KEY IN CUE button of the DYNAMICS 1 popup
window (Other cue group)
E Meter field
• Level meter ....This indicates the level of the cue
signal.
CUE meter
• ACTIVE CUE indicator
...........This indicates the currently-active
Cue group.
...........Clears all Cue selections. This operation can also be performed using
the CLEAR CUE button in the MONITOR screen.
3 Use the buttons of the CUE MODE section
to specify what will happen when multiple
[CUE] keys within the same CUE group are
turned on.
Use the following two buttons to choose the Cue
mode.
● MIX CUE button
All channels or DCA groups within the same Cue
group whose [CUE] key is on will be mixed for
monitoring (MIX CUE mode).
● LAST CUE button
Only the channel or DCA group whose [CUE] key
was last turned on will be monitored (LAST CUE
mode).
HINT
• When using the MIX bus select buttons in the SENDS ON
FADER popup window, you can press the selected button
once again to turn on Cue for the corresponding MIX channel
(→ p. 64).
Monitor/Cue
13
• CLEAR CUE button
• If you want Cue operations and channel select operations to
be linked, open the USER SETUP popup window, choose the
PREFERENCE tab, and turn “[CUE]>[SEL] LINK” on (→ p. 198).
6 To adjust the Cue signal level, use the
MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the
SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section of the
top panel.
If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, you can use both
the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the PHONES
LEVEL knob to adjust the Cue signal level when monitoring through headphones.
HINT
• [CUE] keys belonging to different Cue groups cannot be
turned on simultaneously. The Cue group to which the lastpressed [CUE] key belongs will be turned on, allowing only
the signals of that group to be monitored.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
147
Operating the Cue function
7 To defeat Cue, press the currently-on [CUE]
key once again.
You can press the CLEAR CUE button in the Meter
field to clear all Cue selections.
HINT
• If you press the CUE meter in the function access area, all
Cue selections will be cleared.
• All Cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX
CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in the CUE MODE section.
• You can also assign the same function as the CLEAR CUE
button to a user-defined key (→ p. 200).
148
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 14
Talkback / Oscillator
This chapter explains how to use talkback and oscillator.
About the talkback and oscillator functions
Talkback is a function that sends the signal of a mic connected to the TALKBACK jack to the
desired bus. This is used mainly to convey instructions from the mixing engineer to the performers or staff. If necessary, a mic connected to INPUT jacks 1–32 {1–48} can also be used for talkback.
The M7CL also contains an oscillator that can output a sine wave or pink noise to the desired
bus, and this can be used to check external equipment or to test the acoustical response of the
room.
The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback/oscillator signals.
+48V MASTER
+48V
M
O
ON
MIX
+48V
[TALKBACK
INPUT]
TALKBACK
INPUT
2
METER
3
INPUT 1-32 {48}
INPUT
SELECT
OSCILLATOR
LEVEL
INPUT
1
3
L R
ON
Sine Wave
Pink Noise
Burst Noise
HA
+48V
[INPUT]
[1-32 {48}]
L R (C) 1 2 ··· 7 8
TALKBACK
TALKBACK
GAIN
2
N
ST O
MATRIX CUE
INPUT TB
AD
1
1 2 ··· 1516
HA
METER
AD
OSC
METER
ON
HPF LPF
GAIN/TRIM
Using talkback
1 In the function access area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR
screen.
In the MONITOR screen, the TALKBACK field lets
you check the current talkback settings, and turn talkback on/off.
If you want to view or edit the talkback settings in
greater detail, use the TALKBACK popup window
described in step 2 and following.
1 Popup button
Opens the TALKBACK popup window.
B TALKBACK IN field
This indicates the input level of the mic connected to
the TALKBACK jack, and the phantom power on/off
status.
14
Talkback / Oscillator
Here’s how the signal sent to the TALKBACK jack or an INPUT jack 1–32 {1–48} can be sent to
the desired bus.
C INPUT TO TALKBACK field
Of the INPUT jacks 1–32 {1–48}, this indicates the
input sensitivity, input level, and phantom power on/
off status of the jack that is being used for talkback.
You can select an INPUT jack for talkback by pressing
the button located at the left side. If you press the
GAIN knob to be active. you can adjust the input sensitivity using the corresponding multifunction
encorder.
D ASSIGN field
Indicates the bus to which the talkback signal is sent.
You can press this field to open the TALKBACK
popup window.
E TALKBACK ON button
Switches talkback on/off.
1
2
3
4
5
M7CL Owner’s Manual
149
Using talkback
2 Press the popup button or the ASSIGN field
to open the TALKBACK popup window.
In this popup window you can make detailed settings
for talkback.
1
2
4
4 If you want to use an INPUT jack 1–32 {1–
48} as supplementary input for talkback,
proceed as follows.
1
Press the INPUT TO TALKBACK field INPUT
select button to open the INPUT PORT
SELECT popup window.
2
Of the IN 1–32 (1–48) buttons, press the button for the input you want to use for talkback,
making it light.
3
You can select only one input at a time.
3
Press the CLOSE button to close the popup
window.
Use the INPUT TO TALKBACK field GAIN knob
and level meter to adjust the input level of the connected mic.
NOTE
1 TALKBACK IN field
• +48V button ...This is an on/off switch for the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the
TALKBACK jack.
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA
gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind
that noise may be generated if there is a difference between
the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device
connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom
power.
• TALKBACK jack level
...........This indicates the input level of the
mic connected to the TALKBACK
jack.
B INPUT TO TALKBACK field
• Input select button
...........Opens the INPUT PORT SELECT
popup window, where you can
select the INPUT jack used for talkback.
• +48V button
...........This is an on/off switch for the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the
INPUT jack used for talkback.
• GAIN knob .....Adjusts the input sensitivity of the
INPUT jack used for talkback. Use
the corresponding multifunction
encoder to make this adjustment.
You can also use the MONITOR
screen GAIN knob to adjust this.
• Input level ......Indicates the input level of the mic
connected to the INPUT jack used
for talkback.
C TALKBACK ON button
Switches talkback on/off. This operation can also be
performed using the MONITOR screen TALKBACK
ON button.
D ASSIGN field
Selects the bus(es) to which the talkback signal will be
sent. You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat
all selections.
3 Connect a mic to the front panel TALKBACK
jack, and turn the TALKBACK GAIN knob to
adjust the input sensitivity of the mic.
The meter in the TALKBACK IN field indicates the
input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK
jack. If you want phantom power (+48V) to be supplied to the TALKBACK jack, turn on the +48V button located in the TALKBACK IN field.
150
M7CL Owner’s Manual
5 Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the bus(es) to which the talkback signal
will be sent (multiple selections are
allowed).
These buttons correspond to the following buses.
MIX 1–16 buttons
MIX buses 1–16
MTRX 1–8 buttons
MATRIX buses 1–8
ST L, ST R buttons
STEREO bus L/R
MONO (C) button
MONO bus
HINT
• You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections.
6 To enable talkback, press the TALKBACK
ON button to turn it on.
The TALKBACK ON button will alternately turn on/
off each time you press the button (Latch operation).
While talkback is on, the signal from the TALKBACK
jack and the selected INPUT jack will be output to the
destination bus.
HINT
• You can also assign talkback on/off or an ASSIGN change to
a user-defined key. In this case, you can select either latched
operation or unlatched operation (the function will be on only
while you continue holding down the key) (→ p. 200).
• When talkback is on, you can use the talkback dimmer to
lower the monitor levels other than talkback (→ p. 143).
Using the oscillator
Using the oscillator
Here’s how to send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to a desired bus.
1 In the function access area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR
screen.
In the MONITOR screen, the OSCILLATOR field lets
you check the current oscillator settings, and turn the
oscillator on/off.
If you want to view or edit the oscillator settings in
greater detail, use the OSCILLATOR popup window
described in step 2 and following.
2 Press the popup button or the ASSIGN field
to open the OSCILLATOR popup window.
In this popup window you can make detailed settings
for the oscillator.
1
2
5
3 4
1 MODE field
Press a button in this field to select the type of oscillator. This operation can also be performed using the
MODE button in the MONITOR screen.
2
3
4
5
1 Popup button
Opens the OSCILLATOR popup window.
B LEVEL knob
This adjusts the output level of the oscillator. If you
press the knob to select it, you’ll be able to operate it
using the corresponding multifunction encoder.
C MODE button
This selects the type of oscillator signal. The type will
change each time you press the button.
D ASSIGN field
Indicates the bus to which the oscillator signal is sent.
You can press this field to open the OSCILLATOR
popup window.
E OUTPUT button
Turns the oscillator on/off.
C OUTPUT button
Turns the oscillator on/off. This operation can also be
performed using the OUTPUT button in the MONITOR screen.
D Oscillator level
This indicates the output level of the oscillator.
E ASSIGN field
Selects the bus(es) to which the oscillator signal will
be sent. You can press the CLEAR ALL button to
defeat all selections.
14
Talkback / Oscillator
1
B Parameter field
Here you can adjust the parameters for the oscillator
you selected in the MODE field. The knobs shown in
this field can be operated using the corresponding multifunction encoders.
3 Press a button in the MODE field to select
the type of signal you want to output.
You can choose the following signals.
SINE WAVE 1CH
Single-channel sine wave
PINK NOISE
Pink noise
BURST NOISE
Burst noise (repeated output of pink noise)
M7CL Owner’s Manual
151
Using the oscillator
4 Use the knobs and buttons in the parameter
field to adjust the oscillator parameters.
The displayed parameters will differ depending on the
oscillator selected in the MODE field. The knobs
shown in the parameter field can be operated using the
corresponding multifunction encoders.
The following table shows the available oscillator
types and the parameters displayed for each type.
Oscillator type
Parameters
SINE WAVE 1CH
LEVEL, FREQ
PINK NOISE
LEVEL, HPF, LPF
BURST NOISE
LEVEL, HPF, LPF, WIDTH, INTERVAL
HINT
• The “LEVEL” parameter can also be adjusted using the
LEVEL knob in the MONITOR screen.
Details of each parameter are shown in the following
table.
Parameters
Details
LEVEL
Oscillator output level
FREQ
Frequency of the sine wave output from
the oscillator
HPF
High-pass filter (on/off switch, cutoff frequency)
LPF
Low-pass filter (on/off switch, cutoff frequency)
WIDTH
Length of noise
INTERVAL
Length of silence between intervals of
noise
Level
INTERVAL
Pink noise output
WIDTH
Time
The BURST NOISE button is on
5 Press a button in the ASSIGN field to spec-
ify the bus(es) to which the oscillator signal
will be sent (multiple selections are
allowed).
These buttons correspond to the following buses.
MIX 1–16 buttons
MIX buses 1–16
MTRX 1–8 buttons
MATRIX buses 1–8
ST L, ST R buttons
STEREO bus L/R
MONO (C) button
MONO bus
HINT
• You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections.
152
M7CL Owner’s Manual
6 To enable the oscillator, press the OUTPUT
button to turn it on.
The oscillator signal will be sent to the bus you
selected in step 5. When you press the button again,
the oscillator will turn off.
HINT
• You can also assign oscillator on/off or an ASSIGN change to
a user-defined key (→ p. 200).
Chapter 15
Meters
This chapter explains the METER screen that shows the input/output level
meters for all channels, and operations relating to the optional MBM7CL
meter bridge.
Operations in the METER screen
By accessing the METER screen, you can view the input/output levels of all channels in the
screen, or switch the level meter’s metering points (the points in the signal route at which the
level is detected).
1 In the function access area, press the
1 MIX channels 1–16
METER field to access the METER screen.
The METER screen will appear, and the background
of the METER field will turn white.
METER field
This area indicates the output levels and fader values
of the MIX channels. If the corresponding MIX channels are assigned to the Centralogic section, operating
the faders of the Centralogic section will change these
values in realtime.
B MATRIX channels 1–8
This area indicates the output levels and fader values
of the MATRIX channels. If the MATRIX channels
are assigned to the Centralogic section, operating the
faders of the Centralogic section will change these values in realtime.
C STEREO channel L/R, MONO channel
This area indicates the output levels and fader values
of the STEREO channel L/R and MONO channel.
Operating the corresponding fader will change the
value in realtime.
NOTE
• If the CUE meter is shown in the METER field, pressing the
CUE meter will forcibly defeat the cue that is currently turned
on.
• If the CUE meter is not shown in the METER field, pressing
the CUE meter will switch to the METER screen.
[METER screen]
1
2
3
7
D INPUT channels 1–32 {1–48}
This area indicates the input levels and fader values of
the INPUT channels. Operating the corresponding
fader will change the value in realtime.
15
Meters
CUE meter
E ST IN channels 1–4
This area indicates the input levels and fader values of
the ST IN channels. Operating the corresponding fader
will change the value in realtime.
F Centralogic fader levels
This area indicates the fader values of the channel/
DCA group assigned to the Centralogic section. Operating the corresponding fader will change the value in
realtime.
G Metering point select buttons
(for output channels)
Use these three buttons to select the metering point for
output channels.
8
H Metering point select buttons
(for input channels)
Use these three buttons to select the metering point for
input channels.
9
4
5
6
I PEAK HOLD button
If this button is on, the peak level of the meters will be
held. When you turn this button off, the peak level
indication that had been held will be cleared.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
153
Operations in the METER screen
In the METER screen you can view the following
information for each channel.
1
2 If necessary, you can press a metering
point select button to switch the metering
point.
The metering point for the level meter can be specified
independently for input channels and output channels.
You can choose the following metering points.
● Input channels
2
• PRE HPF........ Immediately before the high-pass filter
• PRE FADER ... Immediately before the fader
• POST ON ....... Immediately after the [ON] key
3
● Output channels
• PRE EQ.......... Immediately before the attenuator
1 Level meter
This is a realtime indication of the input (or output)
level of the corresponding channel.
The ∑ segment will light if any of the level detection
points in each channel reach the OVER level.
The ∑ segment level detection points are as follows.
• PRE FADER ... Immediately before the fader
• POST ON ....... Immediately after the [ON] key
HINT
• The metering point for output channels will also affect the
optional meter bridge (MBM7CL).
• Input channels
...........PRE HPF, PRE FADER, POST ON
• Output channels
...........PRE EQ, PRE FADER, POST ON
HINT
• If ∑ is lit, you can switch the metering point to determine the
point at which the overload is occurring.
B Fader
This is a realtime indication of the top panel fader
position for the corresponding channel. The fader in
the screen cannot be operated.
C Fader level
This indicates the current fader value in a range of
- ∞ to 10.
154
M7CL Owner’s Manual
3 If you want the peak levels of the level
meter to be held, press the PEAK HOLD
button to turn it on.
PEAK HOLD button on/off operations will affect both
input channels and output channels as well as the
MBM7CL meter bridge. When you turn this button
off, the peak level indication that had been held will be
cleared.
HINT
• You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on/off function to
a user-defined key (→ p. 200).
Using the MBM7CL meter bridge (option)
Using the MBM7CL meter bridge (option)
If the optional meter bridge (MBM7CL) is installed in the M7CL, you will always be able to view
the output levels of MIX channels 1–16 and MATRIX channels 1–8.
The MBM7CL’s meters show the MIX channel and
MATRIX channel output levels in 12-segment steps
(OVER, -3dB, -6dB, -9dB, -12dB, -15dB, -18dB, -24dB,
-30dB, -40dB, -50dB, -60dB).
You can select the metering point (the point at which the
level is detected) from the following choices. To change
the metering point, refer to the preceding section “Operations in the METER screen” (→ p. 154).
• PRE EQ.......... Immediately before the attenuator
• PRE FADER... Immediately before the fader
• POST ON ....... Immediately after the [ON] key
MATRIX channels 1–8
MIX channels 1–16
HINT
• For details on installing the meter bridge (MBM7CL), refer to p. 272.
Meters
15
M7CL Owner’s Manual
155
156
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 16
Graphic EQ and effects
This chapter explains how to use the built-in graphic EQ and effects, and how
to perform remote control operations via the dedicated protocol to control an
external head amp (Yamaha AD8HR) from the M7CL.
About the virtual rack
The M7CL lets you use the built-in graphic EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “GEQ”) and effects
to modify signals. You can use two types of GEQ; 31 Band GEQ which lets you freely adjust
thirty-one bands (frequency regions), and Flex15GEQ which lets you adjust any fifteen of thirtyone bands. You can also use 48 different effect types.
In order to use a GEQ or effect, you must mount the GEQ or effect in one of the eight virtual racks, and patch the input and
output of that rack to the desired signal route. In other words, the operation is just as though you had installed a signal processor or effect device in an actual rack, and used patch cords to connect it. Only GEQ can be mounted in racks 1–4, and
either GEQ or effects can be mounted in racks 5–8. [Figure 1]
Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack. (However if the “31 Band GEQ” is mounted in a rack,
there will be only one channel each for input and output.) [Figure 2] shows the signal flow for the virtual racks.
INSERT
IN
PATCH
RACK
RACK 2
RACK 3
Only for GEQ
RACK 1
RACK 4
RACK1
METER RACK OUT
METER RACK IN
31BandGEQ
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
MIX OUT
1-16
MATRIX OUT
1-8
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO (C)
RACK1 IN
A (L ) / B (R)
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
Flex15GEQ
RACK1 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK2 IN
A (L ) / B (R)
RACK2 (same as RACK1)
RACK2 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK3 IN
A (L) / B (R)
RACK3 (same as RACK1)
RACK3 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK4 IN
A (L) / B (R)
RACK4 (same as RACK1)
RACK4 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
CH INSERT IN 1-32 {48}
32 {48}
MIX INSERT IN 1-16
16
3
RACK5
CH
INSERT OUT
1-32 {48}
RACK 6
MIX
INSERT OUT
1-16
RACK 7
RACK 8
[Figure 1]
GEQ or effects
RACK 5
MATRIX
INSERT OUT
1-8
To MIX INSERT IN
STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO (C)
To STEREO INSERT IN
MATRIX INSERT IN 1-8
To MATRIX INSERT IN
8
METER RACK IN
METER RACK OUT
31BandGEQ
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
Flex15GEQ
METER RACK IN L
METER RACK IN R
STEREO
INSERT OUT
L,R,MONO (C)
To CHINSERT IN
METER RACK OUT L
METER RACK OUT R
EFFECT
EFFECT CUE
RACK5 IN
A (L) / B (R)
RACK5 OUT
A(L) / B (R)
RACK6 IN
A (L) / B (R)
RACK6 (same as RACK5)
RACK6 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK7 IN
A (L) / B (R)
RACK7 (same as RACK5)
RACK7 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK8 IN
A (L) / B (R)
RACK8 (same as RACK5)
RACK8 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
16
Graphic EQ and effects
RACK
IN
PATCH
[Figure 2]
HINT
• The M7CL provides a rack for mounting external head amps (Yamaha AD8HR) as well as the virtual rack for GEQ
and effects. For details, refer to “Using an external head amp” (→ p. 177).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
157
About the virtual rack
Virtual rack operations
This section explains how to mount a GEQ or effect in the
virtual rack, and patch the input/output of the rack.
1 In the function access area, press the
RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK
window.
2
C RACK MOUNT button
This displays the RACK MOUNT popup window,
where you can select an item to mount in the rack.
Each of these buttons corresponds to the rack shown at
the right.
D SAFE button
This button switches Recall Safe on/off for the rack.
Each of these buttons corresponds to the rack shown at
the right.
E INPUT button
This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window, where you can select the input source
for the rack.
1
1 RACK button
B GEQ/EFFECT tab
2 In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the GEQ/EFFECT tab to access
the GEQ/EFFECT field.
In the VIRTUAL RACK window you can use the tabs
to switch between two different fields. In this case,
select the GEQ/EFFECT field.
5
2
F Virtual rack
This area shows eight virtual racks in which GEQ or
effects can be mounted. Racks 1–4 are only for GEQ,
and either GEQ or effects can be mounted in racks 5–
8. (However depending on the effect type, some can be
mounted only in rack 5 or 7.)
The popup window that appears when you press a virtual rack will differ depending on whether a GEQ or
effect is already mounted.
• If you press a rack in which a GEQ or effect is
already mounted
........... The GEQ/EFFECT popup window
will appear, allowing you to edit the
parameters of the GEQ or effect.
• If you press a rack that is empty
........... The RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear, allowing you to
select the GEQ or effect that will be
mounted in the rack.
7
3
4
G OUTPUT button
This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window, where you can select the output destination of
the rack.
3 To mount a GEQ or effect in the rack, press
the RACK MOUNT button for that rack.
The RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear.
1
1
2
6
1 GEQ/EFFECT field
3
In this field you can mount GEQ or effects in racks 1–
8, and edit the input/output patching for each rack.
4
5
B Field select tabs
Use these tabs to switch the field shown in the VIRTUAL RACK window. For details on the EXTERNAL
HA field, refer to “Using an external head amp” (→
p. 177).
158
M7CL Owner’s Manual
1 Rack number
This indicates the number of the selected rack.
B Virtual rack
This is the virtual rack in which you can mount a GEQ
or effect.
About the virtual rack
C MODULE SELECT
Use these buttons to select the GEQ or effect that will
be mounted in the rack. Each button has the following
function.
• BLANK button
...........Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in the rack; the rack
will be empty.
1
• 31 Band GEQ button
...........Mounts a 31 Band GEQ in the rack.
• Flex15GEQ button
...........Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack.
2
• EFFECT button
...........Mounts an effect in the rack. However, effects cannot be mounted in
racks 1–4.
HINT
• Input/output patching will be defeated when you change the
item mounted in a rack.
D CANCEL button
Cancels the changes you made in the RACK
MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window.
E OK button
Applies the changes you made in the RACK
MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window.
1 Channel select buttons
Use these buttons to select the input source. Use the
four tabs to switch between groups of input sources
shown in the window.
B CLOSE button
Closes the popup window.
The following input sources can be selected in this
popup window.
Tab name
Input source
MIX 1–16
MIX channel 1–16 outputs
MATRIX 1–8
MATRIX channel 1–8 outputs
STEREO L,
STEREO R,
MONO (C)
STEREO (L/R) channel and
MONO (C) channel outputs
CH 1-32
(INSERT OUT)
CH 1–32
INPUT channel 1–32 Insert
Outs
CH 33-48
(INSERT OUT)
{M7CL-48 only}
CH 33–48
INPUT channel 33–48 Insert
Outs
OUT CH (*1)
NOTE
• Be aware that if you remove a GEQ or effect that was
mounted in a rack and close the window, all parameter settings for that GEQ or effect will be discarded. If you have not
yet closed the window, you can recover the parameter settings by mounting the same GEQ or effect once again.
Button name
MIX 1–16
MIX channel 1–16 Insert Outs
MATRIX 1–8
MATRIX channel 1–8 Insert
Outs
STEREO L,
STEREO R,
MONO (C)
STEREO (L/R) channel and
MONO (C) channel Insert
Outs
HINT
4 Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select
the item you want to mount, and press the
OK button.
5 To select the input source for a rack, press
the INPUT button for that rack.
The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will
appear, allowing you to select the input source for the
rack. Switch the tabs as necessary, and select the input
source that you want to use.
When you select an input source in the OUTPUT CH
SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask you for
confirmation. To confirm the operation, press the OK
button.
HINT
• You have the option of making settings so that the confirmation dialog box does not appear (→ p. 198).
• Normally you can specify two channels of input for each rack.
However if you have selected 31 Band GEQ, only one channel can be used.
OUT CH
(INSERT OUT)
*1 Cannot be selected for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ.
HINT
• If you select Insert Out as the input source for 31 Band GEQ
or Flex15GEQ, the Insert In of the same channel will automatically be selected as the output destination for that rack.
When you defeat an insert-out, the insert-in will be defeated
automatically. For details on Insert Out/In, refer to “Inserting
an external device into a channel” (→ p. 100).
6 To select the output source for a rack,
16
Graphic EQ and effects
• You can also display the RACK MOUNTER popup window by
pressing a vacant rack in the GEQ/EFFECT field.
press the OUTPUT button for that rack.
The INPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear,
allowing you to select the output destination for the
rack. Switch the tabs as necessary, and select the output destination that you want to use.
When you select an output destination in the INPUT
CH SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask you
to confirm the change. To confirm the change, press
the OK button.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
159
About the virtual rack
7 To switch Recall Safe on/off for each rack,
HINT
press the SAFE button for that rack.
• You have the option of making settings so that the confirmation dialog box does not appear (→ p. 198).
• You can specify multiple output destinations for a rack.
• Normally you will be able to specify two channels of output for
a rack, but if the 31 Band GEQ is selected only one channel
can be used.
If Recall Safe is turned on for a rack, the contents and
parameters of that rack will not change when a scene
is recalled. For more about Recall Safe, refer to
“Using the Recall Safe function” (→ p. 136).
HINT
• The type of GEQ or effect mounted in each rack, its parameter settings, and the input-source/output-destination settings
are saved as part of the scene.
1
2
1 Channel select buttons
Use these buttons to select the output destination. Use
the six tabs to switch between groups of output destinations shown in the window.
B CLOSE button
Closes the popup window.
The following output destinations can be selected in
this popup window (multiple selections are allowed).
Tab name
Button name
Output source
CH 1-32 (*1)
CH 1–32
INPUT channel 1–32
inputs
CH 33-48
{M7CL-48 only} (*1)
CH 33–48
INPUT channel 33–48
inputs
STIN (*1)
STIN 1L/1R–
4L/4R
ST IN channel 1–4
inputs
CH 1-32
(INSERT IN)
CH 1–32
INPUT channel 1–32
Insert In
CH 33-48
(INSERT IN)
{M7CL-48 only}
CH 33–48
INPUT channel 33–48
Insert In
MIX 1–16
MIX channel 1–16 Insert
In
MATRIX 1–8
MATRIX channel 1–8
Insert In
STEREO L,
STEREO R,
MONO (C)
STEREO (L/R) channel
and MONO (C) channel
Insert In
OUT CH
(INSERT IN)
*1 Cannot be selected for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ.
HINT
• In the case of 31 Band GEQ and Flex15GEQ, selecting Insert
In as the output-destination will automatically set the Insert
Out of the same channel as the input-source for the rack.
When you defeat an insert-in, the insert-out will be defeated
automatically.
160
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Graphic EQ operations
Graphic EQ operations
About the graphic EQ
Inserting a GEQ in a channel
The M7CL lets you mount a GEQ in racks 1–8 and patch
it to the insert-out/in of a channel. The gain of each band
can be adjusted using the Centralogic section’s faders and
[ON] keys.
The following two types of GEQ are provided.
• 31 Band GEQ
...........This is a monaural 31-band GEQ. Each
band is 1/3 octave wide, the adjustable
gain range is ±15 dB, and the gain of all
thirty-one bands can be adjusted. If a
31 Band GEQ is mounted in a rack, one
channel of input and output can be used
for that rack.
INPUT
Rack
The M7CL’s GEQ units can be patched to the insert-in/out
of any channel except the ST IN channels. Here’s how to
insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use.
1 As described in “Virtual rack operations”
(→ p. 158) steps 1–3, mount a GEQ in a
rack.
The rack shown in the GEQ/EFFECT field indicates
the approximate GEQ settings and the input/output
levels. A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will
show information for two GEQ units (A and B).
OUTPUT
31 Band GEQ
• Flex15GEQ
INPUT
Rack
Flex15GEQ (A)
Flex15GEQ (B)
OUTPUT
2
1
3
1 Racks
B INPUT buttons
C OUTPUT buttons
HINT
• If you’re using a stereo source, you can mount a Flex15GEQ,
or mount two 31 Band GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered racks. This will let you link the two GEQ units
in a later step.
2 Press the INPUT button to open the OUT-
PUT CH SELECT popup window where you
can select the input-source for the rack,
and choose the insert-out of the desired
channel.
The insert-out will be assigned to the input of the
GEQ. (For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window → p. 97).
HINT
• If an insert-out is selected as the input-source, the outputdestination of the rack will automatically be set to the insert-in
of the same channel. For details on Insert Out/In, refer to
“Inserting an external device into a channel” (→ p. 100).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
16
Graphic EQ and effects
...........This is a monaural 15-band GEQ. Each
band is 1/3 octave wide, and the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB. The
Flex15GEQ lets you adjust the gain for
any fifteen of the same bands as the
thirty-one bands of the 31 Band GEQ.
(Once you’ve used up fifteen bands of
adjustment, you won’t be able to adjust
the gain of another band until you reset
a previously-adjusted band to the flat
setting.)
A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is
selected will have two Flex15GEQ units
(shown as “A” and “B” respectively)
mounted in that rack, and will allow two
channels of input and output. If you
mount a Flex15GEQ in each rack, you’ll
be able to use up to sixteen GEQ units
simultaneously.
161
Graphic EQ operations
3 Press the OUTPUT button to open the
INPUT CH SELECT popup window where
you can select the output-destination for
the rack, and choose the insert-in to which
you want to assign the output of the GEQ
(multiple selections are allowed).
The insert-in will be assigned to the output of the
GEQ. (For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window → p. 158).
HINT
• If an insert-in is selected as the output-destination, the inputsource of the rack will automatically be set to the insert-out of
the same channel.
4 In the GEQ/EFFECT field, press the rack in
which you mounted the GEQ.
The GEQ/EFFECT popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ or effect.
HINT
• The popup windows for the 31 Band GEQ and the
Flex15GEQ are nearly identical. However, the Flex15GEQ
individually displays two GEQ units (A and B) mounted in a
single rack.
2
3
4
5
D GEQ LINK button
This button links adjacent GEQ units. In the case of a
31 Band GEQ, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks will be linked. In the case
of a Flex15GEQ, the GEQ (A) and GEQ (B) within
the same rack will be linked.
NOTE
• The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible.
E FLAT button
This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to
0 dB.
F GEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently selected GEQ on/off.
5 If you’re using a stereo source, link the two
GEQ units.
You will be able to use the GEQ LINK button if you
have selected a 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ for adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. When you
turn this button on, the following popup window will
appear. To enable linking, press any button other than
CANCEL. The popup window contains the following
items.
6
1
2
3
4
1
1 Rack select tabs
These tabs switch between racks 1–8. For a rack in
which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the tabs will be split
as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
B INPUT button
This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window, where you can select the input source
of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for
the INPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field.
C OUTPUT button
This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window, where you can select the output destination of
the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for
the OUTPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field.
1 GEQ x→y button (“x” and “y” are the
rack number, or the rack number and the
alphabetical characters A or B)
The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then
linked.
B GEQ y→x button
The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then
linked.
C RESET BOTH button
The parameters of both will be initialized, and then
linked.
D CANCEL button
Cancels the link and closes the popup window.
When you link GEQ units, a symbol will appear in the
GEQ/EFFECT field to indicate the linked status.
Indicate the linked status
162
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Graphic EQ operations
6 In the function access area, press a RACK
button to open the VIRTUAL RACK window,
and use the GEQ/EFFECT tabs to select the
GEQ/EFFECT field.
7 Press the GEQ rack that you want to insert
into the channel; the GEQ/EFFECT popup
window will appear.
8 Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the
GEQ on.
Using the 31 Band GEQ
You will use the Centralogic section’s faders 1–8 and
[ON] keys to control the 31 Band GEQ.
1 As described in “Virtual rack operations”
(→ p. 158) steps 1–3, mount a 31 Band GEQ
in a rack.
The rack in which the 31 Band GEQ is mounted will
show the approximate settings and input/output levels.
After you’ve turned the GEQ on, adjust the bands of
the GEQ. For details on operating the GEQ, refer to
“Using the 31 Band GEQ” that follows or “Using the
Flex15GEQ” (→ p. 165).
1
2
HINT
9 Turn insert on for the patched channel.
For details, refer to “Inserting an external device into a
channel” (→ p. 100).
1 Rack graphic display area
B Input/output meters
This indicates the level of the signals before and after
the 31 Band GEQ.
2 In the GEQ/EFFECT field, press the rack in
which you mounted the 31 Band GEQ.
The GEQ/EFFECT popup window will appear. In the
GEQ/EFFECT popup window you can use the tabs to
switch between the eight racks.
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
1 EQ graph
This indicates the approximate response of the current
31 Band GEQ settings.
B Faders
These faders indicate the amount of boost/cut for each
band of the 31 Band GEQ. The actual values are
shown in the numerical boxes below.
C FADER ASSIGN field
In this field you can select the group of bands that will
be controlled by the Centralogic section’s faders.
16
Graphic EQ and effects
• The rack in the GEQ/EFFECT field shows the input/output
levels of the GEQ.
D Rack select tabs
These tabs switch between racks 1–8. For a rack in
which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the tabs will be split
as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
E INPUT button
This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window, where you can select the input source
of the rack.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
163
Graphic EQ operations
F OUTPUT button
This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window, where you can select the output destination of
the rack.
G GEQ LINK button
This button links adjacent GEQ units. In the case of a
31 Band GEQ, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks will be linked.
HINT
• If you switch the display to a different screen or rack, the fader
assignments of the Centralogic section will forcibly be
defeated. However if you once again display the same rack,
the group of bands you had previously been controlling will
automatically be assigned to the faders.
7 When you’ve finished making settings, turn
NOTE
• The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible.
H FLAT button
This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to
0 dB.
I GEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently selected GEQ on/off.
3 After you’ve set the input-source and out-
put-destination correctly, press the GEQ
ON/OFF button to turn on the 31 Band GEQ.
4 Press one of the buttons in the FADER
ASSIGN field to select the group of bands
you will control using the Centralogic section’s faders.
The buttons of the FADER ASSIGN field correspond
to the following groups of bands.
Button name
Bands
20-100 button
The eight bands 20.0 Hz–100 Hz
63-315 button
The eight bands 63.0 Hz–315 Hz
200-1k button
The eight bands 200 Hz–1.00 kHz
630-3.15k button
The eight bands 630 Hz–3.15 kHz
2k-10k button
The eight bands 2.00 kHz–10.0 kHz
4k-20k button
The eight bands 4.00 kHz–20.0 kHz
When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the
selected group of bands will turn white in the touch
screen, and you will be able to use the faders of the
Centralogic section to control them.
HINT
• The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked. When you turn off the button in the FADER
ASSIGN field, it will return to the locked state.
5 Operate the faders of the Centralogic section.
The corresponding frequency region will be boosted
or cut.
HINT
• When a fader of the Centralogic section is in the center (flat)
position, the corresponding [ON] key will go dark. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified. If
you raise or lower the fader even lightly, the [ON] key will light,
indicating that this band is being modified. If you press a lit
[ON] key to make it go dark, the corresponding band will
immediately return to the flat state.
164
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust each band.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
off the buttons of the FADER ASSIGN field.
The faders and [ON] keys of the Centralogic section
will return to their previous function.
8 If you want to copy the currently-displayed
31 Band GEQ settings to the 31 Band GEQ
of another rack, or to initialize the settings,
you can do so using the tool buttons at the
top of the popup window.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using
the tool buttons” (→ p. 31).
NOTE
• Only 31 Band GEQ settings that use less than fifteen bands
can be copied to a Flex15GEQ.
HINT
• GEQ settings can be saved/loaded at any time using the dedicated library (→ p. 31).
Graphic EQ operations
Using the Flex15GEQ
You will use the Centralogic section’s faders 1–8 and
[ON] keys to control the Flex15GEQ.
A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show
information for two GEQ units (A and B).
3
4
F GEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently selected Flex15GEQ on/off.
You can make settings independently for the two GEQ
units (A and B) in the rack.
3 Use the rack select tabs to choose either
1
2
1
B
C
D
E FLAT button
This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to
0 dB.
GEQ A or B, and specify the input-source
and output-destination correctly. Then
press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn on
the Flex15GEQ.
GEQ (A)
GEQ (B)
Rack graphic display area
Input/output meters
This indicates the level of the signals before and after
the Flex15GEQ. The levels for two GEQ units (A and
B) are shown.
HINT
• When you mount a Flex15GEQ, two monaural 31 Band GEQ
units are placed in a single rack. However, only up to fifteen
bands can be adjusted for each unit.
2 Press the rack in which you mounted the
Flex15GEQ.
The GEQ/EFFECT popup window for GEQ (A) or
GEQ (B) will appear.
5
6
4 Press one of the buttons in the FADER
ASSIGN field to select the group of bands
you will control using the Centralogic section’s faders.
For details on the bands corresponding to each button
in the FADER ASSIGN field, refer to step 4 of “Using
the 31 Band GEQ” (→ p. 163).
When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the
selected group of bands will turn white in the touch
screen, and you will be able to use the faders of the
Centralogic section to control them.
HINT
• The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked. When you turn off the button in the FADER
ASSIGN field, it will return to the locked state.
5 Operate the faders of the Centralogic section.
1
2
3
4
For each of a Flex15GEQ’s two GEQ units (A and B),
a maximum of fifteen bands can be controlled.
The remaining number of bands that can be controlled
is shown in realtime at the right of “AVAILABLE
BANDS” in the FADER ASSIGN field. If you have
used all fifteen bands, you will have to return one of
these bands to the flat position before you can operate
any other band.
1 EQ graph
This indicates the approximate response of the current
Flex15GEQ settings.
Remaining
number of
bands
B Faders
These faders indicate the amount of boost/cut for each
band of the Flex15GEQ. The actual values are shown
in the numerical boxes below.
16
Graphic EQ and effects
1
As described in “Virtual rack operations”
(→ p. 158) steps 1–3, mount a Flex15GEQ in
a rack.
D Rack select tabs
These tabs switch between racks 1–8. For a rack in
which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the tabs will be split
as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
HINT
C FADER ASSIGN field
In this field you can select the group of bands that will
be controlled by the faders. “AVAILABLE BANDS” is
a realtime indication of the remaining number of
bands (maximum 15) that can be controlled for the
current GEQ.
• The [ON] key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the
slightest amount. This indicates that the corresponding band
is being modified.
• To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the flat position,
press the corresponding [ON] key in the Centralogic section
to make it go dark.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
165
Graphic EQ operations
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust up to fifteen
bands.
HINT
• If you switch the display to a different screen or rack, the fader
assignments of the Centralogic section will forcibly be
defeated. However if you once again display the same rack,
the group of bands you had previously been controlling will
automatically be assigned to the faders.
7 When you’ve finished making settings, turn
off the buttons of the FADER ASSIGN field.
The faders and [ON] keys of the Centralogic section
will return to their previous function.
8 If you want to copy the currently-displayed
Flex15GEQ settings to the Flex15GEQ of
another rack, or to initialize the settings,
you can do so using the tool buttons at the
top of the popup window.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using
the tool buttons” (→ p. 31).
HINT
• GEQ settings can be saved/loaded at any time using the dedicated library (→ p. 31).
166
M7CL Owner’s Manual
About the internal effects
About the internal effects
The M7CL’s internal effects can be mounted in racks 5–8, and patched to an output channel’s
output or input channel’s input, or inserted into a channel. For each effect mounted in a rack, you
can choose one of 48 types of effect. With the default settings, the signals from MIX channels
13–16 are input to racks 5–8, and from the racks are then output to ST IN 1–4 (L/R).
NOTE
• The internal effects cannot be mounted in racks 1–4.
• Some effect types can be mounted only in rack 5 or 7.
To use an internal effect via send/return, assign the output
of a MIX channel etc. to the input of the effect, and assign
the output of the effect to an input channel.
In this case, the corresponding MIX bus is used as a master channel for the effect send, and the input channel is
used as an effect return channel.
Rack 5
Rack 7
EFFECT
INPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
Rack 6
EFFECT
L RETURN
EFFECT R
R RETURN
L RETURN
EFFECT
Input of the
input channel
INPUT R
R RETURN
If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two-input
effect, it will be processed as mono-in/stereo-out regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is
selected.
EFFECT
Alternatively, you can assign the input and output of the
internal effect to the insert-out/in of a desired channel
(except for a ST IN channel), so that the effect is inserted
into that channel.
EFFECT
EFFECT L
INPUT R
INPUT L
Rack 8
Insert-out of a
desired channel*
INPUT L
● MIX type effects
EFFECT
Output of
the output
channel
● STEREO type effects
INPUT
L or R
L RETURN
EFFECT
R RETURN
Insert-in of a
desired channel*
16
Graphic EQ and effects
*Except for a ST IN channel
The internal effects fall into two categories; “STEREO
type” (2-in/2-out) effects that process the L/R channel
input signals independently, and “MIX type” (1-in/2-out)
effects that mix the two channels before processing them.
If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an
effect, the way in which the L/R channels are processed
will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix
effect type is selected, as follows.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
167
About the internal effects
Using an internal effect
via send/return
HINT
• You can select more than one output destination for the effect.
Here we will explain how to use a MIX bus as an effect
send bus and a ST IN channel as an effect return channel,
so that the effect can be used in a send/return configuration.
4 In the GEQ/EFFECT field, press the rack in
which you mounted the effect.
The GEQ/EFFECT popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ or effect.
HINT
1
2
3
• If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus, select
“VARI” as the bus type. This will allow you to adjust the send
level separately for each input channel.
• If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo, it is convenient to assign the send-source MIX bus to stereo. (For
details on bus assignments → p. 212).
1 As described in “Virtual rack operations”
(→ p. 158) steps 1–3, mount an effect in a
rack.
The rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate
the effect type used by that effect, the number of
inputs and outputs, and the levels before and following
the effect.
4
1 INPUT L/R buttons
These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window. The operating procedure is the same as
for the INPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field.
2
1
3
1 Racks
B INPUT button
C OUTPUT button
2 Press the INPUT L button to open the OUT-
PUT CH SELECT popup window, and select
a MIX channel as the input source for the
rack.
For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 5 of “Virtual rack operations” (→
p. 158). The output of the MIX channel you’re using
as the effect send is now assigned to the L input of the
effect.
If you’re using a stereo source, assign the L/R signals
of the stereo MIX channels to the L/R inputs of the
rack.
3 Press the OUTPUT L button to open the
INPUT CH SELECT popup window, and
select the L input of the desired ST IN channel as the output-destination for the rack.
For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 6 of “Virtual rack operations” (→
p. 158). The L input of the ST IN channel used as the
effect return channel is now assigned to the L output
of the effect.
If you’re using the output of the effect in stereo, assign
the R input of the same ST IN channel to the R output
of the rack in the same way.
168
M7CL Owner’s Manual
B OUTPUT L/R buttons
These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window. The operating procedure is the same as for
the OUTPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field.
C Input/output meters
These indicate the level of the signals before and after
the effect.
D MIX BAL. knob
This knob adjusts the balance between the original
sound and effect sound included in the output signal
from the effect. If you press this knob to select it,
you’ll be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction encoder.
5 As necessary, use the multifunction
encoder to adjust the MIX BAL. knob.
The MIX BAL. knob adjusts the balance between the
original sound and effect sound included in the output
signal from the effect. This parameter is provided for
all effect types.
If you’re using the effect via send/return, set this to
100% (effect sound only).
HINT
• For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to Editing
the internal effect parameters (P. 171).
About the internal effects
6 To adjust the effect send level of an input
channel, use the navigation keys to access
the OVERVIEW screen that includes the
input channel you want to control.
HINT
• The input/output levels of the effect are shown by the input/
output meters at the upper right of the GEQ/EFFECT popup
window.
10 To adjust the effect return level, operate the
ST IN channel you selected as the outputdestination for the rack in step 3.
2
1
1 TO MIX/TO MATRIX field
B TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob
7 Make sure that a MIX bus is selected as the
send-destination of the TO MIX/TO MATRIX
field.
If a MATRIX bus is selected as the send-destination
(the field indicates “TO MATRIX”), use the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen’s TO MIX/TO
MATRIX button to switch to a MIX bus (→ p. 161).
8 Press the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob that
corresponds to the desired MIX bus, and
turn the multifunction encoder to adjust the
send level of the signal sent from each
channel to the MIX bus.
In this state you can adjust the send level of the signal
sent from the input channel to the internal effect.
Adjust the send level of other input channels in the
same way.
If you press the selected knob once again, the MIX
SEND popup window (8 ch) for the send-destination
MIX bus will appear. This popup window contains on/
off switches for the signals sent from each channel to
the corresponding bus, and lets you select the send
point (PRE or POST) (→ p. 64).
Graphic EQ and effects
16
NOTE
• At this time, you must be sure that the send level from the ST
IN channel you selected in step 3 to the corresponding MIX
bus is set to 0. If you raise this send level, the output of the
effect will be returned to the input of the same effect, possibly
causing oscillation.
9 To adjust the master level of the effect
send, call up the MIX channel you specified
as the input-source of the rack in step 2 to
the Centralogic section, and adjust the corresponding fader.
Set the level as high as possible without allowing the
post-effect signal to reach the overload point.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
169
About the internal effects
Inserting an internal effect
into a channel
Here we will explain how to insert an effect into a channel
by assigning the input/output of the internal effect to the
input/output of the desired channel (except for a ST IN
channel).
INSERT ON/OFF button
1 As described in “Virtual rack operations”
(→ p. 158) steps 1–3, mount an effect in a
rack.
The rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate
the effect type used by that effect, the number of
inputs and outputs, and the levels before and following
the effect.
HINT
• The INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window also lets you
change the insert-out/in position within the channel.
6 Make sure that the INSERT ON/OFF button
is turned on for the channel into which you
inserted the effect.
2
1
3
1 Racks
B INPUT buttons
C OUTPUT buttons
2 Press the INPUT L button to open the OUT-
PUT CH SELECT popup window, and select
the insert-out of a channel as the inputsource.
For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 5 of “Virtual rack operations” (→
p. 158). Insert-out is now assigned to the L input of the
effect.
3 Press the INPUT L button to open the
If it is off, press the button to turn it on. In this state,
effect insertion is enabled for the corresponding channel.
7 In the function access area, press the
RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK
window, and use the GEQ/EFFECT tab to
display the GEQ/EFFECT field.
8 Press the effect rack that you want to insert
into the channel; the GEQ/EFFECT popup
window will appear.
In this popup window you can edit the parameters of
the GEQ/effect. The popup window contains the following items.
1
2
3
INPUT CH SELECT popup window, and
select the insert-in of the same channel as
the output-destination.
For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 6 of “Virtual rack operations” (→
p. 158). Insert-in is now assigned to the L output of the
effect.
If you are inserting in a channel that handles a stereo
source, assign the R channel insert-out/insert-in to the
R input/output.
4 Use the navigation keys to access the
OVERVIEW screen for the channel in which
you want to insert the effect.
5 Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to
access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup
window.
Make sure that the rack you inserted in the input/output ports is selected. For details on Insert Out/In, refer
to “Inserting an external device into a channel” (→
p. 100).
170
M7CL Owner’s Manual
1 INPUT L/R buttons
These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window. The operating procedure is the same as
for the INPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field.
B OUTPUT L/R buttons
These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window. The operating procedure is the same as for
the OUTPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field.
About the internal effects
C Input/output meters
These indicate the level of the signals before and after
the effect.
9 Select the effect type and edit the effect
parameters.
For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to
“Editing the internal effect parameters” that follows.
HINT
• The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input/
output meters at the upper right of the GEQ/EFFECT popup
window.
Editing the internal effect
parameters
This section explains how to change the effect type and
edit the parameters.
1 As described in “Virtual rack operations”
(→ p. 158) steps 1–3, mount an effect in a
rack.
A rack in which an effect is mounted will show the
following information.
1
NOTE
2
• Adjust the effect send master level and the effect parameters
so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the
input or output stage of the effect.
as the rack’s output destination in step 3,
adjust the level as appropriate.
1 Effect title/type
This shows the effect title, the name of the type that is
used, and a graphic. The number of input/output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also
shown.
B Input/output meters
These indicate the level of the signals before and after
the effect.
2 Press the rack in which the effect you want
to edit is mounted.
The GEQ/EFFECT popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ or effect. In
the GEQ/EFFECT popup window you can use the tabs
to switch between the eight racks.
1
3
4 2
5
6 7
16
Graphic EQ and effects
10 Using the fader of the channel you selected
9
8
1 INPUT L/R buttons
These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window.
B OUTPUT L/R buttons
These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
171
About the internal effects
C Effect type field
This shows the effect title, the name of the type that is
used, and a graphic. The number of input/output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also
shown. When you press this field, the EFFECT TYPE
popup window will appear, allowing you to select the
effect type.
D EFFECT CUE button
This button cue-monitors the output of the currently
displayed effect. This cue function is valid only while
this screen is displayed. The cue will be cancelled
automatically when you switch to a different screen.
E Special parameter field
This shows special parameters that are specific to
some effect types.
HINT
• For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the
supplementary material at the end of this manual (→ p. 229).
5 Edit the settings in the special parameter
field as necessary.
For some effect types, parameters such as the following will appear in the special parameter field.
● TEMPO
This is shown if a tempo-type or modulation-type effect is
selected.
F BYPASS button
This button temporarily bypasses the effect.
1
G Input/output meters
These indicate the level of the signals before and after
the effect.
H Effect parameter field
This area shows parameters for the currently selected
effect type. When you press a knob in this field, you’ll
be able to use the multifunction encoders to control the
corresponding horizontal row of knobs.
I Rack select tabs
These tabs switch between racks 1–8.
1 MIDI CLK button
If you turn this button on, the BPM parameter of that
effect will be set to match the tempo of the MIDI timing clock being input from the MIDI port.
● PLAY/REC
This is shown if FREEZE is selected as the effect type.
3 To change the effect type, press the effect
type field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup
window.
1
Press a new effect type to select it.
1 PLAY button / REC button
These buttons are used to record (sample) and play
back when using the freeze effect. For details on how
to use this, refer to “Using the Freeze effect” (→
p. 175).
● SOLO
This is shown if M.BAND DYNA. or M.BAND COMP. is
selected as the effect type.
HINT
• You can also switch the effect type by recalling a library setting.
1
2
NOTE
• Effect types “HQ.PITCH” and “FREEZE” can be used only in
rack 5 or 7. Also, even if you copy these two effect types, you
will not be able to paste them to rack 6 or 8.
4 To edit the effect parameters, press a knob
in the effect parameter field to select it, and
turn the corresponding multifunction
encoder.
172
M7CL Owner’s Manual
1 HIGH/MID/LOW buttons
These buttons pass only the selected frequency band
(multiple selections are allowed).
B Gain reduction meters
These show the amount of gain reduction for each
band.
About the internal effects
6 If you want to monitor only the output sig-
nal of the currently displayed effect, press
the EFFECT CUE button to turn it on.
HINT
• Even if the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE mode (in which all
channels whose [CUE] keys are on will be mixed for monitoring), only the output signal of the effect will be monitored
when you turn on the EFFECT CUE button. (The [CUE] keys
that had been turned on until then will be temporarily
defeated.)
Using the Tap Tempo function
“Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay
time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval. To
use the Tap function, you must first assign Tap Tempo to a
user-defined key, and then operate that user-defined key.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
7 If you want to bypass the currently dis-
played effect, press the BYPASS button to
turn it on.
8 If you want to copy the currently-displayed
effect settings to the effect of another rack,
or to initialize the settings, you can do so
using the tool buttons at the top of the
popup window.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using
the tool buttons” (→ p. 31).
HINT
2 In the upper left of the screen, press the
USER SETUP button to access the USER
SETUP popup window.
16
This window includes several pages, which you can
switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of
the window.
3 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to
select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
Graphic EQ and effects
• Effect settings can be stored and recalled at any time using
the effect library (→ p. 31).
The USER DEFINED KEYS page lets you assign
functions to user defined keys [1]–[12].
M7CL Owner’s Manual
173
About the internal effects
User defined keys popup buttons
7 Press the rack in which the effect you want
to control is mounted.
The GEQ/EFFECT popup window will appear.
8 Press the effect type field to open the
EFFECT TYPE popup window, and select an
effect type that includes the BPM parameter.
The BPM parameter is included in delay-type and
modulation-type effects, and can be used to specify the
delay time or modulation speed.
4 Press the popup button for the user-defined
key to which you want to assign the Tap
Tempo function.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window
will appear.
BPM parameter
5 Select “TAP TEMPO” in the FUNCTION column, select “CURRENT PAGE” in the
PARAMETER 1 column, and press the OK
button.
Use the ↑/↓ buttons to select an item in each column.
Press the OK button; the Tap Tempo function will be
assigned to the user-defined key you selected in step 4,
and you will return to the USER DEFINED KEY
SETUP page.
HINT
• For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the
supplementary material at the end of this manual (→ p. 229).
9 At the desired tempo, repeatedly press the
user-defined key to which you assigned the
Tap Tempo function.
The average interval (BPM) at which you press the
key will be calculated, and that value will be reflected
by the BPM parameter.
The average interval will be input
(the average of a, b, and c)
a
b
c
HINT
• If you specify “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column, the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currentlyshown effect (rack).
• If you specify “RACK x” (x=5–8) in the PARAMETER 1 column, the Tap Tempo function can be used only for a specific
effect (rack).
• For more about user-defined keys, refer to “User-defined
keys” (→ p. 200).
6 In the function access area, press the
RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK
window, and use the GEQ/EFFECT tab to
display the GEQ/EFFECT field.
174
M7CL Owner’s Manual
First tap
Second tap
Third tap
Fourth tap
HINT
• If the average value is outside the range of 20–300 BPM, it
will be ignored.
• If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter
field, the BPM parameter value will change according to the
tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the MIDI port.
About the internal effects
Using the Freeze effect
Here’s how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality of a simple sampler. When this
effect type is selected, you can perform operations in the
screen to record (sample) and play back a sound.
1 In the function access area, press the
RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK
window, and use the GEQ/EFFECT tab to
display the GEQ/EFFECT field.
2 Mount an effect in rack 5 or rack 7.
5 To begin recording (sampling), press the
REC button and then press the PLAY button.
The signal being input to the effect will be recorded.
The progress bar shows the current recording location.
When a fixed time has elapsed, the buttons will automatically turn off.
HINT
• You can adjust the parameters in the window to make detailed
settings for recording time, the way in which recording will
begin, and the way in which the sample will play back. For
details on the parameters, refer to the supplementary material
at the end of this manual (→ p. 238).
NOTE
• Effect types “FREEZE” and “HQ.PITCH” can be used only in
rack 5 or 7.
3 Press the rack in which the effect you want
6 To play back the recorded sample, press
the PLAY button.
NOTE
• Once you stop, the sampled content will be erased.
to control is mounted.
The GEQ/EFFECT popup window will appear.
4 Press the effect type field to open the
EFFECT TYPE popup window, and select
“FREEZE.”
If the “FREEZE” effect type is selected, a PLAY button, REC button, and progress bar are shown in the
special parameter field.
16
Graphic EQ and effects
1 PLAY button
B REC button
C Progress bar
HINT
• As an alternative to switching the effect type, you can also
recall settings that use the “FREEZE” effect type from the
effect library.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
175
Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries
Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries
You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall graphic EQ and effect settings.
● GEQ library
● Effect library
Use the “GEQ library” to store and recall GEQ settings.
All GEQ units used in the M7CL can reference this GEQ
library. (However, the 31 Band GEQ and Flex15GEQ are
different types. You cannot recall a GEQ library item of a
different type.)
200 items can be recalled from the library. Number 000 is
read-only data for initialization, and the remaining library
numbers can be freely read or written.
Use the “Effect library” to store and recall effect settings.
199 items can be recalled from the effect library. Library
items 1–48 are read-only presets, and correspond to effect
types 1–48 respectively. Library items 49–57 are reserved
for use by the system. Other library item numbers can be
freely read and written.
To recall an item from the GEQ library, press the
LIBRARY button located in the upper part of the window
when a GEQ is shown in the GEQ/EFFECT popup window.
To recall an item from the effect library, press the
LIBRARY button located in the upper part of the window
when an effect is shown in the GEQ/EFFECT popup window.
LIBRARY button
LIBRARY button
For details on using the library, refer to “Using libraries”
(→ p. 31).
For details on using the library, refer to “Using libraries”
(→ p. 31).
NOTE
• Store/recall operations are performed on individual racks. It is
not possible to store or recall the two Flex15GEQ units individually.
NOTE
• Library items using the “HQ.PITCH” or “FREEZE” effect types
can be recalled only into rack 5 or 7. They cannot be recalled
into rack 6 or 8.
HINT
• You can also use MIDI messages (program changes) to recall
effect settings from the library (→ p. 184).
HINT
• To access the GEQ/EFFECT popup window, press the rack in
the GEQ/EFFECT field.
176
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Using an external head amp
Using an external head amp
If you connect an external head amp that supports remote control via a dedicated protocol
(Yamaha AD8HR) to the M7CL’s REMOTE connector, you will be able to remotely control parameters such as the phantom power (+48V), gain, and HPF of each channel from the M7CL.
External head amp connections
Here we will give the example of connecting the Yamaha
AD8HR.
In order to remotely control the AD8HR from the M7CL,
use an RS422 D-sub9 pin cable to connect the REMOTE
connector located on the M7CL’s rear panel to the
AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 1 connector. This connection
allows the M7CL to remotely control the AD8HR.
So that the signals input to the AD8HR will be sent to the
M7CL, use a D-sub25 pin AES/EBU cable to connect the
AD8HR’s DIGITAL OUT A (or B) to an I/O card installed
in a slot of the M7CL.
Alternatively, you can use a “daisy chain” connection to
remotely control multiple AD8HR units simultaneously.
To do this, connect the AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 2 connector to the second AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 1 connector. If
you use three Yamaha MY16-AE units, you can connect
up to six AD8HR units.
Audio signals
Remote signals
M7CL
Audio signals
Remote signals
M7CL
REMOTE connector
I/O
card
DIGITAL OUT
A connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
AD8HR 1
HA REMOTE 2 connector
I/O card
REMOTE connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
DIGITAL OUT A
connector
AD8HR 2
HA REMOTE 2 connector
HA REMOTE connector
DIGITAL OUT A connector
AD8HR
HA REMOTE 1 connector
AD8HR 3
HA REMOTE 2 connector
Analog inputs x 8
Up to six units
M7CL Owner’s Manual
16
Graphic EQ and effects
DIGITAL OUT
A connector
177
Using an external head amp
Remotely controlling
an external head amp
Here’s how an external head amp (subsequently referred
to as the “external HA”) connected to the REMOTE connector can be remotely controlled from the M7CL.
C Virtual racks
These are six racks in which remotely controllable
external HA units can be mounted. If an external HA
is mounted, its settings (GAIN setting and phantom
power on/off) are shown. When you press a rack, the
EXTERNAL HA popup window for that rack will
appear.
D EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup but-
1 Connect the M7CL and external HA.
Refer to “External head amp connections” (→ p. 177)
or the owner’s manual for your external HA.
2 In the function access area, press the
RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK
window.
2
ton
This button accesses the EXTERNAL HA PORT
SELECT popup window, where you can specify the
input ports to which the external HA mounted in the
rack will be connected.
E Field select tabs
Use these tabs to switch the field shown in the VIRTUAL RACK window. For details on the GEQ/
EFFECT fields, refer to “Virtual rack operations” (→
p. 158).
4 To specify the input ports for an external
HA, press the EXTERNAL HA PORT
SELECT popup button for that rack.
1
1 RACK button
The EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window
will appear. The popup window includes the following
items.
1
B EXTERNAL HA tab
2
3 In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the EXTERNAL HA tab to display the EXTERNAL HA field.
The EXTERNAL HA field includes the following
items.
1
5
1 PORT SELECT buttons
These buttons specify the input ports to which the
external HA is connected.
B NO ASSIGN button
This button defeats the port selection.
5 Use the PORT SELECT buttons to specify
the input ports to which the audio output of
the external HA is connected.
When you’ve finished making settings, press the
CLOSE button to close the popup window.
2
3
4
1 EXTERNAL HA field
This field shows the state of the connected external
HA.
B ID / Model name / +48V master
This displays information for the external HA
mounted in the rack. The ID number is automatically
assigned in order of the devices connected to the
REMOTE connector, from 1 to six. This area also
shows the on/off status of the master phantom power.
178
M7CL Owner’s Manual
NOTE
• If an external HA is connected to one of the M7CL’s slots, you
must specify the appropriate input port manually. If this is set
incorrectly, the external HA will not be detected correctly
when you patch input ports to input channels.
Using an external head amp
6 To remotely control an external HA, press
the rack in which the external HA you want
to control is mounted.
The EXTERNAL HA popup window will appear.
Here you can remotely control the external HA by
using the knobs and buttons in the M7CL’s display or
the encoders of the top panel.
7 To remotely control the external HA from an
input channel of the M7CL, use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen
that includes the channel whose HA you
want to control.
HA/PHASE field
1
2
3
4
5
1 +48V MASTER
If an external HA is connected to the REMOTE connector, the on/off status of the master phantom power
is shown here. (Switching this on/off is performed on
the external HA itself.)
B +48V buttons
These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.
C GAIN knobs
8 Press the HA/PHASE field of the channel
whose external HA you want to adjust; the
HA/PATCH popup window will appear.
Input port popup button
These indicate the gain of the external HA. To adjust
the value, press the knob to select it, and use multifunction encoders 1–8. The level meter located at the
immediate right of the knob indicates the input level
for the corresponding port.
E Rack select tabs
These tabs switch the rack that is displayed in the
EXTERNAL HA popup window.
HINT
• If you newly connect an AD8HR, these settings will be the
state of the AD8HR.
• These knobs and buttons are shown in the EXTERNAL HA
popup window even if an AD8HR is not connected, allowing
you to create and store a scene even while the AD8HR is not
connected.
9 Press the input port popup button, and
select the input port assigned to the external HA.
With these settings, the external HA can be used in the
same way as the M7CL’s own HA. For details on the
HA/PATCH popup window, refer to “Making HA
(Head Amp) settings” (→ p. 55).
HINT
• External HA settings are saved as part of the scene. However, the phantom master setting is an exception to this.
• When you adjust the brightness of the M7CL’s panel LEDs,
this will also affect the LEDs of the external HA.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
16
Graphic EQ and effects
D HPF knobs / ON buttons
These controls switch the external HA’s built-in highpass filter on/off, and adjust its cutoff frequency. If you
press the HPF knob to select it, you’ll be able to adjust
it using the corresponding multifunction encoder.
179
180
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 17
MIDI
This chapter explains how MIDI messages can be transmitted from an external device to control the M7CL’s parameters, and conversely how operations
on the M7CL can be transmitted as MIDI messages.
MIDI functionality on the M7CL
The M7CL can use MIDI to perform the following operations.
● Program Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library recall) on the M7CL, a program change message of the corresponding number can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a program
change message is received from an external device.
● Control Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (fader/encoder or key operation) on the M7CL, the corresponding control change message can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when control change messages are
received from an external device. This allows you to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external
device, and play them back later.
● Parameter change (SysEx) transmission and reception
When specific events (fader/encoder or key operations, changes in system settings or user settings) are executed, “parameter
change” system exclusive messages can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when
parameter changes are received from an external device.
Using this capability, M7CL operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, or
changes in system settings and user settings can be reflected on another M7CL console.
NOTE
17
MIDI
• The port used for transmission and reception of MIDI messages can be selected from the rear panel MIDI
IN/OUT connectors, the rear panel REMOTE connector, or an I/O card installed in a slot 1–3. All of the
above functionality will be common to the selected port.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
181
Basic MIDI settings
Basic MIDI settings
Here’s how to select the type of MIDI messages the M7CL will transmit and receive, the MIDI
port that will be used, and the MIDI channel.
1 In the function access area, press the
1 PORT/CH field
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
MIDI button
Here you can select the port and MIDI channel that
will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages. If
MIDI messages are being transmitted or received, the
SIGNAL indicators at the top of this area will light.
B Port select popup button
Opens the MIDI SETUP popup window, where you
can select the MIDI message transmission (Tx) and
reception (Rx) ports.
C Channel select popup button
Opens the MIDI SETUP popup window, where you
can select the MIDI message transmission (Tx) and
reception (Rx) channels.
D PROGRAM CHANGE field
Here you can make settings for program change transmission and reception.
• Tx button ....... Switches program change transmission on/off.
2 In the center of the screen, press the MIDI
button to access the MIDI popup window.
This window includes several pages, which you can
switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of
the window.
• Rx button....... Switches program change reception
on/off.
• ECHO button
........... This selects whether incoming program changes are echoed-out from
the MIDI transmission port.
HINT
• For details on how to assign the scene or effect for each program number, refer to “Using program changes to recall
scenes and library items” (→ p. 184).
E PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
Here you can select the program change transmit/
receive mode.
Tabs
• SINGLE button
........... If this button is on, program changes
will be transmitted and received on
a single MIDI channel.
3 Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the
MIDI SETUP page.
In the MIDI SETUP page you can select the type of
MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received,
and choose the port that will be used. This page
includes the following items.
23
• BANK button
........... If this button is on, bank select messages can be transmitted and
received in Single mode. (This is
disabled for Multi mode transmission/reception.)
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
182
M7CL Owner’s Manual
• OMNI button .. If this button is on, program changes
of all MIDI channels will be received
in Single mode. (Multi mode transmission/reception and Single mode
transmission are disabled.)
• MULTI button
........... If this button is on, program changes
will be transmitted/received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode).
Basic MIDI settings
F CONTROL CHANGE field
Here you can make settings for control change transmission/reception.
• Tx button........Switches control change transmission on/off.
• Rx button .......Switches control change reception
on/off.
2
1
• ECHO button
...........Selects whether incoming control
changes will be echoed out from the
MIDI transmit port.
• NRPN button
...........If this button is on, the M7CL’s mix
parameters will be transmitted/
received as NRPN messages on
one MIDI channel (NRPN mode).
• TABLE button
...........If this button is on, the M7CL’s mix
parameters will be transmitted/
received as control change messages on one MIDI channel (TABLE
mode).
H PARAMETER CHANGE field
Here you can make settings for transmission/reception
of “parameter change” system exclusive messages.
• Tx button........Switches parameter change transmission on/off.
• Rx button .......Switches parameter change reception on/off.
• ECHO button
...........Selects whether incoming parameter changes will be echoed out from
the MIDI transmit port.
I OTHER COMMAND field
Here you can specify how MIDI messages other than
program changes, control changes, and parameter
changes (i.e., messages such as note-on/off and MIDI
timing clock) will be received.
1 TERMINAL field
Select the port that will transmit or receive MIDI messages.
You can choose from the following items.
Item
Explanation
NONE
No port will be used.
MIDI
Rear panel MIDI IN (Rx) / OUT (Tx) connector
REMOTE
Rear panel REMOTE connector
SLOT 1–3
A card that supports serial transmission, installed
in a rear panel slot 1–3
B PORT NO. field
If you select SLOT 1–3 in the TERMINAL field,
choose port number 1–8 in this field. (The number of
available ports will depend on the card that is
installed.)
The currently available card is valid only for port 1.
5 Specify the type of port and the port number.
Use the ↑/↓ buttons to select an item. Press the OK
button to confirm the selected port and close the MIDI
SETUP popup window.
HINT
• Alternatively, you can select a port by pressing the desired
port name in the field, or by pressing the field to highlight it
and then turning one of the multifunction encoders to select
the port.
• ECHO button
...........Selects whether other MIDI messages that are received will be echoed out from the MIDI transmit port.
4 To specify the port that will be used to
transmit or receive each type of MIDI message, press the transmit (Tx) or receive (Rx)
port select popup button.
6 To specify the channel on which MIDI mes-
sages will be transmitted or received, press
the channel select popup button.
17
MIDI
G CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
Here you can select the control change transmission/
reception mode.
The MIDI SETUP popup window for selecting the
channel will appear. Operations in this window are the
same for both transmission (Tx) and reception (Rx),
and include the following items.
The MIDI SETUP popup window for selecting the
port will appear. Operations in this window are the
same for both transmission (Tx) and reception (Rx),
and include the following items.
1
M7CL Owner’s Manual
183
Basic MIDI settings • Using program changes to recall scenes and library items
1 CH field
Select CH 1–CH 16 as the channel that will be used to
transmit or receive MIDI messages.
8 Turn transmission/reception on or off for
each MIDI message.
HINT
7 Select the channel.
• For details on using program changes, refer to “Using program changes to recall scenes and library items,” below.
Use the ↑/↓ buttons to select an item. Press the OK
button to confirm the selected channel and close the
MIDI SETUP popup window.
• For details on using control changes, refer to “Using control
changes to control parameters” (→ p. 187).
HINT
• Alternatively, you can select the channel by pressing the
desired channel in the field or by turning one of the multifunction encoders.
• When transmitting or received parameter changes, the channel number you specify here is used as the device number (a
number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit).
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items
The M7CL lets you assign a specific event (scene recall or effect library recall) to each program
change number, so that when this event is executed on the M7CL, a program change message
of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a program change message is received from an external
device.
1 Connect the M7CL to your external device.
The following illustration shows an example of using
the MIDI IN/OUT connectors to transmit and receive
MIDI messages.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
3 In the center of the screen, press the MIDI
button to access the MIDI popup window.
4 Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the
MIDI SETUP page, and select the port and
MIDI channel on which program changes
will be transmitted and received, as
described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→
p. 182).
MIDI OUT
external
device
5 Press the PROGRAM CHANGE tab to
access the PROGRAM CHANGE page.
In the PROGRAM CHANGE page you can specify
how program changes will be transmitted and
received, and choose the event (scene recall or effect
library recall) that will be assigned to each program
number.
This page includes the following items.
M7CL
2 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
MIDI button
1
2
3
6
184
M7CL Owner’s Manual
4
5
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items
Here you can switch program change transmission/
reception on/off, and specify whether program
changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with
the PROGRAM CHANGE field of the MIDI SETUP
page.
B PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
Here you can select the program change transmit/
receive mode. This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field of the MIDI SETUP
page.
C List
This list shows the event (scene recall / effect library
recall) assigned to each program number. The list
shows the following items.
• CH/BANK........Indicates the MIDI channel 1–16 on
which program changes are transmitted/received. In Single mode if
the BANK button is on, this will be
labeled BANK, and the numerical
value in this column will correspond
to the bank number.
● Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on)
Only program changes of the transmit (Tx) and
receive (Rx) channels specified in the MIDI SETUP
page will be transmitted and received.
When a program change on the Rx channel is
received, the event assigned to that program number
of the corresponding channel in the list will be executed.
When you execute the specified event on the M7CL,
the program change of the corresponding program
number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown
in the list. (If an event is assigned to more than one
program number on the same channel, the lowestnumbered program number will be transmitted.)
If you turn on the OMNI button / BANK button in
Single mode, operation will change as follows.
• When the OMNI button is on
........... Program changes of all MIDI channels will be received. However,
regardless of the MIDI channel that
is received, the event assigned to
the corresponding program number
of the Rx channel will be executed.
Turning on the OMNI button will not
change the operation for program
change transmission.
• NO...................Indicates the program number 1–
128.
• PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT
...........Indicates the type/number/title of
the event assigned to the program
number for each MIDI channel
(bank number). You can press an
individual event to access the MIDI
PROGRAM CHANGE popup window, where you can change the
assignment for each program number.
D CLEAR ALL button
Pressing this button will delete all event assignments
in the list.
E INITIALIZE ALL button
Pressing this button will restore all event assignments
in the list to their default state.
F Scroll knob
This knob scrolls the contents of the list. You can use
multifunction encoder 1 to control this.
6 Use the buttons of the PROGRAM CHANGE
MODE field to select the program change
transmission/reception mode.
You can select one of the following two program
change transmission/reception modes.
● Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on)
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received. (The transmit/receive channel
specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be ignored.)
When a program change is received, the event
assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be executed.
When you execute the specified event on the M7CL,
the program change of the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be transmitted.
• When the BANK button is on
........... The CH indication in the list will
change to BANK (bank number),
and bank select (control change #0,
#32) + program change messages
can be transmitted and received.
This is convenient when you want to
control more than 128 events on a
single MIDI channel.
When bank select and then program change messages
(in that order) are received on the Rx channel, the
event assigned to that bank number and program number in the list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on the M7CL, bank
select + program change messages for the bank number and program number assigned to that event will be
transmitted on the Tx channel. (If the same event is
assigned more than once in the list, the lowest-numbered bank number and program number will be transmitted.)
17
MIDI
1 PROGRAM CHANGE field
NOTE
• The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in
Multi mode.
• If the BANK button is on and only a program change on an
applicable MIDI channel is received, the last-selected bank
number will be used.
HINT
• If the BANK button is on, the OMNI button can also be turned
on at the same time. In this case, bank select + program
change messages of all MIDI channels will be received.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
185
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items
7 Use the buttons of the PROGRAM CHANGE
field to turn transmission and reception on/
off, and make settings for echo output.
This field includes the following items.
● Tx button
Switches program change transmission on/off.
● Rx button
Switches program change reception on/off.
event you want to assign, and use the
LIBRARY NAME field to select the scene/
library number that will be recalled.
Use the ↑/↓ buttons to select an item. Press the OK
button to confirm the change and close the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window.
HINT
● ECHO button
This selects whether incoming program changes are
echoed-out from the MIDI transmission port.
8 To change the event assignment for each
program number, press the desired event in
the list.
The MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window will
appear. In this window you can specify the event
assigned to each program number. The popup window
includes the following items.
2
1
9 Use the TYPE field to select the type of
• You can also select the desired event (or scene/library number) in this field by pressing it.
• If you press a field to highlight the selected item, you can turn
any of the multifunction encoders to select the event (or
scene/library number).
10 Assign events to other program numbers in
the same way.
With these settings, executing the specified event on
the M7CL will cause the corresponding program
change (or bank select + program change) message to
be transmitted to the external device.
When an external device transmits a program change
(or bank select + program change) message on the
appropriate channel, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding MIDI channel (or
bank number) will be executed.
HINT
• You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments
to program numbers. The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all
program number assignments to their default state.
• Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings
for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes.
1 TYPE field
NOTE
Select the type of event.
The following table lists the events you can select.
Item
Content
NO ASSIGN
No assignment
SCENE
Scene memory recall operations
RACK 5–8
Effect library recall operations for racks 5–8
(only if an effect is mounted)
B LIBRARY NAME field
Select the number and title of the scene or library item
to recall. If you selected SCENE in the TYPE field,
this shows the scene number and its title. If you
selected RACK 5–8, this shows the library number
and its title.
186
M7CL Owner’s Manual
• In Single mode, if the same event is assigned to more than
one program number on a Tx channel, only the lowest program number will be transmitted. (If the BANK button is on,
only the program number of the lowest bank number will be
transmitted.)
• In Multi mode, if the same event is assigned to more than one
MIDI channel and more than one program number, only the
lowest program number on each MIDI channel will be transmitted.
Using control changes to control parameters
Using control changes to control parameters
You can use MIDI control change messages to control specified events (fader/encoder operations, [ON] key on/off operations etc.) on the M7CL. This capability can be used to record fader
and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play back this data later.
You can use control changes to control events in either of the following two ways.
● Using control changes
This method uses typical control changes (control numbers 1–31, 33–95, 102–119). You can freely assign an event to each
control number.
● Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number)
This method uses a special type of control change messages called NRPN.
NRPN uses control change numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and LSB (Least Significant
Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted control change messages of control change number 6 (or 6
and 38) to specify the value of that parameter.
The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre-defined, and cannot be changed.
HINT
• For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages, refer to the appendix (→ p. 249).
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3 In the center of the screen, press the MIDI
button to access the MIDI popup window.
4 Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the
MIDI SETUP page, and select the port and
MIDI channel on which control changes will
be transmitted and received, as described
in “Basic MIDI settings” (→ p. 182).
5 Press the CONTROL CHANGE tab to
access the CONTROL CHANGE page.
In the CONTROL CHANGE page you can specify
how control changes will be transmitted and received,
and assign the event (fader/encoder operation, [ON]
key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control
number. This page includes the following items.
1
2
Here you can switch control change transmission/
reception on/off, and specify whether control changes
will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the
CONTROL CHANGE field of the MIDI SETUP page.
B CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
Here you can select the control change transmission/
reception mode. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field of the MIDI SETUP
page.
C List
This list shows the event (fader/encoder pattern, [ON]
key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control
number.
• NO. ................. This indicates the control number.
You can use control numbers 1–31,
33–95, and 102–119.
• CONTROL CHANGE EVENT
........... Indicates/selects the type of event
assigned to each control number.
When you press an event, the MIDI
CONTROL CHANGE popup window will appear, allowing you to
change the control number assignment.
17
D CLEAR ALL button
Pressing this button will delete all event assignments
in the list.
3
6
1 CONTROL CHANGE field
MIDI
1 Connect the M7CL to your external device.
2 In the function access area, press the
4
5
E INITIALIZE ALL button
Pressing this button will restore all event assignments
in the list to their default state.
F Scroll knob
This knob scrolls the contents of the list. You can use
multifunction encoder 1 to control this.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
187
Using control changes to control parameters
6 Use the buttons of the CONTROL CHANGE
MODE field to select the control change
transmission/reception mode.
NOTE
• If NRPN mode is selected as the control change transmission/reception mode, the settings in this window are ignored.
You can choose one of the following two modes for
control change transmission/reception.
● NRPN mode (when the NRPN button is on)
The M7CL’s various mix parameters will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as
NRPN messages. If you select this mode, the
assignments in the list will be ignored.
● TABLE mode (when the TABLE button is on)
The M7CL’s various mix parameters will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as
control change messages.
HINT
• For details on the events that can be assigned to control
changes, refer to the appendix (→ p. 245).
9 In the order of the MODE field → PARAMETER 1 field → PARAMETER 2 field, specify
the type of event you want to assign.
Use the ↑/↓ buttons to select an item. Press the OK
button to confirm the change and close the MIDI
CONTROL CHANGE popup window.
HINT
• The channel on which control changes are transmitted and
received is specified by the MIDI SETUP page PORT/CH field
(→ p. 182).
7 Use the buttons of the CONTROL CHANGE
field to turn transmission and reception on/
off, and make settings for echo output.
• You can press a field to highlight the item you want to select,
and then turn one of the multifunction encoders to select an
event.
10 Assign events to other control numbers in
the same way.
● Tx button
When you operate the parameters you assigned on the
M7CL, control change messages will be transmitted to
external devices. Similarly, if the corresponding control change messages are sent from an external device
on the appropriate channel, the parameters assigned to
those control numbers will change.
● Rx button
Switches control change reception on/off.
● ECHO button
Selects whether incoming control changes will be
echoed out from the MIDI transmit port.
To change the event assignment for each
control number, press the corresponding
event.
The MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup window will
appear. In this window you can specify the event
assigned to each control number. The window contains
the following items.
1
2
1 MODE field
Select the type of event.
B PARAMETER 1/2 field
In conjunction with the MODE field, this specifies the
type of event.
188
• You can also press the desired event in the field to select it.
Each button has the following function.
Switches control change transmission on/off.
8
HINT
M7CL Owner’s Manual
HINT
• You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments
to control numbers. The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all
control number assignments to their default state.
• Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings
for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes.
Using parameter changes to control parameters
Using parameter changes to control parameters
On the M7CL, you can use a type of system exclusive messages called “parameter changes” to
control specific events (fader/encoder operations, [ON] key on/off operations, etc.) as an alternative to using control changes or NRPN messages.
For details on the parameter changes that can be transmitted and received, refer to “MIDI data
format” in the appendix.
1 Connect the M7CL to your external device.
2 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3 In the center of the screen, press the MIDI
button to access the MIDI popup window.
4 Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the
MIDI SETUP page, and select the port and
MIDI channel on which parameter changes
will be transmitted and received, as
described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→
p. 182).
NOTE
• Parameter changes include a “device number” that specifies
the transmitting or receiving device. The transmit (Tx) channel
and receive (Rx) channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page
are used as the device number.
• Please be aware that if the device number included in the
transmitted parameter change does not match the device
number of the receiving M7CL console, the message will be
ignored.
• If parameter change and control change transmission/reception are turned on at the same time, a large amount of data
will flood the MIDI port and cause overflows or other problems, so you should avoid this.
5 Use the Tx button and Rx button of the
PARAMETER CHANGE field to turn on
parameter change transmission/reception.
In this state when you operate specific parameters on
the M7CL, the corresponding parameter change messages will be transmitted. If valid parameter change
messages are transmitted from an external device, the
parameters assigned to those parameter changes will
be controlled.
MIDI
17
M7CL Owner’s Manual
189
190
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 18
User settings (Security)
This chapter explains the User Level settings that allow restrictions on the
parameters that can be operated by each user, the Console Lock function
that temporarily disables operation of the console, the Preferences settings
that allow the operating environment to be customized, and Save/Load operations using USB storage devices.
User Level settings
User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that be operated by each user, or to change
the settings of user-defined keys and preference settings for each user. Settings for each user can be
stored as a “user authentication key” on a USB storage device, allowing users to be switched easily,
simply by connecting this storage device to a USB connector. This is convenient in the following situations.
• Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented.
• The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer (guest engineer) can be limited.
• In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other, output settings etc. can be locked to
prevent unintended operations.
• Preferences of each operator can easily be switched.
User types and user authentication keys
There are three types of user, as follows. In order to operate the M7CL, you must log-in as a user.
• Administrator ............This is the administrator of the M7CL, and can use all of its functionality. Only one set of
Administrator settings is maintained inside the M7CL. The Administrator can create user
authentication keys for other users.
• Guest..........................The Guest can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator. Only one
set of Guest settings is maintained inside the M7CL.
When a user logs on, the user settings for that user are applied. User settings include the following information.
• Password (except for Guest)
• User level (except for Administrator)
• Preferences
18
User settings (Security)
• User ............................A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator. User settings
are saved on a USB storage device as a user authentication key. Multiple sets of User settings can be saved with different user names. A User who has Power User privileges can
create or edit user authentication keys with a specified user level.
• User-defined keys
M7CL Owner’s Manual
191
User Level settings
Privileges for each user are as follows.
Logged-in user
Administrator
User
User-defined keys and
preferences editing
Available
Available
(cannot edit, since Administrator
(can edit Administrator setcan always perform all operations/
tings and Guest settings)
Guest settings can be edited)
Comment
editing
User authentication key
(USB storage device)
Create new
Overwrite-save
Available
—
Available
—
Power user
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Normal user
(user without
Power User
privileges)
Available
N/A
(viewing only)
Available
Available
—
Available
(only settings other
than User Level)
Guest
Available
N/A
(viewing only)
—
Available
—
—
Setting the Administrator password
With the factory settings, the Administrator password is
not set, meaning that anyone can log in with Administrator
privileges and perform all operations. If you want to
restrict the operations of other users, you must specify an
Administrator password.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
PASSWORD CHANGE button
2 Press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter
a password.
192
Password
setting
User Level setting
M7CL Owner’s Manual
3 Enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD
field, then enter the same password in the
RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK button.
The password can be up to eight characters. If the two
passwords that were entered match, the Administrator
password will be set.
For details on entering a password, refer to “Entering
names” (→ p. 30).
User Level settings
Creating a user authentication key
Here’s how to create a user authentication key and save it
on a USB storage device. A user authentication key can be
created only by an Administrator or Power User. The user
level can be specified when the authentication key is created, but the user-defined key settings and preference settings will be carried over from the user who is currently
logged-in.
1
Connect a USB storage device to the USB
connector.
2 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
CREATE USER KEY button
D POWER USER
Specifies whether Power User privileges will be
granted to this user.
E ACCESS PERMISSION
These settings specify the range of operations that the
user can perform. For details on each item, refer to
p. 196.
4 When you have specified the user name,
comment, password, power user privileges
on/off, and user rights, press the CREATE
button.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, the user
authentication key will be saved on the USB storage
device.
If you are logged-in as a Power User, a dialog box will
ask you to confirm the store-destination USB storage
device. If you want to save the user authentication key
on a different USB storage device, connect the desired
USB storage device and then press [OK]. The user
authentication key will be saved, and the logged-in
user will automatically switch to the newly created
user.
Logging-in
3 Press the CREATE USER KEY button.
The CREATE USER KEY popup window will appear.
1
2
3
4
In order to operate the M7CL, you must log in as the
Administrator, Guest, or a User.
User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in
the console itself, but in order to log in as a User you must
connect a USB storage device on which a user authentication key has been saved. If you disconnect the USB storage device after logging-in, your access privileges will
forcibly revert to Guest.
NOTE
• If the M7CL’S power is turned off and then on again, it will generally start up in the log-in state in which the power was turned off. If
a user password has been assigned, you will need to enter the
password. However if you cancel the input, you will be forcibly
logged-in as Guest. Similarly, you will also be forcibly logged-in as
Guest if you had been logged-in as a user requiring a user authentication key, but the USB storage device is no longer connected.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
5
Log-in button
1 USER NAME
Here you can specify or view a user name of up to
eight characters. Press this to access a keyboard window where you can enter the user name.
18
User settings (Security)
● Logging-in as Administrator
B COMMENT
Here you can specify or view a comment of up to
thirty-two characters about the user. Press this to
access a keyboard window where you can enter the
comment.
C PASSWORD
Specify a password of up to eight characters. Press this
to access a keyboard window where you can enter the
password.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
193
User Level settings
2 Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN
window.
● Logging-in as a User
To log-in as a User, you will use a user authentication key
saved on a USB storage device. You may also log-in using
a user authentication key created on a different M7CL
console.
1 Connect a USB storage device to the USB
connector.
3 Press the LOGIN button for ADMINISTRATOR.
If no Administrator password has been set, you will
simply be logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the
password.
2 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3 Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN
window.
4 Press the LOAD button for EXTERNAL
USER KEY.
The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear, and the
files and directories saved on the USB storage device
will be displayed. User authentication keys have a file
name of “User name.M7U”.
4 Enter the password and press the OK button.
For details on entering a password, refer to “Entering
names” (→ p. 30).
If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG
PASSWORD” will appear in the bottom of the screen.
● Logging-in as Guest
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2 Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN
window.
5 Turn multifunction encoder 1 to select the
user authentication key for the user as
whom you want to log-in.
For details on loading from a USB storage device,
refer to “Loading a file from a USB storage device”
(→ p. 203).
6 Press the LOAD button.
3 Press the LOGIN button for GUEST to login.
If no password has been set, you will simply be
logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password.
NOTE
• If you select a user authentication key that was created on a
different M7CL console, a keyboard window will appear,
allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the M7CL
that you will be using. (If the Administrator passwords are
identical, this window will not appear.) When you enter the
correct Administrator password, another keyboard window
will appear, allowing you to enter the password for the
selected user.
• If you re-save the user authentication key, you will not be
asked for the Administrator password the next time. (→ p. 196
Editing a user authentication key)
194
M7CL Owner’s Manual
User Level settings
3 Enter the current password and press the
OK button.
For details on entering a password, refer to “Entering
names” (→ p. 30).
When you enter the correct password, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the new password.
7 Enter the password and press the OK button.
For details on entering a password, refer to “Entering
names” (→ p. 30).
If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG
PASSWORD” will appear in the bottom of the screen.
Changing the password
Here’s how to change the password of the logged-in user.
A change in the Administrator password is updated immediately. A change in a User password will be discarded if
the user simply logs-out; it must be applied to the user
authentication key before the user logs-out. The Guest
account does not have a password.
4 Enter the new password in the NEW PASS-
WORD field, then enter the same password
in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK button.
If the two passwords that were entered match, the new
password will be set.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
PASSWORD CHANGE button
User settings (Security)
18
2 Press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter
a password.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
195
User Level settings
Editing a user authentication key
If you are logged-in as a user, you can edit your userdefined keys and preference settings, and overwrite (save)
them onto your user authentication key. If you are loggedin as a Power User, you can also change the user level.
Changing the user level
Here’s how to view or change the user level.
• For the Administrator
........... There is no such setting for the
Administrator himself, but the setting
for the Guest account can be
changed.
1 Log-in as a user, and edit the user-defined
keys (→ p. 200) and preference settings (→
p. 198).
If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also
change the user level.
• For the Guest
........... The setting of the Guest account can
be viewed. It cannot be changed.
• For a normal User
........... The setting of that User account can
be viewed. It cannot be changed.
2 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
• For a Power User
........... The setting of that User account can
be changed.
SAVE KEY button
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
USER SETUP button
3 Press the SAVE KEY button.
A dialog box will ask whether you really want to overwrite (save) the user authentication key.
4 Press OK to overwrite (save) the user
authentication key.
2 Press the USER SETUP button to access
the USER SETUP popup window.
8
1
2
3
6
4
7
5
USER LEVEL tab
196
M7CL Owner’s Manual
USER LEVEL for
GUEST tab
User Level settings
3 Press the USER LEVEL tab to access the
USER LEVEL page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can
switch to the USER LEVEL for GUEST page, and
view or change the user level of the Guest account.
This page includes the following items.
1 CH OPERATION
Here you can specify (for each channel) the operations
that will be permitted for input channels, output channels, and DCA groups. The settings will apply to the
currently selected channel. The channel display field
shows the settings for the selected channel. Use the
panel [SEL] keys to select the channel for which you
want to make settings.
• HA...................Restricts operation of the HA (Head
Amp) patched to that channel.
• PROCESSING
...........Restricts operation of all signal processing parameters for that channel
(except for fader, [ON] key, send
level, etc.)
HINT
• For the channel parameters included in PROCESSING, refer
to the appendix (p. 252).
• FADER / ON ...Restricts operation of that channel’s
fader, [ON] key, send level, etc.
• SET BY SEL ...If this button is on, a group of multiple channels can be set to the same
settings in a single operation. To
select channels, turn this button on,
and then press the [SEL] keys of the
desired channels on the panel. If
you change the setting of any channel in the group, the change will
affect all channels in the group.
Channels that have the same settings are shown with the same color
in the channel display field.
B CURRENT SCENE
This specifies the operations that can be performed on
the current scene memory.
• INPUT PATCH / NAME
C SCENE LIST
This specifies the operations that can be performed on
scene memories.
• STORE / SORT operations
• RECALL operations
D LIBRARY LIST
This specifies the operations that can be performed on
libraries.
• STORE / CLEAR operations
• RECALL operations
E FILE LOAD
This specifies the types of file that can be loaded from
a USB storage device. The user authentication key
contains the user level, user-defined keys, and preference settings. Other data is saved in an “ALL” file.
• USER SETUP (user-defined keys and preference settings)
• SYSTEM SETUP / MONITOR SETUP
• CURRENT SCENE
• SCENE LIST
• LIBRARY LIST
F MONITOR SETUP
This specifies the monitor setup operations that can be
performed.
• OSCILLATOR
• TALKBACK
G SYSTEM SETUP
This specifies the system setup operations that can be
performed.
• MIXER SETUP
• OUTPUT SETUP
• MIDI
H SET ALL/CLEAR ALL button
This button permits/clears all items.
4 Specify the user level by pressing the button for each item that will be permitted.
5 When you have finished making settings,
close the popup window and press the
SETUP button in the function access area.
...........Operations for input channel patching and names will be restricted.
18
• OUTPUT PATCH / NAME
User settings (Security)
...........Operations for output channel
patching and names will be
restricted.
• BUS SETUP ...Operations for bus setup will be
restricted.
• RACK 1–8.......Operations for the racks (1–8) will
be restricted.
However, there will be no restriction
on operating the MIDI CLK button
displayed for delay-type and modulation-type effects, or the PLAY/REC
button displayed for the FREEZE
effect.
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN / MASTER
...........Operations for mute group assignment and mute group master will be
restricted.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
197
Preferences
Preferences
Here’s how you can make various settings for the M7CL’s operating environment, such as how
popup windows appear, and whether SEL key operations will be linked. These settings are
changed for the user who is logged-in, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you will also
be able to change the Guest settings.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
USER SETUP button
B PATCH
These buttons let you turn on/off options related to
patch operations. You can select the following options.
• PATCH CONFIRMATION
........... If this button is on, a confirmation
message will appear when you edit
an input patch or output patch.
• STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION
........... If this button is on, a confirmation
message will appear when you edit
an input patch or output patch item
that is already patched.
C ERROR MESSAGE
Here you can select whether a warning will be displayed when the following problems occur.
• DIGITAL I/O ERROR
........... This appears if a sync error is
detected in the digital input/output.
2 Press the USER SETUP button to access
the USER SETUP popup window.
4
1
• MIDI I/O ERROR
........... This appears if an error is detected
in MIDI transmission/reception.
D PANEL OPERATION
These buttons let you turn on/off options related to
panel operations. You can select the following options.
● AUTO CHANNEL SELECT – INPUT
● AUTO CHANNEL SELECT – OUTPUT
2
These specify whether the corresponding channel
will be selected when you operate a channel’s [ON]
key or fader. This can be turned on/off separately for
INPUT CH (input channels) and OUTPUT CH (output channels).
3
● [CUE]→[SEL] LINK
PREFERENCE tab
PREFERENCE for
GUEST tab
3 Press the PREFERENCE tab to access the
PREFERENCE page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also
switch to the PREFERENCE for GUEST page and
make preference settings for the Guest account.
This page includes the following items.
1 STORE / RECALL
These buttons let you turn on/off options related to
scene store/recall operations. You can select the following options.
• STORE CONFIRMATION
• RECALL CONFIRMATION
...........If these buttons are on, a confirmation message will appear when you
perform a Store or Recall operation
respectively.
198
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked
with cue operations. If this button is on, turning the
[CUE] key of a channel OFF to ON will simultaneously select that channel and light its [SEL] key.
● [NAVIGATION KEY]→[SEL] LINK – INPUT
● [NAVIGATION KEY]→[SEL] LINK – OUTPUT
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked
with operations of the navigation keys. If this button
is on, pressing the desired navigation key will cause
the [SEL] key of the most recently selected channel
in the Centralogic section to light.
This can be turned on/off separately for INPUT CH
(input channels) and OUTPUT CH (output channels).
● [SEL]→[NAVIGATION KEY] LINK
Specifies whether the navigation key selection will
be linked with channel selection. If this button is on,
selecting a channel will cause the corresponding navigation key for that channel to also be selected.
Preferences
● POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS
Specifies whether pressing a knob of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section when the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is shown will
cause a popup window (1 ch) to appear. If this button
is on, a popup window (1 ch) will appear (or close)
whenever you press a knob.
● SCENE UP/DOWN
This specifies what the SCENE MEMORY [▲]/[▼]
keys will do when pressed in the SCENE screen. You
can choose one of the following two operations.
• SCENE +1/-1
...........Pressing the SCENE MEMORY [▲]
key will select the next highest-numbered scene, and pressing the
SCENE MEMORY [▼] key will
select the next lowest-numbered
scene. (Key presses will increment/
decrement the scene number.)
• LIST UP/DOWN
...........Pressing the SCENE MEMORY [▲]
key will scroll the list upward, and
pressing the SCENE MEMORY [▼]
key will scroll the list downward.
(The up/down key corresponds to
the direction in which the list will
scroll.)
● LIST ORDER
This specifies the order in which scene memories and
library items will appear in the screen.
• NORMAL ........Show the list in ascending numerical order.
• REVERSE.......Show the list in descending numerical order.
4 Use the buttons in the screen to make preference settings.
5 When you have finished making settings,
close the popup window and press the
SETUP button in the function access area.
User settings (Security)
18
M7CL Owner’s Manual
199
User-defined keys
User-defined keys
Here’s how you can assign the desired functions to the user defined keys in the USER DEFINED
section of the top panel, and press these keys to execute the defined function.
This assignment procedure will define the user-defined keys for the user who is currently loggedin, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make user-defined key settings for
the Guest account.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
4 Press the button for the user-defined key to
which you want to assign a function.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window will
appear. In this window you can select a function to
assign to the user defined key, and select option
parameters.
USER SETUP button
2 Press the USER SETUP button to access
the USER SETUP popup window.
5 Make sure that the FUNCTION field is
enclosed by a yellow frame, and then use
the [↑]/[↓] buttons in the lower part of the
field or the multifunction encoders of the
panel to select the function you want to
assign.
If the selected function has additional parameters, the
parameters are shown in the PARAMETER 1/2 field.
For details on the assignable functions and their
parameters, refer to “Functions that can be assigned to
user-defined keys” (→ p. 253).
6 If the selected function has parameters,
press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move
the yellow frame, and select parameters 1
and 2 in the same way.
USER DEFINED
KEYS tab
USER DEFINED KEYS
for GUEST tab
7 Press the OK button to close the USER
DEFINED KEY SETUP window.
3
Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to
select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also
select the USER DEFINED KEYS for GUEST page to
make user-defined key settings for the Guest account.
The twelve buttons in the screen corresponds to userdefined keys [1]–[12] on the panel, and the function or
parameter assigned to each one is shown below the
corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the button, an indication of “—” is shown.
200
M7CL Owner’s Manual
8 Assign the desired functions to other userdefined keys in the same way.
9 To execute an assigned function, press the
corresponding USER DEFINED [1]–[12] key
on the panel.
Console lock
Console lock
You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This setting completely disables operations of the panel and touch screen, so that controls cannot be
operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a
break.
If a password is set for the currently logged-in user, that password will be used for the Console
Lock function. If you power-cycle the console while it is locked, you will be asked to enter the
password if you had been logged-in as a user for whom a password is assigned. If you had been
logged-in as the Guest, the console will start up normally.
NOTE
• If you have forgotten the password, refer to “Initializing the M7CL’s internal memory” ( p. 216).
• The Guest cannot set a password.
• Even while the console is locked, control from an external device via MIDI or M7CL Editor will still operate as usual.
Locking the console
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
Unlocking the console
1 In the CONSOLE LOCK screen, press the
UNLOCK button.
2 Press the CONSOLE LOCK button.
If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is
set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to
enter the password. For details on entering a password,
refer to “Entering names” (→ p. 30).
If you are logged-in as a user for whom no password is
set, the console will be unlocked.
If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is
set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to
enter the password.
18
2 Enter the password for the logged-in user,
User settings (Security)
CONSOLE LOCK button
and press the OK button.
3 Enter the password for the logged-in user,
The console will be unlocked, you will return to the
SETUP screen, and the controls will be operable once again.
and press the OK button.
The CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear, the Console Lock function will be enabled, and all controls
except MONITOR LEVEL knob will become inoperable.
HINT
• You may disconnect the USB storage device while the console is locked. Reconnect the USB storage device before you
press the UNLOCK button.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
201
Using a USB storage device to save/load data
Using a USB storage device to save/load data
This section explains how you can connect a commercially-available USB storage device to the
USB connector located at the right side of the display, and use it to save or load internal settings
of the M7CL or user authentication keys.
NOTE
• The M7CL can handle FAT32, FAT16, or FAT12 file systems, but if you format the storage device from the
M7CL it will be formatted as FAT16. Long file names are not supported.
• Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash memory that is no larger than 2 GB.
CAUTION
• An ACCESS indicator is shown in the function access area while data is being accessed (saved, loaded,
or deleted). Do not disconnect the USB connector or power-off the M7CL while this indicator is shown.
Doing so may damage the data on the storage media.
Saving the M7CL’s internal data
on a USB storage device
Here’s how all of the M7CL’s internal data (except for the
data included in a user authentication key) can be saved on
the USB storage device as a file. The saved file will have
an extension of “.M7C”.
3 If necessary, press the directory icon and
change the directory.
To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field.
4 Press the SAVE button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter
a file name and comment.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
SAVE/LOAD button
5 Enter a file name of up to eight characters,
a comment of up to 32 characters, and
press the SAVE button.
When the file has finished being saved, the popup
window showing the save progress indication and the
type of data will close.
2 Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the
SAVE/LOAD popup window.
202
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Using a USB storage device to save/load data
Loading a file from a
USB storage device
4 Press the LOAD button, and a confirmation
dialog box will appear.
Here’s how to load a M7CL setting file (.M7C) from the
USB storage device on which it was saved.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
SAVE/LOAD button
5 Press the OK button to begin loading the
file.
When the file has finished being loaded, the popup
window showing the progress indication and the type
of data will close. Even if you cancel during this procedure, the data up to that point will have been loaded.
The type of file that can be loaded will depend on the
User Level setting at the time you load the file.
Editing the files saved on
a USB storage device
2 Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the
SAVE/LOAD popup window.
Here’s how you can perform editing operations such as
sorting the files and directories on a USB storage device,
editing the file names or comments, copying, or pasting.
● File editing
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
SAVE/LOAD button
File list
18
3 To select the file you want to load, press the
desired file in the file list, or turn multifunction encoder 1 on the panel.
The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file
that is selected for operations.
2 Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the
SAVE/LOAD popup window.
The list will show the files and sub-directories that
have been saved.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
User settings (Security)
LOAD button
203
Using a USB storage device to save/load data
123 4
5
6
• FILE TYPE...... Files that contain M7CL internal settings are shown as “ALL,” user keys
as “KEY,” other files as “???”, and
directories as [DIR].
• TIME STAMP
........... This shows the date and time at
which the file was last modified.
NOTE
7
• The file list can display only up to one hundred items.
H File selection knob
This knob selects a file shown in the file list. You can
operate this knob using multifunction encoder 1.
8 9 J
K
L
1 COPY button
This button copies a file into buffer memory (a temporary holding area) (→ p. 205).
J LOAD button
Loads the selected M7CL setting file (→ p. 203).
B PASTE button
This button pastes the file from buffer memory (→
p. 205).
K CREATE USER KEY button
Creates a user authentication key (→ p. 193).
C DELETE button
This button deletes the selected file (→ p. 205).
D MAKE DIR button
This button creates a new directory (→ p. 206).
E PATH
This shows the name of the current directory. Press the
arrow button to move to the next higher level. If the
current directory is the top level, the arrow button is
dimmed.
NOTE
• You cannot save if the directory name would exceed 237
characters.
F VOLUME NAME/FREE SIZE
This shows the volume name and the amount of free
space on the USB storage device. If the USB storage
device is write-protected, a protect symbol is shown in
the VOLUME NAME field.
G File list
This area lists the files that are saved on the USB storage device. The highlighted line indicates the file
selected for operations.
The file list contains the following items. When you
press the item name at the top of each column, it will
turn orange, and the list will be sorted by that item.
Each time you press the item name, the sorting order
will alternate between ascending and descending
order.
• FILE NAME.....Indicates the file name or directory
name, and shows an icon indicating
its type.
• COMMENT .....For M7CL files, shows the comment. If you press this area, a keyboard window will appear, allowing
you to enter a comment for the file.
• READ ONLY ...A lock symbol is shown to indicate
protected files. You can press this
area to enable or disable the protect
setting.
204
I SAVE button
Saves all of the M7CL’s internal settings together (→
p. 202).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
L FORMAT button
Formats media on the USB storage media (→ p. 206).
3 Perform the desired editing operation.
For details on the procedure, refer to the explanations
that follow.
● Sorting files and editing file names/
comments
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2 Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the
SAVE/LOAD popup window.
3 To sort the files, press one of the titles
“FILE NAME,” “COMMENT,” “READ ONLY,”
“FILE TYPE,” or “TIME STAMP” at the top of
each column in the file list.
The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column title you pressed.
1
2
34 5
1 FILE NAME
Sort the list in alphanumerical order of file name.
B COMMENT
Sort the list in alphanumeric order of the comment.
C READ ONLY
Sort the list according to Write Protect on/off status.
D FILE TYPE
Sort the list according to file type.
E TIME STAMP
Sort the list in order of date/time of editing.
Using a USB storage device to save/load data
HINT
• By pressing the same location again, you can change the
direction (ascending or descending) in which the list is sorted.
4 If you want to edit the file name or com-
ment, press the FILE NAME field or COMMENT field of each file to access the
keyboard window.
For details on entering text, refer to “Entering names”
(→ p. 30).
4 If necessary, press the directory icon and
change the directory.
To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field.
5 Press the PASTE button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter
the paste-destination file name.
For details on entering text, refer to “Entering names”
(→ p. 30).
6 Enter the paste-destination file name, and
press the PASTE button.
If you specified a file name that already exists, a message will ask you for confirmation. Press the OK button to execute.
NOTE
• You can’t paste with an existing file name.
● Deleting a file
5 Enter a file name or comment, and press
1 In the function access area, press the
6 To turn the protect setting on/off, press the
READ ONLY field of the file.
2 Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the
A protect symbol is displayed for write-protected files;
these files cannot be overwritten.
3 Turn multifunction encoder 1 to select the
NOTE
• You cannot edit the file name or comment of a write-protected
file.
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
SAVE/LOAD popup window.
file you want to delete, and press the
DELETE button.
A dialog box will ask you to reconfirm the Delete
operation.
● Copying/pasting a file
Here’s how to copy a desired file into buffer memory, and
then paste it with a different file name.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2
4 To execute the Delete operation, press the
OK button.
Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the
SAVE/LOAD popup window.
3 Turn multifunction encoder 1 to select the
18
User settings (Security)
the RENAME button or SET button.
NOTE
• You can’t delete a protected file.
copy-source file, and press the COPY button.
The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file
that is selected for operations.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
205
Using a USB storage device to save/load data
● Creating a directory
1
2 Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the
SAVE/LOAD popup window.
In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2 Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the
SAVE/LOAD popup window.
3 If necessary, press the directory icon and
change the directory.
To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field.
4 Press the MAKE DIR button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter
a directory name.
For details on entering text, refer to “Entering names”
(→ p. 30).
FORMAT button
3 Press the FORMAT button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter
the volume name that will be applied after formatting.
For details on entering text, refer to “Entering names”
(→ p. 30).
5 Enter the name of the directory you want to
create, and press the MAKE button.
If you specified a file name that already exists, a message will ask you for confirmation. Press the OK button to execute.
4 Enter a volume name, and press the FORMAT button.
Formatting media on
a USB storage device
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Format operation.
Here’s how to format media on a USB storage device
using the FAT16 file system. USB storage devices up to 2
G bytes in capacity are supported.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
5 To execute the Format operation, press the
OK button.
SAVE/LOAD button
206
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Chapter 19
Other functions
This chapter explains other functionality of the M7CL not covered elsewhere.
About the SETUP screen
In the SETUP screen you can make various settings that apply to the entire M7CL. To access the
SETUP screen, press the SETUP button in the function access area. The screen contains the
following items.
2
E CASCADE button
Use this button to access the CASCADE popup window,
where you can make settings for cascade connections (→
p. 210).
3
F OUTPORT SETUP button
Use this button to access the OUTPUT PORT popup window, where you can make output port settings (→ p. 96).
1
G MIDI button
Use this button to access the MIDI popup window, where
you can make MIDI-related settings (→ p. 182).
8
H +48V MASTER ON/OFF button
This button switches the master phantom power on/off.
NOTE
4
5
6
7
9
• If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the
+48V button of each channel is on.
K
I BUS SETUP button
Use this button to access the BUS SETUP popup window,
where you can make settings for bus operation and switch
between mono/stereo (→ p. 212).
L
M
N
1 USER SETUP button
J CONSOLE LOCK button
Use this button to enable the Console Lock function,
which temporarily disables panel operations (→ p. 201).
Use this button to access the USER SETUP popup window, where you can restrict the functionality available to
each user and make system settings.
K DATE/TIME button
Use this button to access the DATE/TIME popup window,
where you can set the internal clock (→ p. 213).
B LOGIN field
Here you can switch users and change passwords (→
p. 193).
L NETWORK button
Use this button to access the NETWORK popup window,
where you can make Ethernet settings (→ p. 214).
C STORAGE field
Here you can save/load user settings on a USB storage
device, or create a user key (→ p. 202).
M Version / Power Supply field
This area shows the current firmware version, and information about the power supply.
D WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP button
Use this button to access the WORD CLOCK/SLOT
SETUP popup window, where you can make settings for
word clock and for the I/O cards installed in slots 1–3 (→
p. 208).
• CPUM/CPUP.. The firmware version is shown separately for each CPU; “CPUM” (main
CPU) and “CPUP” (display control
CPU).
M7CL Owner’s Manual
19
Other functions
J
207
About the SETUP screen • Word Clock and Slot settings
• BATTERY........This indicates the voltage of the internal
backup battery. This will indicate OK if
operation is normal, or LOW or NO if the
voltage is low.
NOTE
N BRIGHTNESS field
Here you can control the brightness of the screen, panel,
and lamps. The corresponding multifunction encoder can
be used to operate the knobs that control the brightness.
You can also use the BANK A/B buttons to save two different sets of brightness settings (→ p. 215).
• The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down. If
this occurs, immediately save your data on a USB storage device
and contact your Yamaha dealer.
• POWER SUPPLY
...........This indicates the status of the internal
power supply (INT) and external power
supply (EXT).
Word Clock and Slot settings
“Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing. If you connect external equipment such as a DAW system or HDR (Hard Disk Recorder) to a
digital I/O card installed in slot 1–3, this equipment must be synchronized to the same word clock
in order for digital audio signals to be sent and received. If digital audio signals are transferred in
an unsynchronized state, the data will not be transmitted or received correctly, and noise may be
present in the signal, even if the sampling rates are the same.
Specifically, you must first decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the
entire system (the word clock master), and then set the remaining devices (the word clock
slaves) so that they synchronize to the word clock master.
If you wish to use the M7CL as a word clock slave that is synchronized to the word clock supplied
from an external device, you must specify the appropriate clock source (the port through which
the word clock is obtained).
The following steps show how to select the clock source that the M7CL will use.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2 In the SYSTEM SETUP field at the center of
the screen, press the WORD CLOCK/SLOT
SETUP button to open the WORD CLOCK/
SLOT SETUP popup window.
In the SETUP screen you can make settings that apply
to the entire M7CL.
This popup window contains the following items.
1
3
4
5
6
2
1
2
1 SYSTEM SETUP field
B WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP button
208
M7CL Owner’s Manual
1 MASTER CLOCK SELECT field
Use the buttons to select the clock source you want to
use as the word clock master. The frequency of the
clock on which the M7CL is currently operating is
shown in the upper left of this field. (This will indicate
“UNLOCKED” if synchronization is not achieved,
such as immediately after the master clock has been
switched.)
Word Clock and Slot settings
C CHANNEL
This area shows the channel numbers of the digital I/O
card(s) installed in slots 1–3.
D FREQUENCY (Clock frequency)
This indicates the clock frequency of the signal being
input to each channel of the digital I/O card, in sets of
two channels.
E SRC (Sampling Rate Converter)
These buttons are on/off switches (in two groups of
two channels) for the sampling rate converters that
automatically convert an external clock frequency to
match the M7CL. This is available only for slots in
which a digital I/O card with a built-in sampling rate
converter is installed.
F EMPHASIS STATUS
This indicates whether emphasis is applied to the input
signal, in sets of two channels. This item is only for
display, and cannot be edited. This is available only for
slots in which a digital I/O card is installed.
3 In the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field,
select the desired clock source.
You can choose one of the following clock sources.
● INT 48 k
● INT 44.1 k
The M7CL’s internal clock (sampling rate 48 kHz
or 44.1 kHz, respectively) will be the clock source.
Choose one of these if you want to use the M7CL as
the word clock master.
● WORD CLOCK IN
The word clock supplied from the rear panel
WORD CLOCK IN jack will be used as the clock
source. In this case, the M7CL will operate as a
word clock slave.
● SLOT 1–3
The clock data of the digital audio signal supplied
via a digital I/O card in slot 1–3 (selectable in twochannel units) will be used as the clock source. In
this case, the M7CL will operate as a word clock
slave.
The status (operating state) of the clock data being
received from each port is indicated by the color of the
symbol displayed immediately above. Each color has
the following significance.
● LOCK (light blue)
This indicates that a clock synchronized with the
selected source is being input. If an external device
is connected to the corresponding connector or slot,
input/output is occurring normally between that
device and the M7CL. If the sampling frequency is
close, this status may be displayed even if not synchronized.
● LOCK, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (yellow)
A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized
with the selected clock source. If an external device
is connected to the corresponding connector, input/
output cannot occur correctly between that device
and the M7CL.
● SRC ON (green)
This is a special status only for SLOT 1–3, indicating that the corresponding channel’s SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) is enabled. This means that
even if the signal is not synchronized, normal input/
output with the M7CL is occurring.
● UNLOCK (red)
A valid clock is not being input. If an external
device is connected to the corresponding connector,
input/output cannot occur correctly between that
device and the M7CL.
● UNKNOWN (black)
This indicates that the clock status cannot be
detected because no external device is connected or
because there is no valid clock input. You will be
able to select this connector/slot, but successful synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection
is established.
If the symbol for the port selected in step 3 has turned
light blue, and the clock frequency is shown at the
upper left of the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field,
this indicates that the M7CL is operating correctly
with the new clock.
HINT
• If you use a digital I/O card that contains a sampling rate converter (MY8-AE96S), input and output can occur normally
with the M7CL even when unsynchronized. In this case, turn
on the SRC button for the slot/channel that is receiving the
signal.
NOTE
• If the symbol for the selected clock does not turn light blue,
make sure that the external device is correctly connected,
and that the external device is set to transmit clock data.
• Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed. In order to protect your speaker system, be
sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the
word clock setting.
• If you attempt to select a channel whose SRC is on as the
word clock source, a message will appear, warning you that
the sampling rate converter will be disabled.
4 To close the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP
popup window, press the “×” symbol
located in the upper right.
You will return to the SETUP screen.
5 To close the SETUP screen, press the
19
Other functions
B Slot number / Card type
This area shows the type of digital I/O card installed in
slots 1–3.
SETUP button in the function access area.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
209
Using cascade connections
Using cascade connections
By cascade-connecting two or more M7CL units or an M7CL with an external mixer (such as the
Yamaha PM5D) you can share the buses. For example this is convenient when you want to use
an external mixer to increase the number of inputs.
Here we will explain cascade connections and operation, using an example in which two M7CL
units are cascade-connected.
To cascade two M7CL units, you will install digital I/O
cards in their respective slots, and connect the output ports
of the sending unit (the cascade slave) to the input ports of
the receiving unit (the cascade master).
The following illustration shows an example in which
three eight-channel digital I/O cards for each unit are
installed in the cascade slave M7CL and in the cascade
master M7CL, and the DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sending unit connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving unit.
Audio signals
of unit A
DIGITAL
OUT
M7CL A
Cascade slave
Operations on the cascade
slave M7CL
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2 In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the
center of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button to open the CASCADE popup
window.
Audio signals
of A + B
DIGITAL
IN
1
M7CL B
Cascade master
: Digital I/O card
In this example, up to twenty four buses chosen from MIX
bus 1–16, MATRIX bus 1–8, STEREO bus (L/R),
MONO(C) bus, and CUE bus (L/R) can be shared, and the
mixed signals transmitted from the cascade master M7CL.
(If you use sixteen-channel digital I/O cards, you’ll be
able to share all buses.)
You do not need to make settings on each M7CL to specify the slot/channel to which each bus is assigned. The
procedure below is given separately for the cascade slave
and the cascade master.
HINT
• If you’re cascade-connecting the M7CL with the PM5D, you can
use the M7CL as the cascade slave if you set the PM5D’s CASCADE IN PORT SELECT to a slot. However, only the audio signals will be cascaded, and the control signals cannot be linked.
• You can also use an AD/DA card to make cascade connections
with an analog mixer.
• There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade-connected, but the signal delay at the cascade slave will increase
according to the number of units from the cascade master.
2
The CASCADE popup window contains the following
items.
1 Port select popup buttons
These buttons access a popup window where you can
select the input/output port for each bus.
B CASCADE IN PATCH/CASCADE OUT
PATCH tabs
These switch between the CASCADE IN PATCH
page and the CASCADE OUT PATCH page.
The CASCADE popup window is divided into two
pages; a CASCADE IN PATCH page where you can
select the input ports for the cascade connection, and a
CASCADE OUT PATCH page where you can select
the output ports. Use the tabs located in the lower left
of the screen to switch between these pages.
3 Press the CASCADE OUT PATCH tab to
access the CASCADE OUT PATCH page.
In this screen you can select the slot and output port
that will output each bus.
210
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Using cascade connections
4 Press the port select popup button for the
bus whose port you want to assign.
The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will
appear.
Operations on the cascade
master M7CL
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
1
2 In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the
2
center of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button to open the CASCADE popup
window.
3 Press the CASCADE IN PATCH tab to
access the CASCADE IN PATCH page.
This popup window contains the following items.
1 Slot select tabs
These tabs select slots 1–3.
B Port select buttons
These buttons select the port of the specified slot.
4 Press the port select popup button for the
bus whose port you want to assign.
The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will
appear.
5 Use the slot select tabs and port select buttons to select the desired slot and output
ports, and press the CLOSE button.
The port will be assigned to the bus you selected.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign ports to
other buses.
HINT
7 To close the CASCADE popup window,
press the “×” symbol located in the upper
right.
You will return to the SETUP screen.
5 Use the slot select tabs and port select buttons to select the desired slot and input
ports, and press the CLOSE button.
The port will be assigned to the bus you selected.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign ports to
other buses.
If desired, you can assign two or more buses to the
same input port.
7 To close the CASCADE popup window,
press the “×” symbol located in the upper
right.
In this state, the bus signals of the cascade slave will
be sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade master,
and the combined signals of both buses will be output
from the cascade master.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
19
Other functions
• You can’t assign two or more buses to the same output port. If
you select a bus to which a signal route has already been
assigned, the previous assignment will be cancelled.
211
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses
This section explains how to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such
as switching between stereo and monaural, and selecting the position from which the signal is
sent from an input channel.
The settings you make in the following procedure are saved as part of the scene.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2 In the center right of the SETUP screen,
press the BUS SETUP button to open the
BUS SETUP popup window.
In the BUS SETUP popup window you can make various settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses.
1
2
3
3 Use the MIX BUS SETUP/MATRIX BUS
SETUP tabs to view either the MIX buses or
the MATRIX buses.
4 Use the buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE field to
specify whether each bus will function as
STEREO (main parameters will be linked for
two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered buses) or MONOx2 (use as two monaural channels).
5 Use the buttons of the BUS TYPE / SEND
POINT field to select the position from
which the signal of the input channel will be
sent.
In the case of a MIX bus, you can use this field to
switch the type of bus (VARI or FIXED). The following items can be selected for each bus.
● MIX bus
• VARI [PRE EQ]
........... The send level of the MIX bus is
adjustable. Choose this if you want
to use the MIX bus as an external
effect send or as a foldback output.
The signal is sent from immediately
before the input channel EQ (attenuator).
4
This popup window contains the following items.
1 SIGNAL TYPE (Signal processing
method)
This selects whether two adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered buses will be used as stereo channels
whose main parameters are linked (STEREO) or as
two monaural channels (MONO x2).
B BUS TYPE / SEND POINT
For two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered
buses, this selects the position from which the signal
will be sent from the input channel. For a MIX bus,
you can also switch the bus type (VARI or FIXED)
here.
C PAN LINK
This specifies whether the position from which the signal is sent from an input channel to the stereo bus will
be linked with the INPUT TO ST PAN setting.
D MIX BUS SETUP/MATRIX BUS SETUP tabs
These tabs switch the type of buses (MIX buses or
MATRIX buses) shown in the screen.
212
M7CL Owner’s Manual
• VARI [PRE FADER]
........... The send level of the MIX bus is
adjustable. Choose this if you want
to use the MIX bus as an external
effect send or as a foldback output.
The signal is sent from immediately
before the input channel fader.
• FIXED ........... The send level of the MIX bus is
fixed at nominal level (0.0 dB).
Choose this if you want to use the
MIX bus as a group output or as a
bus output for recording on a multitrack recorder. The signal is sent
from immediately after the [ON] key
of the input channel.
● MATRIX bus
• PRE EQ.......... The signal is sent from immediately
before the input channel EQ (attenuator).
• PRE FADER ... The signal is sent from immediately
before the input channel fader.
Setting the date and time of the internal clock
6 As desired, turn the buttons of the PAN
LINK field on/off.
In the PAN LINK field you can specify whether the
panning of the signal sent from an input channel to the
stereo bus will be linked with operations of the INPUT
TO ST PAN knob.
● If the PAN LINK button is on
If the send-destination bus is stereo, the PAN knob
that appears in the location of the SEND LEVEL
knob of the input channel’s SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or OVERVIEW screen will be
linked with the INPUT TO ST PAN knob.
● If the PAN LINK button is off
The PAN knob that appears in the location of the
SEND LEVEL knob in the input channel’s
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or OVERVIEW screen can be operated independently of the
INPUT TO ST PAN knob.
This parameter can be enabled only if the SIGNAL
TYPE of the corresponding bus is STEREO (and for a
MIX bus, the BUS TYPE must also be VARI).
7 To return to the SETUP screen, press the
“×” symbol.
Setting the date and time of the internal clock
This section explains how to set the date and time of the clock built into the M7CL, and how to
view the date and time.
The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when saving a scene.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2 Press the DATE/TIME button located in the
bottom row of the SETUP screen, to open
the DATE/TIME popup window.
1
2
3
3 In the DISPLAY FORMAT field, press the
MODE button several times to select the
desired format for date and time display.
You can select from the following display formats.
● Date
MM/DD/YYYY(Month/Day/Year)
DD/MM/YYYY(Day/Month/Year)
YYYY/MM/DD(Year/Month/Day)
● Time
The popup window includes the following items.
1 DATE
Specifies the date of the internal clock.
B TIME
Specifies the time of the internal clock.
C DISPLAY FORMAT
Specifies the format in which the time of the internal
clock is shown.
4 Use multifunction encoders 1–6 on the top
panel to specify the current date and time.
5 When you have finished making settings,
press the OK button.
19
Other functions
24Hours (hours shown in a range of 0–23)
12Hours (hours shown from AM 0–AM 11 and PM
0–PM 11)
The date, time, and display format you specified will
be finalized, and the popup window will close. If you
press the CANCEL button or the “×” symbol instead
of the OK button, your changes will be discarded and
the popup window will close.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
213
Setting the network address
Setting the network address
Here’s how to set the network address that will be required when you use the M7CL’s Ethernet
connector to connect it to a Windows computer.
NOTE
• The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this reason,
if you turn off the Monitor function, the cue signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speakers. However, the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES OUT jack.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2 In the lower line of the SETUP screen, press
the NETWORK button to access the NETWORK popup window.
3 As appropriate for the type of Ethernet jack
on your computer, use the LINK MODE buttons to select the specification of the network to which you will be connecting.
NOTE
• Be aware that if the specification does not match, communication will not occur correctly.
1
3
2
5
4
1 IP ADDRESS
This is a number assigned to identify each device on
the Internet or LAN (Local Area Network).
B GATEWAY ADDRESS
This is a number that identifies a device (gateway) that
allows data of differing media or protocol to be
exchanged within a network to allow communication.
C SUBNET MASK
This is a number that defines the number of bits (of the
IP address used within the network) that will be used
as the network address that distinguishes the network.
D MAC ADDRESS
This is the MAC (Machine Access Control) address
specified for identifying a host within a network. This
field is only for display, and cannot be edited.
E LINK MODE
Select either 100BASE-TX (transmission speed: maximum 100 Mbps) or 10BASE-T (transmission speed:
max 10 Mbps) as the specification used for communication via the Ethernet jack.
214
M7CL Owner’s Manual
4 Press the knob in the screen to select it,
and use the top panel multifunction encoders to specify the address.
If you are connecting the M7CL to your computer in a
one-to-one connection, we recommend that you make
the following initial settings.
IP address: 192.168.0.128 or similar (however, it
must not conflict with the IP address of any other
device on the network)
Gateway address: 192.168.0.1 or similar (however, it
must not conflict with the IP address of any other
device on the network)
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 or similar
For details on settings when connecting to a LAN,
refer to the M7CL Editor installation guide.
5 When you have finished making settings,
press the OK button.
The changes will be finalized, and the popup window
will close. If you press the CANCEL button or the “×”
symbol instead of the OK button, your changes will be
discarded and the popup window will close.
Specifying the brightness of the touch screen, LEDs, and lamps
Specifying the brightness of the touch screen, LEDs, and lamps
Here’s how to specify the brightness of the touch screen, top panel LEDs, and lamps connected
to the rear panel LAMP connectors.
1 In the function access area, press the
SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2 In the BRIGHTNESS field located in the
right of the bottom row in the SETUP
screen, press the BANK A or BANK B button.
You can save two different brightness settings in bank
A and B, and switch between them rapidly when
desired.
4 If desired, switch between banks A/B and
make settings for the other bank in the
same way.
Now you can switch between the BANK A and BANK
B buttons of the BRIGHTNESS field to switch the
brightness of the touch screen, LCD, and lamps in a
single operation. You can also assign the BRIGHTNESS parameter to a user-defined key, and press that
key to switch between banks A and B.
3 Use multifunction encoders 6–8 to set the
following parameters.
● SCREEN
Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.
● PANEL
Adjusts the brightness of the top panel LEDs. If the
optional MBM7CL meter bridge is installed, this
will also affect the LEDs of the meter bridge.
NOTE
• If the AD8HR is connected, the brightness of the AD8HR’s
LEDs will also change.
● LAMP
Adjusts the brightness of the lamps connected to the
rear panel LAMP jacks.
Other functions
19
M7CL Owner’s Manual
215
Initializing the M7CL’s internal memory
Initializing the M7CL’s internal memory
If an error occurs in the M7CL’s internal memory, or if you have forgotten the password, you can
use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory.
CAUTION
• The entire contents of memory will be lost if you initialize the internal memory.
Proceed with the following operation only if you are very sure you want to do this.
1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY
[STORE] key of the panel, turn on the
power.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu
screen will appear.
3 A dialog box will ask you to confirm the initialization. Press the INITIALIZE button.
A dialog box will ask you to reconfirm the operation.
4 Press the OK button in the confirmation
dialog box.
Initialization will begin.
NOTE
• Do not press any button until initialization has been completed.
5 Press the EXIT button.
The M7CL will start up in normal operating mode.
HINT
• Alternatively, you can continue by selecting a different menu
instead of pressing the EXIT button.
2 Press one of the following buttons according to the type of initialization you want to
perform.
• INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES
...........The entire memory including scene
memories and libraries will be
returned to their factory-set condition.
• INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES
...........The contents of memory except for
scene memories and libraries will be
returned to its factory-set condition.
NOTE
• If the backup battery voltage is low, or if an error occurs in the
internal memory, a warning dialog box will appear, and then
the initialization menu will appear. If the warning dialog box
appears, and you press the EXIT button to start up in normal
operating mode, Yamaha will not guarantee that the unit will
operate correctly.
216
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen (Calibration function)
Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen (Calibration function)
Here’s how to correctly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch screen.
1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY
[STORE] key of the panel, turn on the
power.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu
screen will appear.
3 Press the START button.
A confirmation dialog box will appear.
4 Press the OK button in the dialog box.
A cross-shaped cursor will appear in the screen.
5 This cursor will appear a total of three
times. Press each location at which it
appears.
NOTE
• In order to set the detection points accurately, press the
cross-shaped cursor from the position and posture in which
you normally operate the unit.
6 Press the EXIT button.
The M7CL will start up in normal operating mode.
HINT
2 Press the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
button.
• Alternatively, you can continue by selecting a different menu
instead of pressing the EXIT button.
The TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE
screen will appear, allowing you to adjust the touch
screen.
HINT
• When you cannot start calibration by touching, press the
SCENE MEMORY[▲][▼ ] key to select TOUCH SCREEN
CALIBRATION button and then press the [STORE] key to
start.
Other functions
19
M7CL Owner’s Manual
217
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)
Depending on the environment in which you use the M7CL, discrepancies may occur in the
motion of the motor faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies.
1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY
[STORE] key of the panel, turn on the
power.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu
screen will appear.
5 Press the OK button in the dialog box.
6 Each of the specified faders will move to
the target positions in the following
sequence. Manually move the fader to the
correct positions.
1
B
C
D
-∞ (all the way down)
-20 dB
0 dB
+10 dB (all the way up)
7 When you’ve adjusted the fader position,
press the [NEXT] button.
The process will proceed to the next fader position.
8 Repeat steps 6–7 to adjust the faders for
positions (1) through (4).
2 Press the FADER CALIBRATION button.
The FADER CALIBRATION MODE screen will
appear, where you can adjust the faders.
Calibration will be performed semi-automatically for
the specified faders (INPUT, ST IN, Centralogic faders, STEREO/MONO). This window will also appear
if a problem is detected in the fader settings while the
M7CL is running.
9 When calibration has been completed and
the RESTART button has not appeared,
press the APPLY button.
The calibration settings will be saved in internal memory.
If the RESTART button appears, calibration has failed.
Press the RESTART button to execute calibration once
again.
10 Press the EXIT button.
The M7CL will start up in normal operating mode.
HINT
• Alternatively, you can continue by selecting a different menu
instead of pressing the EXIT button.
3 Press a [SEL] key to specify the faders that
you want to calibrate.
Faders for which a problem was detected at start-up
will already be selected.
4 Press the START button.
A confirmation dialog box will appear.
218
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Adjusting the input/output gain (Calibration function)
Adjusting the input/output gain (Calibration function)
If necessary, you can make fine adjustments to the input/output gain.
1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY
[STORE] key of the panel, turn on the
power.
• OUTPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the
output ports)
........... Access the OUTPUT PORT TRIM
window, and make fine adjustments
to the gain of the specified analog
output port in 0.01 dB steps.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu
screen will appear.
2 In the MODE SELECT field, select the item
you want to adjust, and press the button.
• SLOT OUTPUT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the
output ports)
........... Access the SLOT OUTPUT TRIM
window, and make fine adjustments
to the gain of the output ports of the
specified slot in 0.01 dB steps.
The corresponding setting screen will appear.
You can make the following three gain adjustments for
analog input/output.
• INPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the
analog input gain)
...........Access the INPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to
the gain of the specified analog
input port in 0.1 dB steps.
3 Press a knob to select it, and use the multifunction encoders to adjust the value.
4 Press the EXIT button.
The M7CL will start up in normal operating mode.
HINT
19
Other functions
If you press the RESET ALL button provided in each
screen, all settings in the screen will be reset to 0 dB.
The factory settings are also 0 dB.
• Alternatively, you can continue by selecting a different menu
instead of pressing the EXIT button.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
219
Adjusting the input/output gain (Calibration function)
220
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Appendices
EQ Library List
Parameter
Title
01 Bass Drum 1
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
–3.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
100 Hz
265 Hz
1.06 kHz
5.30 kHz
Q
02 Bass Drum 2
1.25
10.0
0.90
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
LPF
G
+8.0 dB
–7.0 dB
+6.0 dB
ON
F
80.0 Hz
400 Hz
2.50 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
03 Snare Drum 1
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
+4.5 dB
132 Hz
1.00 kHz
3.15 kHz
5.00 kHz
1.25
4.5
0.11
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+1.5 dB
–8.5 dB
+2.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
180 Hz
335 Hz
2.36 kHz
4.00 kHz
—
10.0
0.70
0.10
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+2.0 dB
–7.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+1.0 dB
F
212 Hz
670 Hz
4.50 kHz
6.30 kHz
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
425 Hz
1.06 kHz
13.2 kHz
—
8.0
0.90
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.0 dB
–2.5 dB
+1.0 dB
+0.5 dB
F
95.0 Hz
425 Hz
2.80 kHz
7.50 kHz
0.50
1.0
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
–4.5 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
100 Hz
400 Hz
2.80 kHz
17.0 kHz
—
4.5
0.56
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–7.5 dB
+4.5 dB
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
35.5 Hz
112 Hz
2.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
—
5.0
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.5 dB
+0.5 dB
F
112 Hz
112 Hz
2.24 kHz
4.00 kHz
0.10
5.0
6.3
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
+8.5 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
85.0 Hz
950 Hz
4.00 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
12 Syn. Bass 2
—
L.SHELF
G
Q
11 Syn. Bass 1
0.28
H.SHELF
106 Hz
Q
10 E. Bass 2
1.25
PEAKING
–2.0 dB
Q
09 E. Bass 1
10.0
PEAKING
F
Q
08 Percussion
1.4
L.SHELF
G
Q
07 High Hat
—
H.SHELF
–0.5 dB
Q
06 Cymbal
2.2
PEAKING
F
Q
05 Tom-tom 1
4.5
PEAKING
G
Q
04 Snare Drum 2
1.4
PEAKING
0.10
8.0
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
+1.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
125 Hz
180 Hz
1.12 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
1.6
8.0
2.2
—
#
Parameter
Title
13 Piano 1
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+4.0 dB
3.15 kHz
7.50 kHz
—
8.0
0.90
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
–8.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
224 Hz
600 Hz
3.15 kHz
5.30 kHz
5.6
10.0
0.70
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.0 dB
–5.5 dB
+0.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
265 Hz
400 Hz
1.32 kHz
4.50 kHz
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
+2.0 dB
1.00 kHz
1.90 kHz
5.60 kHz
8.0
4.5
0.63
9.0
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
125 Hz
450 Hz
3.35 kHz
19.0 kHz
0.40
0.16
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
+5.0 dB
0.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
355 Hz
950 Hz
3.35 kHz
12.5 kHz
—
9.0
10.0
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+6.0 dB
–8.5 dB
+4.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
315 Hz
1.06 kHz
4.25 kHz
12.5 kHz
—
10.0
4.0
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
106 Hz
1.00 kHz
1.90 kHz
5.30 kHz
0.90
4.5
3.5
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–3.5 dB
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
F
300 Hz
750 Hz
2.00 kHz
3.55 kHz
—
9.0
4.5
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
F
224 Hz
1.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
—
4.5
4.5
0.125
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
0.0 dB
–5.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
180 Hz
355 Hz
4.00 kHz
4.25 kHz
Q
24 Brass Sec.
8.0
L.SHELF
G
Q
23 A. G. Arpeg. 2
—
PEAKING
140 Hz
Q
22 A. G. Arpeg. 1
6.3
PEAKING
+4.5 dB
Q
21 A. G. Stroke 2
10.0
PEAKING
F
Q
20 A. G. Stroke 1
0.18
PEAKING
G
Q
19 E. G. Dist. 2
H.SHELF
950 Hz
Q
18 E. G. Dist. 1
PEAKING
–6.0 dB
Q
17 E. G. Crunch 2
HIGH
PEAKING
95.0 Hz
Q
16 E. G. Crunch 1
H-MID
L.SHELF
F
Q
15 E. G. Clean
L-MID
G
Q
14 Piano 2
LOW
—
7.0
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–2.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
90.0 Hz
850 Hz
2.12 kHz
4.50 kHz
Q
2.8
2.0
0.70
7.0
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Appendices
#
221
EQ Library List • DYNAMICS Library List
#
Parameter
Title
25 Male Vocal 1
Chorus &
Harmo
PEAKING
+2.0 dB
+3.5 dB
2.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
0.11
4.5
0.56
0.11
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.0 dB
–5.0 dB
–2.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
170 Hz
236 Hz
2.65 kHz
6.70 kHz
0.11
10.0
5.6
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–1.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
F
118 Hz
400 Hz
2.65 kHz
6.00 kHz
0.18
0.45
0.56
0.14
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–7.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
112 Hz
335 Hz
2.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
—
0.16
0.20
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–2.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
90.0 Hz
850 Hz
2.12 kHz
4.50 kHz
2.8
2.0
0.70
7.0
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
+6.5 dB
F
95.0 Hz
950 Hz
2.12 kHz
16.0 kHz
7.0
2.2
5.6
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+4.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+6.0 dB
F
95.0 Hz
750 Hz
1.80 kHz
18.0 kHz
Q
32 Total EQ 3
PEAKING
0.0 dB
Q
31 Total EQ 2
PEAKING
1.00 kHz
Q
30 Total EQ 1
PEAKING
190 Hz
Q
29
HIGH
–0.5 dB
Q
28 Female Vo. 2
H-MID
F
Q
27 Female Vo. 1
L-MID
G
Q
26 Male Vocal 2
LOW
7.0
2.8
5.6
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+1.5 dB
+0.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
67.0 Hz
850 Hz
1.90 kHz
15.0 kHz
Q
—
0.28
0.70
—
#
Parameter
Title
33 Bass Drum 3
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+3.5 dB
–10.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
118 Hz
315 Hz
4.25 kHz
20.0 kHz
Q
34 Snare Drum 3
2.0
10.0
0.40
0.40
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
224 Hz
560 Hz
4.25 kHz
4.00 kHz
Q
35 Tom-tom 2
—
4.5
2.8
0.10
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–9.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
90.0 Hz
212 Hz
5.30 kHz
17.0 kHz
Q
36 Piano 3
—
4.5
1.25
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+4.5 dB
–13.0 dB
+4.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
100 Hz
475 Hz
2.36 kHz
10.0 kHz
Q
37 Piano Low
8.0
10.0
9.0
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–5.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+6.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
190 Hz
400 Hz
6.70 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
38 Piano High
10.0
6.3
2.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–5.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+5.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
190 Hz
400 Hz
6.70 kHz
5.60 kHz
Q
39 Fine-EQ Cass
6.3
2.2
0.10
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–1.5 dB
0.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
75.0 Hz
1.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
40 Narrator
10.0
L.SHELF
—
4.5
1.8
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
106 Hz
710 Hz
2.50 kHz
10.0 kHz
Q
4.0
7.0
0.63
—
DYNAMICS Library List
#
1
2
3
4
222
Title
Gate
Ducking
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. SN
Type
GATE
DUCKING
GATE
GATE
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Parameter
Value
Threshold (dB)
–26
Range (dB)
–56
Attack (ms)
#
5
Title
De-Esser
Type
DE-ESSER
0
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Frequency (kHz)
Value
–8
2.00
Threshold (dB)
–8
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Hold (ms)
2.56
Decay (ms)
331
Threshold (dB)
–19
Range (dB)
–22
Knee
Attack (ms)
93
Release (ms)
250
6
Comp
COMPRESSOR
Attack (ms)
30
Out gain (dB)
0.0
2
Hold (ms)
1.20 S
Threshold (dB)
–23
Decay (ms)
6.32 S
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Threshold (dB)
–11
Attack (ms)
Range (dB)
–53
Attack (ms)
7
Expand
EXPANDER
0
Out gain (dB)
1
3.5
Knee
2
Hold (ms)
1.93
Release (ms)
70
Decay (ms)
400
Threshold (dB)
–10
Threshold (dB)
–8
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Range (dB)
–23
Attack (ms)
Attack (ms)
1
8
Compander (H)
COMPANDER-H
Out gain (dB)
Hold (ms)
0.63
Width (dB)
Decay (ms)
238
Release (ms)
1
0.0
6
250
DYNAMICS Library List
9
Title
Compander (S)
Type
COMPANDER-S
Parameter
11
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. BD
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-H
13
A. Dr. SN
A. Dr. SN
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
15
A. Dr. Tom
COMPANDER-S
EXPANDER
17
A. Dr. OverTop
E. B. Finger
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
–10
3.5
Attack (ms)
25
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
0.0
E. B. Slap
COMPRESSOR
19
Syn. Bass
COMPRESSOR
9
Out gain (dB)
3.0
Width (dB)
24
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
180
Release (ms)
250
Threshold (dB)
–24
Threshold (dB)
–9
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
3
9
5.5
20
Piano1
COMPRESSOR
Attack (ms)
17
Out gain (dB)
1.0
Knee
2
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
58
Release (ms)
238
Threshold (dB)
–11
Threshold (dB)
–18
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Attack (ms)
1
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
–1.5
21
Piano2
COMPRESSOR
7
Out gain (dB)
Knee
7
6.0
2
Release (ms)
192
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
–17
Threshold (dB)
–8
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
8
3.5
22
E. Guitar
COMPRESSOR
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
174
7
2.5
Knee
2
Knee
Release (ms)
12
Release (ms)
261
Threshold (dB)
4
–23
Threshold (dB)
–10
Ratio ( :1)
2
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
0
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
0.5
23
A. Guitar
COMPRESSOR
2
Out gain (dB)
Knee
151
5
1.5
2
Release (ms)
238
–11
Threshold (dB)
–8
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Ratio ( :1)
2
Attack (ms)
11
Attack (ms)
33
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Out gain (dB)
1.5
Width (dB)
10
Knee
Release (ms)
128
Release (ms)
749
Threshold (dB)
–20
24
Strings1
COMPRESSOR
2
Threshold (dB)
–12
Ratio ( :1)
2
Ratio ( :1)
1.5
Attack (ms)
2
Attack (ms)
93
Out gain (dB)
1.5
Out gain (dB)
5.0
25
Strings2
COMPRESSOR
2
Knee
Release (ms)
749
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
–24
4
1.35 S
Threshold (dB)
–17
Ratio ( :1)
2
Ratio ( :1)
1.5
Attack (ms)
38
Attack (ms)
76
Out gain (dB)
2.5
Out gain (dB)
–3.5
26
Strings3
COMPRESSOR
Width (dB)
54
Knee
Release (ms)
842
Release (ms)
186
Threshold (dB)
2
–12
Threshold (dB)
–18
Ratio ( :1)
2
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Attack (ms)
15
Attack (ms)
18
Out gain (dB)
4.5
Out gain (dB)
4.0
Knee
18
Value
Ratio ( :1)
Knee
16
Parameter
4
Release (ms)
A. Dr. SN
Type
Ratio ( :1)
Knee
14
Title
Threshold (dB)
Width (dB)
12
#
–8
Ratio ( :1)
10
Value
Threshold (dB)
27
BrassSection
COMPRESSOR
2
Knee
1
Release (ms)
470
Release (ms)
226
Threshold (dB)
–12
Threshold (dB)
–13
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Ratio ( :1)
2
Attack (ms)
6
Attack (ms)
58
Out gain (dB)
2.0
28
Syn. Pad
COMPRESSOR
Out gain (dB)
4.0
Knee
hard
Knee
Release (ms)
133
Release (ms)
Appendices
#
1
238
M7CL Owner’s Manual
223
DYNAMICS Library List
#
29
30
31
32
33
Title
SamplingPerc
Sampling BD
Sampling SN
Hip Comp
Solo Vocal1
Type
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
Click Erase
EXPANDER
0
∞
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Announcer
COMPANDER-H
Limiter1
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
Attack (ms)
0
Out gain (dB)
0.0
18
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
319
Threshold (dB)
–14
Threshold (dB)
–18
3.5
Ratio ( :1)
2
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
2
Attack (ms)
94
Out gain (dB)
2.5
Out gain (dB)
3.5
40
Total Comp1
COMPRESSOR
Knee
4
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
35
Release (ms)
447
Threshold (dB)
–18
Threshold (dB)
–16
Ratio ( :1)
4
Ratio ( :1)
6
Attack (ms)
8
Attack (ms)
11
Out gain (dB)
6.0
41
Total Comp2
COMPRESSOR
Out gain (dB)
8.0
Knee
hard
Knee
Release (ms)
354
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
–23
Ratio ( :1)
20
Attack (ms)
15
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Width (dB)
15
Release (ms)
163
Threshold (dB)
–20
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
31
Out gain (dB)
2.0
1
342
Threshold (dB)
–8
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
26
Out gain (dB)
1.5
3
331
Threshold (dB)
–9
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Attack (ms)
39
Out gain (dB)
2.5
2
Release (ms)
226
Threshold (dB)
–33
Ratio ( :1)
2
Attack (ms)
1
Out gain (dB)
2.0
2
Release (ms)
284
Threshold (dB)
–14
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
1
–2.5
Width (dB)
18
Release (ms)
180
–9
Ratio ( :1)
3
Attack (ms)
20
Out gain (dB)
Release (ms)
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Limiter2
238
Width (dB)
224
39
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
38
8
–2.5
Width (dB)
Knee
37
Value
Ratio ( :1)
Knee
36
Parameter
1.7
Release (ms)
Chorus
Type
Ratio ( :1)
Knee
35
Title
Threshold (dB)
Release (ms)
Solo Vocal2
#
–18
Knee
34
Value
Threshold (dB)
–3.0
90
3.90 s
* At fs=44.1 kHz
1
180
Dynamics Parameters
Dynamics Parameters
Input channels provide DYNAMICS section 1 and DYNAMICS section 2. Output channels provide DYNAMICS section 1. An input channel’s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four
types: GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, and EXPANDER. An input channel’s DYNAMICS
section 2 provides the following four types: COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H (Compander
Hard), COMPANDER-S (Compander Soft), and DE-ESSER. An output channel’s DYNAMICS
section 1 provides the following four types: COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H
(Compander Hard), and COMPANDER-S (Compander Soft).
■ GATE
A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
RANGE (dB)
–∞, –69 to 0 (71 points)
This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold
level.
HOLD (ms)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)
This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen
below the threshold.
DECAY (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. The value
is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
• Time Series Analysis
Output Level
Input Signal
Input Level
Output Level
• I/O Characteristics
This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied.
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
HOLD
ATTACK
DECAY
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RANGE
Input Level
Time
Time
■ DUCKING
Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an
announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a
specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN) required to activate ducking.
RANGE (dB)
–70 to 0 (71 points)
This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered.
HOLD (ms)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)
This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen
below the THRESHOLD level.
DECAY (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required
for the level to change by 6 dB.
Output Level
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
Appendices
• Time Series Analysis
Input Level
Output Level
• I/O Characteristics
Output Signal
HOLD
ATTACK
DECAY
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RANGE
Input Level
Time
Time
M7CL Owner’s Manual
225
Dynamics Parameters
■ COMPRESSOR
The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. The COMP processor can also
be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level
never actually exceeds the threshold.
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output signal
level relative to change in input signal level.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has
been triggered.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger
signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration
required for the level to change by 6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB)
0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)
This sets the compressor’s output signal level.
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This determines how compression is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold,
creating a more natural sound.
• Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1)
Input Level
Output Level
• I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB)
THRESHOLD
RATIO
Input signal
Output Level
KNEE
Output Signal
ATTACK
RELEASE
THRESHOLD
Input Level
Time
Time
■ EXPANDER
An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
This determines the amount of expansion.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger
signal level exceeds the threshold.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below
the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change
by 6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB)
0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)
This sets the expander’s output signal level.
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings,
expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
• Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1)
THRESHOLD
Input Level
Output Level
• I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)
Input Signal
Output Level
KNEE
Output Signal
ATTACK
RELEASE
THRESHOLD
RATIO
226
Input Level
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Time
Time
Dynamics Parameters
■ COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H), COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S)
Output Level
The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.
THRESHOLD
WIDTH
0dB
Input Level
The companders function differently at the following levels:
1 0 dB and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions as a limiter.
2 Exceeding the threshold . . . . . . . . . . Functions as a compressor.
3 Below the threshold and width . . . . Functions as an expander.
The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is
essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2.
* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB.
*The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for
the overall level change caused by the compression and
expansion processes.
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level at which compression is applied.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1 (15 points)
This determines the amount of compression.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain
once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively. The
value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB)
–18.0 to 0.0 (181 points)
This sets the compander’s output signal level.
WIDTH (dB)
1–90 (90 points)
This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied. The
expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width.
■ DE-ESSER
This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high-frequency consonants of the vocal.
Parameter
Range
Description
–54 to 0 (55 points)
Threshold level at which the de-esser effect applies.
FREQUENCY
1kHz – 12.5kHz (45 points)
Cutoff frequency of the HPF used to detect the high frequencies.
Appendices
THRESHOLD
M7CL Owner’s Manual
227
Effect Type List
Effect Type List
Title
228
Type
Description
Reverb Hall
REVERB HALL
Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate
Reverb Room
REVERB ROOM
Room reverberation simulation
with gate
Title
Type
REV+CHORUS
Reverb and chorus in parallel
Rev→Chorus
REV→CHORUS
Reverb and chorus in series
Rev+Flange
REV+FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in parallel
Rev→Flange
REV→FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in series
Rev+Sympho.
REV+SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in parallel
Reverb Stage
REVERB STAGE
Reverb designed for vocals, with
gate
Reverb Plate
REVERB PLATE
Plate reverb simulation with gate
Rev→Sympho. REV→SYMPHO.
Early Ref.
EARLY REF.
Early reflections without the subsequent reverb
Rev→Pan
Gate Reverb
GATE REVERB
Gated early reflections
Reverse Gate
REVERSE GATE
Gated reverse early reflections
Mono Delay
MONO DELAY
Simple mono delay
Stereo Delay
STEREO DELAY
Simple stereo delay
Simple repeat delay with modulation
Description
Rev+Chorus
Reverb and symphonic in series
REV→PAN
Reverb and auto-pan in series
Delay+Er.
DELAY+ER.
Delay and early reflections in parallel
Delay→Er.
DELAY→ER.
Delay and early reflections in
series
Delay+Rev
DELAY+REV
Delay and reverb in parallel
Delay→Rev
DELAY→REV
Delay and reverb in series
Dist→Delay
DIST→DELAY
Distortion and delay in series
3-band parallel filter (24 dB/
octave)
Mod.Delay
MOD.DELAY
Delay LCR
DELAY LCR
3-tap (left, center, right) delay
Multi Filter
MULTI FILTER
Echo
ECHO
Stereo delay with crossed left/
right feedback
Freeze
FREEZE
Simple sampler
Chorus
CHORUS
Chorus
Stereo Reverb
ST REVERB
Stereo reverb
Flange
FLANGE
Flanger
M.Band Dyna.
M.BAND DYNA.
Multi-band dynamics processor
M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor
Symphonic
SYMPHONIC
Proprietary Yamaha effect that
produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal
chorus
Phaser
PHASER
16-stage stereo phase shifter
Auto Pan
AUTO PAN
Auto-panner
Tremolo
TREMOLO
Tremolo
HQ. Pitch
HQ.PITCH
Mono pitch shifter, producing
stable results
Dual Pitch
DUAL PITCH
Stereo pitch shifter
Rotary
ROTARY
Rotary speaker simulation
Ring Mod.
RING MOD.
Ring modulator
Mod.Filter
MOD.FILTER
Modulated filter
Distortion
DISTORTION
Distortion
Amp Simulate
AMP SIMULATE
Guitar amp simulation
Dyna.Filter
DYNA.FILTER
Dynamically controlled filter
Dyna.Flange
DYNA.FLANGE
Dynamically controlled flanger
Dyna.Phaser
DYNA.PHASER
Dynamically controlled phase
shifter
M7CL Owner’s Manual
REV-X Hall
REV-X HALL
REV-X Room
REV-X ROOM
REV-X Plate
REV-X PLATE
New reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation,
smooth decay, and provides a
spaciousness and depth that
enhances the original sound.
Choose from three types depending on your location and needs;
REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and
REV-X PLATE.
Effects Parameters
Effects Parameters
One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb
simulations, all with gates.
Parameter
REV TIME
INI. DLY
Range
0.3–99.0 s
0.0–500.0 ms
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb
begins
■ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early
reflections with reverse gate.
Parameter
TYPE
Range
Type-A, Type-B
Description
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Reflection diffusion (left–right
reflection spread)
Reflection density
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time
ratio
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time
ratio
DENSITY
0–100%
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right
reverb spread)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
FB GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
E/R DLY
0.0–100.0 ms
Delay between early reflections and reverb
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
E/R BAL.
0–100%
Balance of early reflections
and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all
early reflections)
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
GATE LVL
OFF, –60 to 0 dB
Level at which gate kicks in
ATTACK
0–120 ms
Gate opening speed
HOLD
*1
Gate open time
DECAY
*2
Gate closing speed
*1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)
*2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
■ EARLY REF.
One input, two output early reflections.
Parameter
TYPE
Range
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
One input, one output basic repeat delay.
Parameter
Range
0.0–2730.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY
NOTE
Type of early reflection simulation
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 =
live)
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb
begins
Description
DELAY
Description
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
INI. DLY
■ MONO DELAY
*1.
(Max. value depends on tempo setting)
■ STEREO DELAY
Two input, two output basic stereo delay.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. G L
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback (plus values
for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
DIFF.
0–10
Reflection diffusion (left–
right reflection spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reflection density
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
FB GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback
ratio
FB. G R
–99 to +99%
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel DELAY
LPF
Appendices
■ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE,
REVERB PLATE
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
M7CL Owner’s Manual
229
Effects Parameters
■ MOD. DELAY
■ ECHO
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
Parameter
DELAY
Range
Description
Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback
loop.
0.0–2725.0 ms
Delay time
Parameter
DELAY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel delay time
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB.DLY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel feedback delay time
FB.DLY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel feedback delay time
FB. G L
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback gain (plus
values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
FB. G R
–99 to +99%
Right channel feedback gain (plus
values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
L→R FBG
–99 to +99%
Left to right channel feedback
gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
R→L FBG
–99 to +99%
Right to left channel feedback
gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
■ DELAY LCR
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
WAVE
Sine/Tri
Modulation waveform
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY
MOD.NOTE
*2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ
*1.
Range
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
*2.
Parameter
Range
Description
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY L
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY R
NOTE FBL
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. D L
NOTE FBR
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. D R
DELAY L
0.0–2730.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY C
0.0–2730.0 ms
Center channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–2730.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–2730.0 ms
Feedback delay time
LEVEL L
–100 to +100%
Left channel delay level
LEVEL C
–100 to +100%
Center channel delay level
LEVEL R
–100 to +100%
Right channel delay level
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
*1.
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
■ CHORUS
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
FREQ.
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY L
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY C
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY R
WAVE
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
NOTE C
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Two input, two output chorus effect.
Parameter
*1.
230
Description
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
Description
Modulation speed
Effects Parameters
■ FLANGE
■ PHASER
Two input, two output flange effect.
Parameter
Range
Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
–99 to +99%
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. GAIN
FB. GAIN
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
OFFSET
0–100
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
Lowest phase-shifted frequency
offset
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
PHASE
0.00–354.38
degrees
Left and right modulation phase
balance
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
STAGE
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,
14, 16
Number of phase shift stages
LSH F
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
*1.
*1.
■ SYMPHONIC
■ AUTOPAN
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
Two input, two output autopanner.
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
FREQ.
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
DIR.
*1
Panning direction
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
NOTE
*2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
Modulation speed
*1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R
*2.
Appendices
*1.
0.05–40.00 Hz
M7CL Owner’s Manual
231
Effects Parameters
■ TREMOLO
■ DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output tremolo effect.
Parameter
Range
Two input, two output pitch shifter.
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
PITCH 1
–24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
FINE 1
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #1 pitch shift fine
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
LEVEL 1
–100 to +100%
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
Channel #1 level (plus values
for normal phase, minus values
for reverse phase)
PAN 1
L63 to R63
Channel #1 pan
DELAY 1
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #1 delay time
FB. G 1
–99 to +99%
Channel #1 feedback gain (plus
values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
Pitch shift precision
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
MODE
1–10
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
PITCH 2
–24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
FINE 2
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #2 pitch shift fine
LEVEL 2
–100 to +100%
Channel #2 level (plus values
for normal phase, minus values
for reverse phase)
PAN 2
L63 to R63
Channel #2 pan
DELAY 2
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #2 delay time
FB. G 2
–99 to +99%
Channel #2 feedback gain (plus
values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE 1
*1
Used in conjunction with
TEMPO to determine Channel
#1 delay
NOTE 2
*1
Used in conjunction with
TEMPO to determine Channel
#2 delay
*1.
■ HQ. PITCH
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.
Parameter
Range
Description
PITCH
–12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift
FINE
–50 to +50 cents
Pitch shift fine
DELAY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Delay time
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. GAIN
MODE
1–10
Pitch shift precision
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with
TEMPO to determine DELAY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
■ ROTARY
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
Parameter
Range
Description
ROTATE
STOP, START
Rotation stop, start
SPEED
SLOW, FAST
Rotation speed (see SLOW and
FAST parameters)
SLOW
0.05–10.00 Hz
SLOW rotation speed
FAST
0.05–10.00 Hz
FAST rotation speed
DRIVE
0–100
Overdrive level
ACCEL
0–10
Acceleration at speed changes
LOW
0–100
Low-frequency filter
HIGH
0–100
High-frequency filter
■ RING MOD.
Two input, two output ring modulator.
Parameter
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Description
Modulation source: oscillator or
input signal
OSC, SELF
OSC FREQ
0.0–5000.0 Hz
Oscillator frequency
FM FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Oscillator frequency modulation
speed
FM DEPTH
0–100%
Oscillator frequency modulation
depth
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
FM NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FM FREQ
*1.
232
Range
SOURCE
Effects Parameters
■ MOD. FILTER
■ DYNA. FILTER
Two input, two output modulation filter.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
PHASE
0.00–354.38 degrees
Left-channel modulation and
right-channel modulation
phase difference
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
OFFSET
RESO.
Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.
Parameter
Range
Description
Control source: input signal or
MIDI Note On velocity
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency
change
Filter type: low pass, high pass,
band pass
DECAY
*1
Filter frequency change decay
speed
0–100
Filter frequency offset
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter type
0–20
Filter resonance
OFFSET
0–100
Filter frequency offset
LEVEL
0–100
Output level
RESO.
0–20
Filter resonance
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
LEVEL
0–100
Output Level
*1
Used in conjunction with
TEMPO to determine FREQ
NOTE
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
*1.
■ DYNA. FLANGE
■ DISTORTION
Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.
One input, two output distortion effect.
Parameter
DST TYPE
Range
Description
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion,
OVD = overdrive)
Parameter
Range
Description
Control source: input signal or
MIDI Note On velocity
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency
change
Decay speed
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
DECAY
*1
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone
OFFSET
0–100
Delay time offset
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
■ AMP SIMULATE
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
Parameter
AMP TYPE
Range
*1
Description
Guitar amp simulation type
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion,
OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
BASS
0–100
Bass tone control
MIDDLE
0–100
Middle tone control
TREBLE
0–100
High tone control
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
CAB DEP
0–100%
Speaker cabinet simulation depth
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Appendices
*1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMBDX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
M7CL Owner’s Manual
233
Effects Parameters
■ DYNA. PHASER
■ REV→CHORUS
Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.
Parameter
Range
Description
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.
Parameter
Range
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency
change
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DECAY
*1
OFFSET
0–100
Lowest phase-shifted frequency
offset
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb,
100% = all reverb)
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
STAGE
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,
14, 16
Number of phase shift stages
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
Decay speed
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
■ REV+CHORUS
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
*1.
Reverb time
■ REV+FLANGE
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Parameter
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV/CHO
0–100%
Reverb and chorus balance (0% =
all reverb, 100% = all chorus)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
HPF
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
Parameter
Range
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Description
Range
Description
Reverb time
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV/FLG
0–100%
Reverb and flange balance (0% =
all reverb, 100% = all flange)
Modulation speed
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
*1.
*1.
234
Description
Reverb time
Control source: input signal or
MIDI Note On velocity
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
■ REV→FLANGE
■ REV→SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in
series.
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
Parameter
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb,
100% = all reverb)
REV.BAL
0–100%
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb,
100% = all reverb)
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
HPF
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
MOD. DLY
FB. GAIN
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
*1.
Description
Reverb time
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
*1.
■ REV→PAN
■ REV+SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in
parallel.
Parameter
Range
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
REV.BAL
0–100%
0–100%
Reverb and symphonic balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic)
Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb,
100% = all reverb)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
Panning direction
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
*1.
DIR.
*1
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
*1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R
*2.
Appendices
REV/SYM
Reverb time
This is a 1-in/2-out series-connected reverb and auto-pan
effect.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
235
Effects Parameters
■ DELAY+ER.
■ DELAY→ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in
parallel.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in
series.
Parameter
Range
Description
Range
Description
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
DLY/ER
0–100%
Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all
early reflections)
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Delay and early reflected delay
balance (0% = all early reflected
delay, 100% = all delay)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate,
Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate,
Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel DELAY
R
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel DELAY
R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
*1.
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
236
Parameter
DELAY L
M7CL Owner’s Manual
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Effects Parameters
■ DELAY→REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI
0.1–1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback
ratio
DELAY HI
0.1–1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback
ratio
DLY/REV
0–100%
Delay and reverb balance (0% =
all delay, 100% = all reverb)
DLY.BAL
0–100%
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
Delay and delayed reverb balance
(0% = all delayed reverb, 100% =
all delay)
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV TIME
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
REV HI
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
REV HI
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY L
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel DELAY
R
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel DELAY
R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
SYNC
NOTE L
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
■ DIST→DELAY
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion,
OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone control
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY
MOD.NOT
E
*2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
DELAY
0.0–2725.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Distortion and delay balance (0%
= all distortion, 100% = all
delayed distortion)
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
*2.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Appendices
■ DELAY+REV
237
Effects Parameters
■ MULTI FILTER
■ STEREO REVERB
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
REV TYPE
Hall, Room, Stage,
Plate
Reverb type
TYPE 1
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass,
band pass
FREQ. 1
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 1 frequency
LEVEL 1
0–100
Filter 1 level
INI. DLY
0.0–100.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
RESO. 1
0–20
Filter 1 resonance
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
TYPE 2
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass,
band pass
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb
spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
FREQ. 2
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 2 frequency
LEVEL 2
0–100
Filter 2 level
RESO. 2
0–20
Filter 2 resonance
0–100%
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass,
band pass
E/R BAL.
TYPE 3
Balance of early reflections and
reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% =
all early reflections)
FREQ. 3
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 3 frequency
HPF
0–100
Filter 3 level
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LEVEL 3
RESO. 3
0–20
Filter 3 resonance
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
■ FREEZE
■ M. BAND DYNA.
One input, two output basic sampler.
Parameter
Range
REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT
REC DLY
PLY MODE
TRG LVL
Description
In MANUAL mode, recording is
started by pressing the REC and
PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode,
Record-Ready mode is engaged by
pressing the REC button, and
actual recording is triggered by the
input signal.
–1000 to +1000
ms
Recording delay. For plus values,
recording starts after the trigger is
received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is
received.
MOMENT,
CONTI., INPUT
In MOMENT mode, the sample
plays only while the that the PLAY
button is pressed. In CONT mode,
playback continues once the PLAY
button has been pressed. The
number of times the sample plays
is set using the LOOP NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is
triggered by the input signal.
–60 to 0 dB
TRG MASK 0–1000 ms
Input trigger level (i.e., the signal
level required to trigger recording
or playback)
Once playback has been triggered,
subsequent triggers are ignored for
the duration of the TRG MASK
time.
Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with
individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.
Parameter
Range
Description
LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB
Low band level
MID GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Mid band level
HI. GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
High band level
PRESENCE
–10 to +10
For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the
low band is increased. For
negative values, the opposite
will occur. When set to 0, all
three bands are affected the
same.
L–M XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low/mid crossover frequency
M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Mid/high crossover frequency
SLOPE
–6 dB, –12 dB
Filter slope
CEILING
–6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
Specifies the maximum output
level
CMP. THRE –24.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Compressor threshold
CMP. RAT
Compressor ratio
1:1 to 20:1
CMP. ATK
0–120 ms
Compressor attack
CMP. REL
*1
Compressor release time
CMP. KNEE 0–5
Compressor knee
CMP. BYP
OFF/ON
Compressor bypass
LOOKUP
0.0–100.0 ms
Lookup delay
EXP. THRE
–54.0 dB to –24.0 dB
Expander threshold
START
*1
Playback start point in milliseconds
END
*1
Playback end point in milliseconds
EXP. RAT
1:1 to ∞:1
Expander ratio
LOOP
*1
Loop start point in milliseconds
EXP. REL
*1
Expander release time
LOOP
NUM
0–100
Number of times the sample plays
EXP. BYP
OFF/ON
Expander bypass
–12.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Limiter threshold
PITCH
–12 to +12 semitones
LIM. THRE
Playback pitch shift
LIM. ATK
0–120 ms
Limiter attack
FINE
–50 to +50 cents
Playback pitch shift fine
LIM. REL
*1
Limiter release time
MIDI TRG
OFF, C1–C6, ALL
PLAY button can be triggered by
using MIDI Note on/off messages.
LIM. KNEE
0–5
Limiter knee
LIM. BYP
OFF/ON
Limiter bypass
START
[SAMPLE]
0–131000
Playback start point in samples
END
[SAMPLE]
0–131000
Playback end point in samples
LOOP
[SAMPLE]
0–131000
Loop start point in samples
*1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz)
238
Two input, two output stereo reverb.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Effects Parameters
■ M.BAND COMP
Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.
Parameter
Range
Description
LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB
Low band level
MID GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Mid band level
HI. GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
High band level
L-M XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low/mid crossover frequency
M-H XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Mid/high crossover frequency
SLOPE
–6 dB, –12 dB
Filter slope
CEILING
–6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
Specifies the maximum output
level
LOOKUP
0.0–100.0 ms
Lookup delay
LOW THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Low band threshold level
MID THRE
–54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Mid band threshold level
HI. THRE
–54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
High band threshold level
RATIO
1:1 to 20:1
Compression ratio
ATTACK
0–120 ms
Compressor attack time
RELEASE
*1
Compressor release time
KNEE
0–5
Compressor knee
BYPASS
OFF/ON
Bypasses the compressor
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
■ REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE
Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algorithm.
Delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and
provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from three types depending on your
location and needs; REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and
REV-X PLATE.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.28–27.94 s*1
INI. DLY
0.0–120.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
LO.FREQ
22.0 Hz–18.0 kHz
Frequency point for LO.RATIO setting
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb
spread)
ROOM
SIZE
0–28
Size of room
DECAY
0–53
Gate closing speed
HPF
THRU, 22.0 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
1.00 kHz–
18.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Reverb time
Appendices
*1. These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the
ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending on the effect type
and ROOM SIZE setting.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
239
Effects and tempo synchronization
Effects and tempo synchronization
Some of the M7CL’s effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo. There are two
such types of effect; delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the
delay time will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the
modulation signal will change according to the tempo.
• Parameters related to tempo synchronization
The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization.
1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.
SYNC:.............................This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.
NOTE and TEMPO: .....These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.
DELAY and FREQ.:.......DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect the
way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is
relevant only for modulation-type effects.
• How the parameters are related
Tempo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo, and continues making
adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY (or FREQ.). This means that when TEMPO, NOTE, and
DELAY (or FREQ.) are synchronized, and you change any of these values, the other parameters will be re-set in order to maintain the
correct relationship. The parameters that are re-set and the calculation method(*a) used are as follows.
If you turn SYNC on → NOTE will be set
If you edit DELAY (or FREQ.) → NOTE will be set
In this case, the NOTE value is calculated as follows.
NOTE = DELAY (or FREQ.)/(4 x (60/TEMPO))
If you edit NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
If you edit TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = original DELAY (or FREQ.) x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)
Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note
DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)
= 0.5 (sec)
= 500 ms
Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.
Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121
DELAY= original DELAY x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)
= 250 x (120/121)
= 247.9 (ms)
Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.
*a Rounded values are used for the calculation results.
• Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values
The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values. You cannot set NOTE or
TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ. to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo. This limitation also applies even when SYNC is OFF.
• Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter
The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.
• It is a common value shared by all effects
• You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.)
This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is
an example.
Store the effect: TEMPO=120 → Change TEMPO to 60 → Recall the effect: TEMPO=60
Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were
changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way
between store and recall, the M7CL does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is
no longer the same as when that effect was stored.
* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.
240
= 1/48
= 1/24
= 1/16
= 1/12
= 3/32
= 1/8
= 1/6
= 3/16
= 1/4
= 3/8
= 1/2
= 3/4
= 1/1
= 2/1
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table
Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table
Program
Change#
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
Scene/
Effect
Preset#
Scene
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 2
Program
Change#
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
Scene/
Effect
Preset#
Scene
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
Program
Change#
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
Scene/
Effect
Preset#
Scene
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
Program
Change#
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
Scene/
Effect
Preset#
Scene
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Appendices
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 1
241
Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 3
Program
Change#
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
242
Scene/
Effect
Preset#
Scene
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
000
No Assign
M7CL Owner’s Manual
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 4
Program
Change#
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
Scene/
Effect
Preset#
No Assign
Program
Change#
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
Scene/
Effect
Preset#
No Assign
Program
Change#
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
Scene/
Effect
Preset#
No Assign
Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 13
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 5
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
No Assign
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 16
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 8
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Preset#
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 15
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 7
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 14
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 6
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 9
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
RACK5
Preset#
001
002
003
:
128
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 10
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
RACK6
Preset#
001
002
003
:
128
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 11
Scene/Effect
RACK7
Preset#
001
002
003
:
128
Appendices
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 12
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
RACK8
Preset#
001
002
003
:
128
M7CL Owner’s Manual
243
Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table
■ Bank/Ch# _
Program
Change#
244
Scene/
Effect
User#
Program
Change#
Scene/
Effect
User#
Program
Change#
001
044
087
002
045
088
003
046
089
004
047
090
005
048
091
006
049
092
007
050
093
008
051
094
009
052
095
010
053
096
011
054
097
012
055
098
013
056
099
014
057
100
015
058
101
016
059
102
017
060
103
018
061
104
019
062
105
020
063
106
021
064
107
022
065
108
023
066
109
024
067
110
025
068
111
026
069
112
027
070
113
028
071
114
029
072
115
030
073
116
031
074
117
032
075
118
033
076
119
034
077
120
035
078
121
036
079
122
037
080
123
038
081
124
039
082
125
040
083
126
041
084
127
042
085
128
043
086
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Scene/
Effect
User#
Parameters that can be assigned to control changes
Parameters that can be assigned to control changes
NO ASSIGN
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Mode
Parameter 1
—
0
INPUT
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C)
INPUT
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L –
MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
MATRIX 1/2 PAN –
MATRIX 7/8 PAN
INPUT
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
INPUT
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
INPUT
CH 1–CH 48
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
DIRECT OUT
ON
CH 1–CH 48
PAN/BALANCE
INPUT
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
BALANCE
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–STEREO R
TO STEREO
ON
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
TO MONO
ON
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
INPUT ATT
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
MIX 1–MIX 16
INPUT HPF
FADER H
FADER L
CH ON
PHASE
INSERT
ON
LCR
CSR
MATRIX 1 POINT –
MATRIX 8 POINT
MATRIX 1 ON –
MATRIX 8 ON
STEREO TO
MATRIX
MIX/MATRIX
SEND
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
INPUT EQ
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
LPF ON
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
INPUT
ON
FREQ
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
LOW Q
MIX 1 PRE/POST –
MIX 16 PRE/POST
LOW MID Q
MATRIX 1 PRE/POST –
MATRIX 8 PRE/POST
LOW MID GAIN
LOW GAIN
LOW MID FREQ
HIGH MID Q
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
OUTPUT EQ
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L –
MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
HIGH GAIN
MIX 1/ 2 PAN –
MIX 15/16 PAN
HIGH TYPE
MATRIX1/2 PAN –
MATRIX7/8 PAN
HIGH LPF ON
LOW TYPE
LOW HPF ON
ON
TO STEREO ON
ATTACK
MIX 1–MIX 16
PAN
THRESHOLD
MATRIX 1 POINT –
MATRIX 8 POINT
RANGE
HOLD H
MATRIX 1 ON –
MATRIX 8 ON
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H –
MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
ON
LOW FREQ
MIX TO STEREO TO MONO ON
CH 1–CH 48STIN1L–
STIN4R
HIGH MID GAIN
MATRIX 1 ON –
MATRIX 8 ON
MIX 1 LEVEL L –
MIX 16 LEVEL L
STEREO L–MONO(C)
LOW Q
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H –
MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
MIX TO MATRIX
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H –
MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
ON
MIX 1 ON – MIX16
ON
MIX 1 LEVEL H –
MIX 16 LEVEL H
Parameter 2
Appendices
Mode
INPUT
DYNAMICS1
MIX 1–MIX 16
HOLD L
DECAY/RELEASE H
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
DECAY/RELEASE L
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L –
MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
RATIO
MATRIX 1/2 PAN –
MATRIX 7/8 PAN
GAIN L
GAIN H
KNEE/WIDTH
M7CL Owner’s Manual
245
Parameters that can be assigned to control changes
Mode
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
INPUT
DYNAMICS2
RELEASE L
RATIO
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE/WIDTH
FILTER FREQ
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
OUTPUT
DYNAMICS1
RELEASE L
RATIO
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE/WIDTH
BYPASS
EFFECT
MIX BALANCE
RACK5–8
PARAM 1 H –
PARAM 32 L
ON A
GEQ
ON B
GAIN A 1 – GAIN A 31
RACK1–8
GAIN B 1 – GAIN B 31
ON
DCA
FADER H
DCA 1–DCA 8
FADER L
MUTE MASTER
RECALL SAFE
246
ON
MASTER 1–MASTER 8
ON
CH 1–CH 48
STIN1L–STIN4R
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
RACK1–8DCA 1–DCA 8
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Control change parameter assignments
Control change parameter assignments
■ PRESET
Mode
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Control
Change#
Mode
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
1
CH 1
64
CH 1
2
CH 2
65
CH 2
3
CH 3
66
CH 3
4
CH 4
67
CH 4
5
CH 5
68
CH 5
6
CH 6
69
CH 6
7
CH 7
70
CH 7
8
CH 8
71
CH 8
9
CH 9
72
CH 9
10
CH 10
73
CH 10
11
CH 11
74
CH 11
12
CH 12
75
CH 13
76
14
CH 14
77
CH 14
15
CH 15
78
CH 15
CH 16
79
CH 16
17
CH 17
80
CH 17
18
CH 18
81
CH 18
19
CH 19
82
CH 19
20
CH 20
83
CH 20
21
CH 21
84
CH 21
22
CH 22
85
CH 22
23
CH 23
86
CH 23
24
CH 24
87
25
DCA 1
88
26
DCA 2
89
CH 1
27
DCA 3
90
CH 2
DCA 4
91
CH 3
29
DCA 5
92
CH 4
30
DCA 6
93
CH 5
31
DCA 7
94
CH 6
33
CH 1
95
CH 7
34
CH 2
102
CH 8
35
CH 3
103
CH 9
36
CH 4
104
CH 10
37
CH 5
105
CH 11
38
CH 6
106
39
CH 7
107
40
CH 8
108
CH 14
41
CH 9
109
CH 15
42
CH 10
110
CH 16
43
CH 11
111
CH 17
44
CH 12
112
CH 18
CH 13
113
CH 19
46
CH 14
114
CH 20
47
CH 15
115
CH 21
CH 16
116
CH 22
49
CH 17
117
CH 23
50
CH 18
118
51
CH 19
119
52
CH 20
53
CH 21
54
CH 22
55
CH 23
INPUT
13
16
FADER H
DCA
28
INPUT
45
48
FADER L
56
CH 24
57
DCA 1
58
DCA 2
59
60
CH ON
INPUT
CH 12
CH 13
CH 24
FADER H
PAN/BALANCE
DCA
INPUT
DCA 8
CH 12
CH 13
CH 24
FADER L
DCA
DCA 8
Appendices
Control
Change#
DCA 3
DCA
DCA 4
61
DCA 5
62
DCA 6
63
DCA 7
M7CL Owner’s Manual
247
Control change parameter assignments
Control
Change#
Mode
Parameter 2
Control
Change#
1
65
2
66
3
67
4
68
5
69
6
70
7
71
8
72
9
73
10
74
11
75
12
76
13
77
14
78
15
79
16
80
17
81
18
82
19
83
20
84
21
85
22
86
23
87
24
88
25
89
26
90
27
91
28
92
29
93
30
94
31
95
33
102
34
103
35
104
36
105
37
106
38
107
39
108
40
109
41
110
42
111
43
112
44
113
45
114
46
115
47
116
48
117
49
118
50
119
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
248
Parameter 1
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Mode
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
NRPN parameter assignments
NRPN parameter assignments
INPUT
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR
INPUT to Mix9–16,
Matrix1-4 LEVEL
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
INPUT TO MATRIX1
INPUT TO MATRIX2
INPUT TO MATRIX3
INPUT TO MATRIX4
007E
00DE
013E
019E
01FE
025E
02BE
031E
037E
03DE
043E
049E
00B5
0115
0175
01D5
0235
0295
02F5
0355
03B5
0415
0475
04D5
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
INPUT
04FE
0514
052A
0540
0556
056C
0582
0598
05B6
0513
0529
053F
0555
056B
0581
0597
05AD
05ED
MIX1–16, STEREO
LR to MATRIX LEVEL
ON
INPUT to Mix9–16,
Matrix1–4 ON
MIX1–16, STEREO
LR to MATRIX ON
MIX1–8 to STEREO
ON
PHASE
INSERT ON
Input to Mix9–16,
Matrix1–4 PRE/
POST
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR
0616
0633
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
INPUT TO MATRIX1
INPUT TO MATRIX2
INPUT TO MATRIX3
INPUT TO MATRIX4
0634
0694
06F4
0754
07B4
0814
0874
08D4
0934
0994
09F4
0A54
066B
06CB
072B
078B
07EB
084B
08AB
090B
096B
09CB
0A2B
0A8B
MATRIX SEND
0AB4
0AC9
MIX TO ST
0B64
0B6B
INPUT
INPUT
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
INPUT TO MATRIX1
INPUT TO MATRIX2
INPUT TO MATRIX3
INPUT TO MATRIX4
0B6C
0BCC
0C2C
0C4A
0CAA
0D0A
0D6A
0DCA
0E2A
0E8A
0EEA
0F4A
0FAA
100A
106A
0BA3
0C03
0C49
0C81
0CE1
0D41
0DA1
0E01
0E61
0EC1
0F21
0F81
0FE1
1041
10A1
From
(HEX)
To
(HEX)
1304
1382
1400
147E
14FC
157A
15F8
1676
16F4
1772
17F0
186E
18EC
196A
19E8
1A66
1AE4
1B44
1BA4
1C04
1C64
1CC4
1D24
1DA2
1E20
1E9E
1F1C
1F9A
2018
2096
20F6
2156
21B6
2216
2276
22D6
1381
13FF
147D
14FB
1579
15F7
1675
16F3
1771
17EF
186D
18EB
1969
19A1
1A65
1AE3
1B1B
1B7B
1BDB
1C3B
1C9B
1CFB
1DA1
1E1F
1E9D
1F1B
1F99
2017
2095
20CD
212D
218D
21ED
224D
22AD
230D
MATRIX1, 2
MATRIX3, 4
MATRIX5, 6
MATRIX7, 8
2336
234C
2362
2378
234B
2361
2377
238D
MIX TO ST
238E
2395
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR
2396
23B3
Parameter
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
EQ INPUT, MIX,
MATRIX, STEREO LR HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
ATT
HPF ON
LPF ON
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
INPUT DYNAMICS1
RANGE
HOLD
DECAY/RELEASE
ON
ATTACK
INPUT DYNAMICS2 THRESHOLD
MIX, MATRIX, STERELEASE
REO LR DYNAMICS1 RATIO
GAIN
KNEE/WIDTH
PAN/BALANCE
INPUT
MIX9–10
MIX11–12
INPUT to Mix9/10– MIX13–14
15/16, Matrix1/2,
MIX15–16
3/4 PAN
INPUT TO MATRIX1, 2
INPUT TO MATRIX3, 4
MIX1-16, STEREO
LR to MATRIX PAN
MIX1-8 to STEREO
PAN
BALANCE
Appendices
FADER
From
To
(HEX) (HEX)
0000
0037
0060
007D
Parameter
M7CL Owner’s Manual
249
NRPN parameter assignments
Parameter
RACK5–8 (EFFECT)
RACK1–3 (GEQ)
FADER
250
BYPASS
MIX BALANCE
PARAM1
PARAM2
PARAM3
PARAM4
PARAM5
PARAM6
PARAM7
PARAM8
PARAM9
PARAM10
PARAM11
PARAM12
PARAM13
PARAM14
PARAM15
PARAM16
PARAM17
PARAM18
PARAM19
PARAM20
PARAM21
PARAM22
PARAM23
PARAM24
PARAM25
PARAM26
PARAM27
PARAM28
PARAM29
PARAM30
PARAM31
PARAM32
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
MONO(C)
M7CL Owner’s Manual
From
(HEX)
26B4
26BC
26C4
26CC
26D4
26DC
26E4
26EC
26F4
26FC
2704
270C
2714
271C
2724
272C
2734
273C
2744
274C
2754
275C
2764
276C
2774
277C
2784
278C
2794
279C
27A4
27AC
27B4
27BC
27C4
27CA
27D0
27D6
27DC
27E2
27E8
27EE
27F4
27FA
2800
2806
280C
2812
2818
281E
2824
282A
2830
2836
283C
2842
2848
284E
2854
285A
2860
2866
286C
2872
2878
287E
28E4
To
(HEX)
26B7
26BF
26C7
26CF
26D7
26DF
26E7
26EF
26F7
26FF
2707
270F
2717
271F
2727
272F
2737
273F
2747
274F
2757
275F
2767
276F
2777
277F
2787
278F
2797
279F
27A7
27AF
27B7
27BF
27C9
27CF
27D5
27DB
27E1
27E7
27ED
27F3
27F9
27FF
2805
280B
2811
2817
281D
2823
2829
282F
2835
283B
2841
2847
284D
2853
2859
285F
2865
286B
2871
2877
287D
2883
28E8
From
(HEX)
To
(HEX)
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
INPUT TO MATRIX5
INPUT TO MATRIX6
INPUT TO MATRIX7
INPUT TO MATRIX8
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MONO(C)
28EA
292A
296A
29AA
29EA
2A2A
2A6A
2AAA
2AEA
2B2A
2B6A
2BAA
2BEA
2BF0
2BF6
2BFC
2C02
2C08
2C0E
2C14
2C2A
2921
2961
29A1
29E1
2A21
2A61
2AA1
2AE1
2B21
2B61
2BA1
2BE1
2BEE
2BF4
2BFA
2C00
2C06
2C0C
2C12
2C18
2C2E
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
INPUT TO MATRIX5
INPUT TO MATRIX6
INPUT TO MATRIX7
INPUT TO MATRIX8
2C30
2C70
2CB0
2CF0
2D30
2D70
2DB0
2DF0
2E30
2E70
2EB0
2EF0
2C67
2CA7
2CE7
2D27
2D67
2DA7
2DE7
2E27
2E67
2EA7
2EE7
2F27
MATRIX SEND
2F30
2F34
MIX TO ST
2F36
2F3D
INPUT EQ
INPUT EQ
MONO(C)
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
INPUT TO MATRIX5
INPUT TO MATRIX6
INPUT TO MATRIX7
INPUT TO MATRIX8
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
HPF ON
LPF ON
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
2F46
2F4C
2F8C
2FCC
300C
304C
308C
30CC
310C
314C
318C
31CC
320C
325E
3264
326A
3270
3276
327C
3282
3288
328E
3294
329A
32A0
32A6
32AC
32B2
3440
3480
2F4A
2F83
2FC3
3003
3043
3083
30C3
3103
3143
3183
31C3
3203
3243
3262
3268
326E
3274
327A
3280
3286
328C
3292
3298
329E
32A4
32AA
32B0
32B6
3477
34B7
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LRC EQ
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
34C0
34E4
34E2
3506
Parameter
Input to Mix1–8,
Matrix5–8 LEVEL
MONO(C) to Matrix
LEVEL
ON
Input to Mix1–8,
Matrix5–8 ON
MONO(C) to Matrix
ON
MIX9–16 to STEREO ON
INSERT
Input to MIX1–8,
MATRIX5–8 PRE/
POST
MONO(C) EQ
INPUT HPF
FREQ
From
To
(HEX) (HEX)
3640
3677
MONO(C)
DYNAMICS1
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE
RATIO
GAIN
KNEE/WIDTH
3680
3686
368C
3692
3698
369E
36A4
3684
368A
3690
3696
369C
36A2
36A8
INPUT to MIX1–8,
Matrix5–8 PAN
MIX1–2
MIX3–4
MIX5–6
MIX7–8
INPUT TO MATRIX5, 6
INPUT TO MATRIX7, 8
36AA
36EA
372A
376A
37AA
37EA
36E1
3721
3761
37A1
37E1
3821
MONO(C) to
Matrix1–8 PAN
MATRIX1,2
MATRIX3, 4
MATRIX5, 6
MATRIX7, 8
382A
3830
3836
383C
382E
3834
383A
3840
MIX9–16 to STEREO ON
MIX TO ST
3842
3849
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
3852
3858
385E
3864
3857
385D
3863
3869
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
386A
3870
3876
387C
3882
3888
388E
3894
389A
38A0
38A6
38AC
38B2
38B8
38BE
38C4
38CA
38D0
38D6
38DC
38E2
38E8
38EE
38F4
38FA
386F
3875
387B
3881
3887
388D
3893
3899
389F
38A5
38AB
38B1
38B7
38BD
38C3
38C9
38CF
38D5
38DB
38E1
38E7
38ED
38F3
38F9
38FF
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
ON
CSR
ON
ON
ON
FADER
ON
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
3900
3906
390C
3912
396A
39C2
3A02
3A42
3A4E
3A5A
3A66
3B06
3B16
3B26
3B36
3B46
3B56
3B66
3B76
3905
390B
3911
3961
39B9
39F9
3A39
3A49
3A55
3A61
3AEA
3B0B
3B1B
3B2B
3B3B
3B4B
3B5B
3B6B
3B7B
Parameter
RACK4–6 (GEQ)
LCR IN, MIX
DIRECT OUT
INPUT TO STEREO
DCA
MUTE MASTER
RECALL SAFE
HA
Parameter
+48v 1
+48v 2
+48v 3
+48v 4
+48v 5
+48v 6
+48v 7
+48v 8
HA
HPF1
HPF2
HPF3
HPF4
HPF5
HPF6
HPF7
HPF8
INPUT TO MONO
ON
MIX TO MONO
ON
ON
SLOT OUT DELAY
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
ON
OMNI OUT DELAY
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
ON
DIGITAL OUT DELAY TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
RATIO
INPUT DYNAMICS1 KNEE/WIDTH
GAIN
HIGH ONLY/FULL
INPUT DYNAMICS2
FILTER FREQ
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
RACK7–8 (GEQ)
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
EQ
ATT
From
(HEX)
3B86
3B96
3BA6
3BB6
3BC6
3BD6
3BE6
3BF6
3C06
3C16
3C26
3C36
3C46
3C56
3C66
3C76
3C86
3CC6
3CD6
3D06
3D36
3D66
3D76
3D86
3D96
3D98
3D9A
3D9C
3DD4
3E0C
3E44
3E7C
3EB4
3EB8
3EBC
3EC0
3EC4
3EC8
3ECC
3ED0
3ED4
3ED8
3EDC
3EE0
3EE4
3EE8
3EEC
3EF0
3EF4
3EF8
3EFC
3F00
3F04
3F08
3F0C
3F10
3F14
3F18
3F1C
3F20
3F24
3F28
3F2C
3F30
3F34
To
(HEX)
3B8B
3B9B
3BAB
3BBB
3BCB
3BDB
3BEB
3BFB
3C0B
3C1B
3C2B
3C3B
3C4B
3C5B
3C6B
3C7B
3CBD
3CD5
3D05
3D35
3D65
3D75
3D85
3D95
3D97
3D99
3D9B
3DD3
3E0B
3E43
3E7B
3EB3
3EB7
3EBB
3EBF
3EC3
3EC7
3ECB
3ECF
3ED3
3ED7
3EDB
3EDF
3EE3
3EE7
3EEB
3EEF
3EF3
3EF7
3EFB
3EFF
3F03
3F07
3F0B
3F0F
3F13
3F17
3F1B
3F1F
3F23
3F27
3F2B
3F2F
3F33
3F4E
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Appendices
NRPN parameter assignments
251
Mixing parameter operation applicability
Mixing parameter operation applicability
This table indicates how the behaviors of each of the input channel and output channel parameters are affected by Stereo, Link, Recall Safe, and User Level settings.
■ Input Channels
Parameter
HA
NAME,
ICON
Stereo
O
LCR
O
LINK
INPUT HA
RECALL SAFE
INPUT HA
USER LEVEL
INPUT HA
INPUT NAME
INPUT NAME
INPUT ALL
Insert On
O
INPUT ALL
Direct Out
On/Level
O
INPUT ALL
On
O
INPUT ON
INPUT ON
Fader
O
INPUT FADER
INPUT FADER
Pan/
Balance
O
Att
O
INPUT EQ
INPUT EQ
HPF
O
INPUT EQ
INPUT EQ
EQ
O
INPUT EQ
INPUT EQ
INPUT
DYNAMICS1*1
INPUT
DYNAMICS2*1
INPUT
DYNA1
INPUT
DYNA2
Dynamics1
O*1
Dynamics2
O*1
Mute
Assign
DCA
Assign
To Mix
ON
To Mix
LEVEL
To Mix
PRE/POST
To Matrix
On
To Matrix
LEVEL
To Stereo/
Mono
Cue
Key In Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe
Fade Time
INPUT ALL
INPUT ALL
O
INPUT ALL
O
O
O
INPUT
MIX ON*2
INPUT
MIX SEND*2
INPUT MIX
ON
INPUT MIX
SEND
INPUT ALL
O
O
INPUT
MATRIX ON*3
O
INPUT MATRIX
SEND*3
INPUT
MATRIX ON
INPUT
MATRIX
SEND
INPUT ALL
O
O
O
O
O
O
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
FADER/ON
INPUT
FADER/ON
INPUT
FADER/ON
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
PROCESSING
MUTE GROUP
ASSIGN
DCA GROUP
ASSIGN
INPUT
FADER/ON
INPUT
FADER/ON
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
FADER/ON
INPUT
FADER/ON
INPUT
PROCESSING
STORE
■ MIX Channels
252
Stereo
O
O
O
O
O
O
Stereo
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O*1
O
O
O
RECALL SAFE
MIX NAME
MIX ALL
MIX ALL
MIX ON
MIX FADER
MIX ALL
MIX EQ
MIX EQ
MIX DYNA1
MIX ALL
WITH MIX SEND
WITH MIX SEND
MIX to MATRIX ON
MIX to MATRIX SEND
M7CL Owner’s Manual
USER LEVEL
OUTPUT NAME
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX FADER/ON
MIX FADER/ON
MIX FADER/ON
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MUTE ASSIGN
WITH MIX SEND
WITH MIX SEND
MIX FADER/ON
MIX FADER/ON
RECALL SAFE
MIX ALL
MIX ALL
USER LEVEL
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
STORE
*1 Except for Key In Source
■ MATRIX Channels
Parameter
NAME, ICON
Stereo
RECALL SAFE
MATRIX NAME
Insert On
O
MATRIX ALL
On
O
MATRIX ON
Fader
O
MATRIX FADER
Pan/Balance
O
MATRIX ALL
Att
O
MATRIX EQ
Dynamics1
O*1
MATRIX DYNA1
EQ
O
MATRIX EQ
Mute Assign
O
MATRIX ALL
WITH MATRIX SEND
To Matrix On
WITH MATRIX SEND
To Matrix LEVEL
Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe
Fade Time
O
O
O
O
USER LEVEL
OUTPUT NAME
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MATRIX
FADER/ON
MATRIX
FADER/ON
MATRIX
FADER/ON
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MUTE ASSIGN
WITH MATRIX
SEND
WITH MATRIX
SEND
STORE
*1 Except for Key In Source
■ STEREO, MONO Channels
Parameter
Stereo
NAME, ICON
*1 Except for Key In Source
*2 Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1–16 individual Send
Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
*3 Applies to parameters for which the MATRIX channel 1–8 individual Send
Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
Parameter
NAME, ICON
LCR
Insert On
On
Fader
Pan/Balance
Att
EQ
Dynamics1
Mute Assign
To Mix ON
To Mix LEVEL
To Matrix On
To Matrix LEVEL
Parameter
To Matrix POINT
To Stereo/Mono
Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe
Fade Time
RECALL SAFE
STEREO, MONO
NAME
Insert On
O
STEREO, MONO ALL
On
O
STEREO, MONO ON
Fader
O
STEREO, MONO
FADER
Pan/Balance
O
STEREO, MONO ALL
Att
O
STEREO, MONO EQ
Dynamics1
O
STEREO, MONO
DYNA1
EQ
O
STEREO, MONO EQ
STEREO, MONO ALL
STEREO, MONO to
MATRIX ON
STEREO, MONO to
MATRIX SEND
Mute Assign
O
To Matrix On
O
To Matrix LEVEL
O
To Matrix POINT
O
Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe
Fade Time
O
O
O
O
*1 Except for Key In Source
STEREO, MONO ALL
USER LEVEL
OUTPUT NAME
STEREO, MONO
PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO
FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO
FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO
FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO
PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO
PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO
PROCESSING
MUTE ASSIGN
STEREO, MONO
FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO
FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO
PROCESSING
STORE
Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys
Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys
FUNCTION
NO ASSIGN
SCENE
PARAMETER 1
—
PARAMETER 2
Explanation
—
No assignment.
INC RECALL
—
Recall the scene of the next existing number.
DEC RECALL
—
Recall the scene of the previous existing number.
DIRECT RECALL
SCENE #000–#300
Directly recall the scene of the specified number.
RECALL UNDO
—
Execute RECALL UNDO.
STORE UNDO
—
Execute STORE UNDO.
LATCH
Switch TALKBACK on/off.
TALKBACK ON
UNLATCH
Turn TALKBACK on while pressed.
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
—
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of an OUTPUT
channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time,
the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
OSCILLATOR ON
—
Switch the OSC on/off.
The OSC popup window will appear when this is turned on.
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
—
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of an OUTPUT
channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time,
the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
TALKBACK
OSCILLATOR
CUE CLEAR
—
—
Clear all CUE settings together.
MONITOR ON
—
Switch MONITOR on/off.
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
—
While holding down this key, press the SEL key of a MIX or
MATRIX channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this
time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
SOURCE SELECT
STEREO L/R, MONO(C), LCR,
STIN1–4, DEFINE
Recall the selected signal to the monitor.
DIMMER ON
—
Switch the monitor dimmer function on/off.
MONO MONITOR
—
Switch MONO MONITOR on/off.
MONITOR
EFFECT BYPASS
RACK 5–8
—
Bypass the specified effect.
CURRENT PAGE
—
Use the tap tempo function in the displayed screen.
RACK 5–8
—
Use the tap tempo function for the specified effect.
MUTE MASTER
MUTE GROUP 1–8
—
Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on/off.
METER
PEAK HOLD ON
—
Turn the meter PEAK HOLD function on/off.
BRIGHTNESS
BANK CHANGE
—
Toggle between the brightness settings stored in A and B.
PAGE BOOKMARK
—
Memorize the currently selected screen (hold down the key
for two seconds or longer), or display the last-memorized
screen (press and release the key within two seconds). Popup
screens can also be memorized. In the case of a rack, the
number of that rack is also memorized.
CLOSE POPUP
—
Close the displayed popup window.
CH SELECT
INC, DEC
—
Decrement the channel selection.
SEND ENCODER
TO MIX/TO MATRIX
—
If INPUT or ST IN is selected, swich the function of the
Selected Channel section's send encoders from TO MIX/TO
MATRIX.
SET [+48V]
—
SET [Ø]
—
SET [PRE SEND]
—
SET [TO STEREO]
—
SET [TO MONO]
—
SET [TO LCR]
—
SET DEFAULT VALUE
—
—
While holding down this key, push an encoder of the Selected
Channel or Centralogic section to reset it to the default value.
SET NOMINAL LEVEL
—
—
While holding down this key, press a [SEL] key to set the fader
of that channel to nominal level.
SENDS ON FADER
MIX1–16
—
Recall the Sends On Fader function to the selected MIX.
PAGE CHANGE
SET BY SEL
Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it on/off.
During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if on or dark if off.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Appendices
TAP TEMPO
253
Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys
FUNCTION
M7CL EDITOR CONTROL
254
PARAMETER 1
PARAMETER 2
MASTER
—
OVERVIEW
CH1–16, 17–32, 33–48, ST IN,
MIX, MATRIX, ST/MONO, DCA
SELECTED CHANNEL
—
LIBRARY
DYNAMICS LIBRARY, INPUT EQ
LIBRARY, OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY,
EFFECT LIBRARY, GEQ LIBRARY
PATCH EDITOR
INPUT PATCH, OUTPUT PATCH,
INPUT INSERT PATCH, OUTPUT
INSERT PATCH,DIRECT OUT
PATCH, PATCH LIST
RACK EDITOR
RACK, RACK1–8
METER
INPUT METER, OUTPUT METER
GROUP/LINK
DCA GROUP, MUTE GROUP,
CHANNEL LINK
SCENE
SCENE MEMORY, RECALL SAFE,
FADE TIME
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Explanation
Access the M7CL EDITOR screen.
MIDI Data Format
MIDI Data Format
This section explains the format of the data that the M7CL is able to understand, send, and
receive.
1 CHANNEL MESSAGE
(8n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
1000nnnn 8n Note off message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(ignored)
1.2 NOTE ON
(9n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
1001nnnn 9n Note on message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off)
1.3 CONTROL CHANGE
(Bn)
= paramMax - paramMin + 1;
= paramWidth / paramSteps;
= paramWidth - add * paramSteps;
= paramSteps * add + mod / 2;
(1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps
paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value;
(2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than
16,384 steps
paramWidth = 16384;
(2-1) When High and Low data is received
rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(2-2) When only Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low);
(2-3) When only High data is received
rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127);
(3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than
2,097,152 steps
paramWidth = 2097152;
Two types of control change can be transmitted and received; [NRPN] (NonRegistered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (1CH x 110)
messages. Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN].
(3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [Control Change ECHO] is ON.
If [TABLE] is selected, these messages are received when [Control Change Rx] is
ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the settings
of the [Control assign table]. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to
“Parameters that can be assigned to control changes” on page 245.
If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [Control Change Rx] is
ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number (62h,
63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the
specified parameter.
(3-2) When only Low data is received
Transmission
If [TABLE] is selected, and if [Control Change Tx] is ON when you operate a
parameter that is assigned in the [Control assign table], these messages will be
transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can be assigned,
refer to “Parameters that can be assigned to control changes” on page 245.
If [NRPN] is selected, and if [Control Change Tx] is ON when you operate a
specified parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and
DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx CH]
channel. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that can
be assigned to control changes” on page 245.
Control Change messages are not used for transmission to M7CL Editor because
there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.
(Parameter Change messages are always used.)
Control Change numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks.
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn
00
0vvvvvvv vv
1011nnnn Bn
20
0vvvvvvv vv
Control change
Control number (00)
Control Value (0-127)
Control change
Control number (32)
Control Value (0-127)
If [TABLE] is selected
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn Control change
0nnnnnnn nn Control number (1-5, 7-31, 33-37, 38-95,
102-119) *
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
* Numbers 0, 32, and 96–101 cannot be used.
* Control number 6, 38 can be used.
rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control
value(Low);
rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low);
(3-3) When only Middle data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128;
(3-4) When only High data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384;
(3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control
value(Low);
(3-6) When only High and Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low);
(3-7) When only High and Middle data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle)
* 128;
if ( rxValue > paramWidth)
rxValue = paramWidth;
param = ( rxValue - mod / 2) / add;
If [NRPN] is selected
1011nnnn Bn Control change
01100010 62 NRPN LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number LSB
STATUS
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
DATA
01100011 63 NRPN MSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number MSB
STATUS
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
DATA
00000110 06 Data entry MSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data MSB
STATUS
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
DATA
00100110 26 Data entry LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data LSB
* The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not
be added during transmission. Reception must occur correctly
whether or not the status byte is omitted.
STATUS
DATA
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Appendices
1.1 NOTE OFF
Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data
paramSteps
add
mod
curValue
255
MIDI Data Format
1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE
(Cn)
Reception
If [Program Change ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be echoed
from MIDI OUT.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [Program Change RX]
is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages are
received regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene
memory and effect library are recalled according to the settings of the [Program
Change Table].
Transmission
If [Program Change TX] is ON, these messages are transmitted according to the
[Program Change Table] settings when scene memory and effect library are
recalled.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH]
channel.
If the recalled scene memory and effect library has been assigned to more than
one program number, the lowest-numbered program number for each MIDI
channel will be transmitted.
Program Change messages are not used for transmission to M7CL Editor
because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will
match. (Parameter Change messages are always used.)
You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH.
If SINGLE is selected
You can choose the RX CH, OMNI CH, and TX CH.
You can choose whether a bank select message will be added.
A bank of up to 16 can be specified.
If MULTI is selected
The RX and TX channels will be the same.
The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select
messages will not be added.
You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels.
STATUS
DATA
1100nnnn Cn Program change
0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127)
2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
2.1 TIMING CLOCK
11111000 F8 Timing clock
2.2 ACTIVE SENSING
(FE)
Reception
Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized
(e.g., Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of
400 ms.
This message is not subject to echoing.
STATUS
11111110 FE Active sensing
2.3 SYSTEM RESET
(FF)
Reception
When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g.,
Running Status will be cleared).
This message is not subject to echoing.
STATUS
11111111 FF System reset
3.1 Bulk Dump
Command
rx/tx
F0 43 0n 3E BB BB 11 D0 D1 D2 …
EE F7 BULK DUMP DATA
F0 43 2n 3E 11 D0 D1 D2 F7
BULK DUMP REQUEST
rx/tx
Data name
(D0)
‘M’
Data Number
(D1,2)
0–300, 512, 768
‘S’
512
‘s’
512
‘Y’
1–199, 512–
‘Q’
1–199, 512–
‘q’
1–199, 768–
‘F’
1–199, 512– 527
‘E’
1–199, 512– 515
‘P’
512
‘C’
512
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
function
Scene Memory & Request
Setup Memory & Request
(current setup)
User Setup Memory & Request
Dynamics library & Request
Input Equalizer library & Request
Output Equalizer library &
Request
GEQ Equalizer library & Request
Effect library & Request
Program change table & Request
Control change table & Request
‘M’
0–300 Scene number
512 Current Data (without Recall Safe)
768 Current Data (with Recall Safe)
’S’, ’s’, ’P’, ’C’
512 Current Data
’Q’, ’q’
1–199
512–559
768–783
1024–1031
1280–1282
Library number
Input 1–48, 560–567 STIN 1L–4R
MIX 1–16
MATRIX 1–8
STEREO L,R,MONO(C)
‘F’
1–199 Library number
512–527 RACK 1A–8B
‘E’
1–199 Library number
512–515 RACK 5–8
‘Y’
1–199
512–559
560–567
768–783
1024–1031
1280–1282
1536–1583
1584–1591
Library number
Dynamics1 Input 1–48
STIN 1L–4R
MIX 1–16
MATRIX 1–8
STEREO L,R,MONO(C)
Dynamics2 Input 1–48
STIN 1L–4R
Data is lost when you write to the preset library.
The unique header (Model ID) identifies whether the device is a M7CL.
To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE
COUNT (LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary
complement, and set bit 7 to 0.
CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F
Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time
when a Bulk Dump Request is received.
A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk
Dump Request.
In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of
7-bit data.
[Recovery from bulk data to actual data]
d[0. 6]: actual data
b[0. 7]: bulk data
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
b[0] <<= 1;
d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);
}
M7CL Owner’s Manual
BULK DUMP
REQUEST
rx
[Conversion from actual data to bulk data]
d[0. 6]: actual data
b[0. 7]: bulk data
b[0] = 0;
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
if( d[I]&0x80){
b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);
}
b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;
}
256
function
BULK DUMP
DATA
The M7CL uses the following data types for a bulk dump.
(F8)
Reception
This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four
times per quarter note.
Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings.
STATUS
3 System Exclusive Message
MIDI Data Format
3.2 PARAMETER CHANGE
4.1.2
Reception
This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches
the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a parameter change is
received, the specified parameter will be controlled. When a parameter request
is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a
parameter change with its Device Number as the [Rx CH].
Receive
Data will be received when [Parameter change Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[Parameter change ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed
via ParameterChange immediately the data is received.
Transmission
If [Parameter change TX] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which control
change transmission has not been enabled, a parameter change will be
transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number.
In response to a parameter request, a parameter change will be transmitted with
[Rx CH] as its device number.
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
F0 43 1n 3E 11 … F7
RARAMETER CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 11 … F7
PARAMETER REQUEST
rx/tx
rx/tx
function
M7CL native parameter change
rx/tx
M7CL native parameter request
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA Category
DATA
EOX
4 PARAMETER CHANGE details
4.1 Current Scene, Setup, Backup, User Setup
4.1.1
4.1.3
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010001
0ccccccc
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
F0
43
3n
3E
11
cc
ee
ee
ii
ii
cc
cc
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
Digital mixer
M7CL
Element no.
Element no.
Index no.
Index no.
Channel no.
Channel no.
End of exclusive
Data category
DATA CATEGORY
0x01
00000001
Format (Parameter change)
NAME
Current Scene/Setup/Backup/
User Setup Data
Receive
Data will be received when [Parameter change Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[Parameter change ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed
immediately the data is received.
4.2 Function call – library store, recall –
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when
[Parameter change Tx] is on and the parameter is not registered on the [control
change assign table].
Receive
Data will be received when [Parameter change Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[Parameter change ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed
immediately the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
Category
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010001
0ccccccc
F0
43
1n
3E
11
cc
System exclusive message
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
ee
ee
ii
ii
cc
cc
dd
:
F7
Element no.
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
M7CL
Element no.
Index no.
Index no.
4.2.1 Format (Parameter change)
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when
[Parameter change Tx] is on.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA CATEGORY
FUNCTION NAME
Channel no.
Channel no.
data
End of exclusive
MODULE NAME
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010001
00000000
01001100
01101001
01100010
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
F0 System exclusive message
43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
3E Digital mixer
11 M7CL
00 OTHER DATA
"L" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mh number High
ml number Low
ch channel High
cl channel Low
F7 End of exclusive
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Appendices
Command
Format (Parameter request)
257
MIDI Data Format
4.2.2
4.3 Function call – library edit –
Function Name
FUNCTION NAME
4.3.1
Store
Recall
Unknown Factor Store
Unknown Factor Recall
Store Undo (only Scene)
Recall Undo (only Scene)
4.2.3
“LibStr__”
“LibRcl__”
“LibUnStr”
“LibUnRcl”
“LibStrUd”
“LibRclUd”
Transmission
Parameter Change Message will be sent in reply to Request. If [Parameter change
ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
Module Name
MODULE NAME
Scene
Input EQ
Output EQ
Dynamics
GEQ
Effect
Function
“LibStr__“
“LibUnStr“
“LibRcl__“
“LibUnRcl“
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“GEQ_____”
“EFFECT__”
SCENE
Number
1- 300
channel*1)
*5)
INPUT EQ LIB
41- 199
*1)
OUTPUT EQ LIB
4- 199
*2) *3) *4)
Dynamics LIB
42- 199
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
GEQ LIB
1- 199
*6)
EFFECT LIB
58- 199
*7)
SCENE
1- 300
0
INPUT EQ LIB
41- 199
0
OUTPUT EQ LIB
4- 199
0
Dynamics LIB
42- 199
0
GEQ LIB
1- 199
0
EFFECT LIB
58- 199
0
SCENE
0- 300
*5)
INPUT EQ LIB
1- 199
*1)
OUTPUT EQ LIB
1- 199
*2) *3) *4)
Dynamics LIB
1- 199
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
GEQ LIB
0- 199
*6)
EFFECT LIB
1- 199
*7)
SCENE
0
*5)
INPUT EQ LIB
0
*1)
OUTPUT EQ LIB
0
*2) *3) *4)
Dynamics LIB
0
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
GEQ LIB
0
*6)
EFFECT LIB
0
*7)
“LibStrUd“
SCENE
0
0
“LibRclUd“
SCENE
0
0
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
*1) 0:CH1–47:CH48
48:ST IN 1L–55:ST IN 4R
*2) 256:MIX1–271:MIX16
*3) 512:MATRIX1–519:MATRIX8
*4) 1024:STEREO L–1026:MONO(C)
*5) 512:will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one.
*6) 0:RACK1–7:RACK8 If a GEQ is mounted in RACK 1–8.
*7) 0:RACK5–3:RACK8 If an effect is mounted in RACK 5–8.
*8) 1280:CH 1–1327:CH 48
1328:STIN 1L–1335:STIN 4R
(Dynamics2)
258
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Format (Parameter change)
Receive
Data will be received when [Parameter change Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[Parameter change ECHO] is on. The corresponding memory/library will be
changed immediately the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010001
00000000
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
M7CL
OTHER DATA
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mh number -source start High
ml number -source start Low
mh number -source end High
ml number -source end Low
mh number -destination start High
ml number -destination to start Low
F7 End of exclusive
Function Name
FUNCTION NAME
Copy
Paste
Clear
Cut
Insert
Edit Undo
4.3.3
System exclusive message
01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001
01100010
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
DATA
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
EOX
11110111
4.3.2
F0
43
1n
3E
11
00
”LibCpy__”
”LibPst__”
”LibClr__”
”LibCut__”
”LibIns__”
”LibEdtUd”
Source
start
Valid
–
Valid
Valid
–
–
Source
end
–
–
–
–
–
–
Destination
start
–
Valid
–
–
Valid
–
Module Name
MODULE NAME
SCENE LIB
“SCENE___“
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
“INEQ____“
“OUTEQ___“
“DYNA____“
“GEQ_____“
“EFFECT__“
function
Copy, Paste, Clear, Cut, Insert,
EditUndo
Only Copy
Only Copy
Only Copy
Only Copy
Only Copy
MIDI Data Format
4.4 Function call – library attribute –
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
Format (Parameter change)
Receive
Data will be received when [Parameter change Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[Parameter change ECHO] is on. The corresponding memory/library title will
be changed immediately the data is received.
DATA
Transmission
Parameter Change Message will be sent in reply to Request. If [Parameter change
ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010001
00000000
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
Digital mixer
OTHER DATA
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"A" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
"r" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
nh Scene/Library number High
nl Scene/Library number Low
eh Element High
El Element Low
Ih Index High
Il Index Low
Ch Channel High
cl Channel Low
dd Data28–31bit
dd Data21–27bit
dd Data14–20bit
dd Data7–13bit
dd Data0–6bit
F7 End of exclusive
Format (Parameter request)
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00010001
00000000
F0
43
3n
3E
11
00
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
M7CL
OTHER DATA
01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001
01100010
01000001
01110100
01110010
01100010
01110100
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
(ASCII CODE)
(ASCII CODE)
Scene/Library number High
Scene/Library number Low
Element High
Element Low
Index High
Index Low
Channel High
Channel Low
End of exclusive
4.4.3
Module Name
M7CL
Receive
The Parameter change will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately
the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
EOX
(ASCII CODE)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001
01100010
01000001
01110100
01110010
01100010
01110100
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
DATA
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
0000dddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
EOX
11110111
4.4.2
F0
43
1n
3E
11
00
mm
mm
mm
nh
nl
eh
El
Ih
Il
Ch
cl
F7
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"A" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
"r" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
number
0-300 (0:response only)
1-199 (1-40:response only)
1-199 (1-3:response only)
1-199 (1-41:response only)
0-199 (0:response only)
1-199 (1–57:response only)
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“GEQ_____”
“EFFECT__”
size
16
16
16
16
16
16
4.5 Exist Library Range
4.5.1
Format (Parameter change)
Transmission
When M7CL receives Library Exist request command from outside, the answer
will be sent back with the following Parameter change.
This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only.
Top number is requested number or more.
-ExampleSCENE is stored 5,6,7,10,100 and 101
Request Number:0
Data : Valid, Top Number : 5, End Number 7
Request Number: 8
Data : Valid, Top Number : 10, End Number 10
Request Number: 11
Data : Valid, Top Number : 100, End Number 101
Request Number: 102
Data : Invalid, Top Number : 0, End Number 0
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010001
00000000
F0
43
1n
3E
11
00
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
M7CL
OTHER DATA
01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001
01100010
01000101
01111000
01101001
01110011
01110100
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
DATA
0mmmmmmm
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
EOX
11110111
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"E" (ASCII CODE)
"x" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"s" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
nn Data Status (0:Invalid data,1:Valid Data)
nh Request Number High
nl Request Number Low
nh Top Number High
nl Top Number Low
nh End Number High
nl End Number Low
F7 End of exclusive
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Appendices
4.4.1
259
MIDI Data Format
4.5.2
Format (Parameter request)
DATA
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
Receive
The Parameter change will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately
the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00010001
00000000
System exclusive message
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
M7CL
OTHER DATA
number
1-300
41-199
4-199
42-199
1-199
58-199
Format (Parameter change)
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when
[Parameter change Tx] is on.
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010001
00000000
F0
43
1n
3E
11
00
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
M7CL
OTHER DATA
01001100 "C" (ASCII CODE)
01101001
01100010
01010101
01101110
01010011
01110100
01110010
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
260
4.6.2
"o" (ASCII CODE)
"l" (ASCII CODE)
"U" (ASCII CODE)
"n" (ASCII CODE)
"S" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
"r" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
M7CL Owner’s Manual
channel High
channel Low
End of exclusive
Function Name
Function
“ColUnStr“
4.6 Function call – collection store –
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
number Low
Digital mixer
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"E" (ASCII CODE)
"x" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"s" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
nh Request Number High
nl Request Number Low
F7 End of exclusive
“SCENE___“
“INEQ____“
“OUTEQ___“
“DYNA____“
“GEQ_____“
“EFFECT__“
number High
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
Module Name
MODULE NAME
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
4.6.1
EOX
01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001
01100010
01000101
01111000
01101001
01110011
01110100
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
DATA
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
EOX
11110111
4.5.3
F0
43
3n
3E
11
00
mh
ml
ch
cl
F7
4.6.3
Number
Setup
0
User Defined Key
0
Program Change
0
Control Change
0
tx/rx
tx
tx
tx
tx
Module Name
MODULE NAME
Setup
User Defined Key
Program Change
Control Change
“SETUP___“
“USERDEF_“
“PRGMCHG_“
“CTRLCHG_“
4.7 Function call – module –
4.7.1
Format (Parameter change)
Receive
Data will be received when [Parameter change Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[Parameter change ECHO] is on. The corresponding effect will function
immediately the data is received (depending on the effect type).
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010001
00000000
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
M7CL
OTHER DATA
01001101 "M"
01101111
01100100
01000110
01111000
01010100
01110010
01100111
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
DATA
0eeeeeee
0ppppppp
EOX
11110111
4.7.2
F0
43
1n
3E
11
00
"o"
"d"
"F"
"x"
"T"
"r"
"g"
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
ee Effect number (0:RACK5 - 3:RACK8)
pp Release:0, Press:1
F7 End of exclusive
Module Name
MODULE NAME
Freeze Play button
”FRZPLAY_”
Freeze Record button ”FRZREC__”
channel
0:RACK5, 2:RACK7
0:RACK5, 2:RACK7
This will not work when the Effect Type is different.
MIDI Data Format
4.8 Function call – Channe –
4.9
4.8.1
4.9.1 Format (Parameter change)
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter, the
corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds.
If metering information is expected to be continuously sent, Request is needed
to be sent in at least every 10 seconds.
Pair ON/OFF Trigger Format (Parameter change)
Receive
Data will be received when [Parameter change Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[Parameter change ECHO] is on.
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010001
00000000
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
M7CL
OTHER DATA
01000011 "C"
01101000
01101100
01010000
01101001
01110010
01000011
01110000
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
DATA
0sssssss
0sssssss
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
EOX
11110111
4.8.2
F0
43
1n
3E
11
00
"h"
"l"
"P"
"i"
"r"
"C"
"p"
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
ss Source Channel Number H *1)
ss Source Channel Number L *1)
dd Destination Channel Number H *1)
dd Destination Channel Number L *1)
F7 End of exclusive
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request, the corresponding metering
data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and
time will vary depending on devices). When rebooted or port setting is changed,
the transmission will be disabled.
When [Parameter change ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
DATA
EOX
4.9.2
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010001
00100001
F0
43
1n
3E
11
21
System exclusive message
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ddddddd
:
11110111
mm
mm
mm
dd
:
F7
ADDRESS UL
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
M7CL
REMOTE LEVEL METER
ADDRESS LU
ADDRESS LL
Data1
End of exclusive
Format (Parameter request)
Receive
Data will be received when [Parameter change Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[Parameter change ECHO] is on. the corresponding metering data will be sent
via [Rx CH] in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and
time will vary depending on devices).
When Address UL = 0x7F is received, all metering data transmission will be
immediately stopped [disabled].
Transmission
When [Parameter change ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
Module Name
MODULE NAME
Pair On (with Copy)
Pair On (with Reset Both)
Pair Off
Receive
The data will be echoed when [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
”PAIRONCP”
”PAIRONRS”
”PAIROFF_”
*1) 0:CH1–47:CH48
256:MIX 1– 271:MIX 16
512:MATRIX 1–519:MATRIX 8
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00010001
00100001
F0
43
3n
3E
11
21
System exclusive message
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
mm
mm
mm
ch
cl
F7
ADDRESS UL
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
M7CL
REMOTE LEVEL METER
ADDRESS LU
ADDRESS LL
Count H
Count L
End of exclusive
Appendices
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
Level Meter Data
M7CL Owner’s Manual
261
Warning/Error Messages
Warning/Error Messages
Message
Meaning
Scene #xxx is Empty!
No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the data has been damaged so that
it cannot be recalled.
Scene #xxx is Protected!
You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene.
Scene #xxx is Read Only!
You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene.
xxx Parameters Copied.
Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer.
xxx Parameters Initialized.
Parameter xxx was initialized.
xxx Parameters Pasted.
Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer.
xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy Buffer. Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer.
Cannot Assign!
You attempted to assign an output channel to DCA.
Cannot Bookmark This Popup!
This popup window cannot be bookmarked.
Cannot Paste to Different Parameter Type!
Paste cannot be performed because you are attempting to paste channel settings of a different type.
Cannot Recall to Different Parameter Type! You attempted to recall a library of a different type.
Cannot Recall!
262
Failed to recall a scene memory or library.
Cannot Select This Channel.
You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your user level or some other reason.
Cannot Store!
Failed to store a scene memory or library.
Cannot Undo!
You pressed the [UNDO] button when Undo was not available.
Channel Copied.
Channel settings have been copied.
Channel Initialized.
Channel settings have been initialized.
Channel Moved.
Channel settings have been moved.
Couldn’t Access File.
File on the USB storage device could not be accessed for some reason.
Couldn’t Write File.
File could not be saved from the USB storage device.
Current User Changed. [xxx]
Current user was changed to [xxx].
Directory Not Empty!
You attempted to delete a directory, but failed because there were files remaining in the directory.
EFFECT CUE: Turned Off.
CUE was defeated because you switched from the EFFECT popup window to a different screen.
External HA connection conflict!
External HA connection status is different so that External HA data cannot be recalled.
External Power Supply is Cut Off!
The PW800W power supply connected to the M7CL has stopped operating. Alternatively, some other
problem has occurred. If a malfunction has occurred, please contact your Yamaha dealer.
File Access is Busy!
The following operation has not been performed yet because the USB storage device is being
accessed.
File Already Exists!
The USB storage device already contains a file/directory with the same name as the one you are
attempting to save, rename, or create.
File Error [xx]!
Internal file access error
File Protected!
Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB storage device is write-protected.
Illegal Address!
The IP address or Gateway address setting is invalid.
Illegal MAC Address! Cannot Use Ethernet.
Communication via the Ethernet connector is not possible because the MAC address setting has been
damaged for some reason. Please contact your Yamaha dealer.
Illegal Storage Format!
The USB storage device could not be accessed because its format is invalid or unsupported.
Internal Power Supply is Cut Off!
The internal power supply has stopped operating. Alternatively, some other problem has occurred. If a
malfunction has occurred, please contact your Yamaha dealer.
Internal Power Supply is Turned On!
The internal power supply has started up normally.
KEY IN CUE: Turned Off.
KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window to a different screen.
Loading Aborted.
Loading from USB storage device was aborted.
Low Battery!
The backup battery voltage is low.
Memory Error! All Memories Initialized.
All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup memory has been lost, due to failure
of the backup battery or some other reason. Please contact your Yamaha dealer.
Monitor Assignment is Restricted to Max. 8
Sources!
The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to be selected, but you attempted to
assign more than this.
No Controllable Knob.
Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that corresponds to the knob you
operated.
No Response from External HA.
No response from an external AD8HR.
Nothing to Paste!
Paste cannot be performed because there is no data in the copy buffer.
Page Bookmarked.
The current screen or popup has been bookmarked.
Password Changed.
The password has been changed.
Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned!
The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped. If a malfunction has occurred, please contact your Yamaha dealer.
Processing Aborted.
Processing was interrupted.
REMOTE: Data Framing Error!
Invalid signals are being input to the REMOTE connector.
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Warning/Error Messages
Message
REMOTE: Data Overrun!
Meaning
Invalid signals are being input to the REMOTE connector.
REMOTE: Rx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being received at the REMOTE connector.
REMOTE: Tx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being sent from the REMOTE connector.
Saving Aborted.
Saving to the USB storage device has been interrupted.
SLOT x: Data Framing Error!
Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port.
SLOT x: Data Overrun!
Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port.
SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port.
SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being sent from the SLOT x output port.
Storage Full!
The file could not be saved because there is not enough space on the USB storage device.
Storage Not Found!
The USB storage device could not be recognized.
Storage Not Ready!
Access is not possible because the USB storage device is not ready.
Sync Error! [xxx]
The M7CL is not synchronized with the [xxx] signal.
Tap Operation Ignored.
Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen.
This Operation is Not Allowed.
This operation has been ignored because the current user does not have permission.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Compare.
More than 15 bands are used, when trying to copy 31band GEQ and then compare with Flex15GEQ.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Paste to
Flex15GEQ.
More than 15 bands are used, when trying to copy 31band GEQ and then paste to Flex15GEQ.
Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded!
The I/O cards installed in the slots exceed the rated power capacity.
Unsupported File Format!
The file you attempted to load from the USB storage device is of an unsupported format.
USB: Data Framing Error!
Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port.
USB: Data Overrun!
Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port.
USB: Rx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being received at the USB connector input port.
USB: Tx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being transmitted from the USB connector input port.
The password you input was incorrect.
Wrong Word Clock!
The M7CL cannot synchronize because the source selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD
CLOCK screen is not appropriate.
You Cannot Create User Key.
The current user does not have permission to create a user key.
Appendices
Wrong Password!
M7CL Owner’s Manual
263
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
264
Power does not turn on, panel LEDs
and the LCD display do not light
❍ Is the M7CL’s POWER switch turned on?
❍ If the power still does not turn on, contact your Yamaha dealer.
Sound is not input
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Is the optional I/O card installed correctly? (→ p. 42)
Is a signal being input from the external device?
Is the input port patched to an input channel? (→ p. 98)
Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (→ p. 44, 55)
Is the EQ attenuator raised? (→ p. 105)
Could insert be turned on even though it has not been specified correctly? (→ p. 100)
Is the [ON] key indicator of the input channel lit?
Is the fader of the input channel raised?
Is the DCA fader assigned to that channel raised? Could MUTE be turned on?
Sound is not output
❍
❍
❍
❍
Is the optional I/O card installed correctly? (→ p. 42)
Is the [ON] key indicator of the STEREO channel lit?
Is an output port patched to the output channel? (→ p. 95)
Could LCR be on, and the CSR value be set to 1.0? (→ p. 57)
Sound is not output from headphones
or the MONITOR OUT jacks
❍ Is the [PHONES] knob or [LEVEL] knob set to an appropriate volume?
Sound is not loud enough
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (→ p. 44, 55)
Is the fader of the input channel raised?
Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely low setting? (→ p. 105)
Could the GATE/COMP threshold or ratio be set to an extreme setting? (→ p. 108)
Is the EQ attenuator raised? (→ p. 105)
Is the fader of the output channel raised?
Try using the various screens of the METER function to check the levels. (→ p. 153)
Is the DCA fader assigned to that channel raised?
Sound is distorted
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Is the word clock set correctly? (→ p. 208)
Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (→ p. 44, 55)
Could the fader of the input channel be raised too high?
Could the fader of the STEREO channel be raised too high?
Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely high setting? (→ p. 105)
Sound is output even though it is not
patched to an output channel
❍ Could you have assigned an input channel to direct out? (→ p. 102)
❍ Could you have assigned an output channel as the insert out? (→ p. 100)
The volume of a specific channel rises
and falls
❍ Could GATE/COMP be set to ducking? (→ p. 108)
Operating a fader does not control the
level as you expect
❍ Is SENDS ON FADER selected and INPUT TO MIX FADER active in the panel?
Only the sound of a specific channel is
heard from the MONITOR OUT or
PHONES jack
❍ Could a [CUE] key be on?
Noise occurs from an externally
connected recorder or other device
❍ Is the word clock set correctly? (→ p. 208)
❍ Could the input signal be unsynchronized?
❍ Could oscillator or talkback be turned on? (→ p. 149, 151)
High frequency range is attenuated
❍ Could emphasis be applied? This problem will occur if the input signal status does not match the
emphasis data. (→ p. 208)
❍ Could EQ be applied? (→ p. 105)
An input signal is being input, but
there’s no monitor output
❍ Is the dimmer applied?
❍ Is the MONITOR C assigned even though its output port has not been connected to external device.
Not enough headroom, especially
when EQ boost is applied
❍ Use the EQ attenuator function to lower the level. (→ p. 105)
Signal is delayed
❍ Check whether the delay setting for each channel is set correctly. (→ p. 95)
Turning a MIX encoder does not
change the send level to the MIX bus
❍
❍
❍
❍
Can’t save scene memory or library
data
❍ Are you attempting to save the data to a read-only scene/library or a protected scene? (→ p. 125)
Can’t save to USB storage device
❍ Is the USB storage device protected?
❍ Does the USB storage device have enough free capacity to save the data?
❍ When formatting the USB storage device, format it in FAT32 or FAT16 format.
Can’t transmit/receive MIDI data
❍ Is the MIDI PORT selected correctly? (→ p. 182)
❍ Are the mode and channel selected correctly on the transmitting and receiving devices? (→ p. 182)
❍ Has an event been assigned for the program change? (→ p. 184)
When you recall a scene, some
channels/parameters are not updated
❍ Could that channel or parameter be set to Recall Safe? Could Focus be turned off in the scene you
recalled? Could user level restrictions have been specified? (→ p. 135, 136, 196)
You turn on a CUE button in the EFFECT
PARAM screen, but it is automatically
defeated
❍ This is defeated automatically when you switch screens in the display. (→ p. 171)
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Is the [MIX SEND] key turned on?
Is the MIX [ON] key turned on?
Is the MIX bus set to VARI type? (→ p. 212)
If the send point is set to POST, could the fader have been lowered?
Troubleshooting • General Specifications
When you recall a scene, it takes a
certain amount of time for the faders to
stop
❍ Could you have specified a fade time? (→ p. 139)
The panel LEDs or LCD display are too
dark / too bright
❍ This can be adjusted in the SETUP screen. (→ p. 215)
Signal level of a specific frequency is
low
❍ Could the EQ gain be turned down excessively?
❍ Routing a signal through a GEQ or effect will delay it relative to other signals. If this signal is mixed with
the signal via a different signal path, a comb filtering effect will cause the level of a specific frequency
to be decreased.
Can’t control an external head amp
(AD8HR)
❍
❍
❍
❍
Is the external head amp connected to the REMOTE connector?
Is the audio output signal of the external head amp being input via an I/O card to SLOT 1–3?
Is the input port of the external head amp set correctly?
Could there be a problem with the cable that connects the M7CL and external head amp? Are you
using a D-sub 9-pin cross cable?
Can’t control the M7CL by M7CL
Editor.
❍ Refer to M7CL Editor installation guide on our web site.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
In the LCD display, there are some
black points (unlit) or white points
(always lit).
❍ Unfortunately, this is a common characteristic of TFT-LCDs and not a malfunction.
General Specifications
Internal:
External:
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
44.1 kHz (-10%) to 48 kHz (+6%)
Signal Delay
Less than 2.5 ms INPUT to OMNI OUT (@Fs = 48 kHz)
Fader
100mm motorized x62 (46)
Fader Resolution
+10 to -138, -∞ dB (1024 steps/100 mm)
Maximum Voltage Gain
86 dB INPUT1-48 to OMNI OUT
Crosstalk (@1kHz)
-80 dB Adjacent Input Channels (INPUT1-48, ST IN 1-4 [L, R], (GAIN:min) to OMNI OUT 1-16)
Dimensions
M7CL-48:
M7CL-32:
1274 x 286 x 701 mm (W x H x D)
1060 x 286 x 701 mm (W x H x D)
Net Weight
M7CL-48:
M7CL-32:
50 kg
42 kg
Power Requirements
M7CL-48:
M7CL-32:
300 W, 110-240 V 50/60 Hz
250 W, 110-240 V 50/60 Hz
Operation free-air Temperature Range
+10 °C to +35 °C
Storage Temperature Range
-20 °C to +60 °C
Included Accessories
Owner’s Manual
Dust cover
Optional Accessories
mini YGDAI cards
Gooseneck Lamp LA5000
Power Supply PW800W
Power Supply Link Cable PSL360
Appendices
Sampling Frequency
M7CL Owner’s Manual
265
Input/output characteristics
Input/output characteristics
❏ Analog Input Characteristics
Input Terminals
GAIN
Actual Load
Impedance
For Use With
Nominal
3 kΩ
50-600 Ω Mics
&
600 Ω Lines
3 kΩ
50-600 Ω Mics
&
600 Ω Lines
3 kΩ
50-600 Ω Mics
&
600 Ω Lines
–62 dB
INPUT 1-48 <M7CL-48>
INPUT 1-32 <M7CL-32>
+10 dB
–62 dB
ST IN1-4 [L,R]
+10 dB
–60 dB
TALKBACK
–16 dB
Input Level
Sensitivity *1
Nominal
Max. Before
Clip
–82 dBu
(61.6 µV)
–62 dBu
(0.616 mV)
–42 dBu
(6.16 mV)
–10 dBu
(245 mV)
+10 dBu
(2.45 V)
+30 dBu
(24.5 V)
–82dBu
(61.6 µV)
–62 dBu
(0.616 mV)
–42 dBu
(6.16 mV)
–10 dBu
(245 mV)
+10 dBu
(2.45 V)
+30 dBu
(24.5 V)
–70 dBu
(0.245 mV)
–60 dBu
(0.775 mV)
–40 dBu
(7.75 mV)
–26 dBu
(38.8 mV)
–16 dBu
(0.123 V)
+4 dBu
(1.23 V)
Connector
XLR-3-31 type
(Balanced)*2
XLR-3-31 type
(Balanced)*2
XLR-3-31 type
(Balanced)*2
*1.Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dBu (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain. (all faders and level controls are maximum position.)
*2.XLR-3-31 type connectors with latch are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD)
* In these specifications, 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms.
* All input AD converters are 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling.
* +48V DC (phantom power) is supplied to INPUT (1-48 or 1-32), ST IN 1L-4R and TALKBACK XLR type connectors via each individual software controlled switches.
❏ Analog Output Characteristics
Actual Source
Impedance
For Use With
Nominal
OMNI OUT 1-16
75 Ω
600 Ω Lines
PHONES
15 Ω
Output Terminals
Output Level
GAIN SW*3
Nominal
Max. Before Clip
+24 dB (default)
+4 dBu (1.23 V)
+24 dBu (12.28 V)
+18 dB
–2 dBu (616 mV)
+18 dBu (6.16 V)
75 mW*4
150 mW
mW*4
150 mW
8 Ω Phones
40 Ω Phones
—
65
Connector
XLR-3-32 type
(Balanced)*1
Stereo Phone Jack (TRS)
(Unbalanced)*2
*1.XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD)
*2.PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced. (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND)
*3.There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum output level.
*4.The position of the level control is 10 dB lowered from Max.
* In these specifications, 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms.
* All output DA converters are 24 bit, 128 times oversampling.
❏ Digital Output Characteristics
Terminal
2TR OUT
DIGITAL*1
AES/EBU
Format
Data Length
Level
Connector
AES/EBU
Professional Use*1
24 bit
RS422
XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)*2
*1.The channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL is described on page 267.
*2.XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD)
266
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Input/output characteristics
• Channel Status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL
byte
bit
Block Format
1
Mode
2-4
0
5
2
3
4
fixed/variable
fixed
Emphasis
Fs Lock
6-7
1
field name
0
Sampling Frequency
variable
0-3
Channel Mode
4-7
Users Bit Management
0-2
Use of AUX
3-7
Source
0-7
Multi Channel
0-1
Digital Audio Reference Signal
2
fixed
fixed
Sampling Frequency
description
1
professional use
0
audio
0x4
off
0
lock
0x0
others
0x3
32 kHz
0x2
44.1 kHz
0x1
48 kHz
0x1
2ch mode
0x0
—
0x1
24 bits Audio Data
0x00
—
0x00
—
0x0
fixed
—
3-6
7
fixed
data
—
0
variable
0x0
others
fixed
0
—
Sampling Frequency Scan Flag
❏ Control I/O Characteristics
Terminal
ETHERNET
MIDI
WORD CLOCK
Format
Level
Connector
ETHERNET
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
RJ-45
—
MIDI
DIN Connector 5P
TTL/75Ω
—
TTL/75Ω
REMOTE
RS422
LAMP 1(32ch), 2(48ch)
USB HOST
BNC Connector
D-Sub Connector 9P (Male)
—
0 V - 12 V
USB 1.1
—
XLR-4-31 type*1
A type USB Connector
*1.4pin=HOT, 3pin=COLD, Lamp rating 5 W, Voltage control by software
❏ SLOT 1-3 Characteristics
Function
MY8-AT
ADAT
MY8-TD
TASCAM
MY8-AE
MY8-AEB
ANALOG IN
MY4-DA
ANALOG OUT
MY8-AD96
MY8-DA96
MY8-AE96S
MY8-AE96
MY16-AT
ANALOG IN
ANALOG OUT
AES/EBU
AES/EBU
MY16-TD
TASCAM
MY16-CII
MY8-ADDA96
8 IN
8 OUT
The Number Of
Usable Cards
4 IN
—
—
4 OUT
8 IN
—
—
8 IN
3
8 OUT
ADAT
MY16-AE
MY16-C
Output
AES/EBU
MY4-AD
MY8-AD24
Input
16 IN
16 OUT
CobraNet ™
16 IN
16 OUT
ANALOG I/O
8 IN
8 OUT
Appendices
Card Name
M7CL Owner’s Manual
267
Electrical characteristics
Electrical characteristics
All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator:150ohms
❏ Frequency Response
Input
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @20 Hz–20 kHz, referenced to the nominal output level @1 kHz
Output
OMNI OUT 1-16
INPUT 1-48 <M7CL-48>
INPUT 1-32 <M7CL-32>
PHONES
OMNI OUT 1-16
ST IN 1-4 [L, R]
PHONES
❏ Gain Error
RL
600 Ω
8Ω
600 Ω
8Ω
Conditions
GAIN: Max.
Min.
Typ.
Max.
–1.5
0.0
0.5
–3.0
0.0
0.5
–1.5
0.0
0.5
–3.0
0.0
0.5
Min.
Typ.
Max.
2.0
4.0
6.0
2.0
4.0
6.0
Full Scale Output
23.5
24.0
24.5
–30 dBFs, PHONES Level Control: Max.
–0.5
0
0.5
Min.
Typ.
Max.
GAIN: Max.
Unit
dB
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @1 kHz
Input
Output
RL
INPUT 1-48 <M7CL-48>
INPUT 1-32 <M7CL-32>
OMNI OUT 1-16
600 Ω
ST IN 1-4 [L, R]
OMNI OUT 1-16
600 Ω
OMNI OUT 1-16
600 Ω
Internal OSC
PHONES
❏ Total Harmonic Distortion
Input
Output
INPUT 1-48 <M7CL-48>
INPUT 1-32 <M7CL-32>
OMNI OUT 1-16
ST IN 1-4 [L, R]
Internal OSC
8Ω
Input Level : +10 dBu, GAIN: Min.
Input Level : –62 dBu, GAIN: Max.
Input Level : +10 dBu, GAIN: Min.
Unit
dBu
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
RL
600 Ω
OMNI OUT 1-16
600 Ω
OMNI OUT 1-16
600 Ω
PHONES
Conditions
Input Level : –62 dBu, GAIN: Max.
8Ω
Conditions
+4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: Max.
0.1
+4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: Min.
0.05
+4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: Max.
0.1
+4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: Min.
0.05
Full Scale Output @1 kHz
0.02
Full Scale Output @1 kHz, PHONES Level Control: Max.
0.2
Unit
%
* Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave filter @80 kHz
❏ Hum & Noise
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, EIN= Equivalent Input Noise
Input
Output
INPUT 1-48 <M7CL-48>
INPUT 1-32 <M7CL-32>
OMNI OUT 1-16
RL
600 Ω
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Max.
Master fader at nominal level and
–128
EIN
one Ch fader at nominal level.
–62
Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Min.
Master fader at nominal level and
–84
Max.
Unit
–79
one Ch fader at nominal level.
All INPUTs <M7CL-48>
OMNI OUT 1-16
600 Ω
Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Min.
Master fader at nominal level and all Ch 1-48 in faders at
nominal level.
–62
All INPUTs <M7CL-32>
OMNI OUT 1-16
600 Ω
Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Min.
Master fader at nominal level and all Ch 1-32 in faders at
nominal level.
–64
—
OMNI OUT 1-16
600 Ω
Residual Output Noise, ST Master Off
–86
—
PHONES
Residual Output Noise, PHONES Level Control Min.
–86
8Ω
dBu
* Hum & Noise are measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB/octave attenuation.
❏ Dynamic Range
Input
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
Output
RL
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
INPUT 1-48 <M7CL-48>
INPUT 1-32 <M7CL-32>
OMNI OUT 1-16
600 Ω
AD + DA, GAIN: Min.
108
ST IN 1-4 [L, R]
OMNI OUT 1-16
600 Ω
AD + DA, GAIN: Min.
108
OMNI OUT 1-16
600 Ω
DA Converter
110
—
Max.
Unit
dB
* Dynamic range are measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB/octave attenuation.
❏ Sampling Frequency
Parameter
External Clock
Frequency
Internal Clock
Accuracy
Jitter
268
Conditions
Frequency Range
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Min.
Typ.
39.69
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Max.
Unit
50.88
44.1
kHz
48
50
ppm
5
ns
Other Functions
Other Functions
❏ Libraries
❏ Output Function
Name
Number
Scene Memory
Preset 1 + User 300
Total
301
Function
Attenuator
Parameter
–96 to +24 dB
Input EQ Library
Preset 40 + User 159
199
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Output EQ Library
Preset 3 + User 196
199
Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB
Dynamics Library
Preset 41 + User 158
199
Effect Library
Preset 48 + Reserve 9 +
User 142
199
GEQ Library
Preset 1 + User 199
200
Parameter
Normal/Reverse
Attenuator
–96 to +24 dB
Slope= 12 dB/Oct
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Dynamics 1
Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB
Key In:
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Low Shelving (Low Band)
Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16
MIX1-16/MTRX1-8/STIN LR/MONO(C)
(8ch block)
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
Fader
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
Type I/Type II
On
On/Off
Insert Point:Pre EQ/Pre Fader
Mute Group
8 Groups
Direct Out Point:Pre HPF/Pre EQ/Pre Fader
Type: Gate/Ducking/Comp/Expander
Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post On
Mix to Matrix
Stereo to Matrix Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
Oscillator
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Hold= 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec
Decay= 5 msec to 42.3 sec (Release)
Dynamics 1
Release= 5 msec to 42.3 sec
Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to + 18 dB
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Direct Out
Insert Point: Pre EQ/Post EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Compander S
Function
Insert
Low Shelving (Low Band)
Type I/Type II
Insert
Phase
4 Band Equalizer
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
❏ Input Function
HPF
4Band Equalizer
Level= 0 to –96dB (1 dB step)
On/Off= Software control
❏ Output Port
Function
Parameter
Releace= 5msec to 42.3 sec
Out Port Delay
Range= –70 dB to 0 dB
Out Port Phase
Normal/Reverse
Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Attenuator
–96 to +24 dB
0 msec to 600 msec
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In:
Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out 13-16
Ch1-STIN4R (8ch block)
Key In Filter:HPF/LPF/BPF
Type:
Comp/De-Esser/Compander H/
Compander S
❏ Processor
Function
Parameter
GEQ
31 bands x 4(8) systems
Effects
Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 4 systems
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Dynamics2
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Release= 5 msec to 42.3 sec
Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out 13-16
Ch1-STIN4R (8ch block)
Fader
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
On
On/Off
DCA Group
8 Groups
Mute Group
Appendices
Key In:
8 Groups
16 sends
Mix Send
Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes
Mix Send Point:Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
8 Sends
Matrix Send
Matrix Send Point:Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
LCR Pan
CSR= 0% to 100%
M7CL Owner’s Manual
269
Pin Assignment
Pin Assignment
1
5
4
14
15
20
6
8
7
13
19
9
1
2
3
9
6
12
18
23
5
11
10
16
17
21
22
❏ REMOTE
270
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
1
GND
6
RX+
2
RX–
7
RTS
3
TX–
8
CTS
4
TX+
9
GND
5
N.C
M7CL Owner’s Manual
❏ DC POWER INPUT
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
1
+24V
13
GND
2
+24V
14
GND
3
+24V
15
GND
4
+24V
16
GND
5
+24V
17
GND
6
+24V
18
GND
7
+24V
19
CAUTION(+)
8
+24V
20
CAUTION(–)
9
+24V
21
DETECT A
10
GND
22
DETECT B
11
GND
23
DETECT GND
12
GND
Frame GND
Dimensions
Dimensions
M7CL-48
168: PSL360 (option)
955: PSL360 (option)
340:MBM7CL (option)
286
216
370
701
35
˚
146
18
4
111
25
535
30
13
22
185
102
8˚
672
130
297
442
144
124
1026
1274
M7CL-32
168: PSL360 (option)
955: PSL360 (option)
340:MBM7CL (option)
286
216
370
701
35
˚
146
18
4
111
25
13
30
124
83
442
672
130
144
812
Unit : mm
1060
Appendices
535
22
185
102
8˚
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right
to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options
may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
European models
Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.
Inrush Current: 21A
Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4
M7CL Owner’s Manual
271
Installing the MBM7CL meter bridge (option)
Installing the MBM7CL meter bridge (option)
1. Remove screw A from the rear of the M7CL’s touch screen, and remove the connector cover.
2. Remove screws B (two locations).
3. Loosen screws C (two locations) so that they protrude approximately 2 mm.
2 mm
C
Connector cover
C
2 mm
B
A
B
M7CL main unit
4. Hook holes D of the MBM7CL’s attachment fixture over the M7CL’s screws C (two locations, at left and
right).
5. Connect the MBM7CL’s connector E to the M7CL’s connector F.
* Orient the connector so that the red cable is at the right when viewed from the rear panel.
6. Insert the two screws B (which you removed in step 2) into holes G of the MBM7CL’s attachment fixture,
and tighten them.
7. Tighten screws C (two locations) to fasten the MBM7CL to the M7CL.
8. Using screw A which you removed in step 1, fasten the cable cover included with the MBM7CL. This
completes the installation procedure.
MBM7CL
D
G
C
B
F
Red cable
D
C
E
G
B
Cable cover
A
Shown as completed
CAUTION
• Before connecting the MBM7CL meter bridge to the M7CL, you must turn off the power switches of the
M7CL and the PW800W. Failure to observe this will cause malfunctions or electric shock.
272
M7CL Owner’s Manual
MIDI Implementation Chart
MIDI Implementation Chart
YAMAHA
[ Digital Mixing Console ]
Model M7CL MIDI Implementation Chart
Transmitted
Recognized
Date :8-Aug-2005
Version : 1.0
Remarks
Function...
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1 - 16
1 - 16
1 - 16
1 - 16
Memorized
Default
Messages
Altered
x
x
**************
1, 3
x
x
Memorized
Mode
Note
Number
x
: True voice **************
0 - 127
x
Velocity
Note ON
Note OFF
x
x
o
o
After
Touch
Key's
Ch's
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Bank Select
Data Entry
NRPN LSB,MSB
Assignable Cntrl
o 0 - 127
**************
o 0 - 127
0 - 300
Assignable
System Exclusive
o *1
o *1
System
Common
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune
x
x
x
x
x
x
System
: Clock
Real Time: Commands
x
x
o
x
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local ON/OFF
Mes- :All Notes OFF
sages:Active Sense
:Reset
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
Pitch Bend
Control
0,32
6,38
98,99
1-31,33-98,
102-119
Effect Control
Change
Aux
Notes:
: True #
Effect Control
Appendices
Prog
Change
*1 :Bulk Dump/Request,Parameter Change/Request,and MMC.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO
o : Yes
x : No
M7CL Owner’s Manual
273
Index
Index
Symbols
B
Controlling mute groups .............117
[DCA] key .................................... 21
Banks A/B .................................. 215
Copying the parameters
of a channel................................122
[DYNAMICS 1] encoder .............. 17
BRIGHTNESS ........................... 215
Copying/pasting a file.................205
[DYNAMICS 2] encoder .............. 17
Brightness of the touch screen,
LEDs, and lamps ....................... 215
Copying/pasting a scene............132
[HA] encoder ............................... 17
[HPF] encoder ............................. 17
[IN 1-8] key .................................. 21
Buttons......................................... 26
Cue.............................................145
C
Cue function ...............................146
[IN 17-24] key .............................. 21
Calibration function .................... 217
Cutting a scene ..........................134
[IN 25-32] key .............................. 21
Cascade connections ................ 210
[IN 33-40] key .............................. 21
Cascade master......................... 211
[IN 41-48] key .............................. 21
Cascade slave ........................... 210
[MATRIX] key .............................. 21
Centralogic section ................ 19, 87
Operations ................................ 90
[IN 9-16] key ................................ 21
[MIX 1-8] key ............................... 21
[MIX 9-16] key ............................. 21
[MIX/MATRIX] encoder ............... 17
[PAN] encoder ............................. 17
[ST IN] key................................... 21
[STEREO] key ............................. 21
Numerics
2TR OUT DIGITAL jack............... 22
31 Band GEQ ............ 157, 161, 163
CH CLEAR................................. 124
CH COPY .................................. 122
CH JOB................................ 29, 113
CH LINK..................................... 120
CH MOVE .................................. 123
Changing
Input patch settings .................. 98
Output patch settings ............... 95
Password................................ 195
User level ............................... 196
Channel Link .............................. 120
A
AC IN connector .......................... 23
Adjusting
Detection point of the touch screen
(Calibration function)............ 217
Faders .................................... 218
Input/output gain .................... 219
Channel name and icon ......... 53, 71
Channel parameters
Copying .................................. 122
Initializing................................ 124
Moving .................................... 123
Current scene...............................43
D
Daisy chain.................................177
DC POWER INPUT connector .....23
DCA CUE ...................................145
DCA GROUP ASSIGN ...............114
DCA UNITY ................................147
DEC RECALL.............................129
DE-ESSER .................................227
Deleting a file .............................205
Dialog boxes ................................28
Digital input/output connections ...41
Dimensions ................................271
DIMMER.....................................141
DIRECT RECALL .......................129
Directly outputting ......................102
Directory .....................................206
Display section .............................18
DUCKING...................................225
Channel structure ........................ 13
Dynamics ...................................108
Clearing a scene ........................ 133
Dynamics library.........................111
Administrator ............................. 191
COMMENT field......................... 126
DYNAMICS Library List..............222
Analog input connections ............ 39
COMPANDER HARD
(COMPANDER-H) ..................... 227
Dynamics parameter ..................225
COMPANDER SOFT
(COMPANDER-S) ..................... 227
E
Comparing two settings ............... 36
E symbol (EDIT symbol) ............126
COMPRESSOR ......................... 226
Effect library ...............................176
Connections ................................. 39
Effect Type List ..........................228
Console lock .............................. 201
Effects ........................................157
Control Change.......... 181, 187, 245
Effects and tempo
synchronization ..........................240
Analog output connections .......... 40
Assigning channels to a
DCA group................................. 113
Assigning channels to
mute groups .............................. 116
ATT/HPF/EQ popup window
1 ch ........................................ 105
8 ch ........................................ 106
Control change parameter
assignments............................... 247
Controlling DCA groups ............. 115
274
Copying/pasting settings ..............36
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters.....................229
Electrical characteristics.............268
Index
Entering names ........................... 30
EQ ............................................. 105
EQ [FREQUENCY] encoders ...... 17
H
HA (Head Amp) gain settings ...... 44
HA (Head Amp) settings .............. 55
EQ and dynamics ...................... 105
HA/PATCH popup window
1 ch........................................... 55
8 ch........................................... 56
ALL ........................................... 56
EQ library .................................. 111
Help ............................................. 29
EQ [GAIN] encoders.................... 17
EQ [Q] encoders.......................... 17
EQ Library List........................... 221
List windows.................................27
Logging-in ..................................193
M
M7CL..............................................9
MAC ADDRESS.........................214
Main area .....................................29
MATRIX buses ...........................212
MATRIX channels 1–8 ...........13, 70
EQ popup window (ALL) ........... 107
I
Error Messages ......................... 262
INC RECALL.............................. 129
ETHERNET connector ................ 23
Initialize the internal memory ..... 216
MBM7CL meter bridge .........17, 155
Installing..................................272
EXPANDER............................... 226
Initializing ............................. 35, 124
Meters ..................................29, 153
External head amp .................... 177
INPUT channels
1–32 {1–48} ........................... 13, 51
MIDI............................................181
INPUT CUE ............................... 145
MIDI Implementation Chart ........273
INPUT jacks 1–32 {1–48} ............ 22
MIDI IN/OUT connectors ..............23
Input patch settings...................... 98
MIX bus types (VARI / FIXED) .....14
INPUT section.............................. 16
MIX buses ..................................212
Input/output characteristics ........ 266
MIX channels 1–16 ................13, 69
File
Copying/pasting ..................... 205
Deleting .................................. 205
INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window
1ch.................................. 100, 102
8ch.................................. 100, 102
MIX meters...................................17
Firmware version ......................... 14
Inserting a scene ....................... 134
FIXED .................................. 14, 212
Installing an option card ............... 42
Fixing the channels or DCA groups
of the Centralogic section ............ 94
Internal clock.............................. 213
External head amp connections 177
F
Fade function............................. 139
FADE TIME ............................... 139
Faders ......................................... 27
Flex15GEQ................ 157, 161, 165
Internal effect parameters .......... 171
MATRIX meters............................17
MIDI Data Format.......................255
Mixing parameter operation
applicability.................................252
MONITOR ....................................29
Monitor function..........................141
MONITOR section ........................19
MONO (C) channel ................13, 69
Moving the parameters
of a channel................................123
Focus function ........................... 135
Internal effects ........................... 167
Inserting an internal effect into a
channel................................. 170
Freeze effect ............................. 175
Internal memory ......................... 216
Multifunction encoder operations .26
Function access area .................. 28
IP ADDRESS ............................. 214
Multiple selection
(specifying a range)......................25
K
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN ............116
G
Keyboard window ........................ 27
MUTE SAFE...............................116
GATE......................................... 225
Keys
Special operations .................... 25
Mute Safe function .....................119
GATEWAY ADDRESS .............. 214
Knobs........................................... 27
FOCUS ...................................... 135
Functions that can be assigned to
user-defined keys ...................... 253
General Specifications .............. 265
GEQ library................................ 176
GLOBAL RECALL SAFE........... 136
Graphic EQ........................ 157, 161
Grounding screw ......................... 23
Guest ......................................... 191
L
Multi mode..................................185
MUTE MASTER .........................118
MUTE SAFE indicator ................117
N
NAVIGATION KEYS section ........21
LAMP connector .......................... 22
LCR mode.............................. 57, 72
Appendices
Encoder operations ..................... 25
Network address ........................214
Libraries ....................................... 31
NRPN (Non Registered Parameter
Number) .....................................187
Link group .................................. 120
NRPN parameter assignments ..249
LINK MODE ............................... 214
M7CL Owner’s Manual
275
Index
O
S
OMNI OUT jacks 1–16 ................ 22
T
OUTPUT CUE ........................... 145
SCENE ........................................ 29
Clearing .................................. 133
Copying/pasting...................... 132
Cutting .................................... 134
Inserting.................................. 134
Recalling................................. 128
Storing .................................... 125
Output patch settings .................. 95
SCENE field ............................... 126
TALKBACK DIMMER .................142
OVERVIEW screen ............... 29, 88
Scene memory........................... 125
TALKBACK GAIN knob................24
SCENE MEMORY/
MONITOR section ....................... 19
TALKBACK jack ...........................24
Scene number ........................... 126
Time .............................................28
Scene title .................................. 126
Time stamp ................................131
SELECTED CHANNEL
section ................. 17, 61, 66, 75, 79
Operations ................................ 81
TO STEREO/MONO popup window
8 ch .....................................57, 73
ALL .....................................58, 73
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen .................................... 29, 80
Tool buttons .................................31
Option card .................................. 42
OSCILLATOR............................ 151
Other Functions ......................... 269
Output channels .................... 13, 69
P
Parameter change ..................... 181
Password................................... 195
PATCH / NAME popup window
(PATCH) ...................................... 98
Phase (ø)..................................... 52
PHONES LEVEL ....................... 141
PHONES LEVEL knob ................ 24
PHONES LEVEL LINK .............. 141
PHONES OUT
(headphone output) jack.............. 24
Pin Assignment ......................... 270
Popup windows ........................... 28
POWER switch ............................ 23
PRE EQ ..................................... 212
PRE FADER .............................. 212
Preferences ............................... 198
Program Change ....................... 181
Protect symbol........................... 126
R
R symbol (READ ONLY symbol)126
RACK .......................................... 29
Rear panel ................................... 22
Recall Safe ................................ 136
RECALL UNDO ......................... 128
Recalling a scene ...................... 128
REMOTE connector .................... 22
Remotely controlling an external
head amp .................................. 178
Restoring the current scene to the
default state ................................. 43
Sending an input channel signal to
the STEREO bus ......................... 47
Sending signals from MIX channels
and STEREO/MONO channels to
MATRIX buses............................. 75
Sending signals from MIX channels
to the STEREO/MONO bus ......... 72
SUBNET MASK .........................214
Tabs .............................................26
Talkback.....................................149
Tap Tempo function ...................173
Top panel .....................................15
Touch screen .........................18, 25
Troubleshooting .........................264
U
Under the front pad ......................24
USB connector .............................18
Sending the signal from an input
channel to the MATRIX buses ..... 66
USB storage device
Formatting media ....................206
Save/load data........................202
Sending the signal from an input
channel to the STEREO/MONO buses ................................................. 57
SENDS ON FADER ..................... 29
Settings
Copying .................................... 36
Initializing.................................. 35
Pasting ..................................... 36
SETUP ......................................... 29
SETUP screen ........................... 207
Signal flow for input channels ...... 51
Signal flow for output channels .... 69
Single mode ............................... 185
Slots 1–3 ...................................... 23
ST IN (Stereo Input) section ........ 16
ST IN channels 1–4 ............... 13, 51
ST IN jacks 1–4 ........................... 22
STEREO channel .................. 13, 69
STEREO/MONO MASTER
section ......................................... 20
M7CL Owner’s Manual
Storing a scene ..........................125
Sending the signal from an input
channel to a MIX bus ................... 61
ST/MONO mode .................... 57, 72
276
STORE UNDO ...........................127
User............................................191
User authentication
keys............................191, 193, 196
User defined keys ........20, 200, 253
USER DEFINED KEYS section ...20
User level ...................................196
User Level settings.....................191
User name....................................28
User settings ..............................191
Using an internal effect
via send/return ...........................168
Using the Centralogic
section............61, 63, 66, 67, 75, 76
Using the faders
(SENDS ON FADER mode) .........64
Using the faders of the top panel .61
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL
section....................................66, 75
Index
V
VARI ............................................ 14
VARI [PRE EQ] ......................... 212
VARI [PRE FADER] .................. 212
Version/Power supply field ........ 207
Virtual rack ................................ 157
W
Warning ..................................... 262
Word clock........................... 14, 208
Word clock connections
and settings ................................. 43
Appendices
WORD CLOCK IN/OUT
connectors ................................... 23
M7CL Owner’s Manual
277
278
M7CL Owner’s Manual
M
O
MIX
1 2 ··· 1516
■ M7CL-48/M7CL-32 Block Diagram
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
CASCADE
IN
SELECT
MIX 1-16
OSCILLATOR
OSC
METER
AD
Sine Wave
Pink Noise
Burst Noise
INPUT
PATCH
INSERT POINT
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
CH
INSERT OUT 1-32 {48}
CH
INSERT IN 1-32 {48}
HA
+48V
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
GAIN/TRIM
HA
METER
2
AD
1
3
HPF
32
{48}
INSERT
ATT
4BAND
EQ
PRE HPF
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
Keyin
Self PRE EQ
Self POST EQ
MIX13-16 OUT
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32]POST EQ {32}
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48]POST EQ{48}
GAIN/TRIM
To CASCADE IN
SELECT
DYNA1OUT
DYNA2OUT
EQ OUT
METER
METER
METER
GR METER
GR METER
PRE EQ
METER
PRE HPF
METER
ST IN
1L-4R
To MONITOR
SELECT
GATE
COMP
DUCK
COMPAND
EXPAND
DE-ESSER
COMP
KEYIN CUE
Keyin Filter
To MIX
16
16
SLOT2 1-16
To MIX
SLOT3
16
SLOT3 1-16
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
HPF
ATT
PRE HPF
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
Keyin
Self PRE EQ
Self POST EQ
MIX13-16 OUT
STCH 1L-4R POST EQ
MATRIX OUT
1-8
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO (C)
RACK3 IN
A (L) / B (R)
RACK4 IN
A (L) / B (R)
LEVEL
MATRIX1,3...7
ON
LEVEL
MATRIX2,4...8
To MATRIX
ON
LEVEL
PAN
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
LR MONO TO MONO TO ST
PRE FADER
METER
LEVEL/
DCA 1-8
To MIX
POSTON
METER
ON
STEREO
INSERT OUT
L,R,MONO (C)
MATRIX
INSERT OUT
1-8
METER RACK OUT L
METER RACK OUT R
EFFECT
RACK5 IN
A (L) / B (R)
RACK6 IN
A (L) / B (R)
EFFECT CUE
RACK6 (same as RACK5)
RACK5 OUT
A(L) / B (R)
RACK6 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK7 IN
A (L) / B (R)
RACK7 (same as RACK5)
RACK7 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK8 IN
A (L) / B (R)
RACK8 (same as RACK5)
RACK8 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
LEVEL
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
4BAND
EQ
POST ON
METER
BAL
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO (C)
ON
INSERT
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT PRE FADER
Keyin
Self PRE EQ / Self POST EQ / MIX13-16 OUT /
ST (L,R,MONO (C)) POST EQ
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
POST ON
CUE ON
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
PAN
ON
32 {48}
MIX INSERT IN 1-16
16
STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO (C)
MATRIX INSERT IN 1-8
PRE FADER / POST ON To MATRIX
VARI
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
STEREO
MATRIX 1-8
ON
MIX 1,3... 15
ON
MIX 2,4... 16
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH MATRIX
INSERT OUT 1-8
MATRIX
INSERT IN 1-8
ON
POST PAN L
ON
POST PAN R
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
ON
LEVEL
MATRIX2,4...8
ST L
PAN LINK
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
(PRE FADER)PFL/(POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
MATRIX1,3...7
POST ON
FIXED
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
BAL
INSERT POINT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
EQ OUT
DYNA OUT
METER
METER
GR METER
PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
ATT
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
ON
LEVEL
MATRIX1,3...7
ON
LEVEL
MATRIX2,4...8
ON
LEVEL
BAL
CUE ON
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
PRE FADER
METER
POST ON
METER
LEVEL
ON
MATRIX OUT 1-8
INSERT
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
Keyin
Self PRE EQ / Self POST EQ / MIX13-16 OUT/
MATRIX1-8 POST EQ
POST ON
(PRE FADER) PFL / (POST ON) AFL
CUE L
CUE TRIM
(INPUT / OUTPUT / DCA)
CUE R
KEYIN CUE
KEYIN CH1-32 {48}
KEYIN ST IN1L-4R
KEYIN CUE
SELECT
ON
RACK 5-8 OUT L / R
EFFECT CUE
SELECT
ON
EFFECT CUE
To CHINSERT IN
MONO
METER CUE L
METER CUE R
CUE R
To MIX INSERT IN
To STEREO INSERT IN
To MATRIX INSERT IN
CUE ON
DIRECT OUT 1-32 {48}
MIX OUT 1-16
STEREO OUT L,R,MONO (C)
MATRIX OUT 1-8
MONITOR OUT L,R, MONO (C)
CH INSERT OUT 1-32 {48}
MIX INSERT OUT 1-16
STEREO INSERT OUT L,R,MONO (C)
MATRIX INSERT OUT 1-8
CUE LOGIC
ST IN1 L,R
ST IN2 L,R
ST IN3 L,R
ST IN4 L,R
MIX CASCADE OUT 1-16
STEREO CASCADE OUT L,R,MONO (C)
MATRIX CASCADE OUT 1-8
CUE CASCADE OUT L,R
Flex15GEQ
LCR
CSR
PRE FADER
OUTPUTS
METER RACK IN L
METER RACK IN R
ATT
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
MONO (C)
TO LCR
LCR
METER RACK OUT
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
PAN
LR MONO
ST R
POST ON
(PRE FADER)PFL/(POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
PAN MODE
31BandGEQ
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
PAN MODE TO ST TO MONO
PRE FADER
METER
DYNA OUT
METER
METER
GR METER
PRE EQ POST EQ
8
MIX
INSERT OUT
1-16
VARI
STEREO
POST ON
METER
CUE L
RACK5
METER RACK IN
To MATRIX
TO LCR
CUE L
GATE
COMP
DUCK
COMPAND
EXPAND
DE-ESSER
COMP
KEYIN CUE
Keyin Filter
VARI
STEREO
ON
CH INSERT IN 1-32 {48}
3
CH
INSERT OUT
1-32 {48}
To MATRIX
VARI
PRE FADER / POST ON
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PACH STEREO INSERT POIN
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
INSERT OUT L,R,MONO (C)
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
STEREO
INSERT IN L,R,MONO (C)
PRE EQ
EQ OUT
CUE R
To MATRIX
RACK4 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
ON
INSERT
VARI
RACK1 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK4 (same as RACK1)
LEVEL
PAN
PRE FADER / POST ON
STEREO L,R,MONO(C)
ON
To MATRIX PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
RACK3 (same as RACK1)
POST ON
CSR
To MATRIX PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
VARI
VARI
STEREO
METER RACK OUT
31BandGEQ
RACK3 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
ON
ST R
LEVEL
PAN
To MIX
RACK2 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
LEVEL
MIX2,4...16
ON
To MIX
RACK1
RACK2 (same as RACK1)
(13-16)To KEYIN
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
ON
VARI
RACK2 IN
A (L ) / B (R)
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT PRE FADER
Keyin
Self PRE EQ / Self POST EQ / MIX13-16 OUT/
MIX(1-8,9-16)POST EQ
ON
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
To MIX
Flex15GEQ
MATRIX2,4...8
MIX1,3...15
LEVEL
DYNA1OUT
EQ OUT
DYNA 2OUT
METER
METER
METER
GR METER
GR METER
PRE EQ
METER
PRE HPF
METER
RACK
RACK1 IN
A (L ) / B (R)
ON
ON
LEVEL
FIXED
STEREO
MIX OUT
1-16
MIX OUT1-16
(PRE FADER) PFL / (POST ON) AFL
STCH 1L-4R
SLOT1 1-16
SLOT2 1-16
SLOT3 1-16
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
LEVEL
ON
BAL
8
METER RACK IN
MATRIX1,3...7
MONO (C)
ON
ON
ON
INSERT
ST L
PAN LINK
ON
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL/POST PAN R
LEVEL
(PRE FADER) PFL / (POST ON) AFL
MONO (C)
POST ON
POST PAN R
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL/POST PAN L
CUE ON
ST L
CSR
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
VARI
STEREO
ON
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
4 BAND
EQ
POST ON
METER
PRE FADER
METER
ST R
VARI
STEREO
INSERT
IN
PATCH
RACK
IN
PATCH
PAN MODE
ATT
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
To OUTPUT PATCH
TO LCR
LCR
INSERT
VARI
RACK1 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK2 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK3 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK4 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK5 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK6 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK7 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
RACK8 OUT
A (L) / B (R)
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
LR MONO TO MONO TO ST
ON
POST PAN L
To MIX
SLOT2
DIRECT OUT 1-32 {48}
LEVEL
POST ON
METER
POST ON
To MIX
SLOT1 1-16
PRE FADER
METER
LEVEL/
DCA1-8
FIXED
FIXED
STEREO
SLOTIN SLOTIN SLOTIN
METER METER METER
SLOT1
ON
PRE HPF / PRE EQ / PRE FADER
PAN
METER
AD
+48V
HPF LPF
INSERT
CH 1-32 {48}
3
ON
INPUT
1-32 {48}
GAIN/TRIM
2
To RACKIN PATCH
INSERT POINT
To OUTPUT PATCH
MIX
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
INSERT OUT 1-16
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
MIX
INSERT IN 1-16
EQ OUT
PRE EQ
DYNA OUT
METER
METER
METER
GR METER
Tip
PHONES OUT LR
Ring
DA
2
Sleeve
[PHONES]
ST IN1 L,R
ST IN2 L,R
ST IN3 L,R
ST IN4 L,R
PHONES LEVEL
OUTPUT
PATCH
ATT
DELAY
METER
SLOT1OUT
METER
SLOT2OUT
(MAX:600ms)
DELAY
SLOT1
METER
SLOT3OUT
(MAX:600ms)
SLOT3
16
DIRECT OUT 1-32 {48}
MIX OUT 1-16
STEREO OUT L,R,MONO (C)
MATRIX OUT 1-8
MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO (C)
OUTPUT
PATCH
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
METER OMINI OUT
MIX OUT 1-16
STEEREO OUT L,R,MONO (C)
MATRIX OUT 1-8
MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO (C)
OUTPUT
PATCH
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
METER
ATT
[SLOT]
SLOT2
16
(MAX:600ms)
DELAY
TRIM
16
TRIM
2
DA
1
16
ATT
3
[OMNI OUT] (1-16)
TRIM
2TR OUT
2
DIT
AES / EBU
STEREO OUT L,R
STEREO OUT MONO (C)
STEREO OUT L,C,R
[2TR OUT DIGITAL]
STEREO OUT
L,R
STEREO OUT
MONO (C)
MIX OUT1-16
MATRIX OUT1-8
DEFINE
MIX
(MAX : 8ch)
PHONES
LEVEL LINK
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
PHONES L
To PHONES OUT
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
PHONES R
To PHONES OUT
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
MONITOR OUT L
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
MONITOR OUT R
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
MONITOR OUT MONO (C)
MONO
MONITOR L
METER MONITOR L
MONITOR R
METER MONITOR R
MONITOR MONO (C)
METER MONITOR MONO (C)
DIMMER
METER
2
3
[SLOT]
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
ON
INPUT
SELECT
LEVEL
ST IN R
CUE CASCADE OUT LR
TALKBACK
INPUT 1-32 {48}
HA
[ST IN]
[1L-4R]
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
INPUT TB
AD
3
+48V
ST IN L 1
MATRIX CASCADE OUT1-8
HA
METER
2
TALKBACK
GAIN
INPUT 1
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
MONITOR SELECT
TALKBACK 1
INPUT
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO CASCADE OUT L,R,MONO (C)
ON
+48V
[INPUT]
[1-32 {48}]
CASCADE OUT
L R
MIX CASCADE OUT 1-16
+48V MASTER
[TALKBACK
INPUT]
L R (C) 1 2 ··· 7 8
CASCADE IN
SLOT 1 1-16
SLOT 2 1-16
SLOT 3 1-16
+48V
N
ST O
MATRIX CUE
ON
TALKBACK ON
MONITOR DIMM ON
+MONO (C)
MONITOR LEVEL
An output port delay becomes invalid by
assigning a monitor out to the output port
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
■ M7CL-48/M7CL-32 Level Diagram
Analog
Analog
Digital
GAIN
dBu
+30
+24
+20
dBFS
0
-10
+10
+4
0
-20
-10
-40
-20
-50
-30
-60
-40
-70
-50
-60
-70
-30
-80
-90
-100
-80
-110
-90
-120
-100
-130
-110
-140
-120
-150
-130
-160
-140
-170
-150
-180
-160
-190
-170
-180
-190
-200
-210
Digital
AD
INPUT
PATCH
φ
Digital
HPF
INSERT
ATT.
EQ
(x4)
DYN
1
DYN
2
INSERT
LEVEL
DCA
(x8)
ON
PAN
BUS
Adder
INSERT
ATT.
EQ
(x4)
DYN
MASTER
LEVEL
/ BAL
MASTER
ON
OUTPUT
PATCH
DELAY
φ, ATT,
TRIM
Analog
Analog
DA
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
dBu
1 Max. Input [+30dBu]
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
CASCADE IN
1 Nominal Input [+10dBu]
3 Max. Input [+
Digital Clipping Level
dBu]
[0dBu = 0.775Vrms]
[0dBFS = Full Scale]
+10
+4
0
PHONES
Max Output
(150mW@8Ω )
3 Nominal Input [-16dBu]
Nominal Output
(75mW@8Ω )
[The position on the level
control is 10dB lowered
from Max]
4 Max. Input [-40dBu]
-10
-20
-30
-40
2 Max. Input [-42dBu]
OMNI OUT1-16
[Default setting]
4 Nominal Input [-60dBu]
-50
-60
2 Nominal Input [-62dBu]
1
-70
INPUT 1-48 (GAIN MIN.)
ST IN (GAIN MIN.)
-80
2 INPUT 1-48 (GAIN MAX.)
ST IN (GAIN MAX.)
-90
3 TALKBACK(GAIN MIN.)
-100
4 TALKBACK(GAIN MAX.)
-110
-120
-130
-140
-150
30
31
36
Nominal Output
[+4dBu]
OUT
27
28
29
34
35
+30
+24
+20
CASCADE OUT
24
25
26
32
33
Max. Output
[+24dBu]
-160
Max. DSP Noise Floor
-170
-180
-190
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à
Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la
liste suivante.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.
90620, U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización
Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria, CEE Department
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más
cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
ASIA
POLAND
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland
Tel: 022-868-07-57
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen,
The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China)
Co.,Ltd.
25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),
Jingan, Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 080-004-0022
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor
Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan
Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2626
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia)
Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii
Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia
Tel: 495 626 0660
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
HEAD OFFICE
Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2441
PA19
Yamaha Pro Audio global web site:
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2005 Yamaha Corporation
This document is printed on chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.
WF02260 801POCP1.3-07E0
Printed in Japan
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising